JP2024045782A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of achieving improvement in the viewpoint of making a better flowing-down manner of game balls.SOLUTION: It is so structured that, on a side separated from a central opening unit 413, game balls flow down onto an electric power accessory 640a (landing positions of game balls onto the electric power accessory 640a are regulated). Therefore, it is possible to align the game balls while the game balls are flowing down the electric power accessory 640a. Accordingly, when the game balls are about to pass through the central opening unit 413, it is possible to avoid occurrence of jamming ball or increase in the flowing-down resistance of the game balls. Consequently, it is possible to achieve improvement in the viewpoint of making a better flowing-down manner of game balls.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 26

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple landing positions for game balls on a movable component that can be switched between a state in which game balls can be guided to a prize ball port and a state in which game balls are restricted from entering the prize ball port, including a downstream position near the prize ball port and an upstream position upstream of the downstream position, and the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the prize ball port regardless of whether it lands at the downstream position or the upstream position (Patent Document 1).

JP2017-029531A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the flow of the gaming balls. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of improving the flow of the gaming balls.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is equipped with a switching means that can switch between a first state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the ball entry area and a second state in which the ball is restricted from entering the ball entry area, and a flow-down area in which the gaming ball can flow down toward the switching means, and the flow-down area is located away from the ball entry area in front of the switching means.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the first aspect, further comprising a prevention means for preventing the fluid from flowing down to the switching means outside the downstream area.

The gaming machine described in claim 3 is the gaming machine described in claim 2, in which at least a portion of the switching means is disposed behind the front surface of the game board that constitutes the play area.

According to the gaming machine according to the first aspect, it is possible to improve the falling behavior of the game ball.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the preventing means can prevent the game ball from passing outside the flowing area and reaching the switching means. can.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine according to claim 2, the switching means can secure the falling length of the game ball on the switching means to the rear side of the front surface of the game board. The length of encroachment on the gaming area can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a winning unit. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. 15(a) is a front view of the winning unit, (b) is a side view of the winning unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVb in FIG. 15(a), and (c) is a top view of the winning unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15(a). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15(c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XIX-XIX in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XIX-XIX in Figure 15 (c). 15(a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line XXIIIa-XXIIIa in FIG. 15(c). 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of the winning unit taken along the line XXIXa-XXIXa in FIG. 15(b). (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of the winning unit taken along the line XXIXa-XXIXa in FIG. 15(b). 11A to 11C are diagrams showing an example of a change in the state of an electric device over time. A diagram explaining the relationship between hold type, game status, special pattern type, and variable time. 23(a) is a sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member, and the transmission member taken along the line XXXIII-XXXIII in FIG. 23(a). FIG. A cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilt member, and the transmission member taken along line XXXIII-XXXIII in Figure 23 (a). 23(a) is a sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member, and the transmission member taken along the line XXXIII-XXXIII in FIG. 23(a). FIG. FIG. 15C is a cross-sectional view of the plate member, base plate, slide member, tilting member, and transmission member taken along line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). (a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. 3A to 3C are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. (a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable upper lid member and the movable floor member taken along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 37(a). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable upper lid member and the movable floor member taken along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 37(a). (a) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the first special operation pattern, (b) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the second special operation pattern, and (c) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the third special operation pattern. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 1 random number table, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 2 random number table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing correspondence relationships. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter in the first winning type selection table and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter in the second winning random number table and the winning type for normal patterns. It is a top view of a front frame and an outer frame. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a jackpot performance, (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of an ending performance, (c), (d) and (e) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect that is part of the jackpot effect. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a company name display effect displayed during the ending performance, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending performance. (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display performance displayed in the ending performance, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen immediately after the end of the ending performance. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the ending effect and the jackpot type in the special symbol. A cross-sectional view of the winning unit in the second embodiment taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15 (c). It is a sectional view of the winning unit taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit in the third embodiment, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing another example of the winning unit. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating a winning unit in a fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are front views of the upper variable winning device in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect in the sixth embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display performance displayed in the ending performance. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the seventh embodiment. It is a figure which illustrated the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display performance displayed in the ending performance. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. A figure showing an example of the change over time in the frame button display during the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time in the validity of the frame button operation, and the frame button operation.

Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 50, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following explanation, the front side of the paper will be referred to as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper will be referred to as the rear (rear) side with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in Figure 1, the top side will be referred to as the upper (upper) side, the bottom side will be referred to as the lower (lower) side, the right side will be referred to as the right (right) side, and the left side will be referred to as the left (left) side. Furthermore, the arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see Figure 2, for example) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in Figure 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11, whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames assembled into a roughly rectangular shape, and an inner frame 12, which is formed to roughly the same external shape as the outer frame 11 and is supported so as to be openable and closable relative to the outer frame 11. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), in order to support the inner frame 12, and the inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable towards the front, with the side where the hinges 18 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails KG1 and winning holes 63, 64, etc., is removably attached to the inner frame 12. A pinball game is played by balls (game balls) flowing down the front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 is also fitted with a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches balls into the front area of the game board 13, and a launch rail (not shown) that guides the balls launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13.

Note that the illustration of the nail KG1 shows the external shape of the nail KG1 when viewed in the length direction unless otherwise detailed. That is, the nail KG1 is generally formed with a swollen tip on the front side (a shape similar to a gusset needle), but the shape of the swollen part is shown in the figure, and the nail KG1 is shaped like a thin tip driven into the base plate 60. The shape of the diameter portion is not shown. Therefore, in FIG. 2, even if the gap between the nails KG1 is less than the diameter of the ball, if the gap between the narrow diameter parts (not shown) of the nail KG1 is longer than the diameter of the ball, then , it is possible for the ball to pass.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible to the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface and protrudes forward, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed to be sloped downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the balls thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Furthermore, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the content of the super reach performance. Ru.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

A ball rental operation section 40 is arranged below the window section 14c. The ball rental operation section 40 is provided with a frequency display section 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball rental operation section 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. placed in a card unit (ball rental unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball rental unit 40 is operated according to the operation. The loan is made. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The ball rental button 42 is operated to obtain rental balls based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and rental balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a balance on the card, etc. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit. Note that the ball lending operation section 40 is not necessary in a pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper tray 17 from a ball lending device etc. without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine. It is also possible to add a decorative sticker or the like to the installation part so that the component configuration is the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

The lower tray unit 15, located below the upper tray 17, has a lower tray 50 in the center formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. An operating handle 51 is provided on the right side of the lower tray 50, which is operated by the player to shoot the ball into the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotational position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 to be operated when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball extraction lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails KG1 and windmills WF for guiding balls, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 64b, a variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 700, normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. Winning unit 400 in which general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64 and second winning hole 640 are arranged, variable winning device 65 in which third winning hole 64b is arranged, upper variable winning device 700, variable display unit 80 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

Note that the structure of the base plate 60 is not limited to resin material. For example, the base board 60 may be made of wood made of thin plates pasted together, and may be formed so that the various structures disposed from the front side to the back side of the base board 60 cannot be visually seen by the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

Note that the above-mentioned gaming area is interpreted in a narrow sense, and in a broader sense, the gaming area may be expressed as the area where the gaming ball falls until the profit given to the player by the falling gaming ball is determined. In this sense, the gaming area is not limited to the area on the front side of the gaming board 13. For example, the upstream path of the detection sensor 462, which will be described later, may also be included in the gaming area.

The two rails 61, 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2), which prevents the ball once guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage again. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and a ball launched with a certain amount of force or more hits the return rubber 69 and bounces back to the center while reducing its force. In addition, between the tip of the lower right side of the inner rail 61 and the tip of the upper right side of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc on the inner side connecting the rails is driven into the base plate 60 and fixed.

The game area 301 on the front side of the game board 13 is largely divided into a left side game area 302, a right side game area 303, and a lower side game area 304 with respect to the center frame 86 arranged at the center inside position.

The left side game area 302 is a game area where left-handed game balls that are fired while suppressing the game ball's launch intensity flow down, and the right-side game area 303 is a game area where the game balls are fired with a lower launch intensity and flow down. This is a game area where game balls that are fired and hit right flow down. Further, the lower game area 304 is a game area where the game balls that have passed through the left side game area 302 or the right side game area 303 flow down.

The lottery based on winning will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held when a ball wins a prize (a ball that is expected to give the player some kind of benefit (e.g., the payout of a prize ball, the execution of a lottery, or the benefit of moving to a more advantageous state)) in the first winning slot 64, the second winning slot 640, or the third winning slot 64b, and a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held when the ball passes through the normal winning slots 66, 67.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is held for balls that enter the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b, a win/loss determination is made as to whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot (or a miss), and if it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is held for balls that enter the second winning slot 640, a determination is made as to whether the special pattern is a big win, a miss, or a small win. If it is determined that the special pattern is a big win, the type of big win is also determined, and if it is determined that the special pattern is a small win, the type of small win is also determined.

That is, in the special symbol lottery held for the ball entering the second winning hole 640, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by the special symbol lottery held for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b. In addition to this determination, if it is not a jackpot, a determination is made as to whether it is a small hit or a miss.

In this embodiment, a small win is prepared as a win other than a miss, but with a different nature from a big win. In other words, a big win creates an opportunity (a turning point in the game) to transition the game state to a high probability state or a time-saving state, but a small win does not create an opportunity to transition the game state.

In addition, even if you win a small win in a high probability state, the high probability state will not end when the small win ends (except when the upper limit is reached), and you will not win a small win in the normal state or time saving state. Even if you win, the high probability state will not be triggered by the end of the small win. However, a small win is positioned as a win that satisfies the condition for operating the variable prize winning device 65, similar to a big win.

In this pachinko machine 10, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the probability of a special symbol being determined as a jackpot is 1 in 320, and in the high probability state of the special symbol (also called the special symbol high probability state), the probability of a special symbol being determined as a jackpot is 1 in 32. Note that the jackpot probability is only an example, and various values can be set as long as the probability in the low probability state of the special symbol is not less than 1/10 of the probability in the high probability state of the special symbol.

For ease of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol held when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 1," and the lottery for the special symbol held when the gaming ball enters the second winning slot 640 is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 2."

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, in a state where the probability of a special symbol is low, there is a probability of 318 out of 320 that a small win will be determined for the special symbol in the drawing of special symbol 2, and in a state where the probability of a special symbol is high, there is a probability of 309 out of 320 that a small win will be determined for the special symbol in the drawing of special symbol 2. Note that the probability of a small win is just an example, and can be set to various values.

When a special symbol is selected as a small win (a win), a small win game is played and the variable winning device 65 opens and closes. During the small win game, the player can win a certain number of prize balls by having the game ball enter the specific winning port 65a located inside the variable winning device 65. In the small win game of this embodiment, the variable winning device 65 is opened and then closed 1.8 seconds later.

The operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 in the small win of the special symbol may be a single pattern, or multiple types of patterns may be provided. For example, the operation pattern may be configured so that the number of times the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed, or the opening and closing time are different depending on the type of small win. Specifically, the operation pattern may be an opening for 1.8 seconds, an opening for 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times at intervals of several seconds (a total opening of 1.8 seconds), or another operation pattern may be used.

When a special symbol hits the jackpot (wins), the pachinko machine 10 transitions to a special game state, and the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a of the upper variable winning device 700, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls (prescribed number) have won), and this operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds). As a result, a large number of balls enter the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a, and more prize balls are paid out than in normal times. Note that prize balls are paid out when balls enter the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a, and the number of balls paid out will be described later.

There are six types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A," "jackpot B," "jackpot C," "jackpot a," "jackpot b," and "jackpot c." Details will be described later, but the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a after the special game ends are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, variable display of the special symbol starts on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball enters the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the number of times the ball enters the winning hole is Each type of special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the lottery conducted based on the ball entering the mouth is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. It is also shown on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the number of reserved balls for the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the second winning hole 640 If the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

In this embodiment, even if both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are different from the corresponding special symbol (special symbol When the fluctuating display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is completed, the lottery of the next corresponding special symbol (the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2) is carried out, and the fluctuating display according to the lottery is started. In other words, even if the non-corresponding special symbol (for example, special symbol 2 for special symbol 1) has not finished fluctuating, once the corresponding special symbol has finished fluctuating, the next corresponding special symbol will be displayed. A lottery will be held.

In this embodiment, even if there are both reserved balls for special pattern 1 and reserved balls for special pattern 2 remaining, when the variable display of the corresponding previous special pattern for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 has ended, a lottery for the next corresponding special pattern is held and the variable display according to the lottery is started. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery may be held in the order in which the special patterns are obtained (in the order in which the ball is scored), or the lottery may be held alternately between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

In addition, it may be configured such that the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially than the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 1, and in this case, the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 is 0. It is possible to avoid executing a lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 while the number of balls is maintained.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a judgment is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds, 2.0 seconds, or 3.9 seconds), and the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. In other words, if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be held.

When the normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device 83 starts displaying the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.05 seconds or 1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern indicating the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a ball passes through the normal winning openings 66, 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is displaying the variable display, the number of passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. When the variable display by the second pattern display device 83 ends, if there are reserved balls remaining for the normal winning openings 66, 67, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts.

In this embodiment, as an added value after the end of a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is in a special probability changing state of a special symbol (in a special probability changing state of a special symbol with a high frequency of small wins) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot. ) (for example, jackpot A, jackpot a described later), and when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to shift to a special symbol high probability state (special symbol probability changing) ( For example, jackpot B, jackpot b, jackpot c) described later, and cases in which the normal symbol time is shortened after the jackpot game until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times (for example, jackpot C, jackpot c, described later). , is available.

In this embodiment, when a special symbol high probability state is granted after the end of a special game state, the high probability state of the special symbol is continued until the next big win is achieved. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol (high probability state) may be granted from the end of the special game state until 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed, and the normal state may be set after 100 special symbol lotteries have been completed.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is drawn is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times. The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state is drawn may be set to be different from the number of times the special symbol that results in the special symbol's high probability state is drawn.

Here, "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state after a jackpot where the probability of subsequent jackpots is increased as an added value, that is, when the probability is fluctuating (during a probability change), or in other words, a gaming state where it is easy to transition to a special gaming state.

In this embodiment, the "special probability changing state of special symbols (probability variation of special symbols with high frequency of small hits)" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, so-called probability variation state (probability variation state). ), and is in a state where small wins occur frequently.In other words, while playing the game in a state where it is easy to transition to the special gaming state, even before transitioning to the special gaming state, the player is in a state where small winnings occur with high frequency. This is a game state in which you can win a large number of prize balls. The winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a game state is formed in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a third operation pattern described later.

In this embodiment, the "high probability state of special symbols (special symbol high probability state)" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (high probability state), in other words, a gaming state in which it is easy to transition to a special gaming state. The probability of winning a normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a gaming state is created in which it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole 64b. The electric role 640a is operated in the second operating pattern described below.

On the other hand, the "low probability state of special symbols" refers to a time when the probability of special symbols is not changing, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state where the probability of jackpot is lower than when the probability of special symbols is changing.

In addition, the "time saving state (time saving medium) of normal symbols" is a mode of a low probability state of special symbols, and the winning probability of the normal symbols increases and the winning unit 400, which will be described later, operates to enter the third winning hole. Refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to land in the 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a second operation pattern described later.

In addition, the "normal state" is an aspect of the low probability state (not the high probability state) of the special symbol, and the state of the game that is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability is also normal symbol (second symbol)). This refers to a state in which the probability of winning has not changed, and it is not easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a first operation pattern described later.

During the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is changed, and basically compared to the normal state. , is set so that a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b side is maintained for a long time.

In this embodiment, when the electric role 640a is in a non-energized state (non-energized state, i.e., the moving plate member 641 described later is located in the front position and has entered the first ball sending path KR1), the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b than when the electric role 640a is in an excited state (energized state, i.e., the moving plate member 641 described later is located in the rear position and has retreated from the first ball sending path KR1). Therefore, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, and during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b, making it easier to draw a special symbol.

In addition, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, instead of changing the opening time of the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the number of times that the electric device 640a opens when a normal symbol wins may be increased from the normal state.

In addition, during the probability of a special symbol being in a special state or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) may not change, but at least one of the time that the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened and the number of times that the electric device 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened will not be changed, and the normal symbol (the 2 symbols) may be configured to increase only the winning probability compared to the normal state.

At the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side of FIG. 2), the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are provided, each equipped with a plurality of LEDs as light-emitting means and a seven-segment display. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B display information according to the controls performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used differently depending on whether the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640. Specifically, when the ball has entered the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b, the first pattern display device 37A is activated, while when the ball has entered the second winning hole 640, the first pattern display device 37B is activated.

The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B also use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special probability variable, probability variable, time-saving, or normal mode, and whether it is fluctuating, and whether the stopped symbol corresponds to a special probability variable jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, a normal jackpot, a small jackpot, or a miss, and indicate the number of reserved balls by their lighting states, while also displaying the number of rounds during a jackpot and errors using a seven-segment display device. The multiple LEDs are configured to have different light colors (e.g., red, green, blue), and the combination of light colors can indicate various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

When a ball enters the first winning slot 64, the third winning slot 64b, or the second winning slot 640 while the special pattern (first pattern) is being displayed on the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the number of balls entering is reserved for each type of winning slot (i.e., for each type of special pattern, the number of balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b corresponding to special pattern 1 is separate from the number of balls entering the second winning slot 640 corresponding to special pattern 2) up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and also by the third pattern display device 81.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b and the ball entering the second winning hole 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times. The maximum number of pending times is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first prize slot 64, the third prize slot 64b, or the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, an 8R jackpot, and a 4R jackpot. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also shows a symbol according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a special probability jackpot state (a high probability state of special symbols with frequent small wins) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and an "8R probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8.

In addition, in the "4R jackpot", after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), or the maximum number of fluctuations is 100. This is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 4 rounds.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. A variable display unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area.

The variable display device unit 80 has a variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B triggered by a winning (starting winning) in any one of the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, and the second winning hole 640. The passage of the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 and the third symbol display device 81, which is composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as the "display device") that displays the third symbol in a synchronized manner. a second symbol display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays a second symbol using the trigger as a trigger, and a second symbol that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times game balls have passed through the normal winning openings 66, 67 by the lighting state. A hold lamp 84 is provided.

Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol display device 81 is made visible through an opening opened in the center of the center frame 86.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see Figure 4), so that, for example, three pattern rows, left, center, and right, are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of multiple patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are scrolled vertically for each pattern row, so that the third patterns are variably displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, while the first symbol display device 37A, 37B displays the game status in accordance with the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Note that the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of a display device.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the lottery result of a special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned (the same main symbol A fluctuating display that finally stops when all the characters are aligned is performed, and after the fluctuating display ends, a jackpot occurs (transition to a special gaming state begins).

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display will be displayed in which the same main symbols do not line up (the variable display will ultimately stop in a non-lineup state). Also, if the special symbol lottery result is a small win, a variable display will be displayed in which a specific small win symbol will ultimately stop.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a special variable jackpot or a variable jackpot, one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers will be added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, a variable display is performed in which a symbol with the words "Prize Balls Ready" stopped at the center of the display area of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which a "circle" and an "x" symbol are alternately lit for a predetermined period of time as the display symbol (second symbol) each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, a lottery is held to determine whether the second symbol will win. If the lottery results in a win, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "circle" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed. If the lottery results in a loss, the second symbol display device 83 displays a static "x" symbol after the second symbol has been displayed.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that when the variable display on the second pattern display device 83 stops at a predetermined pattern (in this embodiment, a "circle" pattern), the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is activated (opened) for a predetermined period of time.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol (variation time) is set so that it is shorter when the probability of the special symbol is changing or when the time of the normal symbol is shortened than when the gaming state is in the normal state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and the normal symbol's time shortening, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so it is possible to draw the regular symbol (second symbol) more often than during the normal state. can. Therefore, the chances of winning the normal symbols increase, so it is possible to give the player more chances to have the game ball picked up by the electric accessory 640a arranged upstream of the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 64b. can. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for balls to enter the third winning hole 64b or the second winning hole 640 during the probability change of the special symbol and during the time saving of the normal symbol.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for the ball to enter the third winning slot 64b or the second winning slot 640 by increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time taken for the second symbol to change display may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the game state.

The normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 are attached to the game board in the areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and are arranged in positions where balls that are launched into the game area 301 and flow down the left game area 302 or the right game area 303 will always pass through (the upstream nail KG1 arrangement is configured to collect the balls at the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67).

Note that the relationship between the ball fired into the game area 301 and the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is not limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that some of the balls that are launched into the game area 301 and that flow down pass through the normal prize winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls that are held is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol is held as well. The lamp 84 is also illuminated. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. This may be performed using a part of the 3-symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved for passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can also set it. Further, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 arranged on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or other plurality (for example, three or more). It may be.

In addition, the installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, for example, they may be installed on either the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or the variable display It may be above or below the device unit 80.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, the passage of the ball is detected by a first winning hole switch (detection sensor 442 described later) provided on the back side of the game board 13, and the first winning hole switch is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery is performed for special pattern 1 by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, the second winning port switch (detection sensor 462 to be described later) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device At 110 (see FIG. 4), a special symbol 2 is drawn, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The second winning port 640 is configured so that only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit 400 can enter, and winnings that do not pass through the winning unit 400 are prevented; more details will be given later.

In addition, a third winning hole 64b, into which a ball can enter, is disposed below the second winning hole 640 when viewed from the front. When a ball enters the third winning hole 64b, a third winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 turns on. When the third winning hole switch turns on, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a lottery for special symbol 1, and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

The third winning port 64b is configured so that only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit 400 can win, and winning that does not pass through the winning unit 400 is prevented, but more details will be given later.

In addition, the first winning port 64, the third winning port 64b and the second winning port 640 are each a winning port (prize ball port) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port and the first winning port switch, the third winning port switch or the second winning port switch is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640. are configured the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are different. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640. may be configured as five. Further, the magnitude relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640 (and the third winning opening 64b). Normally, this electric device 640a is in a de-energized state (forward closed state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the passage of a ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and a "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83, the electric device 640a is in an excited state (rear open state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

During the special probability change of the special symbol, a state can be created in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning hole 64 does not have an electric accessory 640a as provided in the second winning hole 640, and balls can always be won.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a) that provides the maximum profit (number of winning balls in the special game state) as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64.

Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 due to the electric device 640a located upstream of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b during normal play, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the ball with a shooting strength that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning opening 64, which does not have the electric device 640a, and by having the ball enter the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special probability change of special symbols, the probability change of special symbols, and the time reduction of normal symbols, by passing the ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening When the operation of the electric accessory 640a placed upstream of the electric accessory 640a is controlled, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric accessory 640a, and it is easy to enter the second prize opening 640 or the third prize opening 64b. The ball is fired with a firing intensity that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric accessory 640a, passes through the normal prize openings (through gates) 66, 67, and operates the electric accessory 640a, and also the second prize opening 640 or the third prize winning hole. It is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by winning the prize in the slot 64b.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot, between a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning port 64, and a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the electric device 640a, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special probability variable state, during probability variable, during time-saving mode, during normal mode, etc.). This allows the player to vary the way the ball is shot, making the game more enjoyable.

In this embodiment, during a jackpot game, the electric device 640a is driven in the same operating pattern as in the normal state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to configure the device so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b during a jackpot game.

In addition, in this embodiment, a case has been described in which both the ball flowing down the left side gaming area 302 and the ball flowing down the right side falling area 303 can reach the first prize opening 64 or the electric accessory 640a, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, it may be configured such that only the balls that have flown down the left flow area 302 reach the first prize opening 64, and only the balls that have flowed down the right flow area 303 reach the electric accessory 640a.

In this case, during normal play, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the first winning slot 64 so that it passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (the so-called "left shot"), aiming to win the jackpot by winning the first winning slot 64 and obtaining more jackpot lottery machines.

On the other hand, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, if the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is controlled to operate by passing the ball through the normal winning port (through gate) 66, 67, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric device 640a and it is likely to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the side where the electric device 640a is located so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right hit"), pass through the normal winning port (through gate) 67 to operate the electric device 640a, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 640 to win the jackpot.

This allows the player to change the way the ball is shot between "left hit" and "right hit" depending on the game status of the pachinko machine 10. This allows the player to have more fun playing the game by providing variation in the way the ball is shot.

In addition, in this case, in a situation where "right-handed hitting" should be performed, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) on the third symbol display device 81, the player can control the (special) probability-changing state of the special symbol or the normal symbol. The configuration may be such that the benefits of being in a time-saving state can be reliably obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the time-saving state of the normal symbols.

In addition, if a player is performing a "right hit" even though a "left hit" should be performed, it is preferable to be able to notify the player that the recommended game mode and the game mode being performed are different. For example, a warning image may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

This warning image indicates that the player is hitting the ball to the right even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13 (hitting the ball to the right). This is an image (a right-handed warning image) that is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the player is hit. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is hitting to the right in a normal state (a state that is neither a special symbol probability changing state nor a normal symbol time saving state).

For example, consider a pachinko machine in which the electric device 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the normal state (it is difficult to make the ball enter the second winning hole 640 even if the player hits from the right). In this case, if the player hits from the right in the normal state, there are fewer opportunities to win a special pattern compared to hitting from the left and aiming for the first winning hole 64. In other words, if the player hits from the right in the normal state, it is difficult to win a jackpot, which is a loss for the player. Therefore, the device is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from incurring losses by displaying a right-hit warning image to encourage the player to hit from the left.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!!" are displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

The method for determining whether or not the player is hitting right-handed is whether or not the ball enters the normal through gate 67 (see Figure 2) into which the ball can enter if the ball is hitting right-handed. You should make a judgment based on this.

In addition, it is easy to configure so that a right-handed hit warning image is displayed when it is detected that a ball enters the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see Figure 2) in the normal state, but this is not limited to this. It's not something you can do. For example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the specific winning hole 65a in a state other than a jackpot game or a small winning game, an illegal game (not limited to a right-handed game, for example, a variable winning game) may be detected. Even if it is configured to display a right-handed hitting warning image by determining that a game mode (including a game mode in which a game ball is forcefully entered by applying a load to the device 65 to open the specific winning hole 65a and forcing the game ball to enter the ball) is being performed. good. As a result, the clerk at the hall can easily determine the presence or absence of fraud simply by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed player warning image.

Further, for example, when it is detected that a ball enters the specific winning hole 65a in a state other than during a jackpot game or a small win game, a signal indicating that fraud is being committed is sent to the hall computer. It may be configured to output. Thereby, the operator of the hall computer can easily determine whether there is a possibility that fraud is being committed and the machine number (position) of the pachinko machine 10 where the fraud is being committed.

For example, the right-side flow path of the variable display unit 80 may be narrowed to create an area through which the game ball must pass, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game ball may be disposed in that area. In this case, it may be determined that a right-side hit is being performed based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the detection sensor.

In addition, for example, a detection sensor may be provided that can detect the displacement of a movable member (e.g., a windmill) located to the left of the top position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the center position in FIG. 2). In this case, when a game ball is being shot, it can be determined that a right shot is being performed based on the fact that no displacement of the movable member is detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

In this embodiment, a variable winning device 65 is provided below the first winning opening 64, and a horizontally elongated rectangular specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is provided in the approximate center.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a small win is achieved in a special symbol lottery conducted due to a winning in the second winning hole 640, the small win stops after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on. In addition, a stop symbol corresponding to the small hit is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the small hit. After that, a small winning game in which the ball is likely to win is executed. As this small winning game, the specific prize opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 1.8 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (specified number) are won).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, if a jackpot is achieved in a special symbol lottery performed due to a winning in the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640, it will occur for a predetermined period of time (a variable time period). ) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that it becomes a stop symbol for a jackpot. In addition, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. Thereafter, the game state changes to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the specified winning hole 65a or the second specified winning hole 700a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse, or until 10 balls (specified number) win). It will be released.

The opening/closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening/closing operation is performed is a form of special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of gaming value (gaming value) than usual (in this embodiment, , 15 prize balls are paid out based on one ball winning a prize.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate to open and close. Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate forward, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by repeating the following states alternately. In addition, the opening/closing mode of the second specific winning opening 700a will be described later.

The variable winning device 65 receives not only balls that have passed through the inside of the winning unit 400, but also balls that do not enter the winning unit 400 but are guided by the nail KG1 on the right and left outside of the winning unit 400 and flow down. The lateral length is designed to obtain. That is, the width of the specific winning hole 65a is designed to be longer than the width of the winning unit 400.

Whether or not a ball is easily guided into the winning unit 400 depends on the state of the nail KG1 that is arranged upstream of the winning unit 400, but in this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the player from being given too much of an advantage or disadvantage depending on the state of the nail KG1 (it is possible to strike a balance between advantages).

In other words, for example, if there is a high probability that the ball will be guided inside the winning unit 400, during the time-saving period in which the ball passes through the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b, through which the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit 400, and during the special bonus period in which the lottery is drawn, the player can frequently receive a lottery for special symbols, which is advantageous for the player.

On the other hand, when balls enter the variable winning device 65 in big prize games or small prize games, balls that enter the inside of the winning unit 400 are picked up by the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b before reaching the variable winning device 65, and fewer balls reach the specific winning port 65a. In addition, if there are fewer balls that deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down the left and right sides of the winning unit 400, this is disadvantageous for games in which prize balls are frequently paid out by balls entering the specific winning port 65a.

For example, if the probability of the ball being guided into the winning unit 400 is low, the ball may be passed through the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b through which the ball is guided through the winning unit 400. When the lottery time is shortened or the probability is changed, the interval between special symbols being drawn tends to become long, which is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of gaming efficiency.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 in a jackpot game or a small winning game, there are few balls that enter the winning unit 400, so the balls are picked up into the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b. The number of balls that are lost and unable to reach the specific winning hole 65a is reduced. In addition, since the number of balls that deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down on the left and right sides of the winning unit 400 increases, when the specific winning opening 65a is in the open state, many balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. , the player can expect to receive a large amount of prize balls, which is advantageous for the player.

In this way, even if there are cases where the ball is easily guided into the winning unit 400 and cases where the ball is difficult to be guided depending on the state of the nail KG1, the state of the nail KG1 will allow you to win the special symbol lottery and win the jackpot. If the condition of the nail KG1 works to the advantage of the player during the aiming period, it can work against the player during the jackpot game. If it works against the player, it can be made to work in the player's favor during the jackpot game. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous or too disadvantageous depending on the state of the nail KG1 (the advantage can be balanced).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a Or, when the second specific winning opening 700a is opened for a predetermined time and the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a while the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is open. As a special game state, a game state in which a large opening hole provided separately from the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time may be formed.

Furthermore, the number of specific winning openings 65a or second specific winning openings 700a is not limited to two, but may be one or more than two (for example, three), and the placement location is not limited to below the first winning opening 64, but may be, for example, on the left or right side or above the variable display unit 80.

At the lower right corner of the game board 13, a pasting space K1 is provided for pasting a certificate stamp, identification label, etc. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 64b, 65a, 640, and 700a, enter the first out port 71, left out port 71L, or right out port 71R. and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The first outlet 71 is disposed below the first winning port 64. The left outlet 71L is disposed to the left of the specific winning port 65a, and the right outlet 71R is disposed to the right of the specific winning port 65a.

In this embodiment, since the specific winning hole 65a is arranged near the lower edge of the gaming area, the gap between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning hole 65a is narrow. Therefore, if a plurality of balls rolling on the lower edge of the gaming area on the right and left outside of the specific winning opening 65a are all configured to head toward the first out opening 71, there will be a gap between the balls between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a. There is a possibility that a blockage will occur, which will cause the game to be interrupted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left out port 71L and the right out port 71R are provided, so that the ball rolling on the lower edge of the gaming area on the right and left outside of the specific winning port 65a is transferred to the first out port. 71, the ball can be ejected to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the left out port 71L or the right out port 71R. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where balls become jammed between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning a prize opening 65a, and therefore it is possible to avoid interruption of the game.

The game board 13 has numerous nails KG1 planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills WF are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly provided with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is formed into a unit by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp controller 113), and a display control board (display controller 114). The control board unit 91 is formed into a unit by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a firing control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 located downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132 and dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power outage (including the occurrence of a power outage; the same applies below) are stored in RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power turned on when the power outage is resolved; the same applies below), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power outage based on the information stored in RAM 203. Writing to RAM 203 is performed by main processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned off, and the restoration of each value written to RAM 203 is performed during start-up processing (not shown) when the power supply is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to MPU 201, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage processing.

The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is connected to an input/output port 205 via a bus line 204 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 is connected to the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the second pattern display device, the second pattern reservation lamp, and solenoids 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the specific winning port 65a to open and close forward around the lower edge of the opening/closing plate as an axis, and a solenoid for driving the electric role-playing device, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input/output port 205.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and loan balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores the control program executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory, etc.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return addresses of the control programs executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (working area) in which the values of various flags, counters, I/O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, like the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) is immediately executed as a power outage process.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

The MPU 221 of the audio and lamp control device 113 is connected to an input/output port 225 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, other devices 228, the frame button 22, etc.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and controls the display of the third pattern display device 81, such as the variable performance of the third pattern, based on commands received from the voice lamp control device 113. The display control device 114 also transmits display commands to the voice lamp control device 113 as appropriate, notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81. The voice lamp control device 113 can match the display of the third pattern display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by the display commands.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power outage monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power outage signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control device 111 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like. The power outage monitoring circuit 252 monitors a stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power outage (power outage, power interruption) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, a power outage signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111. By outputting the power outage signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the dispensing control device 111 recognize the occurrence of a power outage and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 continues to output the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning unit 400 will be explained. 5 is a front perspective view of the winning unit 400, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the winning unit 400 is screwed into the base plate 60 when it is fastened and fixed to the front of the base plate 60 so as to close the opening of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2). The plate member 410 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 411 into which fastening screws are inserted.

That is, the part on the front side of the plate member 410 is a part disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and the part on the back side of the plate member 410 is a part disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The portion is a portion disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 rather than the front side surface facing the glass unit 16.

The plate member 410 of the winning unit 400 is provided with a ball receiving section 412 at the center of the upper left and right ends, which is formed in a shape that can receive a ball from above and send the ball rearward, and the ball sent rearward from the ball receiving section 412 enters the first winning hole 64 (see Figure 2) of the game board 13.

Among the balls guided inside the winning unit 400, some of the balls are configured to enter the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2). The ball is once thrown backward inside the winning unit 400, and then the flowing direction is reversed back and forth, and after being placed on the front side of the plate member 410 again, it is sent to the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b. The details of the ball's descent will be described later.

Figures 7 and 9 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit 400, and Figures 8 and 10 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit 400. Figures 7 and 8 show the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric role 640a, and Figures 9 and 10 show the excited state (rear open state) of the electric role 640a. Details of the arrangement of the electric role 640a in the non-excited state and the excited state will be described later.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 10, the winning unit 400 includes a plate member 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and a plate member 410 disposed on the front side of the plate member 410. A front design member 420 is fastened and fixed, a middle member 430 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 410 and fastened and fixed to the plate member 410, and a middle member 430 is arranged above the middle member 430 and fastened and fixed to the middle member 430. A slide member 450 is provided between the middle member 430 and the upper member 440, and a slide member 450 is supported by the middle member 430 so as to be slidable back and forth and constitutes an electric accessory 640a.

The plate member 410 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a central opening 413 that is formed in a substantially rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a horizontal width that allows a ball to pass through at the horizontal center position. A ball passage opening 414 is formed in a size that allows the ball to pass through after riding on the front end of the slide member 450 on the upper right side of the upper end, and a ball passage opening 414 is formed continuously below the ball passage opening 414. A sliding opening 415 is formed and expanded laterally and laterally outwardly than the horizontal width of the ball passage opening 414 to allow the sliding member 450 to be inserted therethrough, and a protruding middle member 430 is formed continuously below the sliding opening 415. A support opening 416 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape corresponding to the outer shape of the portion 437a and through which the protruding portion 437a is inserted and supported, and a support opening 416 is formed continuously below the support opening 416 and is formed with a horizontal width that allows the ball to pass through. A ball discharge opening 417 is provided.

In addition, since the ball passage opening 414, the sliding opening 415, the support opening 416, and the ball discharge opening 417 are configured symmetrically, the configuration on the left side is given the same reference numeral and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

The central opening 413 is an opening through which a ball guided by the central channel 431 of the middle member 430 and flowing down toward the front side passes through to the front side. In addition, in the excited state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a, it also functions as an opening through which the ball passes through to the back side and is guided to the second prize opening switch (detection sensor 462, which will be described later), but the details will be described later. do.

The ball passage opening 414 is an opening through which a ball riding on the slide member 450 in the non-excited state (see FIG. 5) can pass through on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 is guided to the back side of the plate member 410 by passing through the ball passage opening 414.

The sliding opening 415 is an opening that supports the tip 451 of the sliding member 450 in a sliding manner when the sliding member 450 moves back and forth. The plate member 410 is provided with slide support parts 418 that extend rearward from the left and right ends of the sliding opening 415 while maintaining the shape of the inner surface of the sliding opening 415. This allows the sliding member 450 to be supported at a position rearward of the sliding opening 415, so that even if the sliding member 450 slides and displaces with a displacement width equal to or greater than the front-rear width of the sliding opening 415, the displacement of the sliding member 450 can be stabilized.

Through the support opening 416, the protruding portion 437a of the middle member 430 projects to the front side. An opening 435a of a detection sensor 435 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in front of the plate member 410 in the protruding portion 437a of the middle member 430. In other words, of the balls received by the slide member 450 in a non-excited state, those that did not pass through the ball passage opening 414 before the slide member 450 was placed in an excited state pass through the opening 435a disposed in front of the support opening 416 directly below them.

The ball discharge opening 417 is an opening that allows the passage of a ball that has passed through the opening 435a arranged in front of the support opening 416, and sends the ball to the rear side.

The front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and can receive the lower edge of the ball receiving part 412 at the front plate part 421 that forms the design surface and at the upper end of the left and right center position of the front plate part 421. a pair of partition plates 423 extending downward from the lower end of the joint part 422 in pairs on the left and right, and a middle section on the lower side of the partition plates 423. A support part 424 is formed to protrude outward from the left and right at a height that can support the protrusion part 437a of the member 430, and a front plate part 421 serves as a curved wall that forms a downward flow path for the ball below the support part 424. A curved wall portion 425 is formed to protrude rearward from the upper edge of the joint portion 422, a pair of left and right eaves portions 426 are formed to protrude from the upper edge of the joint portion 422 toward the left and right outer sides, and are formed to be able to change the flow direction of the ball. A pair of left and right ball guide protrusions 427 are provided that protrude rearward from the rear side surface of the front plate part 421 on the left and right outer side and lower side than the eave part 426.

Because the front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, even if the front plate 421 covers the front side, the structure on the back side and the balls flowing down can be seen through the front plate 421. In other words, the player can see the state of the electric role 640a (the slide member 450 and the tilt member 470) and the way the balls flow down the back side of the front plate 421.

The joint 422 is formed in a shape that can receive the ball receiving portion 412 so that the seam with the lower edge of the ball receiving portion 412 of the plate member 410 is not noticeable, so that the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 appear integrated when viewed from the front (see Figure 5).

Therefore, in addition to designing the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 to have separate designs, it is also acceptable to design the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 to be combined to form a complete design.

The joint portion 422 also has the function of restricting the downward direction of the ball on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 in the non-excited state is prevented from directly flowing into the center position of the left and right sides with the momentum of flowing down to the left and right inwards by colliding with the joint portion 422. That is, the flow path of the ball received on the slide member 450 is limited by the state of the slide member 450 and the joint portion 422.

Therefore, the ball received by the slide member 450 in the de-energized state is guided rearward by riding on the slide member 450, or the ball is disposed in front of the support opening 416 by switching the slide member 450 to the energized state. It will be guided to the opening 435a.

The partition plate 423 has the function of restricting the direction in which the balls flow downward on the front side of the plate member 410. In other words, by disposing the partition plate 423, the balls that pass through the central opening 413 on the front side are prevented from being discharged to the outside left or right, and the flow path of the balls is restricted so that they flow exclusively downward.

The curved wall portion 425 is formed so that the ball flows outwardly to the left and right. This makes it easy to distinguish between a ball guided by the curved wall portion 425 and flowing backward through the ball discharge opening 417 and a ball flowing backward through the central opening 413 when viewed from the front.

In addition, unlike when the ball flow path is formed so that it does not flow outward to the left or right, space can be secured for arranging specific components by providing a space between the front and rear positions of the central opening 413 and the front and rear positions of the ball discharge opening 417. In this embodiment, a space (receiving recess 465) is formed for arranging a component (first component 481) for transmitting driving force to the electric role 640a, but details will be described later.

The eave portion 426 has an upper surface formed as a smooth surface having the same slope as the upper surface of the joint portion 422, and functions as a portion that switches the flow direction of the ball riding on the left and right upper surfaces of the joint portion 422 to the left and right outer sides. However, the details will be explained later.

The ball guide protrusion 427 is formed along the flow path of the ball flowing down toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 among the balls riding on the slide member 450, and functions as a part that comes into contact with the ball flowing down. .

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 wears down due to friction with the ball over a long period of use, the wear can start from the tip of the ball guide ridge 427, so the contact area between the ball and the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front design member 420 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, scratches reduce the degree of transparency regardless of whether they occur on the front or back side. In other words, the larger the area on which scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to see the components arranged behind the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member 420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency through the front design member 420.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide ridge 427, minimizing scratches on the front design component 420 and ensuring visibility of the balls as they flow down.

The middle member 430 is a member that supports the slide member 450, and includes a central flow passage 431 formed at a position sandwiched between the slide member 450 from the left and right, and a pair of left and right detection sensors 435 disposed below the slide member 450 in a non-excited state.

The central flow path 431 has a bottom portion 431a formed with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the ball and slopes downward toward the front side, and a bottom portion 431a that is erected upward on the left and right sides of the bottom portion 431a to prevent the ball from passing through. It includes a left wall part 432 and a right wall part 433, and a rear wall part 434 that stands upwardly behind the bottom wall part 431a so as to prevent the ball from passing through.

The left wall 432 is configured to secure a gap 432a between it and the rear wall 434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the right wall 433 is configured to secure a gap 433a between it and the rear wall 434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

The gap 433a is located at a position shifted toward the front side from the gap 432a. In this embodiment, the gaps 432a and 433a are arranged such that the front end of the gap 432a and the rear end of the gap 433a are approximately aligned in the longitudinal direction.

The left wall 432 has an alignment portion 432b formed by cutting out the upper half from the rear end. The right wall 433 has an alignment portion 433b formed by cutting out the upper half from the rear end. The alignment portions 432b, 433b are used for alignment when assembling the upper member 440 to the middle member 430, as will be described in detail below.

In the rear side of the left wall portion 432, the right side facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the left side that does not face the central flow path 431 has a horizontal width shorter than that of the front side. A notch 432c is formed in this manner.

In the rear side of the right wall portion 433, the left side facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the right side that does not face the central flow path 431 has a horizontal width shorter than that of the front side. A notch 433c is thus formed.

The cutout portions 432c and 433c are formed with similar front and rear widths and function to avoid interference with the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450 during sliding movement, but the details will be described later.

The rear wall 434 is formed as a curved wall that connects the rear ends of the gaps 432a and 433a. This allows the ball that passes through the gap 432a and abuts against the rear wall 434 to be smoothly redirected toward the front side.

The detection sensor 435 is configured as a detection sensor that does not draw a pattern even if it detects the passage of a ball. In other words, when a ball passes the detection sensor 435, neither the drawing of a special pattern nor the drawing of a normal pattern is performed, and the payout of prize balls is performed. In this embodiment, the detection sensor 435 is controlled so that five prize balls are paid out in response to the detection of one winning ball by the detection sensor 435.

The upper member 440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes an upper flow path forming portion 441 that forms a flow path that slopes downwardly toward the rear through which the balls received in the ball receiving portion 412 flow, and an upper flow path forming portion 441 that forms a flow path that slopes downwardly toward the rear through which the balls received in the ball receiving portion 412 flow. A detection sensor 442 that detects a ball that has flowed down the channel configuration section 441, an upper lid member 443 that is fastened and fixed as an upper lid of the upper channel configuration section 441 and for fixing the detection sensor 442 to the upper channel configuration section 441, and at least a middle section. The member 430 includes a ceiling forming part 444 that constitutes a ceiling part of the central channel 431, and a left side wall part 445 and a right side wall part 446 that guide the flow of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450.

The upper member 440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, so that the ball flow path (the central flow path 431 and the flow path guided by the slide member 450) below the upper member 440 can be seen through the upper member 440 from the player's line of sight looking down at the winning unit 400 through the base plate 60. In other words, the player can see the ball rolling on the slide member 450 and flowing down the central flow path 431.

The detection sensor 442 detects the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor 442, a lottery for special symbol 1 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

The upper cover member 443 is arranged so that the path along which the ball flows to the left is rearward of the rear end of the left wall portion 445. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing down the upper flow path component 441 is positioned above the flow path guided by the left wall portion 445. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the ball guided by the left wall portion 445 from being reduced by the ball flowing down the upper flow path component 441.

The left side wall portion 445 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the left-right center end of the curved portion matches the front-rear position of the left end of the rear wall 434 of the middle member 430.

The right side wall portion 446 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the end portion on the left-right center side of the curved portion matches the front-rear position of the right-hand end portion of the rear wall portion 434 of the middle member 430.

That is, both the left side wall part 445 and the right side wall part 446 are formed so as to be continuous with the rear wall part 434 that forms the rear ends of the gaps 432a and 433a of the middle member 430, so as to guide the ball into the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured. In other words, the rear end of the right wall 446 is located at a position shifted toward the front side than the rear end of the left wall 445 .

The slide member 450 is made of a non-permeable resin material, and includes a pair of left and right tip portions 451, a left guide plate portion 452 and a right guide plate portion 453 extending rearward from the left and right inner portions of the tip portions 451. , a central fixing part 454 that connects and fixes the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 at the rear end.

By forming the slide member 450 from a non-transparent resin material, the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member 450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths 463 of the lower member 460) can be hidden (masked so that they are difficult to see) by the slide member 450. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the balls rolling on the slide member 450 and the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member 450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths 463 of the lower member 460) appear to overlap at the player's line of sight (the line of sight looking diagonally downward from the front side of the winning unit 400) even when the middle member 430 is formed from a light-transparent resin material.

The pair of tip portions 451 are formed in a symmetrical shape with the central flow path 431 in between, and are arranged in symmetrical positions with the central flow path 431 in between, with the left and right pair facing inward at the same angle with respect to the horizontal. It is formed into a plate shape with the left and right sides tilting downward at the same angle toward the rear side.

The left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 extend rearward while following the slope of the tip portion 451, and the length of the left guide plate portion 452 is longer than that of the right guide plate portion 453. long. Therefore, the left guide plate portion 452 is lower in the vertical position at the rear end than the right guide plate portion 453.

The left guide plate part 452 includes an inclined surface part 452a formed near the right edge of the rear half thereof so that the degree of downward inclination of the upper surface of the plate toward the right increases. In addition, the right guide plate portion 453 includes an inclined surface portion 453a formed near the left edge of the substantially rear half so that the degree of downward inclination of the upper surface of the plate toward the left increases.

The inclined surface portions 452a, 453a are formed with a front-rear width sufficient to allow the slide member 450 to be disposed to face the gaps 432a, 433a in the left-right direction, regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in a non-energized state or an energized state.

That is, at the timing when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 passes through the gaps 432a and 433a, the ball is moved along the slope of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a, regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in a de-energized state or an energized state. Since the flow can be made to flow inwardly, the direction of flow can be directed inward to the left and right.

Because the extension length of the right guide plate portion 453 is shorter, it is possible to secure space behind the right guide plate portion 453. In this embodiment, the solenoid SOL41 for driving the electric role 640a is disposed in the freed space, and the winning unit 400 can be configured to comfortably accommodate the solenoid SOL41 (with a shape that is roughly square when viewed from above).

Note that the formation width (left and right width) of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a can be set arbitrarily. For example, the bottom portion 431a of the central flow path 431 may be configured to extend above the bottom portion 431a and partially overlap when viewed from above. In this case, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Figures 11 and 13 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit 400, and Figures 12 and 14 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit 400. Figures 11 to 14 show the non-excited state of the electric roler 640a, and also show the exploded members below the middle member 430. Also, Figures 11 and 12 show the winning unit 400 viewed from diagonally above, and Figures 13 and 14 show the winning unit 400 viewed from diagonally below.

The winning unit 400 comprises a lower member 460 disposed below the middle member 430 and fastened to the middle member 430, a tilting member 470 supported on the lower member 460 between the middle member 430 and the lower member 460 so as to be tiltable forward and backward and constituting an electric role 640a, and a transmission member 480 which transmits the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 to the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470.

First, with reference to Figures 11 to 14, we will provide additional explanation on the configuration of the plate member 410, front design member 420, middle member 430, upper member 440, and slide member 450 of the winning unit 400.

The front design member 420 includes a ball guide protrusion 428 formed as a pair of protrusions for guiding the ball to flow down, at a position slightly shifted outward from the left and right intermediate positions of the pair of partition plates 423.

The protruding tip (rear end) of the ball guide rib 428 is shaped to slope downward toward the front, so that when a ball arriving from the rear is guided, a downward load is easily applied to the ball, making it easier to prevent the ball from bouncing back.

The ball guide ridge 428 is formed along the flow path of the ball that passes through the central opening 413 of the plate member 410 to the front side, and functions as the part that comes into contact with the flowing ball. The ball guide ridge 428 is formed from a pair of ridges that are offset outward to the left and right from the left and right center of the flowing ball. This makes it easier for the ball to come into contact with the left and right inner corners of the ball guide ridge 428, so that wear of the ball guide ridge 428 can occur from the corners. This makes it possible to suppress damage to the left and right central parts of the ball guide ridge 428.

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 wears down due to friction with the ball over a long period of use, the wear can start from the tip of the ball guide ridge 428, so the contact area between the ball and the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 can be kept small.

In addition, since the front design member 420 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, scratches reduce the degree of transparency regardless of whether they occur on the front or back side. In other words, the larger the area on which scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to see the components arranged behind the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member 420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency through the front design member 420.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide protrusion 428, the scratches occurring on the front design member 420 can be minimized and the visibility of the falling ball can be reduced. can be secured.

The middle member 430 includes a support extension 436 that extends outward from the left wall 432 and the right wall 433 to the left and right and presses down and supports the detection sensor 435 from above, and a base plate 437 that is a plate-shaped member on which the detection sensor 435 is placed and to which the support extension 436 is fastened at the left and right ends.

On the opposite surface side (lower surface side) of the bottom surface section 431a disposed between the left wall section 432 and the right wall section 433, a locking plate section 431b projects vertically downward from a position closer to the rear end side. will be established. The locking plate portion 431b functions as a portion that defines the end of movement of the slide member 450, and details will be described later.

The support extension part 436 has an upper surface formed as a smooth surface extending in the front-rear direction, and an opening 436a that opens above the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and has a rectangular shape through which a ball can pass, and an upper surface. and a protrusion 436b extending in the left-right direction and projecting upward.

The protrusion 436b is disposed at a position where the front side of the middle member 430 smoothly communicates with the edge of the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 when the middle member 430 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 9). This prevents balls flowing downward along the front side of the tip 451 from entering the gap between the tip 451 and the detection sensor 435 when the slide member 450 is in the excited state (see FIG. 9), causing the balls to unintentionally stop flowing downward. In other words, the protrusion 436b can guide the balls as they flow downward, making the balls flow smoothly.

Further, the protruding portion 436b is arranged directly below the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when the slide member 450 is in a non-excited state (see FIG. 7). Therefore, when a ball is placed on the tip 451, even if the weight of the ball causes the tip 451 and the left guide plate 452 or the right guide plate 453 to flex and deform in the direction of falling forward. Since the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 can be supported from below by the protrusion portion 436b, the above-mentioned bending deformation can be suppressed.

The base plate 437 is vertically perforated in some places to form openings. That is, in the protrusion 437a that is formed to protrude to the front in order to arrange the detection sensor 435, an opening larger than the opening of the detection sensor 435 is bored in a position that does not block the opening of the detection sensor 435, An opening 437b for passing the plunger SOL41a of the solenoid SOL41 is formed at the lower side of the solenoid SOL41 that is fitted and supported at the end, and an opening 437b for passing the plunger SOL41a of the solenoid SOL41 through the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 at the central rear end. An opening 437c having a sufficient front-to-back width to allow displacement is formed.

The base plate 437 has a receiving recess 437d on its lower side that extends in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member 470, an inclined surface portion 437e that forms the ceiling of the path of the ball guided to the lower member 460 and slopes downward toward the rear, and an inclined stopper 437f that slopes downward toward the rear at the front end of a pair of extension walls that extend downward from the left and right ends of the inclined surface portion 437e.

The tilt stopper 437f can set the tilt member 470 in a non-excited state to a slightly tilted position rather than standing straight up, while still blocking the path of the ball, so the opening and closing angle of the tilt member 470 can be kept small. This can reduce the time required for the tilt member 470 to open and close, thereby preventing ball jamming, as will be described in more detail below.

The ceiling component 444 of the upper member 440 includes an inclined surface 444a that is arranged opposite the bottom surface 431a of the middle member 430 in the vertical direction and inclines upward toward the front, and a pair of extensions 444b that extend downward with an L-shaped cross section from the rear end of the portion arranged on both the left and right sides of the inclined surface 444a.

The inclined surface portion 444a forms the ceiling of the central flow passage 431, and since the inclined surface portion 444a is inclined upward as it approaches the front, the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow passage 431 becomes larger as it approaches the front. In other words, since the flow passage area becomes larger as it approaches the downstream side, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed when the central flow passage 431 flows forward.

The extension portion 444b is designed so that when the upper member 440 is assembled to the middle member 430, the left and right inner ends of the rear end can be engaged with the alignment portions 432b, 433b of the middle member 430 for alignment.

By assembling in this way, the front-back position of the rear surface of the extension portion 444b matches the front-back position of the rear end portions of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 (front ends of the gaps 432a and 433a). That is, a gap 444c is provided between the extension portion 444b and the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 which are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, and this gap 444c is arranged directly above the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured to be continuously connected to the gaps 432a and 433a.

In other words, the gaps 432a and 433a constitute the lower side of the opening through which the ball passes, and the upper side of the opening, of which the gaps 432a and 433a constitute the lower side, is constituted by the gap 444c. As a result, the upper sides of the gaps 432a, 433a are opened, and when the ball bounces, unlike the case where the ball can jump over the gaps 432a, 433a and flow down, the ball passes through the position outside the gaps 432a, 433a, 444c. This can be prevented.

The slide member 450 includes a pair of protrusions 455 extending in the front-rear direction and projecting downward from the lower surfaces of the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453. The protruding portion 455 is designed to have a horizontal width smaller than that of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, and the protruding end portion (lower end portion) extends in the direction of movement of the slide member 450 (front-back direction). It is said to have a shape that follows.

When the slide member 450 moves back and forth, the protrusion portion 455 is supported by the support extension portion 436 of the middle member 430, but in this case, the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension portion 436 can be suppressed. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide member 450 can be suppressed, and the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 can be prevented from falling forward (deformation) due to the weight of the ball on the upper surface.

The protrusions 455 are formed along the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 and function as ribs, thereby increasing the rigidity of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, which are long in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion 455 is disposed further rearward than the tip portion 451 . In other words, the protrusion 455 is not formed on the lower surface of the tip 451, and does not increase the rigidity of the tip 451.

Thereby, the ease with which the slide member 450 can be elastically deformed can be changed from region to region. That is, by configuring the tip portion 451 to allow a certain degree of elastic deformation, for example, when the slide member 450 moves forward, the ball is not caught between the front end of the slide member 450 and the front design member 420. Even if the ball is caught in the ball, the load generated by the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the tip portion 451 can quickly eliminate the ball from being caught in the ball.

When the tip portion 451 is elastically deformed, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are also elastically deformed, so that the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 have an elongated shape in the front-rear direction. There is also a possibility that the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the balls flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 may be narrowed.

In this case, the flow resistance of the ball that has already passed through the ball passage opening 414 and is rolling on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 increases, which may cause the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 to be longer than usual.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are formed with protrusions 455, which function as ribs to prevent the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 from elastically deforming. This makes it possible to maintain the size of the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, and makes it easier to manage the time that the ball passes over the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

Therefore, both the effect that the tip portion 451 is easily elastically deformable and the effect that the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are difficult to elastically deform can be simultaneously achieved.

Next, the configuration of the winning unit 400 other than the plate member 410, front design member 420, middle member 430, upper member 440, and slide member 450 will be explained.

The lower member 460 forms a plurality of rolling paths for the ball. That is, the lower member 460 includes a central path 461 for rolling the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, and left and right paths 463 for rolling the ball that has passed the detection sensor 435. The passage of the ball rolling along the central path 461 is detected by a detection sensor 462 disposed behind it.

The detection sensor 462 detects the passage of the ball that has entered the second winning hole 640 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor 462, the special symbol 2 lottery is executed and the prize ball is paid out.

The lower member 460 also receives a bearing portion 464 that constitutes the lower half of the receiving portion that rotatably supports the tilting member 470, and a first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member 470. a receiving recess 465 extending in the front-rear direction as a portion for the purpose of the slide member 450; and a bearing portion 466 constituting a lower half portion of the receiving portion that rotatably supports the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the slide member 450. , is provided.

The bearing portion 464 is configured as a recess that is open at the top, and the middle member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member 460 with the supported protrusion 473 of the tilting member 470 in place, so that the tilting member 470 is supported by the bearing portion 464 and the middle member 430 so that it can be tilted.

The receiving recess 465 is a region that is long enough in the front-rear direction to receive the first member 481 that is long in the front-rear direction and deep enough to allow displacement of the first member 481 in the vertical direction. 461 and the left and right paths 463. By preventing the first member 481 from falling off from the receiving recess 465, deformation of the first member 481 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The bearing portion 466 is configured as a recess that is open at the top, and when the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 is positioned, the middle member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member 460, so that the second member 485 is supported by the bearing portion 466 and the middle member 430 so that it can tilt.

In the non-energized state, the tilting member 470 rises as shown in FIG. 11 and assumes a posture that restricts the ball from entering the center path 461 side, while in the energized state, it is tilted (see FIG. 9) and moves toward the center path 461 side. This position allows the ball to enter the ball.

The tilting member 470 includes a plate-like portion 471 that gently curves inwardly (upwards) toward the tip, and a pair of cylindrical portions 472 that protrude in a cylindrical shape in the left-right direction at the lower end of the plate-like portion 471. and a supported protrusion 473 that is coaxial with the columnar part 472 and has a smaller diameter than the columnar part 472 and protrudes from the left and right ends of the columnar part 472, and a supported protrusion 473 that protrudes from the left and right ends of the columnar part 472, and A transmitted portion 474 extends in a C-shape and contacts the first member 481 of the transmitting member 480 to receive load transmission.

The plate-like portion 471 is formed to have a horizontal width approximately equal to the diameter of the ball, and is configured to prevent a plurality of balls from landing at the same time.

The cylindrical portion 472, like the supported protrusion 473, is a portion that is rotatably supported by the lower member 460. The cylindrical portion 472 is configured to ensure an area that can bear the sliding load during rotation and the load in the direction of gravity caused by the load from the ball, so mechanical wear can be reduced compared to when it is supported only by the supported protrusion 473.

The transmission member 480 includes a first member 481 at the rear end of which the plunger SOL41a is inserted in the left-right direction to prevent it from falling off in the up-down direction, and a second member 485 that works in conjunction with the first member 481.

The opening 437b of the base plate 437 restricts the movement of the plunger SOL41a in all directions, front to back and left to right, except for up and down, and the first member 481 into which the plunger SOL41a is inserted in the left to right direction is restricted in its movement in the left to right direction by the receiving recess 465, making it easier to prevent the first member 481 and the plunger SOL41a from being disconnected due to falling off in the left to right direction, etc.

When the excitation state of the solenoid SOL41 is switched and the plunger SOL41a is displaced in the vertical direction, the first member 481 is displaced in the vertical direction and the second member 485 is displaced in a direction tilting forward and backward, as will be described in detail later.

15(a) is a front view of the winning unit 400, FIG. 15(b) is a side view of the winning unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVb in FIG. 15(a), and FIG. 15(c) is a front view of the winning unit 400. 15A is a top view of the winning unit 400 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15(a). FIG.

Figures 15(a) to 15(c) show the non-excited state of the electric device 640a. Also, Figures 15(b) and 15(c) show, with imaginary lines, the positions of the front and rear sides of the base plate 60 to which the winning unit 400 is attached. In this embodiment, the ball that flows down the front side of the front side of the front side of the base plate 60 reaches the winning unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state, the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is arranged on the left and right sides of the eave portion 426, and the tip portion 451 As shown in the figure, it slopes downward toward the rear.

Therefore, if a ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 evades the ball receiving portion 412 and lands on the tip portion 451 via the eaves portion 426, or if the ball lands on the tip portion 451 directly without passing through the eaves portion 426 (a diving ball), it is pulled backward along the slope of the tip portion 451. Then, when the ball reaches a position where it can pass through the ball passage opening 414 (see FIG. 11), it flows along the slope of the tip portion 451 along the top surface of the slide member 450 toward the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

Figures 16(a) and 16(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XVIa-XVIa in Figure 15(c). Figure 16(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric device 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470), while Figure 16(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric device 640a. Also, Figures 16(a) and 16(b) illustrate some of the nails KG1 that are set into the base plate 60.

The state of the slide member 450 is changed by sliding it forward and backward, and is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish between the non-energized state and the energized state when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult to predict whether a game ball flowing down toward the slide member 450 will roll on the top surface of the slide member 450 or flow downward along the front side of the tip 451.

The state of the tilting member 470 is changed by a tilting action, and is configured to make it easy to distinguish between the non-energized state and the energized state. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball is in a state where it can enter the second winning hole 640 (see Figure 2).

The manner in which the balls flow down to the winning unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 16(a) and 16(b). Note that since the winning unit 400 is formed with a bilaterally symmetrical shape in the cross section shown in Figures 16(a) and 16(b), only one side will be described and the other side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), a ball that misses the ball receiving portion 412 and flows down will flow along route DR1, for example, via the eaves portion 426. In this case, the ball will not flow down the shortest distance to the ball passage opening 414 because it is blocked by the eaves portion 426, and the time it stays on the tip portion 451 will be extended. In addition, because the inclination of the eaves portion 426 causes the ball to flow down with a velocity component to the left and right outward, after landing on the slide member 450 and bouncing, the ball will tend to bounce back to the left and right outward.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper surface of the slide member 450 is inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides, the direction of the ball's rebound can be shifted toward the left and right inner sides. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the balls that have flowed down along the path DR1 spill to the left and right outside of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the nail KG1 is planted in a position facing the ball flowing outward to the left and right of the tip 451 of the slide member 450. Therefore, even if the ball flows outward to the left and right of the tip 451, the greater the momentum of the ball, the more likely it is to return to the slide member 450 side upon collision with the nail KG1. If the momentum of the ball is insufficient when it flows outward to the left or right of the tip 451, it will not bounce back upon collision with the nail KG1, and will flow down between the nail KG1 and the tip 451 of the slide member 450.

Even when flowing down a route different from the route DR1, due to the influence of the arrangement of the nails KG1, it usually reaches the same point DR1a where the route DR1 reaches the slide member 450, and is guided by the slide member 450.

The ball flows down over the nail KG1, which is planted in a position opposite the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450, and reaches point DR1a. Because the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is formed to protrude toward the nail KG1, the ball is prevented from falling between the tip 451 of the slide member 450 and the nail KG1.

Note that the ball bounced off by the nail KG1 may fly toward the left and right inner parts of the tip portion 451 (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414), but the eave portion is designed to make it easier for the ball to collide with the eaves portion 426. 426 arrangements have been designed. That is, in the present embodiment, even in an irregular downward flow state due to the ball being bounced off by the nail KG1, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 without passing through the point DR1a is suppressed. ing. In the present embodiment, the frequency of balls that are bounced off by the nail KG1 and reach the position in front of the ball passing opening 414 without passing through the point DR1a is about 1 in 10 of the balls that are bounced off by the nail KG1. It is designed and adjusted to

As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) is excited and the ball flows down the path DR1, the ball does not land on the slide member 450 and It flows while maintaining the velocity component in the left and right direction caused by the inclination of 426.

Because the tip 451 of the slide member 450 does not overhang to the left or right, it is not possible to expect the effect of narrowing the gap between the nail KG1, and the ball flows down to the left or right outside the opening 436a. In addition, the design of the eaves portion 426 described above prevents the ball from reaching a position in front of the ball passage opening 414 in an irregular manner due to the ball being bounced off the nail KG1, and prevents the ball from passing through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

In other words, when a ball flows down as illustrated by route DR1, if the slide member 450 is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to be guided inwardly to the left and right along the upper surface of the tip 451, whereas if the slide member 450 is in an excited state, the ball is unlikely to enter directly into the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and is likely to flow down the outer left and right sides of the front design member 420.

Next, the manner in which the ball flows down after riding on the tip end 451 of the slide member 450 in the non-excited state will be described. When the ball riding on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 flows toward the left and right inward along the slope of the tip 451 and the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state until it passes through the ball passing opening 414. , the ball flows to the rear side of the tip portion 451 without any problem, increasing the possibility that the ball will enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b (see FIG. 2).

As another case, a case will be described in which the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is riding on the tip portion 451.

The ball arrangement B1 in FIG. 16(a) is illustrated as riding on the left and right outer ends of the slide member 450. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement B1, since the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member 410, the ball will not move backward as the slide member 450 moves. Unable to do so, the ball flows down the left and right outer sides of the front design member 420.

Ball arrangement B2 in FIG. 16(b) is illustrated as a state in which the center of the ball is located above the left and right outer edges of the opening 436a of the middle member 430. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in ball arrangement B2, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member 410, so the ball cannot move rearward as the slide member 450 moves.

Whether the ball flows down the outer left or right side of the front design member 420 or toward the opening 436a depends on the momentum of the ball at the time and the deviation of the ball's center position. A ball that flows down toward the opening 436a passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and a prize ball is paid out to the player.

Therefore, if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement B2, the whereabouts of the ball is uncertain, and the profit that the player obtains changes depending on the ball's whereabouts. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide member 450 when there is a ball in the arrangement B2.

Ball arrangement B3 in FIG. 16(b) is illustrated as a state in which a ball is arranged in front of the ball passage opening 414. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state with a ball in ball arrangement B3, the rear of the ball is open at the ball passage opening 414, so that the ball moves rearward as the slide member 450 moves due to the load it receives from the slide member 450 (it moves rearward by being pushed by the slide member 450).

That is, even if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when a ball is placed in the ball arrangement B3, that ball (only one ball) can be caused to flow down to the rear of the ball passage opening 414. In this case, since the upper surface of the distal end portion 451 of the slide member 450 is inclined downwardly toward the rear, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from spilling forward while the slide member 450 is moving.

In this embodiment, the ball arrangement B3 is formed symmetrically, so when the slide member 450 is switched to an excited state with balls on both the left and right ball arrangements B3, both balls move backward with the movement of the slide member and flow down behind the ball passage opening 414.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the slide member 450 is switched from a state in which a ball is placed on the tip 451 to an excited state, the change will depend on the arrangement of the ball on the tip 451. The ball is configured so that the downward flow path of the ball changes after the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state. Therefore, when the ball is placed on the tip portion 451, attention to the movement of the ball and the slide member 450 can be improved.

When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state, the further downstream (towards ball arrangement B3) the ball arrangement B1-B3 is, the greater the potential profit the player can potentially obtain. Therefore, even after the ball lands on the slide member 450, the potential profit the player can obtain continues to increase, which can increase the player's attention to the ball flowing downstream.

In addition, the number of balls on the slide member 450 is not limited to one, and for example, balls may be placed in ball arrangements B1 and B3 at the same time. In this case, the player's potential profits will be higher if the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state until the ball in ball arrangement B3 passes backward through the ball passage opening 414 and the ball in ball arrangement B1 reaches the ball arrangement B3 side (approximately 0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and therefore the player's attention to the movement of the balls and slide member 450 can be improved.

17 is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15(c), FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c), and FIG. is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 15(c). 17 to 19, the non-excited state (advanced closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

When the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state (forward closed state), the sliding member 450 is positioned in the forward position and the tilting member 470 is positioned in the closed position, as shown in Figures 17 to 19.

First, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 19, the configuration of the flow path of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 will be described. When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the front-rear width between the front design member 420 and the slide member 450 becomes less than the diameter of the ball, so the ball is prevented from flowing into the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. As a result, the ball riding on the tip 451 is introduced to the rear of the ball passage opening 414.

The ball that passes through the ball passage opening 414 rolls on the slide member 450 along the area surrounded by the middle member 430 and the upper member 440. The upper member 440 has a ceiling surface 447 that is disposed opposite the upper surface of the slide member 450.

The ceiling surface 447 is different from the slope of the upper surface of the slide member 450, and is formed as a plane extending along the front-rear direction (in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the slide member 450). Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the flow path formed between the top and bottom of the ceiling surface 447 and the slide member 450 increases as it goes toward the rear (downstream side), so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and prevent the ball from clogging. It is possible to avoid an increase in flow resistance.

This also makes it easier to prevent the ball from colliding with the ceiling surface 447, even if the ball rolling backward on the slide member 450 bounces upward, or if the ball bounces backward due to a load pushing it backward.

As shown in FIG. 19, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 is lower than the vertical position of the ceiling surface 447. Therefore, even if the ball bounces close to the ceiling surface 447, the height position of the ball can be lowered to the inclined surface portion 444a before passing through the gap 444c and joining the central flow path 431.

That is, the ball can be made to join the central channel 431 after reducing its momentum. As a result, even if balls are introduced into the central flow path 431 from the left and right at arbitrary timing and there is a possibility of collision, the balls that are newly guided to the central flow path 431 will not be able to be placed in the center flow path 431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a large load is applied to a ball that has been holding the ball to the extent that it causes the ball to flow backwards. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the backflow of the balls within the central channel 431 and to make the flow of the balls smoother.

This effect occurs not only for the ball guided by the right guide plate portion 453, but also for the ball guided by the left guide plate portion 452, since the height position of the ceiling surface 447 is the same on the left and right.

The ceiling surface 447 includes a curved guide portion 447a formed as a curved surface at the rear end portion and smoothly connected to the left side wall portion 445 and the right side wall portion 446. When the ball bounces on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and collides with the curved guide part 447a, the ball can be directed downward along the shape of the curved guide part 447a, so the ball can be brought closer to the slide member 450 side. Can be done.

This allows the ball to be smoothly displaced below the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a, allowing the ball to smoothly merge with the central flow path 431.

As shown in Figures 17 and 19, the forward and backward movement of the ball rolling on the top surface of the slide member 450 is several centimeters (approximately 3 to 5 centimeters), but the length (left-right width) that it occupies on the front side of the base plate 60 is kept to approximately 1 to 2 centimeters on each side (see Figure 16).

In other words, the slide member 450 is configured so that the range in which the slide member 450 is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (the area it occupies when viewed from the front) can be made smaller compared to the length of the path along which the ball is guided. This allows the space in the play area occupied by the slide member 450 to be reduced while still ensuring a sufficient length for guiding the ball with the slide member 450, so that space can be secured in the play area for arranging other electric devices, winning slots, etc.

As shown in FIG. 19, the inclined surface portion 444a of the upper member 440 and the right guide plate portion 453 (and the left guide plate portion 452, see FIG. 17) of the slide member 450 have the same inclination angle in the front-to-rear direction. This ensures that the areas of the right opening RT (the opening defined by the right gap 444c, the inclined surface portion 444a, and the right guide plate portion 453) through which the ball passes from the right guide plate portion 453 to the central flow path 431 and the left opening LT (the opening defined by the left gap 444c, the inclined surface portion 444a, and the left guide plate portion 452) through which the ball passes from the left guide plate portion 452 to the central flow path 431 are the same.

That is, since the left and right openings LT and RT have different front and rear positions, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a is lower in the rear left opening LT, so that the area (vertical width) of the openings LT and RT becomes smaller. Although there is a possibility, in this embodiment, the vertical position of the right guide plate part 453 (and left guide plate part 452, see FIG. 17) of the slide member 450 is lowered in response to the lowering of the vertical position of the inclined surface part 444a. Since the openings LT and RT are similarly low, it is possible to ensure that the vertical widths of the left and right openings LT and RT are the same.

This makes it easier to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance of the ball when it joins the central flow path 431 changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the right guide plate portion 453 or the left guide plate portion 452.

On the other hand, the length of the ball rolling on the slide member 450 varies depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate part 453 or the left guide plate part 452 (the length of the ball rolling on the slide member 450 differs depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate part 453 or the left guide plate part 452). The right guide plate portion 453 is longer than the right guide plate portion 453 by about 11 mm (the diameter of the ball), so the time required for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening 414 and merge into the central channel 431 is different. Details regarding the time required for the ball to flow down will be described later.

In addition, in Figures 17 to 19, the left and right openings LT, RT are shown by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. Also, to avoid overlapping with other solid lines, they are shown slightly smaller, but this is not intended to limit the shape to a small one, and they are formed with a size and arrangement sufficient to be smoothly guided from the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 to the central flow path 431.

Next, the central channel 431 will be explained with reference to FIG. 18. The ball guided by the slide member 450 is introduced into the central channel 431 along the slope of the slope portions 452a, 453a at openings LT, RT which are located at different positions in the front and rear on both the left and right sides.

The introduced ball flows down along the central flow path 431 toward the front side, and when the tilting member 470 is in the closed position, it flows downward after colliding with the ball guide protrusion 428, falls out of the winning unit 400, and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

Here, since the balls received in the ball receiving part 412 flow down into the upper flow path forming part 441 in order, the number of balls does not suddenly increase, and the slope of the upper cover member 443 is lower than the upper flow path forming part 441. It is parallel to 441. On the other hand, a plurality of balls may be arranged in the central flow path 431 at the same time, such as balls being guided simultaneously from the left and right sides of the center flow path 431, and the balls may become connected or float due to the load generated between the balls. there is a possibility.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inclined surface portion 444a that constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow passage 431 is inclined upward as it approaches the front, so the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow passage 431 becomes larger as it approaches the front. In other words, since the flow passage area becomes larger as it approaches the downstream side, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed when the balls flow forward through the central flow passage 431. In other words, even in a flow passage configuration in which the balls join at an intermediate position, a large flow passage area is ensured, so it is possible to avoid an increase in the flow resistance of the balls.

20 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15(c), FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c), and FIG. is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 15(c). 20 to 22, the excitation state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

In addition, in Figures 20 to 22, the left and right openings LT and RT are shown by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is in the forward position, similar to the illustrations in Figures 17 to 19.

When the electric device 640a is in an excited state (retracted and open state), the sliding member 450 is positioned in a retracted position and the tilting member 470 is positioned in an open position, as shown in Figures 20 to 22.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, when the slide member 450 is placed in the retracted position, the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is placed behind the front side of the plate member 410. This can prevent a new ball from landing on the slide member 450.

That is, a new ball is introduced toward the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b (see FIG. 2) located downstream of the central channel 431 located downstream of the slide member 450. do not have. Therefore, if the excited state is maintained beyond the time required for the balls riding on the slide member 450 to flow completely on the front side of the tilting member 470, all the balls guided to the winning unit 400 will be picked up by the tilting member 470. I can. In addition, since the balls guided by the slide member 450 are not added, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b from becoming excessive. Note that details of ball entry control will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 20 and 22, a narrow protrusion 455 is formed on the lower surface of the slide member 450, and the narrow protrusion 445 supports the support extension 436 of the middle member 430. has been done. This suppresses a posture change in which the slide member 450 tilts in the front-rear direction, and reduces frictional resistance by reducing the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension portion 436 when the slide member 450 moves back and forth. be able to.

When the slide member 450 is switched to an excited state and displaced from the forward position to the backward position, if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are inclined downward toward the rear, suppressing ball slippage, and the ball moves backward integrally with the slide member 450 (with the same displacement amount as the displacement amount of the slide member 450). In addition, the ball is accelerated backward by the load applied via the slide member 450.

On the other hand, if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when the slide member 450 is switched from an excited state to a de-excited state and displaced from the retracted position to the advanced position, the vertical height of the slide member 450 at the front-rear position where the ball is placed decreases due to the inclination of the upper surface of the slide member 450, and the vertical distance between the slide member 450 and the ball increases.

That is, the ball will land on the slide member 450 again after floating with respect to the slide member 450, and the ball will be prevented from moving forward together with the slide member 450.

In addition, if a forward spin is applied to the ball when the slide member 450 starts to move (before the ball and the slide member 450 are spaced apart vertically), the speed at which the ball flows down the slide member 450 can be increased.

When the slide member 450 is switched from a non-energized state to an energized state, the ball already resting on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 remains on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, and the branching of the flow path is confirmed further downstream.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. As mentioned above. That is, at a position in front of the ball passing opening 414, it is possible to determine whether the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and is discharged outside the gaming area, or whether the ball flows along another downstream path. There is sex.

In this embodiment, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 is located closer to the front than the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. Thereby, the attention to the detection sensor 435 can be improved, and the downstream path branches to the opening 435a side of the detection sensor 435, making it easier to visually recognize the ball passing through the opening 435a.

As shown in FIG. 21, even when the slide member 450 is placed in the retreated position, the inclined surface portion 452a is placed in the left opening LT. That is, the inclined surface portion 452a is formed with a front-rear width sufficient to be placed in the left opening LT regardless of the placement of the slide member 450. The same applies to the inclined surface portion 453a.

When a ball is introduced into the central flow passage 431 and passes through the central flow passage 431, if the tilting member 470 is still positioned in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and passes through the detection sensor 462.

In other words, the position in front of the tilting member 470 is the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined; either the ball passes through the detection sensor 462 and is discharged outside the play area, or the ball flows along a different flow path.

In this embodiment, the tilting member 470 is configured to be located closer to the front than the left guide plate section 452 and the right guide plate section 453. Thereby, attention to the tilting member 470 can be improved, and the flow path branches toward the detection sensor 462 side, making it easier to visually recognize the ball flowing down toward the detection sensor 462 side.

In this way, the winning unit 400 is configured so that the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined is located on the front side. Furthermore, by configuring the ball to pass through multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) with a sufficient amount of time between them, rather than passing through them immediately, a player who is paying attention to the ball can have time to move their eyes.

In addition, by narrowing the distance between the multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) when viewed from the front (see Figure 16), a player who is focusing on the ball can have more room to move their eyes.

As shown in FIG. 21, the supported protrusion 473, which serves as the rotation axis of the tilting member 470, is disposed at a position further rearward than the front end of the central flow passage 431. In addition, in the closed position, the tilting member 470 is slightly tilted forward in response to the inclination of the inclined stopper 437f of the middle member 430 (see FIG. 18).

As a result, even if the tilting member 470 is excited and displaced toward the open position when a ball is located in front of the tilting member 470 in the closed position, the front surface of the tilting member 470 is already tilted forward, making it easier to apply a downward load to the ball and to expel the ball downward early. In other words, it is easier to avoid a situation in which the ball gets caught between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420, prolonging the time during which the displacement of the tilting member 470 to the open position is hindered.

In addition, the rotation angle of the tilting member 470 during the opening and closing operation can be reduced, so the time required for the opening and closing operation can be shortened. This makes it easier to control the timing of opening and closing, and makes it easier to prevent excessive ball entry.

In this embodiment, the horizontal width of the plate-shaped portion 471 of the tilting member 470 is formed to be approximately the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 16), and it is difficult to pick up multiple balls while moving from the open position to the closed position. Since the structure is such that it is not possible to do so, it is possible to easily prevent over-entering balls.

The inclined surface portion 437e, which constitutes the ceiling of the flow path through which the ball picked up by the tilting member 470 flows, is formed as an inclined surface parallel to the central path 461 at the rear side, and the front side portion as the side closer to the tilting member 470. , the angle of upward slope toward the front increases.

As a result, even if a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 bounces due to a collision with the tilting member 470, the ball can be smoothly introduced into the path between the central path 461 and the inclined surface portion 437e. . Therefore, the tilting member 470 is closed due to the weight of the ball riding on the tilting member 470 and the high resistance of the ball flowing into the path between the central path 461 and the inclined surface portion 437e, which prevents the ball from being displaced. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the displacement towards the position is delayed.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state, the vertical position of the slide member 450 rises at the same front-to-rear position, so the lower edge of the right opening RT rises and the area through which the ball can pass becomes smaller. The same is true for the left opening LT.

At this time, the ball that reaches the rear end of the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 bounces up due to the vertical position of the slide member 450 rising at that position. This may increase the kinetic energy of the ball.

On the other hand, the vertical distance between the inclined surface portion 444a and the slide member 450 is narrower than when the slide member 450 is in the forward position, increasing the resistance of the ball to flow downward and enhancing the effect of the inclined surface portion 444a in slowing down the momentum of the ball. This allows the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball to be sufficiently reduced before it is guided into the central flow path 431.

Figures 23(a) and 23(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XXIIIa-XXIIIa in Figure 15(c). Figure 23(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470), while Figure 23(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric role 640a. Note that Figures 23(a) and 23(b) show cross sections passing through the midpoint of the gap 444c in the front-to-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, the left opening LT and the right opening RT are shifted in position in the front and back, so that the openings are different from each other, which is often seen when the left and right openings are arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid the problem that the balls passing through collide with each other in the left-right direction, and the loads generated by the balls are balanced by being directed outward in the left-right direction, resulting in a stagnation in the flow of the balls.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball on the left guide plate part 452 passes through the right opening RT which is arranged on the front side of the left opening part LT introduced into the central flow path 431, and the ball on the right guide plate part 453. is introduced into the central flow path 431, there is a possibility that the ball attempting to pass through the right opening RT and the ball flowing down the central flow path 431 will collide (see FIG. 23(a). )reference). In this case, even if the shape of the flow path is designed so that this is unlikely to occur, there is a possibility that the loads applied to each other by the balls will become unbalanced and the flow of the balls will stop.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state and is displaced to the retreat position, it does not affect the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central channel 431, but the right guide plate portion By raising the vertical position of the ball on the guide plate 453, it is possible to create a gap between the ball placed in the central channel 431 and the ball on the right guide plate 453, albeit for a moment. can. During this time, the balls placed in the central flow path 431 flow along the slope of the central flow path 431, thereby making it possible to unbalance the loads that the balls apply to each other.

In addition, when the slide member 450 is switched to a non-excited state and displaced to the forward position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path 431 is not affected, but the vertical position of the right guide plate portion 453 is lowered, so that a gap can be created (floated) between the ball above the right guide plate portion 453 and the right guide plate portion 453, albeit for a moment. When the ball above the right guide plate portion 453 displaces downward to fill this gap, it is believed that the ball is pushed by the load from the balls arranged in the central flow path 431 and displaces outward to the left and right, thus disrupting the balance of the loads that the balls impart to each other.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if a situation occurs in which the loads given to each other by the balls are balanced at the merging position to the central flow path 431, the loads are balanced by switching the state of the slide member 450. It is constructed in such a way that the placement of one of the balls can be changed to disrupt the balance of the load. Thereby, the flow of the balls from the slide member 450 through the central channel 431 can be maintained smoothly.

The above-mentioned effect of imbalancing the load occurs when the state of the slide member 450 is switched, so the operation pattern of the slide member 450 may be designed in anticipation of this effect. In other words, the more frequently the state of the slide member 450 is switched, the easier it is to imbalance the load between the balls as they flow down, making it possible to make the balls flow down more smoothly.

Next, with reference to Figures 24 to 28, variations in the flow path of the ball that reaches the position where the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is located will be described.

24(a) to 24(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 24(a) to 24(d) show the non-excited state of the electric device 640a, and the flow of the ball after it hits the tip 451 in chronological order. Note that in 24(a) to 24(d), the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper member 440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the areas that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip 451 of the slide member 450 (ball arrangement B1, see FIG. 16(a)) as shown in FIG. 24(a). The ball that lands on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 as shown in FIG. 24(b) and flows down the slide member 450 along the left side wall 445 or right side wall 446 of the upper member 440.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the balls flow into the central flow passage 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flow down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage 431. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(d), the balls pass through the central opening 413 at the front end side of the central flow passage 431 and flow downward.

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(d), when the electric accessory 640a is maintained in a non-excited state during the period during which the ball passes through the winning unit 400, the ball that has landed on the tip 451 It falls down the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

25(a) to FIG. 25(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 25(a) and 25(b) illustrate a non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIGS. 25(c) and 25(d) illustrate an excited state of the electric accessory 640a. 25(a) to 25(d), the flow of the ball after riding on the tip 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(d), illustration of the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper stage member 440 is omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. The guide points are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the left and right outer sides of the tip 451 (ball arrangement B1, (see FIG. 16(a)). The ball that landed on the tip 451 then flows down to the left and right inside toward the front side of the ball passing opening 414, and passes through the ball arrangement B2 (see FIG. 16(a)) as shown in FIG. 25(b).

When the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state as shown in FIG. 25(c) when the ball flowing down is placed in the ball arrangement B2, the ball flows to the left and right inward due to inertia, as shown in FIG. 25(d). As shown in FIG. 3, the ball flows downward on the front side of the ball passage opening 414 and passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in FIGS. 25(a) to 25(d), if the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state within a short time after the ball rides on the tip 451, the ball rides on the tip 451. The ball can fall in front of the ball passage opening 414 and pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

However, if the electric device 640a is switched to an excited state in such a short time that inertia does not act on the inside left or right, the ball on the tip 451 may come off the opening 435a and flow down the outside left or right of the detection sensor 435.

26(a) to FIG. 26(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 26(a) and 26(b) illustrate the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, and FIGS. 26(c) and 26(d) illustrate the excited state of the electric accessory 640a. 26(a) to 26(d), the flow of the ball after riding on the tip 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 26(a) to 26(d), illustration of the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper stage member 440 is omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. The guide points are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the left and right outer sides of the tip 451 (ball arrangement B1, (see FIG. 16(a)). The ball that landed on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left wall 445 or right wall 446 of the upper member 440, as shown in FIG. 26(b). do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the balls flow into the central flow passage 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flow down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage 431. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(d), the balls pass through the central opening 413 at the front end side of the central flow passage 431, flow down, and are picked up by the tilting member 470 and flow down toward the rear.

As shown in Figures 26(a) to 26(d), when the electric device 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state while a ball passes through the winning unit 400 and is maintained in the excited state, the ball that lands on the tip 451 falls down the front side of the central opening 413, is picked up by the tilting member 470, and enters the second winning opening 640 (an opening that is opened and closed by the tilting member 470, see Figure 2).

27(a) to 27(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 27(a), 27(b) and 27(d) show the non-energized state of the electric device 640a, 27(c) shows the energized state of the electric device 640a, and 27(a) to 27(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip 451 in chronological order. Note that in 27(a) to 27(d), the plate member 410, front design member 420 and upper member 440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the right and left outer sides of the tip 451 (ball arrangement B1, (see FIG. 16(a)). The ball that landed on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left side wall 445 or the right side wall 446 of the upper member 440, as shown in FIG. 27(b). do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 27(c), it flows into the central flow path 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flows down to the front side along the inclination of the central flow path 431. At this point, the electric device 640a is in an excited state as shown in FIG. 27(c), similar to that shown in FIG. 26(c).

Thereafter, before the ball passes through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central channel 431, the electric accessory 640a is switched to the non-excited state as shown in FIG. 27(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central channel 431 flows downward.

As shown in FIGS. 27(a) to 27(d), when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the de-energized state to the energized state while the ball passes through the winning unit 400, and then switched back to the de-energized state , the ball that landed on the tip 451 falls down the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, at the time when the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state after the ball passes through the ball passing opening 414, it is unclear whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member 470 or not. Ru.

In other words, depending on how the state of the tilting member 470 changes after the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the ball will either fall down the front side of the tilting member 470 and flow down toward the third winning opening 64b, or be picked up by the tilting member 470 and flow down toward the second winning opening 640, and it is not clear which direction the ball will flow down until it reaches the tilting member 470. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of attention on the ball that passes through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down toward the front side of the tilting member 470.

When the ball lands on the tip 451, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will flow into the ball passage opening 414 or not, thereby improving the attraction, and when the ball passes through the central opening 413, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member 470 or not, thereby improving the attraction. This makes it possible to increase the attraction of the ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 at multiple positions.

28(a) and 28(b) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. In FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), the excited state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and the flow of the ball flowing down the front side of the tip portion 451 is illustrated by an arrow. In addition, in FIGS. 28(a) and 28(b), illustration of the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper stage member 440 is omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. The guide points are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the path passes through the left and right positions (ball arrangement B1, see FIG. 16(a)) where it lands on the left and right outer parts of the tip portion 451. When the ball flows down, the ball flows to the left and right outside of the opening 436a. That is, the ball does not pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), when a ball having a velocity component inward to the left and right flows down toward the front position of the slide member 450, the ball enters the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. There is a possibility.

On the other hand, because the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is positioned far back (see FIG. 20), the balls flowing down are prevented from landing on the tip 451. This prevention effect is also strengthened by the reduction in the opening area enclosed by the ball passage opening 414 and the tip 451.

In other words, because the tip 451 is formed to slope downward toward the rear, when the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position (see FIG. 17), the vertical position of the part of the slide member 450 (corresponding to the front edge of the tip 451) that can form an opening together with the ball passage opening 414 is higher than the vertical position of the part of the slide member 450 (corresponding to the rear edge of the tip 451) that forms an opening together with the ball passage opening 414 when the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position (see FIG. 17).

Therefore, when the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position, the lower edge (corresponding to the edge formed by the tip 451) of the opening surrounded by the ball passage opening 414 and the tip 451 is raised in the vertical direction, thereby reducing the opening area. This makes it easier to prevent a ball with a velocity component to the left and right inward as it flows down toward the front position of the slide member 450.

In this way, the balls flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a generally deviate to the left and right outside of the winning unit 400, and a part of the balls enter the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in an excited state, balls flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 are prevented from landing on the slide member 450, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which new balls are introduced toward the second winning hole 640 (see Figure 2) or the third winning hole 64b, which are located downstream of the slide member 450, when the electric device 640a is in an excited state.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 28, the winning unit 400 can branch the flow of the ball riding on the tip end 451 of the slide member 450 at a plurality of positions. First, when the slide member 450 is switched to the energized state immediately after the ball rides on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 in the non-energized state (first branch position), the ball enters the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. (See FIG. 25(c)).

On the other hand, the balls that have not flowed down into the opening 435a flow from the tip 451 along the slope. If the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is riding on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, the ball remains on the slide member 450. Further, if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while riding on the bottom surface part 431a (see FIG. 26(c)), the ball still remains on the bottom surface part 431a.

A ball flowing backward down the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 is constantly pulled inward to the left or right due to the left-right inclination formed across the entire front-to-rear width of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, and flows backward. This allows the ball to be pulled toward the downstream central flow path 431 before it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. Therefore, the flow of the ball into the central flow path 431 can be made smoother than if the ball were to change direction to the central flow path 431 only after it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

The balls that have flowed into the central channel 431 roll forward along the slope of the central channel 431. When the ball falls from the front end of the central channel 431 (second branch position), if the tilting member 470 of the electric accessory 640a is placed in the closed position in a non-energized state, the ball will fall downward. (See FIG. 24(d)), if the tilting member 470 of the electric accessory 640a is placed in the open position in an excited state, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows backward (see FIG. 26(d)). ).

In this embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball rolling on the slide member 450 is set to include the front and rear directions, so that the game ball can roll over a path length that is greater than or equal to the dimensions of the slide member 450 and tilt member 470 when viewed from the front.

As a condition for the development of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the width dimension of the electric accessory 640a when viewed from the front cannot be extended indefinitely, and a length limit is set (for example, 55 mm), but according to the present embodiment The horizontal width dimension of the electric accessory 640a when viewed from the front satisfies the conditions for the development of the pachinko machine 10, and the actual rolling length of the ball via the electric accessory 640a can be further extended. As a result, in the configuration in which the ball flows over the electric accessory 640a and is guided to the winning port on the downstream side, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the ball to flow down while narrowing the space for placing the electric accessory 640a in front view. can.

Furthermore, the electric device 640a has the points (tip 451 and tilting member 470) that come into contact with the game ball flowing down located at a distance. This allows the game ball to flow down a greater distance than the shape of the electric device 640a by the length of the central flow path 431 between them.

29(a) and 29(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XXIXa-XXIXa in FIG. 15(b). FIG. 29(a) shows a state in which the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position (non-excited state), and FIG. 29(b) shows the slide member 450 in the retreated position from the state shown in FIG. 29(a). The state immediately after being switched to the arranged state (excited state) is illustrated. Furthermore, FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b) illustrate the balls that were placed in the slide member 450 or the central channel 431 when the slide member 450 slid.

As shown in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), the ball that was riding on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slid is displaced backward together with the slide member 450 by the displacement amount of the slide movement. . Further, since the left guide plate portion 452 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see FIG. 17), a backward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is accelerated.

On the other hand, the ball that was on the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 slid is not displaced particularly backward, but rolls on the fixed floor surface. Therefore, even if the ball flows down the same path, the time required for the ball that was on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slid is different from the time required for the ball that was not on the left guide plate portion 452 but on the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 slid is different, but the difference in the time required will be described in detail later.

Note that in the case where two balls are placed in the flow-down area formed by the slide member 450 and the central flow path 431, Figures 29(a) and 29(b) show a state in which one ball is placed on each of the slide member 450 and the central flow path 431, but this is not limited to the above. For example, it is also possible that balls are placed only on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, or that balls are placed only on the central flow path 431. Furthermore, the number of balls placed is not limited to two, and there may be one, or three or more.

Figures 30(a) and 30(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XXIXa-XXIXa in Figure 15(b). Figure 30(a) illustrates the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position (non-excited state), and Figure 30(b) illustrates the state immediately after the slide member 450 is switched from the state shown in Figure 30(a) to the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position (excited state). Figures 30(a) and 30(b) also illustrate balls that were positioned on the slide member 450 or in the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 slid.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slid is similar to the ball that was on the left guide plate section 452. Together with the slide member 450, it is displaced backward by the displacement amount of the slide movement. Furthermore, since the right guide plate portion 453 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see FIG. 19), a backward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is accelerated.

On the other hand, the ball riding on the central channel 431 when the slide member 450 slides rolls on the fixed floor surface without being particularly displaced rearward. Therefore, even if the balls flow down the same path, the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slides and the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slides. The time required for the ball to flow down is different for the ball that is not riding on the ball and is riding on the central flow path 431, but the details of the difference in the time required will be described later.

The time required for the ball to flow down on the slide member 450 and pass the front end of the central channel 431 will be explained. In this embodiment, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls down the right guide plate part 453, if the slide member 450 does not slide while the ball is flowing down, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414. The ball passes through the front end of the central channel 431 in about 2.0 seconds.

On the other hand, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls down the left guide plate portion 452, if the sliding member 450 does not slide while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 will pass the front end of the central flow path 431 in approximately 2.4 seconds.

The slide member 450 constitutes half of the path from passing through the ball passage opening 414 to passing through the front end of the central channel 431. That is, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 flows down on the right guide plate portion 453, the slide member 450 slides before approximately 1.0 seconds have passed after the ball has passed through the ball passage opening 414. If the ball receives a load from the slide member 450, if the slide member 450 slides approximately 1.0 seconds after the ball passes through the ball passage aperture 414, the ball receives a load from the slide member 450. No load is applied from the slide member 450.

In addition, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 flows down the left guide plate portion 452, if the sliding member 450 performs a sliding operation before approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414, the ball will receive a load from the sliding member 450, whereas if the sliding member 450 performs a sliding operation after approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414, the ball will not receive a load from the sliding member 450.

In this embodiment, even if the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage openings 414 at the same time, depending on the timing of the sliding movement of the slide member 450, the ball may or may not receive a backward load from the slide member 450 at the same time.

That is, if the slide member 450 slides after about 1.0 seconds have passed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414 and before about 1.2 seconds have passed, the left guide plate The ball flowing down on the portion 452 receives a backward load, and the ball flowing down on the right guide plate portion 453 does not receive a backward load.

When the slide member 450 slides backward while the ball is riding on the slide member 450, the time required for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening 414 and the front end of the central channel 431 is approximately 0.5. Seconds reduced.

The breakdown of this 0.5 seconds is approximately 0.3 seconds due to the amount of longitudinal displacement of the slide member 450 (approximately 12 mm), and 0.2 seconds due to the acceleration due to the load applied to the ball from the slide member 450. Seconds reduced.

A ball that rolls backward on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 passes through gap 432a or gap 433a (see FIG. 24(b)) and flows into the central flow passage 431. Since gaps 432a and 433a are offset from each other in the front-to-back direction, it is possible to prevent a head-on collision between the balls in the left-to-right direction when a ball passes through gap 432a and a ball passes through gap 433a at the same time. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that passes through gap 432a or gap 433a is pushed back by a collision with the ball and flows back.

When the electric role 640a is in the excited state, a ball flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 is prevented from reaching the slide member 450 (see Figure 28), so the ball that takes the longest time to reach the tilt member 470 after the electric role 640a is switched to the excited state is the ball that was on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 at the time the electric role 640a is switched to the excited state, and no balls after that will reach the tilt member 470.

FIGS. 31(a) to 31(c) are diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in the state of the electric accessory 640a. Note that FIG. 31(a) shows the time measurement change in the first operation pattern, FIG. 31(b) shows the time measurement change in the second operation pattern, and FIG. 31(c) shows the time measurement change in the third operation pattern. A timed change in the actuation pattern is illustrated.

In FIGS. 31(a) to 31(c), the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a whose operation is controlled when the passage of a ball is detected in the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 will be described.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the nail arrangement is designed so that the ball flowing down toward the electric accessory 640a passes through the normal prize openings (through gates) 66 and 67 without leaking, and the ball is Compared to the firing interval (0.6 second interval), the operation time of the electric accessory 640a triggered by the ball passing through the normal prize opening (through gate) 66, 67 (single lottery of normal symbols) (The operating time in the standard operating pattern, which corresponds to the interval between drawings for normal symbols) is longer, so during the pinball game, the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is less likely to be interrupted, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is always constant. It is likely to be maintained in a state where it is greater than 0. Therefore, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed repeatedly according to the standard operation pattern without any interval.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the first operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time t1a (0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member 450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for an operation time t1b (3.9 seconds in this embodiment), and this pattern is repeated as a reference operation pattern RP1.

In more detail, the 0.1 seconds that constitute the non-energized state are broken down into 0.05 seconds during which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after this period the sliding member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.05 seconds.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, but for 0.1 seconds, the ball changes from the ball arrangement B1 to the ball arrangement B3 (see FIG. 16(a)). ) (approximately 0.2 seconds).

Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate in the first operation pattern, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball passage opening 414, and the ball is prevented from being introduced into the central flow path 431. It is possible to prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b (see FIG. 2).

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the second operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a de-energized state (advanced position) for a standby time t2a (1.8 seconds in this embodiment), and then for an operation time The slide member 450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for t2b (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), and thereafter, the slide member 450 is maintained in a de-energized state (forward position) for a standby time t2a, and then the slide member 450 is not operated. The pattern in which the slide member 450 is maintained in the excited state (retracted position) at time t2b is set as the reference operation pattern RP2, and this is repeated.

In addition, in detail, as a breakdown of the 1.8 seconds that constitute the non-excited state, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member 450 is maintained at the forward position for 1.75 seconds. has been done.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided toward the central flow path 431.

The correspondence between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that elapses until the ball passes the front end of the central flow path 431 will be explained. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds to reach ball placement B1 to B3, the ball begins to pass through ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after slide member 450 is placed in the advanced position.

When a ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the first left ball entry period TIL1 (0.2 to 0.6 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 2.4 seconds later, the first left discharge period TOL1 (2.6 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In this case, the ball reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, so there is no change in the ball's flow speed due to the load from the slide member 450.

In addition, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the second left ball entry period TIL2 (0.6 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passage period is shortened by 0.5 seconds due to the backward load from the slide member 450, so that the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the second left discharge period TOL2 (2.5 to 3.7 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided to the right guide plate part 453, the ball passes after the first right ball entry period TIR1 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. The ball that has passed through the opening 414 passes through the front end of the central channel 431 after a first right discharge period TOR1 (2.2 to 2.8 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.0 seconds later. In this case, since the ball reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, the downward velocity of the ball does not change due to the load from the slide member 450.

In addition, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the second right ball entry period TIR2 (0.8 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 after the second right discharge period TOR2 (2.3 to 3.3 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

Therefore, in a state where the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled according to the second operation pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric accessory 640a is activated at the timing when the ball passes through the front end of the central channel 431. Since the ball is in a de-energized state (a state in which the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position and the tilting member 470 is placed in the closed position), the ball is not picked up by the tilting member 470, so that the ball is not picked up by the second prize opening 640 (see Fig. 2), but is guided to the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on the position of the ball (for balls that enter later), a load is applied to the ball when the slide member 450 is operated, shortening the time required for the ball to pass through. This makes it possible to operate the slide member 450 with an operating pattern having a shorter period than the time required for a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 to pass the front end of the central flow path 431 when the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state (the time required for the ball to flow down through the left guide plate portion 452 (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment)), while still allowing the ball to pass from the front end of the central flow path 431 within the period of the operating pattern of the slide member 450.

Therefore, the ball that passed through the ball passing opening 414 with the slide member 450 in the forward position for the first time (nth time) is passed through the ball passage opening 414 in the second time when the slide member 450 is in the retreat position. It is possible to pass from the front end of the central flow path 431 in a state where the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position (n+1th time).

In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening 414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow passage 431 can be completed as one set of the nth state and the n+1th state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), in the third operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a de-energized state (advanced position) for a standby time t3a (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and then for an operation time This is repeated using a pattern in which the slide member 450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) at t3b (2.0 seconds in this embodiment) as a reference operation pattern RP3.

In more detail, the 2.0 seconds that constitute the non-energized state are broken down into 0.05 seconds during which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after this period the sliding member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.95 seconds.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball will pass through the ball. It passes through the opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided toward the central flow path 431 side.

The correspondence between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that elapses until the ball passes the front end of the central flow path 431 will be explained. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds to reach ball placement B1 to B3, the ball begins to pass through ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after slide member 450 is placed in the advanced position.

When the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the third left ball entry period TIL3 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 2.4 seconds later, the third left discharge period TOL3 (2.6 to 3.2 seconds in this embodiment).

In addition, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the fourth left ball entry period TIL4 (0.8 seconds to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passage period is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the fourth left discharge period TOL4 (2.7 to 3.9 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the third right ball entry period TIR3 (0.2 to 1.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 2.0 seconds later, the third right discharge period TOR3 (2.2 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment).

In addition, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the fourth right ball entry period TIR4 (1.0 to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, so that the ball passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 after the fourth right discharge period TOR4 (2.5 to 3.5 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

Therefore, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the third operating pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric device 640a is in an excited state (the slide member 450 is in the retracted position and the tilt member 470 is in the open position) at the timing when the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage 431, so the ball is picked up by the tilt member 470 and guided without fail to the second winning opening 640 (see Figure 2), and is not guided to the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the ball (for a ball that enters the ball late), a load is applied to the ball during operation of the slide member 450, and the time required for the ball to pass is shortened. Thereby, when the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state, the time required for the ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 to pass through the front end of the central channel 431 (when flowing down via the left guide plate section 452 Even if the operating pattern is such that the period during which the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than the time required for the slide member 450 to be maintained in the retracted position (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment), The sphere can be passed through the front end of the central channel 431.

Therefore, in the standard operating pattern, the ball that rides on the slide member 450, which is positioned in the forward position when the electric device 640a is in the non-energized state, and flows down to the central flow path 431 can be picked up by the tilting member 470, which is positioned in the open position when the electric device 640a is in the energized state. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening 414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow path 431 can be completed in the standard operating pattern RP3.

As described above, the ball guided by the electric accessory 640a passes through different ball entrances depending on the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a. First, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled in the first operation pattern, the ball does not pass through the ball passage opening 414, but passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, or deviates from the opening 435a and falls.

Therefore, there is no support for drawing special symbols, and since the drawing of special symbols is solely based on balls entering the first winning port 64, it is difficult to draw special symbols frequently without intervals. When a ball that has flown down the front side of the sliding member 450 passes through the opening 435a, a prize ball is paid out, and support is only provided in terms of increasing the number of game balls the player has in hand.

Next, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, the electric device 640a is de-energized when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 passes the front end of the central flow path 431, and the tilting member 470 is positioned in the closed position, so that the ball flows down the front side of the tilting member 470 toward the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

Therefore, the special symbol 1 can be drawn frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the third winning hole 64b, a prize ball is paid out, which helps the player increase the number of game balls he has.

Next, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled in the third operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a is brought into an excited state at the timing when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 passes through the front end of the central channel 431, Since the tilting member 470 is placed in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows down toward the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2), that is, toward the detection sensor 462 (see E5).

Therefore, the special symbol 2 can be drawn frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the second winning hole 640, a prize ball is paid out, which provides support for increasing the number of game balls the player has.

By being able to set the third operating pattern from the first operating pattern in this way, even in a design in which the electric device 640a is constantly driven to open and close, it is possible to switch between a case in which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and a case in which a ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640.

That is, when the drive control of the electric accessory 640a is executed in the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern, the ball is prevented from entering the second prize opening 640, and the electric accessory 640a is prevented from entering the second prize opening 640. When the drive control is executed in the third operation pattern, the ball enters the second winning a prize opening 640 frequently.

FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating the relationship among the reservation type, gaming state, special symbol type, and fluctuation time. In addition, in order to make it easy to understand, only the special symbol 2 is illustrated, and the illustration of the special symbol 1 is omitted.

For special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is set the same in both low and high probability states, and if a losing pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 or 20 seconds, and if a winning pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, the state of the lottery for special pattern 2 is set to either the low probability state or the high probability state described above, and the game progresses with the variation time being different based on the set game state.

As shown in FIG. 32, in a low probability state (normal state or time-saving state in this embodiment), if a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 minutes. On the other hand, in a low probability state, if a big winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

The reason why the fluctuation time is set to a long time of 10 minutes is to reduce the profit that the player obtains when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 in a low probability state. As a result, even if a ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 accidentally enters the second winning hole 640, the fluctuation of the special symbol 2 will not be prolonged unless the gaming state is shifted to a high probability state. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to obtain a profit from the lottery of the special symbol 2.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 is allowed up to 4, so if a jackpot symbol is determined by the reserved balls of special symbol 2, the jackpot based on that determination will occur after 10 to 30 minutes. (the fluctuation of the special symbol stops) may occur.

Therefore, a player who is playing the game at the timing when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the pending special symbol 2, and a player who is playing the game at the timing when the jackpot based on the reserved special symbol 2 occurs. A different situation may occur, or a situation where no player is playing the game at the timing when a jackpot occurs.

In such a case, if the machine immediately transitions to a special game mode when a jackpot occurs, the player currently playing the machine, or players playing another pachinko machine nearby, may be surprised by the sudden start of the special game mode, which may lead players to suspect a malfunction.

In response to this, it is possible to determine the conditions for transitioning to the special game state when a jackpot is determined. In this embodiment, after a jackpot is determined (after the special symbols have stopped varying), the player can transition to the special game state by passing the ball through the through gates 66, 67 in accordance with the instructions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

In other words, by controlling the machine so that the special game state is not entered until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suspect a malfunction. Note that the location through which the ball must pass to enter the special game state is not limited to the through gates 66 and 67; for example, the machine may be controlled so that the special game state is entered when the ball passes through the general winning opening 63.

In addition, in a high probability state (high probability state or special high probability state in this embodiment), if a losing symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds.

In addition, in a high probability state, if a small winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 seconds. On the other hand, in a high probability state, if a big winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In the high probability state, the fluctuation time when the small winning symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2 is set to be short, so the state where the ball frequently enters the second prize opening 640 (this implementation In the case where the drive control of the electric accessory 640a is executed in the third operation pattern), the player can frequently perform small winning games and open the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to frequently obtain prize balls based on balls that enter the mouth 65a.

The setting of the change time for the special symbols is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a wide variety of variations may be added to the change time for each symbol, or the length of the change time may be changed according to the number of reserved special symbols. When the length of the change time changes according to the number of reserved special symbols, the change time is generally set to be longer when there are fewer reserved symbols than when there are more reserved symbols (when the tank is close to full).

This embodiment solves the problem that occurs in conventional machines, where the player receives an unexpected profit by firing a ball so as to win the special symbol 2 lottery at an inappropriate timing. be able to.

That is, even in the conventional model, as in this embodiment, there is a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port related to the lottery of special symbol 1 is high, and a state in which the frequency of balls entering the ball into the second ball entry port related to the lottery of special symbol 2 is high. There have been examples of configurations in which it is possible to switch between a state in which the frequency of ball entry increases.

However, if the number of electric accessories 640a to be installed is limited to one, the electric accessory 640a is installed to be attached to either the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, and the electric accessory 640a is installed to accompany the other ball entrance. It is assumed that the electric accessory 640a is not installed in the ball and the ball is always in a state where the ball can enter the ball.

In this case, if the ball entry efficiency of one ball entry port (corresponding to the first winning port 64, see Figure 2) located in the center of the game board 13 is higher than that of the other ball entry port, or if the player's profits are extremely high if a ball entry into the other ball entry port results in a jackpot, the player may shoot the ball toward the other ball entry port even if the game provided by the pachinko machine 10 indicates that it is the right time to let the ball enter the first ball entry port.

Even if a measure is taken to reduce the efficiency of digesting the fluctuation based on the ball entering the other ball entrance by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in a low probability state extremely long, the number of reserved special symbols 2 First, when a variation is started based on the suspension of special symbol 1, the ball enters the other ball entrance in advance to fluctuate the special symbol 2, and then the game proceeds in which the ball enters one ball entrance. If it is possible to make the special symbol 2 fluctuate while playing the game provided by the pachinko machine 10 by doing so, it can be said that the deterrent effect is low.

In the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, even if the timing is right for a ball to land in one ball opening, if the ball enters the other ball opening and results in a jackpot, the pachinko machine enters a special game state. If the game provided by the machine 10 ends up giving the player a benefit that is not intended, there is a problem in terms of the fairness of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) driven by the single solenoid SOL41 operates the first ball entrance (third prize opening) related to the special symbol 1 lottery. 64b)), the second ball entry port (equivalent to special symbol 2) is supported to increase the frequency of balls entering the slot (corresponding to 2 (corresponding to the second winning hole 640), while supporting the player to increase the frequency of balls entering the second ball entering hole related to the special symbol 2 lottery (equivalent to the electric accessory 640a). In the state where the drive is controlled by the third operation pattern), it is possible to reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port related to the special symbol 1 lottery.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port (corresponding to the third winning port 64b) related to the drawing of special pattern 1 and the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port (corresponding to the second winning port 640) related to the drawing of special pattern 2 are both low (a state in which the electric device 640a is driven and controlled by the first operating pattern).

Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from receiving a profit that is not intended for the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to improve the fairness of the game.

Figures 33 to 35 are cross-sectional views of the slide member 450, tilt member 470, and transmission member 480 taken along line XXXIII-XXXIII in Figure 23(a). Figures 33 to 35 chronologically illustrate the switching operation of the electric role 640a from a de-energized state to an excited state, with Figure 33 illustrating the de-energized state of the electric role 640a, Figure 34 illustrating the state in which the first member 481 rises while the slide section 450 is maintained in the forward position, and Figure 35 illustrating the excited state of the electric role 640a. Also, in Figures 33 to 35, the outline of the plate member 410 is illustrated in imaginary lines as a reference for the arrangement.

As shown in Figures 33 to 35, when the electric role 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the sliding member 450 and the operation timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, only the tilting member 470 moves from the start of the operation to the intermediate position (see Figures 33 and 34), and from the intermediate position, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 move (see Figures 34 and 35). At this time, the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 end their operations at approximately the same time (see Figure 35).

This will be explained in detail below. Since the first member 481 operates integrally with the plunger SOL41a (see FIG. 11) of the solenoid SOL41, it moves up and down in synchronization with the drive timing of the solenoid SOL41.

On the other hand, in a configuration in which the driving force is transmitted from the first member 481 to the second member 485 via a pair of transmission plate portions 482 formed at the rear end of the first member 481, when the electric device 640a is in a non-excited state, the upper plate portion 482a abuts against the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is maintained between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486.

The second member 485 is supported so as to be rotatable about the rotation shaft 485a, and is engaged with the engaging plate 431b via the slide member 450 (see FIG. 18), so that its position in the non-excited state (see FIG. 33) is the terminal position of the forward rotation displacement.

When the first member 481 rises from the non-energized state, the position of the second member 485 and the arrangement of the slide member 450 are maintained until the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact, and only the tilting member 470 tilts. In other words, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member 470.

When the first member 481 is rising, after the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact, the second member 485 rotates in the backward direction around the rotating shaft portion 485a with the eccentric protrusion 486 being lifted by the lower plate portion 482b.

In this way, when switching the electric accessory 640a from the energized state to the de-energized state while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), the timing when the driving force is required for the tilting member 470, The timing at which the sliding member 450 requires driving force is shifted.

In particular, since the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is retracted from above the first member 481 after the transmission of the driving force to the slide member 450 is started (see FIG. 34), the transmission target portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is The movement is left to its own weight, and the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is used to move the slide member 450.

Furthermore, as described above, in the switching operation of the electric accessory 640a from the de-energized state to the energized state, the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 is started in advance, so that the tilting member is not affected by the operation resistance of the slide member 450. 470 tilting motions can be initiated.

Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the slide member 450, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the tilting action of the tilting member 470 is delayed due to the weight of the ball, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the timing of the start of the period in which the ball is guided toward the second winning opening 640 deviates from the control due to the tilting member 470 being placed in the open position.

In addition, even if a ball is positioned on the front side when the tilting member 470 starts to displace, and the ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 18), the driving force is transmitted to the tilting member 470 without being allocated to the sliding member 450, so a force sufficient to expel the ball downward can be generated. Therefore, the state in which the ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 can be quickly resolved.

On the other hand, at the stage where the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the sliding member 450 (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the driving force allocated to the tilting member 470 becomes extremely small, and the driving force is transferred to the sliding member 450. Therefore, when a ball is placed on the slide member 450, a backward load applied to the ball via the slide member 450 can be secured.

In this embodiment, the path of the ball flowing down toward the tilting member 470 is surrounded by the plate member 410 and the front design member 420, so that the ball does not deviate from the tilting member 470 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, even before the tilting member 470 is fully opened, the weight of the ball is applied to the tilting member 470, so that the tilting member 470 is displaced to the open position (pushed down). Therefore, the ball can be configured to be easily picked up by the tilting member 470.

Even when the electric device 640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state (returning from FIG. 35 to FIG. 33), there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the sliding member 450 and the operation timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, from the start of the operation (see FIG. 35) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 34), the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is pushed down by the first member 481 of the transmitting member 480, and the lower plate portion 482b of the first member 481 is pressed down. When the locking projection 487 of the second member 485 is pushed down, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 operate together. On the other hand, since the slide member 450 has already reached the forward position at the halfway position (see FIG. 34), only the tilting member 470 is operated from the halfway position.

Thereby, in the switching operation of the electric accessory 640a from the energized state to the de-energized state, the slide member 450 can be placed in the forward position before the operation of the tilting member 470 is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to get on the tip 451 (the period during which the ball is picked up by the tip 451 can be extended as much as possible), and it is also possible to make it easier for the ball to be picked up by the tilting member 470 (tilting (the time period until member 470 reaches the closed position can be extended).

In addition, in this embodiment, the protrusion 455 is not formed on the underside of the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and elastic deformation in the vertical direction is allowed at the tip 451. Therefore, even if a ball is caught between the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 20) during the switching operation from the excited state (see FIG. 35) to the de-excited state (see FIG. 33), and the displacement of the slide member 450 is suppressed, the tip 451 can be elastically deformed to continue the forward displacement of the slide member 450, so that the rise-up operation of the tilt member 470 linked to the slide member 450 is prevented from becoming defective, and the rise-up operation of the tilt member 470 can be reliably completed.

In this embodiment, as described above, when switching the electric accessory 640a from a non-excited state to an energized state while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), a driving force is required for the tilting member 470. The timing at which this occurs and the timing at which driving force is required for the slide member 450 are shifted.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the electric role 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, the tilting member 470 starts to operate first, and then the sliding member 450 starts to operate, and the timing at which the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 end their operations is set to be approximately the same.

The load transmission from the slide member 450 side will now be described. As shown in FIG. 33, a locking protrusion 487 is formed on the lower end of the second member 485 (the portion below the rotating shaft portion 485a) and protrudes along the axial direction of the rotating shaft portion 485a.

The locking protrusion 487 is arranged so as to come into contact with the lower plate part 482b of the first member 481 in the front-rear direction. Due to the frictional force generated in this contact portion, it is possible to suppress the unintended rise (lifting) of the first member 481 when the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state, and it is possible to easily maintain the tilting member 470 in the closed position. Can be done.

Furthermore, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, a load (backward load) is applied to the slide member 450 in a direction that moves the slide member 450 backward and rotationally displaces the second member 485 in the backward rotation direction in conjunction with the slide member 450. Even if the lower plate portion 482b is arranged in the moving direction of the locking protrusion 487, the rotational displacement of the second member 485 is stopped, and the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 is also prevented. It can be stopped.

In this case, since the direction of movement of the locking protrusion 487 (direction along a circle centered on the rotating shaft section 485a) and the direction of movement (vertical direction) of the first member 481 intersect (orthogonal to each other), , the first member 481 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted through the locking protrusion 487. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide member 450 is unexpectedly displaced backward in the non-excited state.

This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts, such as, for example, inserting a thin metal wire (such as a piano wire or wire) from outside the pachinko machine 10 (see Figure 1) into the play area, applying a load to the sliding member 450 via the thin metal wire, and changing the position of the electric device 640a.

In particular, by taking measures regarding the slide member 450, which protrudes from the front side of the base plate 60 (see Figure 2) in the non-energized state and which a fraudster would find easy to apply load to, it is possible to prevent the continuation of fraudulent behavior.

Figure 36 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member 410, base plate 437, slide member 450, tilt member 470, and transmission member 480 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15(c). In Figure 36, unnecessary components of the winning unit 400 are omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure, and the figure shows a state in which the operation of the tilt member 470 is temporarily stopped due to a ball being caught between the tilt member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e while the electric role 640a is being switched from an excited state to a non-excited state.

As described above, the operations of the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 are interlocked with each other using the transmission member 480 as an intermediary. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when a ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball catching occurs), the forward movement of the slide member 450 is suppressed, and the plate member The ball passing opening 414 (see FIG. 16) is configured so that the ball flowing down the front side thereof is unlikely to be picked up by the slide member 450.

Therefore, when a ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball biting occurs), it is easy to avoid a situation where an unexpectedly large amount of balls stays inside the winning unit 400. can do.

This prevents the balls from being picked up one after another by the slide member 450 when a ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e, and the balls flow down one after another toward the tilting member 470, causing the ball caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e to overlap with the following balls one after another, thereby preventing the tilting member 470 from malfunctioning.

Returning to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 is disposed at approximately the center of the left-right width of the play area, forming the upper part of the center frame 86. Some of the balls shot along the rails 61 and 62 collide with the nails and reach the upper variable winning device 700.

37(a) and 37(b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. In FIG. 37(a), the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated, and in FIG. 37(b), the open state of the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated.

The upper variable winning device 700 is provided with a base plate member 710 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 so as to close the opening drilled in the front-rear direction in the base plate 60 and forms a path for the balls to flow down between the base plate member 60 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), a movable upper cover member 730 that can slide in the front-rear direction through an inverted V-shaped opening 711 drilled in the front-rear direction on the upper side of the base plate member 710, a detection sensor that forms a second specific winning opening 700a that is configured to allow game balls that pass through the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 to pass (win), a movable floor member 740 that can slide in the front-rear direction through a rectangular opening 712 drilled in the front-rear direction on the lower side of the base plate member 710, and a plurality of detection sensors 750 that are configured to detect the passage of balls flowing down the front side of the base plate member 710 and have openings 751 through which the balls can pass, which are arranged on the front side of the base plate member 710.

In addition, the game balls that have passed through the front side of the movable floor member 740 are connected to an intermediate rail member that is formed into a curved shape by a band-shaped metal plate and is planted on the front side of the base plate 60, similar to the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. It is accepted by 781.

A ball ejection opening 782 is formed in the base plate 60 at the rear position of the lowest end of the intermediate rail member 781. The ball received by the intermediate rail member 781 passes through the ball ejection opening 782 and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The upper variable prize winning device 700 is arranged so as to form a gaming area with the glass unit 16 arranged on the front side. Since the glass unit 16 is transparent, the player can visually recognize the second specific winning opening 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 when viewed from the front.

In addition, on the back side of the glass unit 16, a resin plate member of a size that overlaps with the second specific prize opening 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in front view is arranged, and the resin plate member and the base plate member 710 are connected. The configuration may be such that the ball flows down between the two. In this case, the visibility of the game ball can be made different depending on whether a transparent member or an impermeable member is used as the resin plate member. For example, when an impermeable member is adopted, the upper variable prize winning device 700 can be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the passing of the ball to the specific winning hole 700a and the opening 751.

The base plate member 710 has an inverted V-shaped opening 711 on the upper side, the left and right ends of which are close to the left and right central ends of the center frame 86, a rectangular opening 712 on the lower side, a pair of inclined rolling plate parts 713 extending from the inverted V-shaped opening 711 to the front side and inclining downward toward the second specific winning opening 700a, and a pair of inclined rolling plate parts 713 extending from the inverted V-shaped opening 711 to the front side at a position below the inclined plate parts 713 and on the left and right outer sides of the detection sensor 750 and inclining downward toward the detection sensor 750. It is equipped with an inclined outer wall plate portion 714, a pair of plate-shaped portions extending toward the front below the second specific winning opening 700a with a gap that can receive balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 700a, a pair of left and right storage plate portions 715 with their lower ends positioned close to the rectangular opening 712, a pair of left and right receiving portions 716 extending toward the front below the detection sensor 750 in a U-shape with a left-right width that can receive balls that have passed through the opening 751, and a pair of left and right discharge openings 717 drilled in the front-rear direction according to the inner shape of the receiving portions 716 and discharging the balls received by the receiving portions 716 to the rear side.

The inclined rolling plate part 713, the inclined outer wall plate part 714, the storage plate part 715, and the receiving part 716 are extended to a sufficient position to prevent balls from spilling between them and the glass unit 16. That is, in a front view, the ball does not pass through the inclined rolling plate part 713, the inclined outer wall plate part 714, the storage plate part 715, and the receiving part 716, but flows down along the shape thereof.

The inclined outer wall plate part 714 forms a gap between the inclined rolling plate part 713 above the detection sensor 750 and into which a ball can enter. As a result, the ball that has deviated to the left and right sides above the detection sensor 750 can be guided toward the detection sensor 750 along the inclination.

The storage plate section 715 is positioned at a position that is the same distance to the left and right from the central axis of the second specific winning opening 700a. In other words, the central axis of the second specific winning opening 700a is positioned on a plane that is parallel to the left and right side surfaces of the storage plate section 715 and is positioned at the midpoint between the pair of storage plate sections 715. This makes it easier for balls that enter the second specific winning opening 700a to flow into the gap between the pair of storage plate sections 715.

The movable upper cover member 730 has a plate portion 731 that is bent in an inverted V shape when viewed from the front and slopes downward outward to the left and right. When the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the plate portion 731 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 60, and balls placed on the movable upper cover member 730 are swept outward to the left and right along the slope of the plate portion 731.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the open state, the plate portion 731 is retracted rearward from the front end surface of the base plate 60, and the balls on the plate portion 731 fall toward the inclined rolling plate portion 713.

At this time, when the upper variable prize winning device 700 is in the closed state, the balls flowing down along the slope of the plate section 731 have a velocity directed toward the left and right outer sides, so Easy to land. Then, it flows along the inclination toward the left and right inner sides of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a.

That is, it is easier to make the downward direction of the ball flowing on the upper surface of the plate part 731 take a detour compared to the direction toward the second specific winning opening 700a at the shortest distance, and the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific winning opening 700a is reduced. can be prolonged.

Since the movable upper lid member 730 is tilted to both the left and right sides, the above-mentioned effect of prolonging the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific prize opening 700a can be produced in multiple paths, so that the ball can flow down. By slowing down, it is possible to prevent the ball from slowing down.

In other words, it is easy to keep the ball flowing smoothly even though it prolongs the time it takes for the ball to pass, so it is possible to avoid a situation where the player stops shooting the ball because he or she suspects that the ball is jammed. That is, it is possible to promote the shooting of the ball.

Furthermore, by lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through, even if multiple balls are placed near the top of the second specific winning opening 700a, they will always pass through the second specific winning opening 700a. Therefore, by keeping the second specific winning opening 700a in the player's field of vision, the player can avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed in front of the movable top cover member 730.

The vertical distance between the plate portion 731 and the inclined rolling plate portion 713 is longest at the center on the left and right, and becomes shorter toward the outside on the left and right. Furthermore, at the outside ends on the left and right, the vertical distance is configured to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Therefore, for example, when a ball is riding on the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate part 713, the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state, and the plate part 731 of the movable upper lid member 730 slides to the front side. When the ball moves, a load is generated from the plate portion 731 in a direction that pushes the ball inward from the left and right.

This prevents the ball that has passed the front side of the plate portion 731 from becoming stuck at the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, and also prevents the time it takes for the ball to reach the second specific winning port 700a from becoming excessively long.

The movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 move in synchronous opposite directions by the driving force of the solenoid 763 described below. In Figures 37(a) and 37(b), the outer shapes of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are shown in solid lines when the gap between them and the glass unit 16 is short enough to prevent a ball from passing through, and are shown in imaginary lines when the gap between them and the glass unit 16 is long enough to allow a ball to pass through.

That is, when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the movable floor member 740 is retracted to the rear side, and the balls can be discharged below the storage plate portion 715 (see FIG. 37(a)), and the upper variable winning device 700 In the open state, the movable floor member 740 is projected forward, making it impossible to discharge the balls below the storage plate portion 715 (see FIG. 37(b)).

When the ball flowing down the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 in the open state of the upper variable winning device 700 is detected to have passed through the second specific winning opening 700a, the prize ball is paid out, while the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 , functions as a specific area for changing the game state based on the entry of a ball. That is, with the requirement that the ball has passed through the opening 751 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be a high probability state, but the details will be described later.

Figures 38(a) to 38(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. Figures 38(a) to 38(c) show an example of how balls enter the upper variable winning device 700 in chronological order.

In FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c), the outlines of the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are indicated by solid lines and imaginary lines. The meaning is the same as that shown in FIG. 37(b).

As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the open state, a ball that passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a, or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning opening 700a flows directly into the second specific winning opening 700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate portion 713.

The balls that pass through the second specific winning opening 700a are stored in order in the area formed by the storage plate section 715 and the movable floor member 740, as shown in FIG. 38(b). Then, when the storage plate section 715 is filled with balls up to near the top end (ball P1, the fourth ball to pass through the second specific winning opening 700a, is positioned near the top end of the storage plate section 715), ball P2, which passes through the second specific winning opening 700a following ball P1, cannot enter the gap between the storage plate sections 715 and flows left and right and passes through the opening 751 (see FIG. 38(c)).

In other words, when the storage plate 715 is filled with balls up to near the top end, it is not the balls positioned inside the storage plate 715, but rather the balls that follow and reach near the top end of the storage plate 715 that pass through the opening 751.

According to the example shown in FIG. 38, more balls than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 pass through the second specific prize opening 700a. For example, the ball will pass through opening 751.

Figures 39(a) to 39(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. Figures 39(a) to 39(c) show an example of how balls enter the upper variable winning device 700 in chronological order.

In Figures 39(a) to 39(c), the meanings of the outer shapes of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 being illustrated with solid lines and with imaginary lines are the same as those in Figures 37(a) and 37(b).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the open state, balls are maintained stored in the area formed by the storage plate section 715 and the movable floor member 740, and balls that pass the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 roll on the inclined rolling plate section 713 and pass through the second specific winning opening 700a, or, for example, balls that fall from directly above the second specific winning opening 700a flow directly into the second specific winning opening 700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate section 713.

The state shown in FIG. 39(a) is similar to the state shown in FIG. 38(b), and the ball can be placed near the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 by riding on the ball stored between the storage plate portions 715. P1 is flowing down.

In this state, when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state, the movable floor member 740 retreats to the rear, and the balls stored in the area between the storage plate sections 715 are discharged from the bottom (see Figure 39 (b)).

Although FIGS. 39(b) and 39(c) illustrate a state in which only one ball is ejected, the number of ejected balls depends on the length of time that the movable floor member 740 is retracted backward. If the time is short, some of the balls will be ejected, and if the time is long, all the balls will be ejected.

Since the balls are ejected from the area between the storage plate parts 715, the fourth ball P1 that has passed through the second specific prize opening 700a is one ball ( In other words, the ball P2, which is placed downward by the number of ejected balls) and has passed through the second specific prize opening 700a following the ball P1, also enters the area between the storage plates 715, as shown in FIG. 39(c). Therefore, the ball P2 is arranged near the upper end of the storage plate section 715.

From the state shown in FIG. 39(c), the ball that further follows the ball P2 and passes through the second specific winning hole 700a cannot enter the gap between the storage plate parts 715, but flows left and right and opens the ball. It passes through section 751.

In other words, according to the example shown in FIG. 39, even if more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plates 715 (four in this embodiment) pass through the second specific winning port 700a, the balls do not necessarily pass through the opening 751.

Whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 depends on whether or not the state in which ball P1 is positioned near the upper end of the storage plate section 715 (see Figure 38 (c)) is maintained until the trailing ball P2 passes through the second specific winning opening 700a and reaches near the upper end of the storage plate section 715.

The balls are discharged from the storage plate portion 715 at the timing when the movable upper lid member 730 is closed (see FIG. 39(b)), and the number of balls discharged is related to the length of the opening/closing operation. The more frequently the opening and closing operations of the member 730 occur, and the longer the movable upper lid member 730 is closed, the state in which the ball P1 is disposed near the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 (FIG. 38(c) )) becomes difficult to maintain, making it difficult for the ball to pass through the opening 751. Note that details of the operation control of the movable upper lid member 730 will be described later.

Figures 40(a) to 40(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 taken along line XLa-XLa in Figure 37(a). In Figures 40(a) to 40(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate 60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from a closed state to an open state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 40(a) to 40(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is illustrated as a side view viewed from the right, rather than as a cross-sectional view.

The drive transmission device 760 includes a first member 761 journaled on a rotating shaft XXXVII fixedly positioned near the rear side of the base plate 60, a second member 762 journaled on a rotating shaft J2 fixedly positioned near the front side of the base plate 60, a solenoid 763 configured to allow a plunger 763a to slide vertically by electromagnetic force, and a transmission member 764 into which the plunger 763a of the solenoid 763 is fitted and which slides vertically in sync with the sliding movement of the plunger 763a.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state (see Figure 40 (a)), the first member 761 is supported in a forward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, the movable upper cover member 730 is positioned in an advanced position, the second member 762 is supported in a backward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in a retreated position.

In the open state of the upper variable prize winning device 700 (see FIG. 40(c)), the first member 761 is in the backward position, the movable upper lid member 730 is in the retreated position, and the second member 762 is in the forward position. , moving floor member 740 is placed in the forward position.

The first member 761 has a protrusion 761a that protrudes rightward from the right side surface and has a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 has a rear extension 764a that extends toward the protrusion 761a (the rear side in this embodiment) so as to be located below the protrusion 761a, and a bent extension 764b that extends toward the protrusion 761a above the rear extension 764a in parallel with the rear extension 764a and has a bent tip.

The second member 762 has a protrusion 762a projecting from the right side to the right with a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 is located on the protrusion 762a side (this embodiment In this embodiment, a rear extending portion 764c extends to the rear side), and a bent portion extends below the rear extending portion 764c to the projecting portion 762a side parallel to the rear extending portion 764c and has a bent tip. An extension portion 764d.

The solenoid 763 is configured to pull the plunger 763a upward when an electromagnetic force is generated (excited state), and when the electromagnetic force disappears (de-excited state), the force of the coil spring and gravity pull the plunger 763a downward.

The interlocking of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the solenoid 763 is in a non-excited state, the plunger 763a is positioned at the lower end position, and the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is positioned at the lower end position.

When the solenoid 763 is energized, the transmission member 764 is slid upward, but in the process of sliding, the protruding portion 762a is first pushed up onto the upper surface of the bent extension portion 764d, and the second The member 762 begins to rotate in the forward rotation direction (see FIG. 40(b)).

During this time, the rear extending portion 764a is similarly slid upward, but the gap between the rear extending portion 764a and the protruding portion 761a is only filled, and the protruding portion 761a absorbs the load from the rear extending portion 764a. Not given. In other words, the first member 761 still maintains the forward tilted posture.

When the transmission member 764 slides further upward from the state shown in FIG. 40(b), the first member 761 rotates in the rearward direction with the protrusion 761a pushed up against the upper surface of the rearward extension 764a, changing to a rearward tilted position (see FIG. 40(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 for the first member 761 to reach the backward position from the forward position is the same as the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 for the second member 762 to reach the forward position from the backward position.

Therefore, the second member 762 assumes a forward-leaning position before the first member 761 assumes a backward-leaning position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion 764d is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion 762a in the forward-leaning position of the second member 762, so that an upward load from the bent extension portion 764d to the second member 762 is prevented from being applied to the second member 762 after the second member 762 assumes the forward-leaning position.

Further, the rear surface of the portion extending downward on the rear end side of the bent extension portion 764d comes into contact with the protrusion portion 762a, and by restricting the diagonal forward and downward displacement, rotation of the second member 762 in the backward rotation direction is prevented. This prevents movement.

In this case, since the load applied to the transmission member 764 from the protrusion 762a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, the transmission member 764 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion 762a. The arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIGS. 40(a) to 40(c), the switching operation of the upper variable prize winning device 700 from the closed state to the open state is not one in which the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate at the same time. , there is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the movable floor member 740 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable top cover member 730 starts moving toward the retracted position. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a ball passes the front side of the movable top cover member 730 immediately after the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the retracted position, the movable floor member 740 is already positioned in the forward position at that time.

As a result, the movable floor member 740 is not placed in the forward position until the ball that has passed through the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 has passed, and the ball passes through the front side of the movable floor member 740 and is placed between the storage plate portions 715. It is possible to avoid a situation where the balls are not stored.

In addition to this, in this embodiment, due to the shape of the movable upper lid member 730, the period until the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate part 731 passes through the second specific prize opening 700a is designed to be longer. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls are not stored between the storage plate portions 715.

Figures 41(a) to 41(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 taken along line XLa-XLa in Figure 37(a). In Figures 41(a) to 41(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate 60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from an open state to a closed state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 41(a) to 41(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is illustrated as a side view viewed from the right, rather than as a cross-sectional view.

The interlocking movement of the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the solenoid 763 is energized and the plunger 763a is placed at the upper end position, the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is placed at the upper end position.

When the solenoid 763 is de-energized, the plunger 763a is moved downward by the biasing force of the coil spring provided in the solenoid 763 and gravity, and the transmission member 764 is slid downward, but the process of sliding movement is First, the first member 761 begins to rotate in the forward rotation direction in such a manner that the protruding portion 761a is pushed down by the lower surface of the bent extension portion 764b (see FIG. 41(b)).

During this time, the rear extending portion 764c is similarly slid downward, but the gap between the rear extending portion 764c and the protruding portion 762a is only filled, and the protruding portion 762a absorbs the load from the rear extending portion 764c. Not given. In other words, the second member 762 still maintains the forward tilted posture.

When the transmission member 764 further slides downward from the state shown in FIG. The posture changes to a reclined position (see FIG. 41(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 for the first member 761 to reach the forward-tilted position from the backward-tilted position is the same as the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 for the second member 762 to reach the backward-tilted position from the forward-tilted position.

Therefore, before the second member 762 assumes the backward position, the first member 761 assumes the forward position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension part 764b is set to a length that does not exceed the front end of the protrusion part 761a when the first member 761 is in the forward-folded position. This prevents a downward load from being applied to the first member 761 from the bent extension portion 764b after the first member 761 assumes the forward-folded position.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end of the bent extension 764b abuts against the protrusion 761a, restricting the displacement diagonally forward and upward, thereby preventing the first member 761 from rotating in the backward direction.

In this case, since the load applied to the transmission member 764 from the protrusion 761a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, the transmission member 764 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion 761a. The arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in Figures 41(a) to 41(c), when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 do not operate simultaneously, but there is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the movable upper lid member 730 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable floor member 740 starts moving toward the retreating position. As a result, regarding the ball that causes the movable upper lid member 730 to close (for example, the ball that passes through the second specific prize opening 700a after the specified number of balls), the time required for the ball to reach the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 is You can extend the time.

That is, since the time until the movable floor member 740 is moved to the retreat position and the balls begin to be discharged from the storage plate section 715 can be extended, the balls that trigger the closing of the movable upper cover member 730 can be detected by the opening of the detection sensor 750. The possibility of passing through section 751 can be increased.

In particular, since the ball that triggers the closing of the movable upper lid member 730 passes through the front side of the plate part 731, it is not affected by the inclination of the plate part 731 and flows down while maintaining a velocity in the left and right inward directions. There are many. Therefore, since it is possible to shorten the period until reaching the second specific winning opening 700a, it is possible for the player to reach the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate section 715 before the movable floor member 740 is displaced to the retreat position. can increase expectations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the distance from the second specific winning opening 700a to the detection sensor 750 is short, and the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 is positioned directly below the second specific winning opening 700a. This makes the player think that if the ball simply passes through the second specific winning opening 700a, it may pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750, increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the opening pattern of the second specific winning hole 700a opened in the first round in the jackpot game of this embodiment will be explained. In the description of FIG. 42, FIGS. 2, 4, and 37 to 41 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning hole 700a in the first special operation pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning hole 700a in the second special operation pattern. FIG. 42(c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning opening 700a in the third special operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines that a jackpot has been awarded, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the special symbol variation display (symbol variation presentation) ends. The following describes the operation control of the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 that is performed when a jackpot game is awarded.

In addition, in Figures 42(a) to 42(c), "top open, bottom closed" means a state in which the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the advanced position, and "top closed, bottom open" means a state in which the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the advanced position and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the retracted position. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing of the displacement of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 is shifted, but in Figures 42(a) to 42(c), this is illustrated in a simplified manner that does not express the shift in timing.

First, a case where the operation of the first special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on a first special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to move the upper lid member until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the solenoid 730 in the forward position, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of the round game R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member 730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening 700a, thereby causing the movable upper cover member 730 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the first special operation pattern, the movable floor member 740 is always kept in the forward position during the first round of round play R, so that, as described above with reference to FIG. 38, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port 700a, a number of balls greater than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate sections 715 (four in this embodiment) can be made to flow down toward the storage plate section 715. This makes it easy to create cases where balls pass through the opening 751.

When the first round of round play R ends, the timer means controls the solenoid 763 to hold the movable upper cover member 730 in the forward position until the first interval time Int1 between rounds (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, and starts the second round of round play R after the first interval time Int1 has elapsed.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds should be set to a time sufficient for the ball that passed the front side of the movable top cover member 730 immediately before the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the forward position to pass the front side of the movable floor member 740, and in this embodiment is set to approximately 2 seconds.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the specific winning hole 65a is opened. Then, in the round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and the second round round game R ends.

After that, the round games R from the 3rd round to the maximum 15th round are repeated with a first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed.

Then, when the final round game R ends, the timer means keeps the specific winning opening 65a closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (for example, 11 seconds) have elapsed, and The jackpot game ends as .

Next, a case where the operation of the second special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on the second special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member 730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member 730 from the forward position to the backward position to open the second specific winning opening 700a, thereby causing the movable upper cover member 730 to operate for a long period of time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the second special operation pattern, in the round game R of the first round, the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retreat position and the movable floor member 740 is placed in the forward position, and the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position. The state in which the movable floor member 740 is disposed and the movable floor member 740 is disposed in the retracted position is switched approximately every second.

In other words, the state is switched approximately every second between a state in which balls can be guided toward the second specific winning opening 700a and balls can be stored in a position between the storage plates 715, and a state in which the guidance of balls toward the second specific winning opening 700a is restricted and balls stored in a position between the storage plates 715 are discharged.

In this embodiment, the ejection of each ball from the position between the storage plate parts 715 is completed in about 0.2 seconds. Therefore, while the movable floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position for about 1 second, a maximum of five balls can flow down the front side of the movable floor member 740 from the positions between the storage plate portions 715. Furthermore, considering the ball firing interval (in this embodiment, 0.6 second intervals) allowed for the pachinko machine 10, it is possible that the movable upper lid member 730 The number of balls passing in front of the ball is about three at most.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, in the process of passing a prescribed number of balls to the second specific winning opening 700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 can be discharged. be done. In addition, the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plate parts 715 is greater than the number of balls that can be guided to the gap between the storage plate parts 715 per unit time (about 1 second). , it is possible to configure a state in which more balls are stored in the gaps between the storage plate parts 715 than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plate parts 715. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is difficult to cause the ball to pass through the opening 751.

On the other hand, because the opening 751 does not appear to be closed, the player is made to believe that there is a rare possibility that the ball may enter the opening 751 due to the irregular flow of the ball or the tilt of the pachinko machine 10 when it is installed, and this can increase the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700.

Note that the control after the first round of play R is completed is the same as when operating with the first special operation pattern, so a description will be omitted.

Next, a case where the operation of the third special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on the third special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member 730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means, and to displace the movable upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position and open the second specific winning opening 700a. The movable upper lid member 730 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning hole 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the third special operation pattern, in the first round round game R, the movable upper lid member 730 is maintained at the backward position and the movable floor member 740 is maintained at the forward position for about 1 second, and the movable upper lid member 730 is maintained at the forward position. , and a state in which the movable floor member 740 is maintained at the retreated position for about 0.2 seconds are alternately switched.

In other words, a state in which the ball can be guided toward the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball can be stored in a position between the storage plates 715 is maintained for approximately 1 second, and a state in which the guidance of the ball toward the second specific winning opening 700a is restricted and the ball stored in a position between the storage plates 715 is discharged is maintained for approximately 0.2 seconds, are alternately repeated. According to this time setting, the state in which the movable upper cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position can be created a maximum of approximately 25 times during the first round of play.

In this embodiment, the discharge of a ball from a position between the storage plates 715 is completed in approximately 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the moving floor member 740 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 0.2 seconds, a maximum of one ball can flow down the front side of the moving floor member 740 from a position between the storage plates 715. In addition, considering the ball launch interval permitted by the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the number of balls passing the front side of the moving upper cover member 730 while the moving upper cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position for 1 second is at most about three.

Therefore, as described above with reference to Figure 39, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port 700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plate sections 715 can be discharged.

In addition, since the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plates 715 per second unit time (approximately 0.2 seconds) is smaller than the number of balls that can be guided into the gap between the storage plates 715 per unit time (approximately 1 second), it is easier to create a state in which more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plates 715 (four in this embodiment) are stored in the gap between the storage plates 715 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern. Therefore, it is easier to cause the balls to pass through the opening 751 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern.

On the other hand, the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plates 715 are discharged at a rate of one each time the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are displaced (at approximately 1.2 second intervals). Therefore, depending on the frequency with which the balls pass in front of the movable top cover member 730 and the time interval, it is possible that the first round of play R will end without the ball passing through the opening 751.

According to the third special operation pattern in this embodiment, by increasing the frequency at which the ball passes the front side of the movable upper lid member 730, the possibility that the ball passes through the opening 751 can be increased, so one round Continuously shoot the ball in the game in the eye round game R (without stopping the ball shooting, shoot the ball at the ball shooting interval allowed by the pachinko machine 10 (in this embodiment, 0.6 second intervals) It is easy to use a continuous firing mode.

This makes it easier to prevent players from taking single shots (a technique in which the firing of balls is intentionally stopped and balls are fired one at a time with an interval of 0.6 seconds or more as a technical intervention to obtain benefits such as excess prize balls), thereby making it possible to standardize the benefits that players can obtain regardless of their level of experience.

Note that the control after the first round round game R is completed is the same as that in the case of operating in the first special operation pattern, so a description thereof will be omitted.

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 within the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. 43(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the fixed value data described above. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the first winning type selection table 202b and the second winning random number table 202c will be described later.

Figure 43(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, Figure 43(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1, and Figure 43(d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2.

In the first winning random number table 202a, as shown in FIG. 43(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a game ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b is Whether the value of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 for determining whether or not it is a jackpot and the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a game ball enters the second winning hole 640 is a jackpot. This table is set with a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 for determining whether or not.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 determines a win in the special symbol 1 lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b. This is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set. In the special symbol 1 lottery, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, if it is determined that the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C3 is a value of "1 to 319", it is determined that the win is a loss.

On the other hand, the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 is a table in which a random number value (judgment value) that is judged as a win in the lottery for special pattern 2 based on the ball entering the second winning port 640 is set, as shown in FIG. 43(d). In the lottery for special pattern 2, it is judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is judged as a big win. It is also judged whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is judged as a small win. Otherwise, if it is judged as "319", it is judged as a miss.

In this way, the first winning random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter with a range of 0 to 319. In this first winning random number counter C3, when the special symbol 1 is selected based on the ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b, the random number value that results in a jackpot for special symbol 1 is 1, and since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 320, the probability of a jackpot for special symbol 1 is 1/320.

On the other hand, when the special symbol 2 is drawn based on the ball entering the second prize opening 640, the random number of the special symbol 2 that becomes a jackpot is one, and among the total number of random numbers of 320, there is only one random number that becomes a jackpot. Since the total number of numbers is 1, the probability of special symbol 2 becoming a jackpot is "1/320". Furthermore, since the total number of random numbers that result in a small hit is 318, the probability that the special symbol 2 results in a small win is "318/320".

The above description of the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponds to the low probability state in this embodiment. In the high probability state, in addition to "0", if the obtained value of the first random number counter C3 is "1 to 9", it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability that special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 will be a jackpot in the high probability state is "1/32".

FIG. 44(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter C2 in the first winning type selection table 202b and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second win random number counter C4 in the 2 win random number table 202c and the win in the normal symbol.

The first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 44(a)) is a data table in which judgment values for determining the jackpot type are stored, and the judgment value of the first winning type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. , and the type of winning hole that triggered the lottery of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when it is determined that a special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the starting prize is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b, and the first The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 1 (drawing based on a ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 19" is associated with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 44(a)).

When jackpot A is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the third operation pattern continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to not just a probability change, but a special probability change (a special symbol probability change accompanied by frequent small wins). Therefore, before winning the next jackpot, the player can place a ball into the special winning hole 65a opened by a small win, and can receive a payout of many prize balls.

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operating pattern, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

A situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round is a situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the ball being launched to the upper variable prize winning device 700 satisfactorily. It is assumed that the game has ended.

This situation may occur due to ball jamming in the ball launching unit 112a or in the game area. In contrast, in this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined, the jackpot game is controlled so that it does not start until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the jackpot game starts without noticing the ball jam.

After a special jackpot is determined, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is preferably designed to prevent the player from being confused as to whether to aim at the through gates 66, 67 or the upper variable winning device 700. For example, immediately after a jackpot is determined, arrows pointing to the through gates 66, 67 and the upper variable winning device 700 may be displayed to encourage the player to aim, and after the jackpot game has started, the arrows pointing to the through gates 66, 67 may be removed, leaving only the arrow pointing to the upper variable winning device 700. This allows for a smooth game flow in which the ball passes through the through gates 66, 67 and then enters the upper variable winning device 700.

In addition, when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the ball fired toward the upper variable winning device 700 is flown left and right along the slope of the movable upper lid member 730, flows through the gaming area 301, and enters the through gate. It will pass through 66 and 67.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 49" is associated with and defined as jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 44(a)).

When a jackpot B is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to the probability change. Therefore, the player cannot basically receive a large number of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the player must proceed with the game in order to win the next jackpot in a short time. .

Note that if the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the 8th round jackpot game (special game) will be a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a will be changed to the The state set in the operation pattern 2 continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with the big winning type C (see 202b3 in FIG. 44(a)).

When a jackpot C is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the second special operation pattern, and it is difficult for the ball to pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. Therefore, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operation pattern, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to time saving. Therefore, the player cannot basically receive a large number of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the player must proceed with the game in order to win the next jackpot in a short time. .

In addition, because the operating pattern of the electric device 640a is the same as the game state after the big win B, it is not possible to determine whether the currently executing game state is a high probability state or a low probability state from the operating mode of the electric device 640a. Therefore, if the currently executing game state is not notified as to whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, a game mode can be configured in which the player is forced to guess. On the other hand, it is also possible to notify as to whether the currently executing game state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while there is a 50% chance of a 4-round jackpot, so you basically cannot expect to win a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, a 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, so you can start shooting balls earlier in order to try to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, in the case of a jackpot in the special symbol 2 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 640), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 29", the jackpot a is defined in correspondence (see 202b4 in FIG. 44(a)).

When jackpot a is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, just as in the case of jackpot A, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the third operation pattern (corresponding to a special probability change) continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "30 to 49" is associated with and defined as a jackpot b (see 202b5 in FIG. 44(a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operating pattern, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

In the case of jackpot b, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing 8 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to (corresponding to the probability change) continues until the next jackpot is won.

A jackpot c is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 44(a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a will be set to the second operating pattern, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

In the case of jackpot c, the operation pattern of the upper variable prize winning device 700 in the first round is set as the third special operation pattern, and depending on the player's ball launch mode, the ball hits the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. A case in which the ball passes through the opening 751 and a case in which the ball does not pass through the opening 751 are formed.

If the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to a high probability state) continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to the time-saving period) continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

In either case, the operating pattern of the electric role device 640a is the same as the second operating pattern, so it is not possible to determine whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state from the operating state of the electric role device 640a. Therefore, if the currently active game state is not notified as to whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, a game mode can be configured in which the player is forced to guess.

On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the gaming state currently being executed is a high probability state or a low probability state. In fact, whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state or a low probability state depends on whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, which allows this, the player is often able to grasp whether the currently executed gaming state is a high-probability state or a low-probability state.

Therefore, if you design a fluctuating effect for the third symbol on the premise that the player does not know whether the current gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state, it is necessary to It is preferable to provide a device to make the portion 751 difficult to see or to draw the eye away from the opening portion 751.

For example, as a way to make the opening 751 difficult to see, the light intensity of the irradiation means that irradiates the upper variable winning device 700 with light may be reduced especially near the opening 751, or it may be made extremely strong near the opening 751 to create a dazzling effect. The visibility of the opening 751 itself may be reduced by It may be possible to lower the value of the target.

In the case of a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 2 (a drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640), there is a 30% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, but a 50% chance of winning a 4-round jackpot, so you basically cannot expect to win a large number of prize balls.

On the other hand, the possibility of winning a 15-round jackpot is set higher than when special symbol 1 is drawn. Therefore, compared to when special symbol 1 is drawn, when special symbol 2 is drawn, the expectation that a 15-round jackpot may be won can be increased.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 44(b)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 44(b)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 239" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 44(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and the second winning random number table 202c are referenced to determine whether or not a normal symbol has been won.

And even in a state where the probability of a normal symbol is high, and even in a state where the probability of a normal symbol is low, the normal symbol will frequently win. Therefore, it is possible to create a state where the electric device 640a operates frequently.

Next, we will explain the ending presentation in this embodiment. First, we will explain the upper tray 17 of the pachinko machine 10 and the group of operation buttons located near the upper tray 17.

Figure 45 is a top view of the front frame 14 and outer frame 11. In the front frame 14, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4).

A frame button 22 is also provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is generally operated by the player, for example, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or to change the content of the Super Reach performance, but in this embodiment, it is used to execute a specific performance by operating it during a jackpot game (during a jackpot performance), and details will be described later.

Further, on the upper surface of the upper tray 17, a second ball rental operation section 40b having the same function as the above-mentioned ball rental operation section 40 is arranged. The second ball rental operation section 40b is provided with a second frequency display section 41b, a second ball rental button 42b, and a second return button 43b.

When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 and the second ball lending operation unit 40b is operated, balls are lent in accordance with the operation.

Specifically, the second frequency display section 41b is an area where information on the remaining amount of the card or the like is displayed, and a built-in LED lights up to display the remaining amount in numbers as the remaining amount information. The second ball rental button 42b is operated to obtain a rental ball based on information recorded on a card, etc. (recording medium), and as long as there is a balance on the card, etc., the rental ball will be transferred to the upper tray 17. is supplied to The second return button 43b is operated when requesting the return of a card or the like inserted into the card unit.

Note that in a pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which balls are lent directly from a ball lending device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, the second ball lending operation section 40b is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the ball operating section 40b so that the component configuration may be the same. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be used in common.

Further, a ball removal operation section 44 is arranged on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 to the left of the second ball lending operation section 40b. By pushing and operating the ball removal operation part 44, the balls can be caused to flow down from the upper tray 17 toward the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1), so the player can shoot all the balls stored in the upper tray 17. You can end the game at any time.

Further, a direction operation section 45 is disposed on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 to the right of the frame button 22. The direction operation section 45 has four operation sections that can be independently operated and are arranged in positions corresponding to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from above. When it is possible to make adjustments, adjust the light emission intensity of a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 or a light emitting means such as an LED, or switch the type of performance related to the game (for example, variable performance) in multiple ways. It is operated by a player or the like when switching between the two.

Here, with reference to FIG. 46, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 46 is a diagram for explaining the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 46(a) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen of the variable effect. FIG. 46(b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), attached designs imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the attached symbol, and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols line up is performed, and the jackpot occurs after the variable display has ended. On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for the special symbols is a miss, a variable display in which the same main symbols do not line up is performed.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd number "7" is added are aligned. In addition, in the case of "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot B" (see Figure 44), a fluctuating display in which the main symbols with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" added except "7" are aligned. If it is "Jackpot C" or "Jackpot C" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number do not line up. Note that in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a continuous notice performance may be performed to suggest (predict) that there is a high possibility of a special symbol jackpot. In that case, when the variable display is performed, a so-called "chance eye" is always displayed, which is a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, the combination of main symbols is "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the activated line L1).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the other part being the main display area Dm. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each play, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. When the third symbols stop, if they line up on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is provided in a horizontally elongated manner above the main display area Dm, and is further equally divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Among these, the small area Ds1 is the number of balls that have not been changed (reserved balls) among the balls entered into the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640. This is an area for displaying numbers, and small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying preview effect images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 46(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third design are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a video (not shown) is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot. In the small area Ds2 in the center, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

If a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "straw hat" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

Similarly, if a ball enters the second winning slot 640 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that enter is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "star-shaped" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b is displayed horizontally in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 46(b)), whereas the number of reserved balls when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is displayed horizontally in the lower half of the small area Ds1.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b and the balls entering the second winning slot 640 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot performance performed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 47(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect, and FIG. 47(c) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect. ), FIG. 47(d), and FIG. 47(e) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect that is part of the jackpot effect.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, or the third winning hole 64b (starting winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger, and then a special symbol lottery is performed. A variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 A variable display of the third symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of 37.

When the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started first, and then after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 60 seconds) has passed, the display switches to a medium-speed variable display of the third symbol, and then to a low-speed variable display of the third symbol. If the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, a stop display of the same numbered main symbol (third symbol) is displayed, the variable performance ends, and then the jackpot performance starts. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a stop display of the same numbered main symbol (third symbol) is displayed, the variable performance ends, and if there is a pending start winning, the next special symbol is drawn and the next variable performance starts.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the big win effect is divided into three periods: a period during which a fanfare effect is performed, a period during which a round effect is performed, and a period during which an ending effect is performed.

The fanfare performance notifies the player that the pachinko machine 10 will now move to a special gaming state and that the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. This is a performance to increase expectations, and the round performance notifies the player of the number of rounds that are about to start and urges the player to fire the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a, This is a performance to notify that a large number of prize balls will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), in the ending performance, the player is notified of the end of the special gaming state, and the gaming value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (the magnitude of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the next jackpot An ending display effect is executed to inform the player whether or not a large number of prize balls can be expected to be paid out by the time the player obtains the winning ball, and whether or not the player can expect to pay out a large number of prize balls by the time the player obtains the winning ball, and whether or not the player can expect to pay out a large number of prize balls by the time the player obtains the winning ball, and whether or not the player can expect to pay out a large number of prize balls by the time the player obtains the winning ball.

In addition, depending on the situation, the ending effect may include a company name display effect that announces the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10, and the return of cards with remaining balance (recording media, coins, etc.) at the end of the game or when leaving the seat. A display effect to prevent forgetting the card is executed, which will be described in detail later.

When a jackpot effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. A fanfare command is sent to device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a fanfare performance is started following the fluctuation performance.

Next, at the same time as the fanfare effect ends, the main control device 110 sends a round number command indicating the first round to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, following the fanfare effect, a round effect corresponding to the first round starts. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, that state continues until the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a is repeated a number of times according to the type of jackpot (up to 15 rounds, see FIG. 44(a)).

After the first round begins and the second specific winning port 700a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won), the second specific winning port 700a is closed and the first round ends. Then, the second round starts immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 42), and a round number command indicating the second round is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, following the round presentation corresponding to the first round, the round presentation corresponding to the second round begins.

After the second round starts and the specific winning hole 65a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won), the specific winning hole 65a closes and the second round ends. Then, immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 42), the third round begins, and a round number command indicating the third round is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, following the round presentation corresponding to the second round, the round presentation corresponding to the third round begins.

When the third round begins, the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is controlled in the same way as in the second round. After that, every time a new round begins, a round number command indicating a new round number is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a is controlled. This causes each round performance to be executed in order from the first round to the final round (maximum 15 rounds).

Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a of the final round is completed. As a result, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, in the ending performance, the end of the special gaming state is notified to the player, and in the ending display performance, the gaming value (the magnitude of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the next jackpot The player is informed of whether or not he can expect to pay out a large amount of prize balls by the time he obtains the ball, and whether or not he can expect to pay out a large number of prize balls by the time he obtains the ball, and for a short period of time in the case of a normal symbol.

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(c), a prize ball display indicating the number of prize balls paid out in the jackpot game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. 801 is displayed, and an identification display 802 indicating "100 chances" is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. Further, a reliability display 803 indicating the message "Don't give up yet" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

The time display 811 serves to notify the user of the end of the ending performance (including the case where only the ending display performance is performed), and the right edge moves from the appropriate timing towards the end position 812, but details will be given later.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "Jackpot C" (see FIG. 44), or when the lottery result is "Jackpot C" and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 is displayed during a jackpot game. This is displayed when the ball does not pass through (see FIG. 37), and the identification display 802 indicates that the electric accessory 640a is in the second operation pattern from after the jackpot ends until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times. This means that the state where the operation is controlled continues, and the probability of winning the jackpot with the special symbol is low (1/320 in this embodiment).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 allows the player to recognize that there is a small possibility of hitting the jackpot next time.

In other words, by visually checking the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, which motivates the player to continue playing.

In addition, in the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(d), a prize ball display 801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an identification display 802 showing the content "Probability fluctuation entry" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, a reliability display 803 showing the content "High expectation" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (see Figure 44). The identification display 802 indicates that from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot for the special symbol, the electric device 640a will continue to be controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, and the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is high (1 in 32 in this embodiment).

The identification display 802, reliability display 803, and time display 811 on this screen are also displayed when the lottery result is "jackpot c" and the ball passes through the opening 751 (see FIG. 37) of the detection sensor 750 during jackpot play. In that case, the prize ball display 801 is different from the value shown in FIG. 47(d) and is set to "600" as shown in FIG. 47(c).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the player can recognize from the reliability display 803 that he can expect a big hit next time.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display performance on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation of the next jackpot, and therefore can be motivated to continue playing the game.

The contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to the above, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the identification display 802 may display "Next big win guaranteed," and the reliability display 803 may display "More winning balls in preparation."

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(e), a prize ball display 801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an identification display 802 showing the content "Rush Start" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Also, a reliability display 803 showing the content "Super High Expectations" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" (see Figure 44). Until the next jackpot occurs, the state in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the third operation pattern continues, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high (1/32 in this embodiment). means.

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player does not understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 allows the player to not only expect to win the jackpot next time, but also to earn even more profits. The player can recognize this fact.

In other words, by visually viewing the ending display presentation on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for the next big win, as well as a sense of anticipation for further profits (for example, the possibility of an increase in prize balls through winning small wins before the next big win is achieved), which can motivate the player to continue playing.

In this way, the identification display 802 is configured to change its display in response to the game state after the big win game ends, and the player can predict the profits he or she will get after the big win game ends by visually checking the ending display performance.

Note that the contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to these, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, instead of "rush rush", it may be "super certain variable rush", "small hit rush rush", or a unique name such as "super advantageous mode" may be displayed.

Next, the company name display performance and the card forgetting prevention display performance in the ending performance will be explained. In the ending performance in the example shown in FIG. 47(b), a company name display command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in time with the ending display performance ending. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, the company name display performance starts following the ending display performance.

Next, at the same time as the company name display performance ends, the main control device 110 sends a card forget prevention display command to the voice lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, the card forget prevention display performance starts following the company name display performance.

The ending effect ends when the card forgetting prevention display effect ends. After the ending performance ends, if there is a pending starting prize, the next special symbol will be drawn and the next variable performance will start. On the other hand, if there is no pending starting prize (if the number of pending balls is 0), a variable standby screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Figure 48(a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and Figure 48(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. Figures 48(a) and 48(b) explain the case where the company name display effect is executed following the ending display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed following the company name display effect (see Figure 47(b)).

In the example shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the execution time of the ending effect is divided equally between the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect, and the execution time of the ending effect is 15 minutes. Set to seconds. In this case, each of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance is allocated for 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in the company name display performance, the name of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 (Company A) is displayed as a specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48(b), when the display switches to the anti-forgetting-of-card display effect, a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's insertion port is displayed as a specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a comment saying "Please be careful not to forget to take your card" is displayed below it.

In the ending performance in the example shown in Figures 48(a) and 48(b), after the ending display performance, which runs for 5 seconds, ends, the company name display performance is executed for 5 seconds, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed for 5 seconds, so there is a gap of 10 seconds from the end of the ending display performance to the start of the next variable performance. In this embodiment, it is designed to make effective use of that free time.

As shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), during the execution of the company name display effect and the card forget prevention display effect, the timer is displayed near the lower end of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. A time display 811 in which the right tip moves to the right as time passes is displayed, and a frame button display 813 schematically showing the frame button 22 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the frame button display 813 schematically shows the frame button 22. On the right side of the button display 813, scales are arranged vertically, indicating the current luminous intensity (e.g., the luminous intensity of the LEDs (for example, the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the indicator lamps 34 (see FIG. 1)) installed in the pachinko machine 10. A scale that displays the setting value (emission intensity of the means, brightness of the screen of the third symbol display device 81) so that the player can understand it (displays that it is the second setting value from the top out of five levels) A display 814 is displayed, and below the frame button display 813 and the scale display 814, a caution comment display 815 is displayed that reads "Be careful of prolonged exposure to light."

In this embodiment, during the ending performance, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the operation of pressing the frame button 22 is controlled to be valid. In other words, during the ending performance, when the frame button display 813 is not displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the operation of the frame button 22 is invalid.

On the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the frame button display 813 and scale display 814 are hidden halfway through the card forgetting prevention display performance (at the point when 4 seconds remain), but the specific display 810, time display 811, and warning comment display 815 continue to be displayed until the card forgetting prevention display performance ends.

Here, even if a game ball enters the first winning slot 64, the second winning slot 640, or the third winning slot 64b, the variation of the special symbols is stopped while the ending performance is being performed, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbols does not decrease. Therefore, even if a ball enters the first winning slot 64, the second winning slot 640, or the third winning slot 64b when the number of reserved balls for the special symbols is full, the player cannot receive a lottery for the special symbols. On the other hand, if the ending performance has ended, the variation of the special symbols begins, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbols decreases from full, and the player is more likely to receive a lottery for the special symbols by placing a ball in the starting slot.

Further, during the jackpot game including the ending performance, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the normal operation pattern. In this embodiment, since the first operation pattern (see FIG. 31(a)) is used, the game ball is unlikely to be picked up by the slide member 450. On the other hand, once the ending performance is finished, the electric accessory 640a is driven in an operation pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot, so the game ball is more likely to be picked up by the slide member 450, so the game ball can win the second prize. It becomes easier for the ball to enter the opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

For these reasons, after a round of play has finished, players tend to think that they will incur less loss if they start firing balls after the ending performance has ended, but with conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to tell when the ending performance would end. That is, because the game result is indicated by the ending display performance, players tend to think that the variable performance will start immediately, and they think that they will fire the balls as soon as the screen switches from the ending display performance, but in fact there may be an ending performance remaining for the company name display performance or the card forget prevention display performance, and by the time the player realizes this, the balls have already been fired, which can leave the player dissatisfied with having wasted several balls by firing during the ending performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the movement mode of the time display 811 is set such that the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 at the same time as the ending effect ends. That is, the right end of the time display 811 moves to the right as time passes, and the variable performance starts after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812, so the length of the ending performance and the ending performance change. Since it is possible to easily know when the game ends, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where a ball is fired during the ending performance.

The manner in which the time display 811 moves is not limited in any way, but in this embodiment, the display manner of the time display 811 and the end position 812 is designed with the length between the left end of the time display 811 and the end position 812 as a guideline for a length of 10 seconds. If there are 10 seconds or more remaining until the end of the ending performance when the ending performance starts, the right end of the time display 811 is set to remain stopped or to move at an extremely slow speed until there are approximately 10 seconds remaining until the end of the ending performance, at which point the right end of the time display 811 is set to start moving at a constant speed to the right as time passes.

On the other hand, if there are less than 10 seconds left until the end of the ending performance when the ending performance starts, the right end of the time display 811 starts moving immediately. In this case, the movement speed of the time display 811 is set to a speed at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 simultaneously with the end of the ending performance (i.e., if there are 5 seconds left until the end of the ending performance, the speed is set to twice the speed at which it would take 10 seconds to move to the end position 812).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the characters "GO" indicating the start of launching the game ball are always displayed above the terminal position 812. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 or several seconds before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 (for example, when the fired ball reaches the through gates 66 and 67 The word "GO" may be displayed an average number of seconds before the start. In this case, the characters "GO" may be displayed from a hidden state, or "GO" may be displayed from a semi-transparent state to a materialized state.

In this case, by starting to launch the ball with the word "GO" displayed as a landmark, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from passing through the through gates 66 and 67 before the ending effect ends. Therefore, the player does not need to visually follow the moving time display 811. Thereby, the burden on the player can be reduced.

Note that the manner in which the letters "GO" are displayed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be replaced with a comment such as "Start launching the ball" or "Start launching when the bar reaches". Furthermore, the size of the letters "GO" does not always need to be the same. For example, the character "GO" may gradually become larger as the right end of the time display 811 moves. In this case, the maximum size of the letters "GO" is displayed semitransparently, and the timing when the gradually increasing size of the letters "GO" matches the maximum size shown semitransparently is shown. , the right end of the time display 811 may be controlled to match the timing at which it reaches the terminal position 812.

In the state shown in Figure 48, if the player does not operate the frame button 22, after the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 during the card forgetting prevention display performance shown in Figure 48 (b), the screen of the third pattern display device 81 will switch to the screen shown in Figure 46 (b), and the variable performance will begin.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, this generally indicates that the frame button 22 can be operated. The following describes how the screen of the third pattern display device 81 changes when the player operates the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 48.

FIG. 49(a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forget prevention display performance displayed in the ending performance, and FIG. 49(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen immediately after the end of the ending performance.

Figure 49 (a) illustrates the screen of the third pattern display device 81 that is switched when the player operates the frame button 22 (see Figure 45) in the state shown in Figure 48 (b) (state in which the frame button display 813 is displayed).

When the frame button 22 is operated to switch the screen of the third pattern display device 81 to the state shown in Figure 49 (a), just as when the frame button 22 is not operated, the right end of the time display 811 moves to the right over time, and after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, the screen of the third pattern display device 81 switches to the screen shown in Figure 49 (b), and the variable performance begins.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the player operates the frame button 22, the specific display 810, which is a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's slot and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take your card", is moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the display mode is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the distinctiveness of the specific display 810, making it easier to direct the player's attention to parts other than the specific display 810.

A directional control display 816 that shows the directional control unit 45 is displayed near the center of the screen, and to the left of the directional control display 816, a vertical scale display 817 is displayed with scales lined up and down to show the current light emission intensity setting value so that the player can grasp it (displays that the setting is the second setting value from the top out of five levels), and below the directional control display 816, a horizontal scale display 818 is displayed with scales lined up left and right to show the current volume setting value so that the player can grasp it (displays that the setting is the third setting value from the top (right) out of five levels).

Further, below the caution comment display 815, a second caution comment display 819 with the content "Please be careful with long-term sound" is displayed. The caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are displayed in correspondence with the types of objects for which the player can check the setting values.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the vertical scale display 817 can be changed by operating the up and down buttons of the directional operation unit 45. In other words, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand how to operate.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the direction operation section display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the set value of the horizontal scale display 818 can be changed by operating the left and right buttons of the direction operation section 45. can do. That is, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the set value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand the operating method.

In addition, the operation of the directional operation unit 45 is controlled to be invalid when the directional operation unit display 816 is not displayed on the display screen. This allows the player to know whether the current operation of the directional operation unit 45 is valid or invalid simply by checking whether the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed or not.

A display resembling a light bulb is provided near the end of the vertical scale display 817, allowing the player to easily understand that the vertical scale display 817 can be used to set the light emission intensity (the light emission intensity of light-emitting means such as LEDs (e.g., the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34 (see FIG. 1)) arranged in the pachinko machine 10, and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device 81). In addition, a display resembling musical notes is provided near the end of the horizontal scale display 818, allowing the player to easily understand that the horizontal scale display 818 can be used to set the volume.

In the state shown in FIG. 49(b), unlike the state shown in FIG. 46(b), which is considered to be the state in which the special pattern variation performance starts, the directional operation unit display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display 818 are arranged in a reduced state in small area Ds3.

Therefore, even after the ending effect has ended and the variable effect has been executed, the direction control display 816 will continue to be displayed for a while, allowing you to change the light emission intensity setting or change the volume setting. can do.

In this embodiment, the direction operation unit display 816 is continuously displayed during the high-speed fluctuation display of the first fluctuation performance that starts after the end of the ending performance, and is hidden after the high-speed fluctuation display of that fluctuation performance ends. be done.

As a result, the direction operation section display 816 is hidden and the operation of the direction operation section 45 is invalidated, at least at the timing when the symbols are stopped and displayed and the variable performance ends. Since no operation occurs, it is possible to avoid a situation where the user concentrates on operating the direction operation section 45 and misses the stop display of the symbol.

During high-speed fluctuations, there will be spaces in the reserved balls, so the player will start firing balls to enter the lottery for the special symbol, but since the directional control unit 45 can be operated with one hand, it is possible to avoid impeding the firing of the balls. While the player has fired several balls (after going through the firing state), the directional control unit display 816 is hidden.

From the second change performance that starts after the ending performance ends, the direction operation unit display 816 is hidden. In other words, the screen of the third pattern display device 81 is in the state shown in Figure 46 (b), and the change performance is executed.

Figure 50 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the ending effects and the jackpot type in the special pattern. As shown in Figure 50, in this embodiment, the ending display effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type (indicated by a circle in Figure 50).

In addition, the company name display effect is executed when the game state to be entered after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, so that players who see the company name display effect can have a sense of anticipation for the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the company name display effect is executed in the ending effect of "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" which is a jackpot type that enters a special probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game (indicated by ○ in FIG. 50), and other The company name display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game of the jackpot type (indicated by x in FIG. 50).

The conditions for executing the company name display effect correspond to the game state that is entered after the end of a jackpot game, and do not correspond to the number of payouts in the jackpot game. In other words, even if the number of payouts in the jackpot game is, for example, 0, the company name display effect will be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, since the number of payouts in the jackpot game of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is the maximum number among all jackpot types, when the company name display effect is executed, , it is possible to make the user feel that a jackpot game with the maximum number of payout prize balls has been executed.

The card forget prevention display effect is executed when the number of balls paid out in a jackpot game is equal to or greater than the number of balls for eight rounds (a specified number or more), allowing players who see the card forget prevention display effect to feel the joy of winning many prize balls.

In this embodiment, a card forgetting prevention display performance is executed in the ending performance of "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot a" which is a jackpot type of 15th round and "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot B" which is a jackpot type of 8th round. (Indicated by a circle in FIG. 50), the card forgetting prevention display effect is not executed in the ending effect of a jackpot game of other jackpot types (indicated by an x in FIG. 50).

In this way, in this embodiment, the content of the ending performance differs depending on the type of jackpot. The ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance each last for 5 seconds, so the execution time of the ending performance differs depending on the different combinations.

For example, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is performed over 15 seconds, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" is performed over 10 seconds, and the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" is performed over 5 seconds.

Due to these circumstances, the player may be confused about the timing of firing the ball when the ending effect ends; however, in this embodiment, the time display 811 (see FIG. 48) indicates the end of the ending effect. It is now possible to determine the point in time.

In other words, even if the duration of the ending performance is different, the speed at which the right end of the time display 811 moves (or the starting point of the movement of the time display 811 is changed) is changed so that the ending performance ends when the time display 811 reaches the end position 812, and by visually checking the time display 811, the player will not be confused about the timing of firing the ball. This reduces the burden on the player when playing the game.

It should be noted that the execution time of the ending performance is stipulated and unchanging depending on the type of jackpot, and the content during the ending performance is variable. For example, even if the ending performance is 15 seconds in execution time, if a certain condition is met (or randomly), the ending display performance will be set to 10 seconds, and the remaining 5 seconds will be used to display the company name and prevent card forgetting. You may also execute the following. In particular, when the player hits the jackpot for the first time, the player's interest can be increased by setting the ending display performance to be longer.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the bottom surface part 431a as a part that supports the ball flowing down the central channel 431 in the winning unit 400 is configured as a fixed plate part, but in the winning unit 2400 of the second embodiment In this case, the shape of the portion that supports the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is configured to change. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 and 52 are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). In FIG. 51, the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and in FIG. 52, the excited state (retracted open state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

The electric accessory 640a includes the same tilting member 470 as in the first embodiment, and a slide member 2450 partially different in shape from the slide member 450 in the first embodiment. Note that the slide member 2450 is only partially different in shape and operates in the same manner as the slide member 450 of the first embodiment.

The following describes the differences between the slide member 2450 and the slide member 450 in the first embodiment. The slide member 2450 includes a lower protrusion 2456 that protrudes downward from the front end of the central fixing part 454, and a front protrusion 2457 that protrudes forward from the front end of the central fixing part 454.

In the winning unit 400 in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it was possible to assemble the slide member 450 by covering it from above, in the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the front protruding portion 2457 has a shape that projects further forward than the rear end of the rear wall portion 434. Therefore, the assembly method cannot be used as is.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a continuous notch 2431d is formed in the bottom surface portion 431a, the locking plate portion 431b, and the rear wall portion 434 with a left-right width (in this embodiment, a left-right width of about 3 mm) centered on the cross section shown in Figure 51. That is, the notch 2431d is formed as an opening that cuts from the upper end to the lower end of the rear wall portion 434 and continues from that position to a midpoint on the bottom surface portion 431a and to a midpoint on the locking plate portion 431b.

By forming the horizontal width of the notch 2431d to be slightly longer than the horizontal width of the front protrusion 2457, in the arrangement shown in FIG. The arrangement of the notches 2431d of the member 2430 can be overlapped.

As a result, the front protrusion 2457 of the slide member 2450 can pass through the middle member 2430 in the vertical direction through the notch 2431d, making it possible to assemble the slide member 2450 by placing it over the middle member 2430 from above.

The lower protrusion 2456 is a part that protrudes to a position where it can abut against the rear surface of the locking plate portion 431b outside the notch 2431d, and is used to determine the front movement end of the slide member 2450.

In the first embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member 450 was determined at the position where the front end of the central fixing part 454 abutted against the rear surface of the locking plate part 431b (see FIG. 18), but in the second embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member 2450 is determined at the position where the front surface of the lower protrusion part 2456, which protrudes directly downward from the front end of the central fixing part 454, abuts against the rear surface of the locking plate part 431b, so that the front movement end position of the slide member 2450 in the second embodiment and the front movement end position of the slide member 450 in the first embodiment are the same position.

The front protrusion 2457 has a pair of ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b that protrude upward. The ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are arranged side by side in the front and rear at left and right positions that allow them to enter the notch 2431d, and the front ball interference protrusion 2458a is formed so that its upper end is lower than the rear ball interference protrusion 2458b.

The front-to-rear inclination angle of the straight line passing through the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458b and the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458a is formed to be the same as the front-to-rear inclination angle of the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a of the middle member 2430.

The protrusion length of the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b is such that when the slide member 2450 is placed in the forward position, it protrudes upward by 1 to 2 mm from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a ( (See Figure 51). As a result, when the slide member 2450 is placed in the retracted position, the upper end positions of the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b are cut inside 2431d (the upper and lower sides of the middle member 2430 (inside the wall thickness dimension in the direction).

As a result, when the slide member 2450 is positioned in the forward position, the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b can be brought into contact with the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431, whereas when the slide member 2450 is positioned in the backward position, the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is configured not to come into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b.

With the configuration described in FIGS. 51 and 52, the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment controls the flow rate of the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 in addition to the action produced by the winning unit 400 described in the first embodiment. It can be changed depending on the situation.

For example, when the slide member 2450 is in an excited state (retracted position), the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b retract to the outside of the central flow path 2431, so that the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is no longer decelerated by contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b.

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excitation state (retracted position), the ball riding on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7) , is pushed backward by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and is accelerated in the downstream direction (direction of arrow B).

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the entire area of the ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central channel 2431 , the velocity of the ball tends to increase.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2450 is in the de-energized state (advanced position), the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom part 431a toward the center flow path 2431, so that the center flow path The ball flowing down 2431 comes into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b and is decelerated. As a result, the deceleration effect of the ball flowing down in the central channel 2431 is more likely to occur compared to when the slide member 2450 is in the excited state (retracted position), and the flow mode of the ball can be stabilized (rectified). ).

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (forward position), the ball is placed on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7). Even if the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part 453 is displaced in the direction that creates a gap between it and the ball (the direction in which the ball is not pushed in, the direction of arrow F), the change in the falling speed of the ball will be Suppressed (not accelerated).

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 is changed to a non-excited state (forward position), the ball's flow speed tends to slow down in the entire area of the ball's flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the slide member 2450 is changed to an excited state (retracted position), the action of increasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431, whereas when the slide member 2450 is changed to a non-excited state (advance position), the action of decreasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431.

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the de-energized state (forward position) and when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the center The difference in time (difference in length) required for the ball to pass through the downstream path formed by the flow path 2431 can be increased.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the first embodiment, the internal flow path in the winning unit 400 is formed as a flow path extending forward and backward, but in the winning unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending left and right. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

53(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit 3400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 53(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit 3400b as another example of the winning unit 3400. be. In addition, in FIG. 53, the narrow diameter portion of the nail KG1 that is driven into the base plate 60 is illustrated by a solid line, and the bulging portion at the front end portion is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The winning unit 3400 is arranged, for example, downstream of the through gate 67 in the right-side play area 303 (see FIG. 2), and is configured as a unit that guides the flow of balls placed in the play area 301.

The winning unit 3400 includes a flow path configuration section 3410 formed from a plate-like member disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and a sliding member 3420 that is slidably displaced in the forward and backward directions so as to change state between a protruding state (corresponding to a forward position state) positioned inside the game area and a retracted state (corresponding to a retracted position state) retracted outside the game area.

In the slide member 3420, a first slide member 3421 near the ball inlet 3411 of the flow path forming section 3410 and a second slide member 3422 near the ball outlet 3412 are arranged separately, and these are integrated on the back side. By being configured as such, they can be slid and displaced in one piece.

That is, the second slide member 3422 goes into the extended state in synchronization with the first sliding member 3421 into the extended state, and the second slide member 3422 goes into the retracted state in synchronization with the first slide member 3421 into the retracted state. The slide member 3420 is integrally constructed so that.

We will explain the variations in the flow patterns of balls that enter the winning unit 3400. When the ball that entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, if the first slide member 3421 is in a retracted state, or if the first slide member 3421 is in a protruding state but is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be guided to the right (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), the ball is discharged from the mid-way discharge section 3413 to the outside (outside the left side) of the flow path configuration section 3410. In this embodiment, the ball that passes through the mid-way discharge section 3413 is configured to flow down by avoiding the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b.

On the other hand, when the ball that entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, the first slide member 3421 moves for a sufficient length (for example, 0.2 seconds) to guide the ball. ), the ball is guided into the flow path forming portion 3410.

The subsequent downward flow path of the ball changes depending on whether the second slide member 3422 is in a protruding state or in a retracted state at the timing when the ball guided inside the flow path forming part 3410 reaches the ball outlet 3412. do.

In other words, when the second slide member 3422 is in the protruding state, the ball passes directly above the second winning opening 640 while rolling on the upper surface of the second slide member 3422, and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b. In this embodiment, a detection sensor SE1 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is disposed upstream of the third winning opening 64b, and this detection sensor SE1 functions in the same way as the detection sensor 442 (see FIG. 7) in the first embodiment.

That is, when the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passing opening SE1a, the first winning opening switch is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (Fig. 4)), the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery.

On the other hand, if the second slide member 3422 is in a retracted state, the ball flows down toward the second winning opening 640. In this embodiment, a detection sensor SE2 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is disposed upstream of the second winning opening 640, and this detection sensor SE2 functions in the same way as the detection sensor 462 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 11).

In other words, when the detection sensor SE2 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE2a, the second winning port switch is turned on, and the main control device 110 (see Figure 4) is configured to draw a lottery for special pattern 2 as a result of the second winning port switch being turned on.

The second winning opening 640 is arranged directly below the second sliding member 3422, and the ball is placed in the second winning opening 640 easily, but the distance between the detection sensor SE2 and the nail KG1 directly above it The distance between the detection sensor SE2 and the flow path forming part 3410 on the opposite side (right side) is designed to be longer than the diameter of the sphere. That is, the second slide member 3422 is in the retracted state, and some of the balls that have flown down to the second winning opening 640 side are configured to be able to deviate from the second winning opening 640 and flow down.

Although not shown in the figure, a variable winning device 65 that opens and closes during small win play is disposed below the winning unit 3400, so that balls that flow below the winning unit 3400 (balls that do not enter either the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b and deviate, for example balls that flow toward the midway discharge section 3413) can be made to enter the specific winning port 65a that is opened during small win play.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), the formation of the intermediate discharge part 3413 may be omitted, and the general prize opening 63 may be arranged directly below the first slide member 3421. At this time, when the ball entering through the ball entrance 3411 reaches the position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, the first slide member 3421 may be in the retracted state or the first slide member 3421 may be in the protruded state. If the ball is switched to the retracted state in a very short time (shorter than the time required for the ball to be guided to the right side (for example, 0.2 seconds)), the ball will be placed in the general winning slot 63. Enter the ball.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(b), a detection sensor SE3 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed upstream of the general winning opening 63, and this detection sensor SE3 functions in the same manner as the detection sensor 435 (see FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. In other words, when the detection sensor SE3 detects that a ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE3a, neither the drawing of the special symbol nor the drawing of the normal symbol is performed, and the payout of the prize balls is performed.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), the winning ports may be arranged close to each other so that the balls ejected from the ball outlet 3412 to the left do not spill. In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(b), by arranging the third prize opening 64b close to the ball outlet 3412, the third winning opening 64b is arranged in the vicinity of the ball outlet 3412, so that the third winning opening 64b is arranged in the vicinity of the ball outlet 3412. ) The ball guided by the ball is surely entered into the third winning hole 64b.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a ball is guided to the outside (left) of the flow path configuration portion 3410 when the second slide member 3422 is in the protruding state and thus is unable to obtain a prize ball, as compared to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(a) in which the ball may deviate from the third winning opening 64b due to a collision with the nail KG1 causing a change in the flow path.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In the first embodiment, the electric accessory 640a in the winning unit 400 is composed of a plurality of members arranged apart from each other, and the interval between the timing when an upstream member hits the ball and the timing when the downstream member hits the ball is lengthened. Although the case has been described, in the winning unit 4400 of the fourth embodiment, the electric accessory 4420 is composed of a single member. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a winning unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 54(a), the electric accessory 4420 is in the forward position where it extends over the area (game area) between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The states are illustrated, and FIG. 54(b) shows a state in which the electric accessory 4420 is retracted from the gaming area and placed at the rear position.

In Figures 54(a) and 54(b), the outline of the part of the electric device 4420 that is located inside the winning unit 4400 in a position that blocks the passage of the ball is shown in solid lines and the inside is painted with a dotted pattern, while the outline of the part that is located in a position that does not block (allows) the passage of the ball is shown in imaginary lines.

In FIG. 54, the narrow diameter portion of the nail KG1 that is driven into the base plate 60 is shown by a solid line, and the swollen portion at the front end is shown by an imaginary line.

The winning unit 4400 is formed from a plate-like member disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and has a flow path configuration that constitutes a downward flow path of the ball. part 4410, and an electric accessory 4420 that is arranged inside the flow path forming part 4410 and changes the flow path of the ball.

The electric device 4420 is equipped with a rolling plate 4421 that has an upper surface for rolling the ball and is guided so that it can be displaced in the forward and backward directions, and an obstruction rod 4425 that protrudes from the downstream end of the rolling plate 4421 and is formed with enough strength to obstruct the flow of the ball.

In this embodiment, when a ball enters the flow path configuration section 4410 through the ball inlet 4411 formed at the upstream end of the flow path configuration section 4410 and reaches the position where the electric device 4420 is located, the ball's flow path differs depending on whether the electric device 4420 is located in the forward position or the backward position.

First, if the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the forward position when the ball that has entered the flow path forming part 4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory 4420 is placed (see FIG. 54(a)), the ball will roll. It rolls on the upper surface of the moving plate part 4421 and flows through the channel forming part 4410 to the left side (specific winning opening 65a side).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned at a distance of 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere from the front surface of the base plate 60. For example, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned so as not to obstruct the flow of the sphere downward through the flow path configuration portion 4410 by entering an opening formed in a plate-like member disposed between the flow path configuration portion 4410 and the glass unit 16 and covering the flow path configuration portion 4410 from the front side.

On the other hand, if the electric device 4420 is positioned in the retracted position when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section 4410 reaches the position where the electric device 4420 is positioned (see FIG. 54(b)), the ball flows down the front side of the rolling plate section 4421 and down the flow path configuration section 4410 (towards the second winning opening 640).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned in a front-rear position where it can collide with the ball flowing down the flow path configuration portion 4410 and obstruct (prevent) the passage of the ball. As a result, when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the retracted position (see FIG. 54(b)), even if a ball bounces off a plate-shaped portion of the flow path configuration portion 4410 (for example, the plate-shaped portion 4412 positioned below the rolling plate portion 4421) and flies toward the obstruction rod portion 4425, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing over (passing) the obstruction rod portion 4425 and flowing through the guide portion 4413 that guides the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In other words, the ball that flies toward the obstruction rod 4425 has its momentum to the left suppressed by the obstruction rod 4425, and either falls directly below and enters the second prize opening 640, or is bounced to the right. After that, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 4412 and enters the second winning hole 640.

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on whether the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward or backward position, the ball that enters the ball entrance 4411 will either pass downward through the electric device 4420 and roll down the plate-shaped portion 4412, or pass to the left through the electric device 4420 and roll down the guide portion 4413.

One of the purposes of forming the paths and winning openings 65a, 640 like the winning unit 4400 is to control the operation of the electric device 4420 so that it can be switched between a state in which the majority of balls that enter the ball entrance 4411 are guided to the specific winning opening 65a (guiding state) and a state in which the majority of balls that enter the ball entrance 4411 are not guided to the specific winning opening 65a (non-guiding state).

This control can be achieved by switching the operating pattern (opening/closing length) of the electric accessory 4420, but if the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion 4421 of the electric accessory 4420 is short, the non-guiding state is established. Also, a situation where the ball is guided to the specific winning hole 65a side is likely to occur.

For example, even if the time for which the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position is set to be shorter than the time required for a ball to pass through the rolling plate section 4421 several seconds after the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position, if the ball arrives at the same time that the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position (if there is almost no difference between the timing of the ball's arrival and the timing when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position) or if the ball arrives with greater momentum than usual (for example, if there is a rotation in an accelerating direction), the ball may pass through to the guide section 4413 while the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position.

As a countermeasure against this, firstly, the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion 4421, which is normally designed to have a horizontal length of 55 mm or less, may be designed to be longer than that (for example, 77 mm or 100 mm). . In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the time during which the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the non-guided state and the rolling plate portion 4421 is placed in the forward position.

Further, by designing the rolling plate portion 4421 to have a long horizontal width, it is possible to increase the number of balls that ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 when the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the forward position.

When the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed with a normal left-right length (55 mm or less), at most two to three balls can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 at the same time, but when the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed with a longer length (for example, 100 mm), it is possible to create a situation in which four or more balls can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 at the same time.

When four or more balls are simultaneously placed on the rolling plate portion 4421 and the electric device 4420 is displaced to the retracted position, the four or more balls are guided toward the second winning opening 640 at once, so the number of reserved special symbols 2 can be increased to four (full) in a short time.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, unlike the case where the balls are guided one by one to the electric accessory 640, the plurality of balls riding on the upper surface of the electric accessory 4420 are guided by the electric accessory 4420. Immediately after being displaced to the retreat position, they simultaneously fall toward the second prize opening 640 side, so it is required that the electric accessory 4420 maintains its arrangement at the retreat position in order to cause the plurality of balls to flow down to the second prize opening 640 side. It is possible to shorten the length of time. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the operation pattern of the electric accessory 4420 can be improved.

Secondly, as the next measure, the obstruction rod portion 4425 can be configured to cut off the flow of balls moving from the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 to the guide portion 4413 just before the rolling plate portion 4421 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position.

In other words, by positioning the obstruction rod 4425 at a position that protrudes further toward the guide section 4413 than the downstream end of the rolling plate section 4421 (in this embodiment, it protrudes toward the guide section 4413 by protruding diagonally to the upper left perpendicular to the top surface of the rolling plate section 4421), even if a ball is about to pass the downstream end of the rolling plate section 4421 when the electric device 4420 is in the guiding state (see FIG. 54(a)), if the electric device 4420 is immediately switched to the non-guiding state (see FIG. 54(b)), the flow of the ball that has passed through can be blocked by the obstruction rod 4425.

As a result, even if the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion 4421 is short, the electric accessory 4420 is moved to the guide portion 4413 immediately before switching from the forward position to the backward position. It is possible to make it difficult for the moving ball to be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side.

In other words, the ball attempting to pass through the rolling plate portion 4421 to the left can be pulled back to the second winning opening 640 side by the obstruction rod portion 4425. This makes it possible to maximize the left and right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 and increase the number of balls riding on the electric accessory 4420 when the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the forward position. By arranging 4420 in the retreat position, it is possible to increase the number of balls dropped to the second winning a prize opening 640 side.

This also allows more balls than would be expected from the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 to flow down toward the second winning opening 640 immediately after the electric device 4420 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position.

That is, in addition to the ball riding on the rolling plate part 4421, a ball that is about to pass the downstream end of the rolling plate part 4421 and then is pulled back (flowing backward) to the obstruction rod part 4425 is also awarded the second prize. Since it can flow down to the 640 side, it is possible to improve the winning frequency of the second winning opening 640.

On the other hand, the flow path configuration section 4410 has a ceiling section 4414 formed in such a manner that it covers the flow path from above so that balls do not flow into the electric role device 4420 side, except for the ball inlet 4411. In other words, since the introduction of balls into the electric role device 4420 is limited to the ball inlet 4411, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the number of balls remaining on the electric role device 4420 becomes greater than expected (for example, a situation in which balls are remaining in a manner such that they are stacked in two or more layers).

In this way, according to this embodiment, the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether or not the ball passes over the rolling plate portion 4421. In other words, the ball will flow toward the specific winning opening 65a only when the period during which the electric device 4420 is maintained in the forward position exceeds the time required for the ball to pass over the rolling plate portion 4421.

As explained in the first embodiment above, as long as the ball has passed the tip 451, it does not matter whether the ball passes over the left guide plate 452 or the right guide plate 453. This is different from the case where switching of the flow path is not affected.

The state of the electric role 4420 shown in FIG. 54(a) corresponds to the non-excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470) in the first embodiment described above, and the state of the electric role 4420 shown in FIG. 54(b) corresponds to the excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, the rolling plate portion 4421 corresponds to the slide member 450, and the obstruction rod portion 4425 corresponds to the tilt member 470.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the upper variable winning device 700 causes the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a to flow down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715, but in the fifth embodiment The upper variable winning device 5700 is provided with a switching device 5770 for switching the flow of the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

55(a) and 55(b) are front views of the upper variable prize winning device 5700 in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. In FIG. 55(a), the closed state of the upper variable winning device 5700 is illustrated, and in FIG. 55(b), the open state of the upper variable winning device 5700 is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 55(b), the upper variable winning device 5700 in the fifth embodiment has a base formed by partially reusing the configuration of the base plate member 710 in the first embodiment. A plate member 5710 is provided.

The base plate member 5710 lowers the arrangement of the lower component from the inclined outer wall plate part 714, and thereby, in the space created between the inclined rolling plate part 713 and the inclined outer wall plate part 714, the middle of the pair of left and right A plate part 5718, and a pair of left and right discharge openings 5719, which are bored in the front-rear direction and have edges along a part of the intermediate plate part 5718, and discharge the balls received in the intermediate plate part 5718 to the back side. Be prepared.

The intermediate plate portion 5718 is a plate-shaped portion extending toward the front side toward the space created between the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, and is a plate-like portion that extends toward the front side toward the space formed between the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, and is A prevention wall portion 5718a for preventing spillage, and an inclined plate portion 5718b that is connected to the lower end of the prevention wall portion 5718a and extends in an upwardly inclined direction toward the left-right position side of the second specific winning opening 700a. is connected to the extending end of the inclined plate portion 5718b and is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 centered on the rotation axis J51 of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 of the switching device 5770. A circular arc plate portion 5718c is provided.

The switching device 5770 includes a ball receiving rotating member 5771 configured to be rotatable around a rotation axis J51, and a pair of right and left flow control members disposed opposite to the ball receiving rotating member 5771 from the left and right. A member 5778 is provided.

The flow-down restriction member 5778 is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball-receiving rotation member 5771, centered on the rotation axis J51, and is configured to be displaceable between a forward position where it protrudes further forward than the front surface of the base plate member 5710 to restrict the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member 5771, and a retracted position where it retreats further back than the front surface of the base plate member 5710 to allow the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member 5771.

The ball receiver rotating member 5771 is a disc-shaped member that is rotatable around a rotation axis J51 that is arranged directly below the left-right center of the second specific winning opening 700a and extends in the front-rear direction, and is Four ball receiving recesses 5772 are formed at 90 degree intervals from the outer circumferential side so as to be able to receive the balls that have passed through 700a.

The drive device that drives the ball receiving rotating member 5771 and the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member 5778 are different from the solenoid 763 (see FIG. 40) and are not shown. In this case, the drive device that drives the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may also be used as the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member 5778.

In this embodiment, in the first round of play, the solenoid 763 is driven in the first special operating pattern (see FIG. 42(a)), and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is constantly rotated in the clockwise direction at a rotational speed of 90 degrees per second.

The flow-down restriction member 5778 is set so that its operating mode during the first round of play can be changed depending on the type of jackpot. For example, for jackpots A, B, a, and b (see FIG. 44), it is always fixed in the forward position, for jackpot C, it is always fixed in the backward position, and for jackpot c, it is driven to switch between the forward and backward positions every second.

The following describes the flow of balls that pass through the second specific winning opening 700a. In this embodiment, a ball that passes through the second specific winning opening 700a is always received in one of the ball receiving recesses 5772 of the ball receiving rotating member 5771.

By rotating the ball receiving rotating member 5771 with the ball received in the ball receiving recess 5772, the ball received in the ball receiving recess 5772 is also displaced as the arrangement of the ball receiving recess 5772 changes.

During rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771, when the lower edge of the ball receiving recess 5772 (the lower edge of a pair of edges at the radially outer end of the ball receiving recess 5772 centered on the rotation axis J51; the side that forms the ball flow down surface) becomes flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b, if the flow down restriction member 5778 is positioned in the retracted position, the ball will be discharged from the ball receiving recess 5772 that is now flush with the inclined plate portion 5718b, and the ball will pass through the discharge opening 5719 and be discharged from the upper variable winning device 5700. The balls discharged in this manner will not be stored in the gap between the pair of storage plates 715.

On the other hand, when the lower edge of the ball receiving recess 5772 is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b during rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771, if the flow-down restriction member 5778 is positioned in the forward position, the discharge of balls is restricted by the flow-down restriction member 5778, and the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771 continues without balls being discharged from the ball receiving recess 5772. After that, when the ball receiving recess 5772 is positioned between the pair of left and right arc plate portions 5718c, the balls can flow through the gap between the pair of arc plate portions 5718c and flow down toward the gap between the pair of storage plates 715, where they can be stored.

In other words, in this embodiment, depending on the operating mode of the switching device 5770, it is possible to configure two cases: a ball that has passed through the second specific winning port 700a flows down toward the gap between a pair of storage plate sections 715, and a ball that has passed through the second specific winning port 700a is discharged without reaching the gap between a pair of storage plate sections 715.

Therefore, by driving the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 in the first special operation pattern, the balls guided to the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715 are not discharged but are stored during the round game. Even in this mode, especially when the arrangement of the flow regulating member 5778 changes during the round game as in the case of jackpot c, depending on the timing of the ball entering the second specific prize opening 700a, the pair of storage Since the number of balls guided to the plate portion 715 may be sufficiently large (in this embodiment, five or more) or less than that, the player's It can improve your attention.

In addition, it is not sufficient that one ball passes from the switching device 5770 to the pair of storage plate parts 715, but the number of balls exceeding the number that fills the position between the pair of storage plate parts 715 (this embodiment Since the balls can be reliably passed through the opening 751 only after 5 or more balls have passed through the opening 751, the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700 can be maintained at a high level for a long time. Can be done.

According to this embodiment, the ball flows down slower when it passes through the second specific winning opening 700a and is displaced by the ball receiving rotating member 5771 than when it passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. This makes it possible to delay the time it takes for the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a to reach a position between the pair of storage plates 715. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball that passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 immediately after the movable upper cover member 730 is placed in the retracted position from immediately reaching a position between the pair of storage plates 715.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In the first embodiment, the time display 811 explained the case where the ending time of the ending performance of the jackpot game can be grasped, but the firing time display 6811 in the sixth embodiment allows the appropriate ball to be fired just before the end of the ending performance. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is designed so that the timing can be grasped. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 56(a) shows the display screen after the specific display 810 is moved from the center by operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45), and FIG. 56(b) shows the display screen after the specific display 810 is moved from the center by operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. The display screen after being switched by operating the frame button 22 in the shown state is illustrated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(b), when the frame button 22 is operated while the card forgetting prevention display effect is being executed, the direction operation section display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display 818 will indicate the ball. The display is switched to a firing position suggestion display 6820 that suggests a position where the player may gain a profit by firing and aiming, and a firing time display 6811 is displayed superimposed on the time display 811.

The launch position suggestion display 6820 includes a play area display 6821 that (schematically) displays an illustration, photo, etc. of the play area (at least a part of it), and a target suggestion display 6822 that indicates a part of the play area display 6821 with an arrow or the like so that the player knows that he or she should aim at the target by launching the ball.

In this embodiment, the firing position suggestion display 6820 indicates the entire game board 13 (see FIG. 2) as the game area display 6821, and the through gates 66, 67 (see FIG. 2) as the target suggestion display 6822. At the same time, the comment "Aim here" is displayed.

Note that the launch position suggestion display 6820 is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of displaying the entire game board 13 as the game area display 6821, a portion of the game board 13 may be displayed. For example, as a portion including the through gates 66, 67, only the portion above the windmill WF (see FIG. 2) may be displayed, or only the area around the through gates 66, 67 (or the area around either of the through gates 66, 67) may be displayed.

In the case where a part of the game board 13 is displayed, the game area display 6821 may be displayed as a still image or a moving image. For example, in the launch position suggestion display 6820, the game area display 6821 is configured to schematically display the surroundings of the ball that is about to be launched, and the ball is launched, flows down, and reaches the through gates 66, 67. Move the game area display 6821 along the route (display as a moving image), and when the ball reaches the through gates 66, 67, fix the game area display 6821 at the display around the through gates 66, 67 (display as a still image) ).

Also, for example, as the target suggestion display 6822, instead of displaying an arrow to indicate the location to aim at by firing the ball, the location may be displayed by illuminating it, or the rest of the screen except for the location may be displayed in a dark color to make it stand out in comparison.

Further, the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822 may be fixed from the beginning or may be fixed after being moved. For example, the light may be moved along the path along which the ball is emitted, and when the light reaches the through gates 66 and 67, it may be fixed at the position where it reaches the through gates 66 and 67.

In this way, by displaying the launch position suggestion display 6820, the player can easily understand where to aim and launch the ball after the ending performance has ended. This allows the game to proceed smoothly after the ending performance has ended.

Like the time display 811, the right end of the launch time display 6811 is displayed as moving rightward over time, and the speed of movement is the same as that of the time display 811. Also, the right end of the launch time display 6811 is positioned closer to the terminal position 812 than the right end of the time display 811, and the right end of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

In this embodiment, the length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is the length of time when the ball is fired. It is designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from the time the target reaches the through gates 66, 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822).

Therefore, the ending performance of the currently active jackpot game will end before the ball shot at the timing when the right tip of the shot time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 passes through the through gates 66 and 67.

In this way, by using the launch time display 6811 as a guide when launching the ball, it is possible to prevent the launched ball from passing through the through gates 66, 67 during a jackpot game (before the end of the ending performance). This makes it possible to maximize the profits that the player can obtain in the lottery for the second symbol that is executed when a ball is detected by the through gates 66, 67.

That is, in general, the lottery of the second symbol, which is executed when a ball is detected in the through gates 66 and 67 during a jackpot game, is carried out with a medium probability, so the profit obtained by the player is minimal. becomes. After the jackpot game ends, the probability of drawing the second symbol can increase depending on the jackpot type, so by avoiding the ball passing through the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game, the second symbol It is possible to maximize the profit obtained by the player in the lottery (profit that changes depending on the difference in the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a).

Furthermore, by firing the ball using the firing time display 6811 as a guide, compared to the case where the ball is fired after the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, the jackpot can be reduced from the end of the jackpot game. The length of time until the ball passes through the through gates 66, 67 for the first time after the end of the game can be shortened.

In this way, by firing the ball using the firing time display 6811 as a guide, a situation occurs in which the ball fired just before the end of the jackpot game passes through the through gates 66 and 67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). To smoothen the progress of a game by shortening the period until a ball passes through gates 66 and 67 after the end of a jackpot game while maximizing the profit obtained by a player by minimizing the Can be done.

Figure 57 is a diagram showing an example of the display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. Figure 57 shows the display screen when the right end of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 from the state shown in Figure 56 (b).

As shown in FIG. 57, when the right end of the launch time display 6811 reaches the end position 812, the display mode of the target suggestion display 6822 switches. In this embodiment, the shape of the frame surrounding the comment in the target suggestion display 6822 changes, and the "aim" portion is enlarged.

In other words, the timing at which the "aim" portion of the target suggestion display 6822 is enlarged coincides with the timing at which the right end of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812. Therefore, even if the player does not view the launch time display 6811, by allowing the player to view the launch position suggestion display 6820, the player can be prompted to launch the ball at the appropriate launch timing based on the timing of the change in the target suggestion display 6822.

By visually checking the launch position suggestion display 6820, the player can grasp not only the target position to launch the ball, but also the timing to launch the ball. This reduces the burden on the player, who must select only the top portion of the display on the third symbol display device 81 as needed.

FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 58(a) shows a display screen that is switched from the state shown in FIG. 56(a) when passage of a ball is detected at the through gates 66, 67 before the end of the ending performance.

Further, in FIG. 58(b), if time has passed since the display in FIG. 58(a) and the firing suggestion display 6811 is displayed, the timing at which the right tip of the firing suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 is shown. The display in is illustrated. That is, the arrangement of the right end of the time display 811 in FIG. 58(b) is the same as the arrangement of the right end of the time display 811 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the player fires the ball without operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) from the state displayed in FIG. 56(a), before the ending effect ends, When the passage of a ball is detected through the through gates 66 and 67, the direction operation section display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display 818 display a game stop suggestion display to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball. 6831.

In this embodiment, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is an illustration imitating a barrier installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the barrier being lowered is displayed, along with a message saying "stop". A comment will be displayed. This allows the player to be urged to stop shooting the balls, thereby reducing the number of balls shot before the ending effect ends.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), when time has elapsed since the game stop suggestion display 6831 was displayed, the game stop suggestion display 6831 changes to a game preparation suggestion display 6841 for prompting the player to prepare for firing a ball. can be switched to

In this embodiment, the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is an illustration that imitates a crossing gate installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the crossing gate raised is displayed along with the comment "START." This allows the player to understand that the period during which balls are to be stopped has ended, and prompts the player to prepare to launch the ball.

In this embodiment, if the player does not operate the frame button 22, the firing time display 6811 (see FIG. 56(b)) is not displayed, but the timing at which the game stop suggestion display 6831 is switched to the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is , coincides with the timing when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812.

Therefore, the same benefit as that obtained by operating the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. , can be obtained when a ball is detected by the through gates 66 and 67 before the end of the ending performance.

Thereby, for example, when the frame button 22 is not operated due to a malfunction of the frame button 22, it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the profits obtained by the player. In other words, since the shooting position suggestion display 6820 (see FIG. 56(a)) is not displayed because the frame button 22 is not operated, the player cannot grasp the appropriate ball shooting timing. Even if the player starts firing the ball before the ending effect ends, the game stop suggestion display 6831 or the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is displayed, so that the player is not informed of the ball launch. It is possible to stop the ball from being shot or to have the player prepare to shoot the ball at an appropriate timing.

Note that the modes of the game stop suggestion display 6831 and the game preparation suggestion display 6841 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of an illustration of a circuit breaker, an illustration of the handle 51 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) with an x mark may be displayed. For example, it may be configured as a moving image instead of a still image. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 instead of a part of the display screen.

The contents of the caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are not limited to those shown in FIG. 58, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the contents may correspond to the launch of the ball. That is, an illustration imitating the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) may be displayed and a counterclockwise arrow may be added to the handle 51 to suggest that the launch of the ball should be stopped, or a clockwise arrow may be added to the handle 51 to suggest the timing to start launching the ball. Also, a comment corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special pattern (such as "full" or "one ball remaining") may be displayed.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60. In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the direction operation section display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , a case has been described in which it is possible to adjust the intensity of the light intensity and the volume, but in the situation suggestion display 7821 in the seventh embodiment, the light intensity and volume currently being executed are displayed in response to the light intensity and volume settings made by the player. It is designed to display comments about volume settings. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

Figures 59(a), 59(b) and 60 are diagrams illustrating display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the seventh embodiment. Figures 59(a) and 60 show display screens in different jackpot games with the same timing as the ending effect (the position of the right tip of the time display 811 is the same timing), and Figure 59(b) shows the display screen after time has passed from the state shown in Figure 59(a).

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a), when the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) is operated according to the frame button display 813 (see FIG. 48(b)) in the ending performance, a direction operation section display 816, a vertical scale display 817, and a horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a situation suggestion display 7821 is displayed above them.

The situation suggestion display 7821 is designed to display various comments, but in FIG. value).

That is, in this embodiment, the settings for the light intensity and volume are initialized (returned to the maximum values) by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) when a specified period of time has elapsed since the settings were changed. This is set, and the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821 in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which, for example, if the left and down switches (switches operated to decrease the volume or light intensity) of the directional control unit 45 (see Figure 45) are functioning but the right and up switches (switches operated to increase the volume or light intensity) are malfunctioning, once the light intensity or volume has been reduced to its minimum, the light intensity or volume cannot be increased at all thereafter, even if the player changes.

By visually checking that the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the status indication display 7821, the player can understand that the changes to the light intensity or volume settings have been initialized (returned to maximum value). If the player who previously changed the light intensity or volume settings is the same player who is currently playing, it is likely that the player will want to return the light intensity or volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value).

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is performed, the light intensity setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the vertical scale display 817 as the past light intensity display 7817 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading), and the volume setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the horizontal scale display 818 as the past volume display 7818 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading).

Therefore, the player operates the direction operation section 45 using the past light amount display 7817 as a guide to change the setting of the light amount, and also operates the direction operation section 45 using the past volume display 7818 as a guide to change the setting of the volume. By doing so, it is possible to easily restore the light intensity and volume settings to the state immediately before initialization (returning to the maximum value).

As described above, the past light amount display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization of the light amount and volume is executed by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). On the other hand, if the timing is missed, the display is set to disappear, making it more time-consuming (and more difficult) to change the light intensity and volume settings.

This allows the player to be prompted to operate the direction operation unit 45 at the timing when the past light intensity display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), when the player operates the directional control unit 45 to return the light intensity and volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value), the comment "Cancel" in the status indication display 7821 is changed to the comment "Restoration complete."

The player can see that the light intensity and volume settings have been restored to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value) by visually checking that the comment "Return Completed" is displayed on the status indication display 7821. As a result, the setting change has been executed, and the light intensity and volume will not be initialized (returned to maximum value) by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) until a specified time has elapsed.

In the display shown in FIG. 60, the status indication display 7821 displays the comment "Automatic continuation," and the volume and light intensity settings are maintained as set by the player. Therefore, the player does not need to change the volume or light intensity settings, and can focus on the movement of the time display 811 and figuring out the timing of the ball's release.

In this way, by changing the content of the situation suggestion display 7821 in the ending performance and, depending on the content, encouraging the player to operate the directional operation unit 45 to change the light intensity or volume settings, it is possible to improve the player's ability to focus on the ending performance.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63. In the first embodiment, the case where the frame button display 813 is always displayed and the frame button 22 can be operated is explained while the card forgetting prevention display effect is being executed, but the frame button display 8813 in the eighth embodiment is , is displayed as an entity during a more limited period during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, and the frame button 22 can be operated. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), and 62 are diagrams illustrating in chronological order the display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the eighth embodiment. In FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), and 62, the frame button display 8813 is shown with imaginary lines when it is displayed semitransparently, and with solid lines when it is displayed as an entity. be done.

In this embodiment, when the card forget prevention display effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61(a), in addition to displaying a specific display 810 in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, Translucent frame button displays 8813 are displayed scattered around the edges of the display screen. The frame button display 8813 moves toward the center of the display screen as time passes.

When the semi-transparent frame button display 8813 reaches the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and merges with it, the frame button display 8813 materializes as shown in FIG. 61(b). When the frame button display 8813 is materialized, the input of the frame button 22 is controlled to be valid, and when the input of the frame button 22 is detected as valid, an operation validity display 8813a (in this embodiment, the comment "Good") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and then the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 49(a) described in the first embodiment.

When the player operates the frame button 22 and wants to shift the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), the timing at which the frame button display 8813 materializes is determined. Therefore, the player follows the moving frame button display 8813 with his eyes.

Since the specific display 810 is displayed on the moving route of the frame button display 8813, it is possible to cause the specific display 810 to come into the field of view of the player who follows the frame button display 8813 with his/her eyes. Furthermore, by overlapping the position where the frame button display 8813 materializes with the position where the specific display 810 is displayed, it is possible to induce the player to pay attention to the specific display 810 displayed behind the frame button display 8813. .

In the first place, during the period from when the card forgetting prevention display performance starts until the frame button display 8813 is materialized, the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, making it easier for the player to see the specific display 810 compared to when the frame button 22 can be operated immediately after the card forgetting prevention display performance starts and the specific display 810 can be instantly moved to the corner of the display screen.

If the frame button 22 is not operated while the frame button display 8813 is materialized, the frame button display 8813, which is displayed semi-transparently from the center position of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 toward the outside, moves as shown in FIG. 62.

In the state shown in FIG. 62, input to the frame button 22 is controlled to be invalid, and even if the frame button 22 is operated for input, only an invalid operation display 8813b (in this embodiment, a comment "Miss") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the display screen does not transition to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), and the specific display 810 is maintained in a state in which it is positioned in the center of the display screen.

In this way, in this embodiment, by limiting the timing of operation of the frame button 22 while the card forget prevention display effect is being performed, the following favorable effects can be achieved.

That is, in a case where the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes from a translucent display to a solid display to indicate the timing when the frame button 22 can be operated, the specific display remains until the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes. Since the symbol 810 is arranged at the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be easily visible to the player, attention to the specific display 810 can be improved.

Furthermore, by switching the frame button display 8813 from a solid display to a semi-transparent display during the card forgetting prevention display performance, it is possible to prevent the period from being too short from the timing at which the display screen transitions to the state shown in FIG. 49(a) by operating the frame button 22 to the end of the card forgetting prevention display performance period.

This makes it possible to avoid situations in which, even if the player has effectively operated the frame button 22, there is not enough time to change the light intensity or volume settings before the card forgetting prevention display performance ends, and so the player is unable to change the light intensity or volume to his or her preferred settings.

This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player who has had the experience of operating the frame button 22 only to be unable to change the light intensity or volume settings to their liking from underestimating the value of operating the frame button 22. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a player's motivation to operate the frame button 22 (not only during the ending performance, but also during play) decreases.

Note that the frame button display 8813 may be accompanied by a musical note mark or a light bulb mark to suggest an object that can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. In this case, when the player is thinking of adjusting the volume, the frame button display 8813 can be more attention-grabbing if a musical note mark is attached, and attention can be distracted from the frame button display 8813 if a light bulb mark is attached.

Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the change over time of the frame button display 8813 in the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time of the validity of the operation of the frame button 22, and the operation of the frame button 22. As an example, Figure 63 shows a case in which the period of the card forgetting prevention display performance is divided into three equal parts and assigned to a first period T81 (see Figure 61 (a)) in which the semi-transparent frame button displays 8813 are scattered, a second period T82 (see Figure 61 (b)) in which the frame button displays 8813 are united and materialized, and a third period T83 (see Figure 62) in which the frame button displays 8813 become semi-transparent again and are scattered.

Unlike the first embodiment, in which the frame button 22 could be operated at any time during the card forget prevention display performance, in this embodiment, the frame button 22 is enabled to be operated only during the second period T82. If the frame button 22 is operated in the second period T82, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is shifted to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), and the setting of the light amount and volume can be changed. On the other hand, the control is such that no matter how much the frame button 22 is operated during the first period T81 or the third period T83, the setting of the light amount or volume cannot be changed.

Although FIG. 63 illustrates a case where the periods T81, T82, and T83 are the same, the lengths of the periods T81, T82, and T83 can be changed in various ways depending on the purpose. Hereinafter, an example of an effect that can be expected due to a change in the length of the first period 81 or a change in the length of the third period T83 will be described.

For example, by setting the first period T81 shorter, the transition to the second period T82 in which the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective is accelerated. Therefore, it is possible to increase the maximum length of time that can be spent changing settings of light intensity and volume.

Setting to shorten the first period T81 may be effective in some cases, for example, in the ending performance of a jackpot game for the first win (first jackpot in a series of games). A specific song may be played during a time saving state, variable probability state, or jackpot game, and there are players who are not interested in the audio in the normal state but would like to hear a specific song.

Even if such a player plays games with the volume turned down in the normal state, when transitioning from the normal state through the jackpot gaming state to the time saving state or variable probability state, the player may turn the volume down to the point where a specific song can be heard. I'm thinking of raising it.

Therefore, by lengthening the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the light intensity and volume settings, particularly in the ending performance of the first jackpot game, it becomes easier to change the volume settings at the appropriate timing when moving from the normal state through the jackpot game state to the time-saving state or the probability variable state, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction of players who want to hear the above-mentioned specific song.

Further, for example, by setting the first period T81 longer, the transition to the second period T82 in which the operation of the frame button 22 becomes effective is delayed, while the specific display 810 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to maintain the period displayed in the center of the screen for a long time.

Setting to lengthen the first period T81 may be effective in some cases, for example, in the ending performance of a jackpot game during a series of games. In most cases, it is sufficient to change the volume and light intensity settings at the first visit, and it is unlikely that you will want to change the volume and light intensity settings during a series of games. Even if the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the settings of the volume and light intensity becomes shorter due to the slower transition, the disadvantage to the player is small.

On the other hand, the longer the game continues, the higher the player's level of excitement becomes, so there is a high possibility that the player will forget to return the cards inserted into the card unit when finishing the game due to the excitement. On the other hand, if the first period T81 is set long, the period during which the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time during the card forgetting prevention display performance, so that the game It is possible to make the person pay more attention to returning the card, etc.

Further, for example, by setting the second period T82 shorter, it is possible to make it difficult for the frame button 22 to be operated and to shift to the state illustrated in FIG. 49(a). In this case, in addition to being able to guide the player's line of sight to the specific display 810 with the moving frame button display 8813 (see FIG. 61(a)), it is also possible to prevent an operation from failing when multiple frame button displays 8813 are combined. It is possible to increase the possibility of shifting the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 62.

As a result, in addition to being able to maintain the specific display 810 at the center of the display screen during the card forget prevention display performance, the player's line of sight is guided to the specific display 810 by moving the frame button display 8813. You can expect good results. Therefore, compared to the case where the frame button display 8813 is not provided, the specific display 810 can leave a stronger impression on the player.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the second period T82 longer, the period during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be maintained for a longer period, thereby ensuring opportunities to operate the frame button 22.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the third period T83 shorter, T82 can be made relatively longer, and the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be maintained for a longer period. Opportunities for operation can be secured.

In addition, for example, by setting the third period T83 longer, the remaining period of the card forgetting prevention display effect after the state shown in FIG. 49(a) is transitioned to by operating the frame button 22 during the second period T82 can be secured to be longer, making it easier to avoid incomplete changes to the light intensity or volume settings.

The length of each of the periods T81, T82, and T83 may be changed for reasons other than those mentioned above. For example, if a jackpot is awarded for a reserved ball that has already been used to draw the first symbol during a jackpot game, the first period T81 may be made extremely short, and the second period T82 may be made longer by that amount.

In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be made to appear to the player as if it had started from the state of FIG. 61(b) without going through the state of FIG. 61(a), giving the player a sense of incongruity. This sense of incongruity makes the player realize that he or she will be able to grasp that the reserved balls are a jackpot, which can encourage the player to pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect. This can make the player aware of the need to return cards, etc. inserted into the card unit, and can prevent the player from actually forgetting cards, etc.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above embodiments, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and it is readily understood that various modifications and improvements can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention. This can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above first embodiment, by controlling the operation of the winning unit 400 in multiple ways, it is possible to switch between a state in which a ball passing through the inside of the winning unit 400 is guided almost entirely to the second winning port 640 and a state in which it is guided almost entirely to the third winning port 64b. This is used to explain the case in which it is possible to configure a special probability variable state in which small winning games occur frequently (occurring with almost every change in the special pattern) as the game state after a big winning game, in which a large number of prize balls can be paid out before the transition to a big winning game by causing a ball to enter a specific winning port 65a that is opened during a small winning game, and a probability variable state in which small winning games do not occur frequently, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting may not be such that small wins occur frequently (specific winning port 65a is not necessarily required), and the winning unit 400 may be used to switch between a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for the drawing of special pattern 1 (corresponding to third winning port 64b) and a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for the drawing of special pattern 2 (corresponding to second winning port 640).

In this case, a pachinko machine can be configured in which, in the game state transitioned to after the end of a jackpot game, the game has the common game mode of firing a ball toward the winning unit 400, but the allocation of the jackpot type expected when a jackpot is obtained can be changed.

In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 selects either the first operation pattern in which it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b, or the first operation pattern in which it is difficult to guide the ball to the third winning port 64b. Although a case has been described in which the electric accessory 640a is configured to be operable in either the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern that facilitates guiding the ball to the second winning opening 640, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric accessory 640a may be operable in an operation pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to both the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 64b.

As a means for achieving this, for example, the operating time t3b of the standard operating pattern RP3 in the third operating pattern can be set to 1.0 second, and the sliding member 450 can be maintained in a non-excited state for the remaining 1.0 second, so that the ball picked up by the tip 451 during the waiting time t3a can be guided to the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b.

In the above first embodiment, in the winning unit 400, when the solenoid SOL41 is driven with a ball resting on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 arranged in the forward position, the ball resting on the tip 451 is pushed onto the upper surface of the tip 451, forming the ball passage opening 414 so as to be able to pass through, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip 451 and the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414 may be designed to be less than the diameter of the ball.

That is, the upper surface of the tip 451 is formed as an inclined surface that rises and slopes toward the front, and since the displacement direction of the slide member 450 is the front-rear direction, the upper surface of the tip 451 and the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414 The dimension between the two is shorter when the slide member 450 is placed in the retracted position than when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position.

Utilizing this, when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball is allowed to pass through the ball passage opening 414, while when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the retreat position, the tip end The ball resting on the tip 451 is designed with dimensions such that the ball is caught on the upper edge of the ball passing opening 414, so that the ball rests on the tip 451 when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the retreat position. Balls can be prevented from passing through the ball passage opening 414. Thereby, the probability of a ball entering the ball passage opening 414 can be lowered.

In the first embodiment described above, in the winning unit 400, the left wall part 432 and the right wall part 433 are formed with a height that is high enough to block the passage of the ball in the left and right direction, and the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part The introduction of the sphere from 453 to the central flow path 431 side is limited to passing through the left opening LT or right opening RT arranged on the rear side of the left wall 432 or right wall 433. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical heights of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed to be low so that the ball can pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433.

For example, the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion may be 433 to block the ball from passing above the left wall 432 and right wall 433 when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position (when the top surface is at a low vertical position). (For example, it is designed so that the upper ends of the left wall part 432 and the right wall part 433 are higher than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450.) On the other hand, when the slide member 450 is in the retracted position (when the vertical dimension of the top surface is high), it is possible to allow the ball to pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 (for example, the slide member 450 allows the ball to pass through). The upper end of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed so that the upper end thereof is lower than the upper surface thereof.

In this case, as a variation of the flow path of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and flowing down toward the central flow passage 431, in addition to the flow path passing through the left opening LT or right opening RT located on the rear side of the left wall portion 432 or right wall portion 433, a flow path passing through the upper side of the left wall portion 432 or right wall portion 433 when the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position can be configured.

The relationship between the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450 and the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be made different on the left and right. For example, the ball may be allowed to pass above the left wall portion 432 but restricted from passing above the right wall portion 433, or the ball may be allowed to pass above the right wall portion 433 but restricted from passing above the right wall portion 432.

In this case, the flow path of the ball guided by the slide member 450 can be made to differ significantly depending on whether the ball flows down the left side or the right side.

In the above first embodiment, the structure for picking up a ball includes a tip 451 of the slide member 450 and a plate-like portion 471 of the tilt member 470, and the tip 451 is disposed on the outer left and right sides and above the plate-like portion 471 when viewed from the front. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bifurcated structure of the slide member 450 may be eliminated, and the part corresponding to the tip 451 may be disposed directly above the plate-like portion 471.

In this case, by providing a fixed restricting plate that restricts the passage of balls at a position between the tip portion 451 and the plate-shaped portion 471 in the area between the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16, it is possible to prevent a winning situation in which a ball that has not been picked up by the tip portion 451 is picked up by the plate-shaped portion 471.

Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the winning unit 400 can be reduced. In addition, by having only one tip 451, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of merging of balls in the path inside the winning unit 400, so it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the winning unit 400 (by simplifying the design). ).

In the first embodiment, the ceiling surface 447 disposed above the slide member 450 is formed to extend in the horizontal direction, and the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 disposed above the central channel 431 is formed to extend horizontally. Although the case where the slope increases toward the front side has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the ceiling surface 447 disposed above the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that slopes downward toward the rear. In this case, the downstream area of the ball (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450 becomes too large, and it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down from flapping. .

For example, the ceiling surface 447 located on the upper side of the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that slopes upward toward the rear. In this case, a large ball flow area (area through which balls can pass) can be secured downstream of the flow path of the balls flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450. Therefore, even if the balls on the upper surface of the slide member 450 are pushed backwards when the slide member 450 is displaced rearward and the density of balls at the rear position of the slide member 450 increases, the possibility of balls becoming clogged on the upper side of the slide member 450 can be reduced.

For example, the ceiling component 444 arranged above the central flow passage 431 may be configured to slope downwards toward the front side, or to extend horizontally. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball's flow area (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the central flow passage 431 from becoming too large, which would cause the ball to flutter while flowing down.

In the first embodiment, the horizontal width of the ball passing opening 414 through which the ball picked up by the sliding member 450 passes and the center opening 413 through which the ball picked up by the tilting member 470 passes is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball. Although the case where the length of time is considered to be long has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening 414 and the center opening 413 are designed to be slightly longer than multiple times (for example, twice) the diameter of the ball, and the left guide plate portion 452 of the slide member 450 is The right guide plate portion 453, the central channel 431, and the tilting member 470 may also be designed to have the same horizontal width. In this case, the number of balls that can be picked up at once by the sliding member 450 or the tilting member 470 can be increased, so the winning efficiency can be increased.

In the first embodiment, the left and right widths of the sphere passage opening 414 and the central opening 413 are aligned, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the left and right widths of the sphere passage opening 414 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the left and right widths of the central opening 413 may be designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the sphere. Additionally, the left and right widths of the central flow passage 431 and the tilting member 470 may be designed with the same concept as the left and right widths of the central opening 413.

In this case, the balls can flow down side by side in the region downstream from the central channel 431, so even if the balls pass through the pair of left and right ball passing openings 414 at the same time, the balls can flow down the center channel 431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation where the balls merge and the flow resistance increases.

Further, for example, the horizontal width of the ball passage opening 414 is designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the sphere, and the horizontal width of the central opening 413 is designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere. In addition, the left and right widths of the tip portion 451, left guide plate portion 452, and right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450 may be designed based on the same concept as the left and right width of the ball passage opening 414.

In this case, under the condition that the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 are linked, it is possible to improve the first ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the sliding member 450 picks up the balls) at the most upstream side (entrance side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400, while reducing the second ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the tilting member 470 picks up the balls) at the most downstream side (exit side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400 below the first ball entry efficiency.

As a result, it appears to the player that the apparent efficiency of ball entry into the entrance of the winning unit 400 (first ball entry efficiency) is high, and the probability that the ball is actually picked up by the tilting member 470 (second ball entry efficiency) is shown to be high. Ball entry efficiency) can be configured to be reduced. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's impression of the efficiency of ball entry into the winning unit 400, and it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the inclination angle of the left guide plate part 452 of the slide member 450 and the inclination angle of the right guide plate part 453 are the same, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the right guide plate part 453 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the left guide plate part 452, or the inclination angle of the left guide plate part 452 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the right guide plate part 453. Also good.

In particular, in the latter case, the difference in the falling time of the ball due to the difference in the longitudinal length of the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 can be compensated for by the falling speed of the ball. If the balls are received at the same time, the timing at which the balls arrive at the central channel 431 can be made easier to match.

In the former case, on the other hand, the difference in the time it takes for the ball to flow down due to the difference in the front-to-back lengths of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 is amplified by the speed at which the ball flows down, so that when the left and right tip portions 451 receive balls simultaneously, it is easier to differentiate the timing at which the balls reach the central flow path 431.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the slide member 450 rolls the ball not only at the tip portion 451 that receives the ball from the game area but also in the flow path behind it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the ball that comes into contact with the ball only at the tip 451 and flows downstream of the tip 451 is exposed to the upper surface of the fixed plate part (the part that does not displace) that covers the left guide plate part 452, the right guide plate part 453, etc. from above. It may be made to roll. In this case, the range in which the ball is accelerated or decelerated by the displacement of the slide member 450 can be narrowed.

Further, in this case, the configuration and operation mode of the distal end portion 451 may be changed so that the tip section 451 may be tilted forward (operation mode exemplified by the tilting member 470). That is, it may be configured such that in the non-energized state, the tilting member 470 is in the open position, and in the energized state, the tilting member 470 is in the closed position.

In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 is described as having the ball picked up by the tip 451 roll on the fixed bottom surface 431a on the path until it reaches the tilting member 470, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface 431a may be configured to move in conjunction with the movement of the sliding member 450. In this case, even if the internal flow path of the winning unit 400 is clogged with balls, the entire internal flow path moves, so the balls can be loosened and the ball clog can be resolved. The movement of the bottom surface 431a may be in the opposite direction to the sliding member 450, or may be configured as one with the sliding member 450 and move in the same direction.

In the first embodiment, the fixed bottom surface portion 431a is formed as an inclined surface that causes the ball to roll linearly, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface portion 431a may be curved to curve the direction in which the ball flows down, resulting in a noticeable change in the speed at which the ball flows down, or the flow path may be configured to have a range in which the ball falls while flowing down, causing the ball to bounce and resulting in variation in the flow pattern, or the flow path may be repeatedly bent so that the ball flows down in a meandering manner, thereby lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball passage opening 414 is a mere opening in the winning unit 400, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection sensor for detecting passage of a ball may be disposed in the ball passage opening 414 so that entry of a ball into the ball passage opening 414 can be detected. In this case, when a ball entering the ball passing opening 414 is detected, the third symbol display device 81 or the like notifies the player that the ball has passed through the ball passing opening 414. , and the attention of the winning unit 400 can be improved.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the balls picked up by the tip 451 of the winning unit 400 are always guided to the tilting member 470 side, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge opening may be formed in the internal flow path, and some of the balls may be discharged through the discharge opening, so that only some of the balls picked up by the tip 451 are guided to the tilting member 470. In this case, the sliding member 450 may also be configured to function as a member that opens and closes the discharge opening.

In the first embodiment, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450 are formed in a plate shape with the same inclination in the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination may change midway, or the upper surface may be formed in a stepped shape. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls on the slide member 450, the magnitude of the load that the balls receive when the slide member 450 is displaced rearward can be changed (for example, when formed in a stepped shape, the load can be made different depending on whether the balls are arranged close to the steps and receive the load from the side of the steps, or whether the balls are arranged away from the steps and receive the load by sliding against the upper surface of the steps).

For example, if the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the downstream side (rear side) with respect to the horizontal plane is made smaller than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the upstream side (front side) with respect to the horizontal plane, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the upstream side can be made greater than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the downstream side. This makes it possible to narrow (shrink, make closer) the spacing between multiple balls arranged on the upstream and downstream sides of the slide member 450 by the displacement of the slide member 450.

In addition, for example, when the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the downstream side (rear side) with respect to the horizontal plane is made larger compared to the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the upstream side (front side) with respect to the horizontal plane, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the upstream side can be made smaller than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the downstream side. This makes it possible to widen (enlarge, make sparse) the spacing between multiple balls arranged on the upstream and downstream sides of the slide member 450 by displacing the slide member 450.

Also, for example, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 may be configured to change in magnitude of inclination relative to the horizontal plane multiple times along the flow path. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls, it is possible to generate both cases in which the distance between the balls decreases and cases in which the distance between the balls increases due to the displacement of the slide member 450.

Further, for example, the angle of inclination of the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 and the angle of inclination of the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 452 may be made different. That is, the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 is formed in a plate shape so that the slope with respect to the horizontal plane is the same in the front-rear direction, while the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 453 is formed such that the slope with respect to the horizontal plane changes along the way. good. In this case, the aspect of the load that the ball receives due to the displacement of the slide member 450 can be made different depending on whether the ball is placed on the left guide plate part 452 or the ball is placed on the right guide plate part 452. .

In the first embodiment, the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked by the transmission member 480 interposed therebetween, and problems such as ball biting occur on one side of the slide member 450 or the tilting member 470. , and the case where the operation of the other side is also affected has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, at a position where the front side of the rotating tip of the second member 485 of the transmission member 480, which is disposed opposite to the slide member 450, and the central fixed portion 454 of the slide member 450 are opposed to each other (a position between). It is configured to include a coil spring that can be expanded and contracted in the front and rear directions. Usually, the slide member 450 is pressed against the second member 485 side by the biasing force of the coil spring, and while the second member 485 and the slide member 450 are configured to interlock, the front end of the slide member 450 and the front design are If the ball is caught between the slide member 420 and the slide member 420, the coil spring contracts to cover the amount of obstruction to the forward displacement of the slide member 450. Even if the slide member 450 is not placed in the forward position, the second member 485 can be tilted forward.

This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the first member 481 from being hindered by the second member 485, making it easier to prevent the operation of the tilting member 470 from being stopped midway due to ball bite occurring on the sliding member 450 side.

In this way, even when multiple transmission paths for the driving force are provided using the transmission member 480, by interposing a member such as a coil spring (which may be a cushioning material, etc.) in one transmission path, it is possible to prevent a malfunction occurring in one transmission path from being transmitted to other transmission paths.

In the first embodiment, the case where the locking protrusion 487 is pushed down on the lower plate 482b when the electric device 640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the formation of the locking protrusion 487 may be omitted. When the electric device 640a is in an excited state, the lower plate 482b abuts against the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is maintained between the upper plate 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486.

The load in the rotational direction due to the second member 485's own weight is lower than the static friction between the middle member 430 and the slide member 450 that comes into contact with the second member 485 at the outer end in the rotational radial direction. 485 is prevented from being displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight. That is, even if the contact between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 is released, the posture of the second member 485 is maintained.

Therefore, when the electric role 640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state, the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position until the eccentric protrusion 486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion 482a, and only the tilt member 470 rises up. In other words, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilt member 470. In this case, the timing at which the slide member 450 starts to operate and the timing at which the tilt member 470 starts to operate are not aligned.

That is, only the tilting member 470 moves from the start of the operation to the intermediate position, and from the intermediate position, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 move. In the process of the first member 481 descending, after the upper plate portion 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact, the second member 485 rotates in the forward direction around the rotating shaft portion 485a with the eccentric protrusion 486 being pushed down by the upper plate portion 482a. The timing of the end of the operation of the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 is almost simultaneous.

In this case, even if a ball is caught between the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 during the switching operation from the energized state to the de-energized state, and the displacement of the slide member 450 may be suppressed, the slide member 450 Since the rising motion of the tilting member 470 is started prior to the displacement of the tilting member 470, it is possible to prevent the rising motion of the tilting member 470 from being suppressed.

This, in conjunction with suppressing the displacement of the slide member 450, delays the rising action of the tilt member 470, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is picked up by the tilt member 470 at an unexpected time.

Note that the load in the rotational direction due to the second member 485's own weight is lower than the static friction between the middle member 430 and the slide member 450 that comes into contact with the second member 485 at the outer end in the rotational radial direction. Although the case where the two members 485 are prevented from being displaced in the forward rolling direction due to their own weight has been exemplified, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity of the second member 485 may be designed to be closer to the tilting tip side, so that the second member 485 can be displaced in the forward rotation direction by its own weight.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked by the driving force of a single solenoid SOL41, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive device that drives the sliding member 450 and the drive device that drives the tilting member 470 may be configured separately and configured to be operable in a non-interlocked manner.

In this case, for example, the tilting member 470 is opened after approximately 3 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 450 was placed in the retreated position (sufficient time has elapsed for the ball that has flowed into the winning unit 400 to pass through). An additional actuation pattern may be added in which the tilting member 470 is then placed in the closed position when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being picked up by the tilting member 470.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the tip 451 is configured to make it difficult to pick up a ball even if the ball is pinched when the tilting member 470 is closed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the solenoid SOL41 may be set to be driven so that the closing operation of the tilting member 470 does not occur at the timing when the ball may reach the tilting member 470. In this case, the closing of the tilting member 470 can be executed smoothly.

Also, at the timing when the ball may reach the tilting member 470, the solenoid SOL41 may be set to be driven so that only the opening operation of the tilting member 470 occurs. In this case, the weight of the ball acts in a direction that opens the tilting member 470, which can assist in the opening of the tilting member 470, and the load is transmitted from the tilting member 470 to the sliding member 450 via the first member 481 and the second member 485, allowing the sliding member 450 to move smoothly toward the retracted position.

In the first embodiment, a case is described in which the flow path of the ball flowing down the winning unit 400 is switched by repeatedly executing the operation patterns RP1 to RP3 set from the standby time t1a to t3a and the operation time t1b to t3b. Although explained above, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the operation time may be set as the standard operation pattern, and instead of the standby time, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set.

For example, if the operation time is set to 3.9 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time it takes to change and display the second pattern is set to 0.1 seconds, the 0.1 seconds will be the time the de-energized state is maintained, resulting in an operation mode similar to that achieved by the first operation pattern.

For example, if the operation time is set to 0.2 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 1.8 seconds, the 1.8 seconds will be the time that the de-energized state is maintained, and as a result, an operation mode similar to that of the second operation pattern can be achieved.

Also, for example, if the operation time is set to 2.0 seconds as the standard operation pattern, and the time required for the fluctuating display of the second symbol is set to 2.0 seconds, the 2.0 seconds will be maintained in the de-energized state. As a result, an operation mode similar to that of the third operation pattern can be realized.

In the above first embodiment, a nail KG1 is disposed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b, and depending on the state of the nail KG1, the probability of a ball flowing downward from the internal flow path of the winning unit 400 entering the third winning opening 64b is changed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the switching device 5770 described in the fifth embodiment is disposed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning hole 64b, and depending on the timing of ball entry with respect to the operation of the switching device 5770, the third winning hole 64b It may also be possible to determine whether or not the ball is pitched. In this case, the ball can be entered into the third winning hole 64b regardless of the state of the nail KG1.

For example, a sorting device (for example, a seesaw mechanism) that introduces one out of every two (or N) balls into the third winning opening 64b is installed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b. ) may be provided. In this case, the player can play the game with peace of mind because the sorting device allows one out of every two (or N) balls to enter the third winning hole 64b regardless of the state of the nail KG1. be able to.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball flowing down above the through gates 66, 67 is guided to the through gates 66, 67 by the nail KG1, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a structure made of a resin material may be used to guide the through gates 66 and 67 instead of the nail KG1 or in combination with the nail KG1. In this case, since the resin material structure is less likely to change its state than the nail KG1, the guidance of the balls to the through gates 66 and 67 can be stabilized.

Also, for example, by reducing the number of nails KG1 or changing their positions, the balls flowing down above the through gates 66, 67 may not all pass through the through gates 66, 67, but all at once. The other balls may be configured to deviate from the through gates 66 and 67 and flow down.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 is detected, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 2, and a ball not picked up by the tilting member 470 enters the third winning hole 64b, making it possible to win a lottery for special pattern 1, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the allocation of the special symbols that can be used to win a lottery may be reversed (a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 is detected, so that a lottery for special symbol 1 can be won, and a ball not picked up by the tilting member 470 enters the third winning hole 64b, so that a lottery for special symbol 2 can be won). In this case, if the operation pattern of the electric device 640a after the big win ends is the second operation pattern in the case of big wins A and a, and the third operation pattern in the case of big wins B, C, b, and c, the same playability as that described in the first embodiment can be maintained. Furthermore, unlike the case described in the first embodiment, a small win game is likely to occur in a state in which a ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 64b, and since it is configured so that a ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball that has fallen from the third winning hole 64b is picked up by the specific winning hole 65a.

Furthermore, for example, under conditions where it is possible to win the special symbol 2 lottery by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, it is also possible to win the special symbol 2 lottery by entering the ball into the third winning slot 64b. It's good as well. In this case, the specific winning a prize opening 65a may be arranged in such a size and position that it does not protrude outward in the left and right direction from the left and right outer ends of the winning unit 400.

When the electric accessory 640a is driven in the second operation pattern, most of the balls that were picked up by the tip 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 are discharged from the winning unit 400 and go to the third winning port 64b side. Flow down. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is driven in the third operation pattern, most of the balls that were picked up by the tip part 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 are picked up by the tilting member 470, It does not flow out to the third prize opening 64b side. The specific winning hole 65a is arranged to receive the ball spilled from the third winning hole 64b among the balls ejected from the winning unit 400 and flowing down to the third winning hole 64b side, thereby creating new gaming characteristics. can be configured.

In other words, regardless of whether the electric device 640a is driven in the second or third operating pattern, it is possible to win the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, the specific winning hole 65a may be frequently opened and closed as a small prize game.

Here, when the electric accessory 640a is driven in the second operation pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip part 451 and flowing down inside the winning unit 400 flow down to the third winning opening 64b side. The player can receive a large amount of prize balls by spilling out of the third winning hole 64b and entering the specific winning hole 65a.

On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is driven in the third operating pattern, most of the balls do not head toward the specific winning hole 65a (they are picked up by the tilting member 470), making it difficult for the balls to enter the specific winning hole 65a, and the player is unable to receive a large number of winning balls.

In this way, regardless of whether the electric role device 640a is driven by the second or third operating pattern, the player can win the lottery for special pattern 2, so the specific winning opening 65a is frequently opened and closed, but the probability of the ball being guided to the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the operating pattern of the electric role device 640a, so that when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (when a small win game occurs), the ball can enter the specific winning opening 65a and a large number of winning balls can be obtained, and this creates a gameplay that does not occur.

In the first embodiment described above, the profit that the player can obtain from a ball that flows into the winning unit 400 is such that when the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, no special symbol is drawn and only prize balls are paid out, whereas when the ball passes through the third winning port 64b, special symbol 1 is drawn and prize balls are also paid out. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, special symbol 1 is drawn and prize balls are also paid out, whereas when the ball passes through the third winning port 64b, no special symbol is drawn and only prize balls are paid out.

In this case, in the first operation pattern, the ball rarely passes through the opening 435a, and in addition to the number of balls entering the first winning hole 64, the frequency of drawing special symbols 1 increases by passing through the opening 435a. do.

In the second operating pattern, the balls are picked up by the tip 451 and pass through the front side of the tilting member 470 when the electric role 640a is in an excited state, making it easier for them to enter the third winning opening 64b, so the frequency of drawing special symbols is not increased by balls that flow into the winning unit 400, and more prize balls are paid out. Even when the winning unit 400 is open so that balls can pass through the opening 435a, the rate at which balls pass through the opening 435a is 1 in 10, so when the opening 435a is open during operation time t2b, almost no balls flow into the opening 435a side. Therefore, in the second operating pattern, there is almost no increase in the frequency of drawing special symbol 1.

In the third operating pattern, the ball picked up by the tip 451 during standby time t3a is likely to be picked up by the tilting member 470 during operation time t3b, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 2 increases. Also, during operation time t3b, the ball can pass through the front side of the tip 451 and through the opening 435a, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 1 also increases.

In addition, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435a is used as an out port (opening where there is no payout of prize balls, no drawing of symbols, and ejects balls from the gaming area), and simply as a sensor for counting the passage of balls. It's okay. In this case, the frequency with which the ball passes through the aperture 435a can be measured by the aperture 435a.

Further, the function of the second winning hole 640 and the function of the third winning hole 64b may be set oppositely. In this case, it is sufficient to set the operating pattern for the special variable probability state as the second operating pattern, and set the operating pattern for the variable probability state as the third operating pattern, so that the ball enters the third winning hole 64b. A pachinko machine can be configured in which a small win is generated in a lottery, and a ball that deviates from the third winning hole 64b can enter a specific winning hole 65a.

As a result, if the state of the nail KG1 placed directly above the third winning opening 64b is such that it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning opening 64b, small wins are likely to occur, but few balls will miss the third winning opening 64b, so it is possible to prevent an excessive number of winnings at the specific winning opening 65a. On the other hand, if the state of the nail KG1 placed directly above the third winning opening 64b is such that it is difficult for the ball to enter the third winning opening 64b, small wins are unlikely to occur, but many balls will miss the third winning opening 64b, so once the specific winning opening 65a is opened, a large number of balls can enter the specific winning opening 65a. In other words, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine that balances whether it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning opening 64b (advantage/disadvantage) with whether it is easy for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a (disadvantage/advantage).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which up to four balls can be stored between the storage plate sections 715 in the upper variable prize winning device 700, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage plate portion 715 may be formed in such a shape that only one ball can be placed therebetween. In this case, the balls stopped between the storage plates 715 are on the moving floor member 740, and the balls that collided with the balls can flow into the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. In this case, whether the ball can easily pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be easily determined by checking the presence or absence of the ball between the storage plate parts 715. Compared to the case where it is necessary to count the number of balls in between, the burden on the player can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which multiple detection sensors 750 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the storage plate section 715 in the upper variable winning device 700, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of detection sensors 750 arranged may be one. Also, when one detection sensor is arranged, one may be left on the left or right side of the storage plate section 715 and the other may be excluded, or the detection sensor 750 may be arranged in a shifted position in front of or behind the storage plate section 715.

When the detection sensor 750 is arranged on the front side of the storage plate section 715, the ball passing through the opening section 751 can be easily seen by the player. On the other hand, when the detection sensor 750 is arranged on the back side of the storage plate section 715, an effect can be added in which the balls passing through the opening 751 are hidden by the balls stored in the storage plate section 715. The player's attention to the portion 751 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the relationship between the specified number in round play and the number of balls that can be stored between the storage plate section 715 in the upper variable winning device 700 is described as 10 to 4, but the relationship of the numbers can be determined arbitrarily and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of 10 to 10, a pachinko machine can be configured in which balls pass through the opening 751 when a number of balls exceeding the specified number wins in the upper variable winning device 700 (11 or more wins, over-win). In this case, the player can simultaneously be given the joy of an increase in the number of prize balls obtained in round play compared to when the specified number of balls remain in play, and the joy of being transferred to a more advantageous playing state after the big win game ends.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are interlocked, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device that drives the movable floor member 740 may be provided separately from a drive device that drives the movable upper lid member 730.

The motion pattern in this case can include a wide variety of motion patterns in addition to the motion pattern described in the first embodiment. For example, when the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position, the movable floor member 740 can also be placed in the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent the balls that have passed through the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 from being stored in the position between the storage plate portions 715, thereby reducing the possibility that the balls will enter the opening portion 751. .

Further, for example, when the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retreated position, the movable floor member 740 may be independently moved back and forth (repeatedly). In this case, if the period during which the movable floor member 740 is maintained in the retracted position is longer than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be ejected from the position between the storage plate portions 715, while the movable floor member 740 If the period during which the ball is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than 0.2 seconds, the ball can be held at a position between the storage plate portions 715.

For example, when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position, the movable floor member 740 can also be placed in the forward position. In this case, even if the movable top cover member 730 is driven to repeatedly open and close during a round of play, the balls can be maintained in a state of being stored in the position between the storage plate section 715. Furthermore, by creating a time lag of several seconds between when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position and when the movable floor member 740 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, in the case where a large number of balls enter the game together just before the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position, the balls can be prevented from being discharged from the position between the storage plate section 715 until the time when the balls reach the opening 751 side and can pass through the opening 751.

In the above first embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 is described as being opened and closed during a big win game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper variable winning device 700 may be configured to be opened and closed during a small win game, and the detection sensor 750 may be configured as a detection sensor that enables a big win game to be executed when a ball passes through the opening 751.

Here, in the case where the total open time of the upper variable winning device 700 in a small win game is set to 1.8 seconds, the movable upper cover member 730 can be placed in the retracted position up to 15 times (0.12 x 15 = 1.8) in a state where the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly displaced back and forth according to the rule that once it is placed in the retracted position, it is placed in the forward position every 0.12 seconds.

When the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the forward position and the movable floor member 740 is driven so that balls positioned between the storage plates 715 are not discharged, balls that flow down the front side of the movable top cover member 730 when the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the backward position can be stored in the position between the storage plates 715, making it easier to insert the balls into the opening 751. When the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are linked, this corresponds to a drive mode in which the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, when the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position and the movable floor member 740 is driven so that the balls placed between the storage plates 715 can be ejected, the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position. The balls that flow down the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 in a state where the ball is disposed in the upper lid member 730 are discharged one after another from the positions between the storage plate portions 715, making it difficult to enter the balls into the opening portion 751. When the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are interlocked, this corresponds to a driving mode in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more.

In a small win game, the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are opened and closed in a predetermined drive pattern. When the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are linked, it is preferable to have a large number of balls enter the upper variable winning device 700 during a period in which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, but it is difficult to tell the difference between 0.1 seconds and 0.3 seconds, for example.

Therefore, as a drive pattern for the small winning game, the timing is moved forward by the period until the fired ball reaches the period in which the movable upper lid member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds. Then, a notification may be made to prompt the player to shoot the ball toward the upper variable winning device 700. If the ball is fired in accordance with this notification, the ball can be stored at a position between the storage plate parts 715 and the ball can be easily entered into the opening 751. In this way, by notifying the appropriate timing for firing the ball, it is possible to easily avoid ball loss due to firing the ball at a timing other than the notification.

As a drive pattern for the small winning game, two periods are prepared in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, and during that period the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position. When a period in which the state in which the moving upper lid member 730 is in the forward position is repeated for 0.2 seconds or more is arranged, the first period in which the state in which the movable upper lid member 730 is in the forward position is repeated for less than 0.2 seconds is arranged. If the ball does not enter the opening 751, the upper variable prize winning device is activated before the second period in which the state in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds is repeated. A notification may be issued to encourage the player to shoot the ball toward 700.

In this case, even if the ball cannot be launched due to a blockage in the ball launcher, if the period during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more is set to a long period (for example, 15 seconds), the possibility of repairing the blockage in the ball launcher during that period can be increased.

Note that the timing, which is advanced by the period until the shot ball arrives, can be changed depending on the arrangement of the upper variable winning device 700. If it is placed near the upper end of the gaming area as in the first embodiment, it will take 1 to 2 seconds, but if it is placed at the lower right edge of the gaming area, it will be longer, and on the upstream side. Depending on the length of the ball path (the path formed by the nail KG1 or the path formed by the resin member), the width varies from about 5 to 10 seconds.

Moreover, although the case where the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are linked is illustrated, in the case where the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are configured to be driven independently, the movable floor member 740 moves backward. The above-mentioned notification may be made by aiming at a period in which the device is repeatedly operated in a driving mode in which the period in which the device is placed in a certain position is less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, since the operation mode of the movable floor member 740 and the operation mode of the movable upper cover member 730 do not correspond, the operation of the movable floor member 740 is It is difficult to make a correspondence. Therefore, attention to the above-mentioned notification can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the ball is easily allowed to enter the opening 751 while it is stored between the pair of storage plates 715, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, a state change means may be provided that changes the state between an induction state in which the ball is guided to the opening 751 and a non-induction state in which the ball is not guided, depending on the operation, and the operation of the state change means may be performed by the kinetic energy of the ball discharged from the pair of storage plates 715. In this case, a gaming machine can be configured that makes it easy to allow the ball to enter the opening 751 after it has been discharged from between the pair of storage plates 715.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls prevent the balls from entering the pair of storage plate sections 715, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening/closing means may be provided to switch whether or not a ball can enter the area between the pair of storage plates 715. In this case, even before the position between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is filled with balls, the opening/closing means can create a state in which balls cannot enter between the pair of storage plate parts 715. It is possible to create a situation where the light passes through the opening 751.

In this case, various aspects can be exemplified as the size of the opening/closing means, but by making the size in front view smaller than the size of the sphere, the opening/closing means can be made inconspicuous. The timing at which the ball will flow into the opening 751 can be made difficult for the player to predict.

In addition, by making the size of the opening/closing means larger than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, it is possible for the player to easily grasp the state of the opening/closing means and to easily determine whether or not the ball will flow into the opening 751.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is guided to the area between a pair of storage plates 715 with a high probability, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail KG1 may be arranged between the storage plates 715 and the second specific winning opening 700a in such a position that it can come into contact with the ball.

This makes it easier for an irregular winning to occur, in which a ball that collides with the nail KG1 passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 before the area between the pair of storage plate sections 715 becomes full. In particular, irregular winning is more likely to occur when the flow of the balls is disturbed due to contact between the balls, such as when multiple balls pass through the second specific winning port 700a in succession.

On the other hand, the nail KG1 is positioned so that it is not in contact with the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections 715. This allows the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections 715 to be discharged smoothly.

Note that the nails do not necessarily need to be placed in such a way that they can come into contact with the ball. For example, a protrusion may be provided that protrudes forward from the base plate member 710, and the protrusion may collide with the ball. In this case, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the protrusion can be improved compared to the case of nail KG1. For example, by forming the protrusion in the shape of a protrusion that is long in the left-right direction and slopes downward as it approaches the opening 751, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be guided to the opening 751.

Also, for example, a movable member may be disposed on the front side of the base plate member 710, and the ball that collides with the movable member may be given momentum by the movable member, so that the ball may be guided into the opening 751. The movement of the movable member may be a rotational movement, a sliding movement in a linear direction, or a combination of these movements.

In addition, for example, the second specific winning opening 700a may move back and forth in the left-right direction, or the detection sensor 750 and the storage plate section 715 may move back and forth in the left-right direction, so that depending on the timing, a ball that passes through the second specific winning opening 700a may flow to the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 rather than to the pair of storage plate sections 715.

In the first embodiment, the balls are stored directly below the second specific winning port 700a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passageway is formed downstream of the second specific winning port 700a, and an opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 is formed at the downstream end of the ball passageway. A ball storage section extends downward at a midpoint of the ball passageway, and a movable floor member 740 is disposed at the lower end of the ball storage section. When the ball storage section becomes full, the following balls roll over the top ball in the ball storage section and flow downstream through the ball passageway, and the balls pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

In addition, the opening direction of the second specific winning opening 700a may be oriented diagonally, and the member for opening and closing the second specific winning opening 700a may not be slidably displaced, but may be rotated (for example, A tulip-type opening/closing member composed of a pair of opening/closing members) may also be used.

In addition, the direction of the ball path extending obliquely downward to the downstream side of the second specific winning opening 700a is not limited at all. For example, it may be diagonally downward when viewed from the front (diagonally downward as one goes toward the left and right sides), or diagonally downward when viewed from left and right (diagonally downward as one goes toward the front and rear sides).

In particular, when the angle is downward toward the rear, the opening 751 can be positioned closer to the player than the ball storage section. This makes the balls passing through the opening 751 more noticeable than the balls stored in the ball storage section, making it easier for the player to see the balls passing through the opening 751.

In the first embodiment, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plates 715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plates 715 is constant, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical position of the upper surface of the movable floor member 740 may change in the vertical direction over time, or the movable floor member 740 may be a plurality of plate members on which the balls at the lower ends of the storage plates 715 are placed, arranged in a vertical direction, and operated to be opened in order from the top. By changing the vertical position of the ball placed at the bottom end of the plurality of balls placed between the pair of storage plates 715, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plates 715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plates 715 may be changed.

Further, the storage plate portions 715 may be configured to be movable so that the left-right distance between the pair of storage plate portions 715 changes. In this case, if the left-right distance is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, it will be full with 4, but if the left-right distance is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, then 8 Since the ball is filled up with only one ball, the difficulty level of passing the ball through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be changed.

Moreover, even in the case where the tank is filled with four pieces, compared to the case where the left-right distance between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, the pair of storage plate parts 715 If the left and right distance between the balls 715 is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, the vertical length of the storage plate 715 can be halved, so the height dimension for storing the balls can be reduced. Can be shortened. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the storage plate portion 715 can be improved.

In the first embodiment described above, a case was described in which the balls placed in the position between the pair of storage plates 715 were configured to be always visible, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the balls in the position between the storage plates 715 may be configured to be less visible (for example, by being configured to be concealed by a movable member, or to be made difficult to see by adjusting the amount of light). In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict when the position between the pair of storage plates 715 will be filled with balls.

Although the case where the number of balls stored between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is four has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It may be 0, 1, 3, or 5 or more. For example, by setting the number to eight (a number close to the specified number), it is possible to greatly reduce the possibility that a ball will pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in the third special operation pattern.

In the first embodiment described above, the balls are stored in a position between a pair of storage plate sections 715, and when the movable floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the balls are discharged from the play area through the ball removal opening 782, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the balls are discharged into a crane with multiple holes.

This Kruun has one of the multiple holes designated as a specific hole that has the same function as the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. Even if the moving floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position during a round of play without being able to confirm that the ball has passed through the opening 751, and the ball is released from a position between a pair of storage plate sections 715, the player may still be able to gain an advantage by having the ball enter the specific hole of the Kruun, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the ball that is released from a position between the pair of storage plate sections 715.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball following the stored ball rather than a ball stored at a position between the pair of storage plate parts 715 can pass through the opening 751, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the middle part of the storage plate part 715 is configured to be openable and closable, and the detection sensor 750 is also disposed downstream of the opening/closing part, so that when the middle part of the storage plate part 715 is opened, It may be configured such that any one of the balls stored between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is allowed to flow and pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment described above, the driving device for the movable upper lid member 730 and the driving device for the movable floor member 740 are both solenoids 763, and the case where the operation of the movable upper lid member 730 and the operation of the movable floor member 740 are linked is explained. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device separate from the solenoid 763 may be provided to drive the movable floor member 740 so that they can operate independently of each other. In this case, in addition to the operation mode described in the first embodiment, there may be a case where both the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are placed in the forward position, or when both the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are placed in the forward position. It is possible to configure the case where the device is placed in the retracted position.

In the first embodiment, the movable top cover member 730 is formed in a plate shape that slopes downward on both the left and right sides, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable top cover member 730 may be formed in a flat plate shape that slopes in one direction. Even in this case, the order of operations in which the movable floor member 740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member 730 begins to displace toward the retreated position functions appropriately, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball that flows along the front side of the movable top cover member 730 at the same time as the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the retreated position passes the front side of the movable floor member 740 before the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the forward position.

In the first embodiment, the operation sequence is such that the movable floor member 740 moves to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable upper lid member 730 starts moving towards the retreat position, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the order of operation may be reversed.

In addition, although a case has been described in which the movable upper cover member 730 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable floor member 740 starts to displace toward the retracted position, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the operating order may be reversed.

In the above first embodiment, the front surface of the base plate member 710 arranged on the back side of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 arranged in the forward position is a smooth surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple deceleration protrusions protruding from the front surface of the base plate member 710 to the front side in a long protrusion shape in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 (for example, the vertical direction) may be arranged along the flow direction of the ball. Alternatively, or in addition, the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 may be formed in a stepped shape to slow down the flow speed of the ball.

As a result, the speed of the balls rolling and flowing down the upper surface of the movable upper lid member 730 can be reduced, so that the movable upper lid member 730 can be moved by opening the movable upper lid member 730 once (displacing from the forward position to the retreating position). Since the number of balls passing through the front side of the ball can be increased, when the movable upper lid member 730 is in the closed state (disposed in the forward position), the balls can be prevented from falling out from between the pair of storage plates 715. Even with this configuration, balls can be easily stored between the pair of storage plate sections 715, and the possibility that the balls will pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the pair of storage plates 715, the movable floor member 740, and the detection sensor 750 are disposed downstream of the movable upper lid member 730, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration of the movable upper lid member 730 may be omitted, and the balls may always be allowed to flow down toward the pair of storage plate portions 715, the movable floor member 740, or the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the movable upper lid member 730 is operated in the first round to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 700a, and in the second round and subsequent round games, the specific winning hole 65a is opened. Although the case where the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. It is possible to arbitrarily set which specific winning hole 65a, 700a is controlled so that the ball can be entered in which round game.

For example, the movable upper lid member 730 may also be operated in the second round and subsequent round games to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 700a. In this case, it can be configured so that the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a only in small winning games (in all round games, the movable upper lid member 730 is operated and the ball enters the second specific winning opening 700a). (equivalent to the case where the ball is controlled by the player), it is possible to avoid the setting of the number of prize balls to be paid out for the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a from affecting the number of prize balls in the jackpot game.

Therefore, for example, by setting the number of prize balls to be paid out for a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a to be larger than the number of prize balls to be paid out for a ball that enters the second specific winning hole 700a, the number of prize balls for a jackpot game can be increased. It is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of prize balls in small winning games is increased while suppressing the amount of damage.

In addition, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to be less than the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the second specific winning port 700a, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that limits the number of prize balls awarded for small win games (for example, to a level that maintains the same number of prize balls as the number of fired balls) while increasing the number of prize balls awarded for big win games.

In addition, when the movable top cover member 730 is operated in multiple rounds of play and controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, in the event that the game state after a big win game changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the opening 751, if the game ball passes through the opening 751 in at least one round of play controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, the game ball is deemed to have passed through the opening 751.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the drawing of special pattern 1 does not result in a small win, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible for both special pattern 1 and special pattern 2 to be determined as a small win, or it may be configured so that special pattern 1 can be determined as a small win, but special pattern 2 cannot be determined as a small win.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the operation pattern of the electric role 640a during normal operation is the first operation pattern has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the operation pattern of the electric role 640a during normal operation may be configured to be the third operation pattern.

In this case, it is possible for the ball to enter the second winning slot 640 during normal play (low probability state for special symbols), but the time for which special symbol 2 fluctuates during the low probability state for special symbols is set to a long period (10 minutes in this embodiment) except in the case of a jackpot, so it is rare for a jackpot to be won by drawing special symbol 2, and so a gameplay that basically aims for a jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 by the ball entering the first winning slot 64 can be created.

In this case, for example, if the game state after the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot B is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is won, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role device 640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed, the electric role device 640a will be operated in the third operation pattern after the 101st special symbol drawing, which is the same as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot A. In other words, it is possible to configure a case in which the game transitions to a special probability state after the end of the jackpot game and after a specified number of special symbol drawings (100 in the first embodiment above).

In addition, in the case of jackpot C, the state in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern is configured to continue until the special symbol lottery ends 100 times, and when the 101st special symbol is drawn. After the lottery, the electric accessory 640a is controlled to operate in the third operation pattern, but since it is in a special symbol low probability state, it simply shifts to the normal state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the allocation of the jackpot type is different between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the allocation of the jackpot type may be set to be the same for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. In this case, since there is no difference regardless of which special symbol is used to win the jackpot, the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 1 and the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 2 can be regarded as the same. In this case, for example, by excluding the case where the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed with a long-term fluctuation (for example, a 10-minute fluctuation) and setting the fluctuation time to the same as the fluctuation time selected in the lottery for special symbol 1, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is 8 (the sum of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, which is 4, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, which is 4).

In addition, for example, the ratio of the jackpot type of special pattern 1 in which the game state after the jackpot play ends is a high probability state and the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot play ends is a low probability state (1:1 in the first embodiment above) may be different from the ratio of the jackpot type of special pattern 2 in which the game state after the jackpot play ends is a high probability state and the jackpot type in which the game state after the jackpot play ends is a low probability state (1:1 in the first embodiment above).

In this case, by configuring the jackpot type with special pattern 2 to have a higher proportion of high probability game states after the jackpot game ends compared to the jackpot with special pattern 1, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that can transition to a state where jackpots with special pattern 2 are likely to occur consecutively.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the direction operation unit display 816 can be displayed at the same time as the company name display effect and the card forget prevention display effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the company name display effect or the card forget prevention display effect, an adjustment period may be provided during which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the volume and light amount can be adjusted. In this case, the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 means the end timing of the adjustment period and the start timing of the variable performance after the end of the jackpot game. By visually confirming this, actions from adjusting the volume and light intensity during the adjustment period to firing the ball after the start timing of the variable performance can be smoothly performed at the appropriate timing.

The duration of the ending performance is determined by the type of jackpot, but the internal structure of the ending performance can be changed even if the type of jackpot is the same. When an adjustment period is set, the period during which the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance are executed is narrower than when an adjustment period is not set, but by shortening the duration of any of the performances or executing multiple performances simultaneously, the ending performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Whether or not to provide an adjustment period can be set arbitrarily, but for example, if the effect executed during a jackpot game is one in which the light intensity is particularly likely to be strong (strongest light intensity) among multiple variations, or if the effect is especially loud. If it is determined that the volume is likely to become loud (maximum volume), an adjustment period may be provided in the ending effect. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the gaming burden on the player.

Regardless of whether an adjustment period is provided, the length of the ending display effect, company name display effect, and card forgetting prevention display effect can be changed. For example, during a series of jackpots, the length of the company name display effect and card forgetting prevention display effect, which do not increase the amount of information even if viewed multiple times in a short period of time, can be shortened or displayed simultaneously, thereby lengthening the ending display effect accordingly. The ending display effect displays information that is highly important to the player, such as the number of prize balls actually won (this can be only for the jackpot game currently being played, or the accumulated number during the jackpot game) and the game status after the jackpot game ends, so by lengthening the display period, the possibility that the player will miss that information can be reduced.

For example, if the game state after the end of a jackpot game is a low probability state, there is a high possibility that the winning streak will come to an end, and therefore the player is likely to finish playing and leave the seat. Therefore, by lengthening the length of the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will forget to take their cards home.

For example, when the gaming state changes to a special probability state after the end of a jackpot game, this is the timing when the player's expectations for the ball payout are at their highest, so by making the company name display visible at this timing, the current It is possible to improve the impression of the pachinko machine being played and the manufacturing company. In addition, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, players' expectations will increase, so by setting the company name display to be longer as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, it will give a better impression. be able to.

In the above first embodiment, a case where volume and light intensity adjustment is possible in the ending performance has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to determine whether volume and light intensity adjustment has been performed in the ending performance, and the result of this determination may affect the decision on the variable performance after the ending performance has ended.

For example, if a specific effect (such as a one-shot announcement effect) is prepared as a variable effect that tends to increase the light intensity or volume compared to the normal main symbol stop notification, the light intensity may be changed during the immediately preceding ending effect. Even though the adjustment has been made to lower the level, if certain effects are executed, it may cause further fatigue to players whose eyes are already tired from the light, and they may have to stop playing the game midway. may be interrupted. Therefore, if an adjustment is made to lower the light intensity during the immediately preceding ending performance, the specific performance is controlled so as not to be performed, so that the game can be continued while waiting for the player to recover from fatigue.

In addition, if the player performs an operation to change the song that is played in the gaming state after the jackpot game is over during a jackpot game, the player must have felt that he/she wants to hear that song, so In the ending performance of the jackpot game, a period for displaying the direction operation section display 816 may be secured.

In the first embodiment, the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 at the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the normal symbol variation display is still ongoing at the end of the ending performance and there is a time difference between the end of the ending performance and the start of the next variation of the normal symbol, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 may be shifted (delayed) from the end of the ending performance by the amount of the time difference. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters the winning unit 400 in which the electric role 640a is operating in the operation pattern (operation pattern in the normal state, first operation pattern) that is continuing from the jackpot game, even though the ball is shot after the ending performance.

In other words, the winning unit is in a state where the electric accessory 640a is operating the ball fired after the ending performance in the operating pattern (second operating pattern or third operating pattern) after transitioning from the end of the jackpot game. You can get the ball into the 400.

Even in this case, when the ending performance ends, if there are any reserved balls with special symbols, the special symbols will start to change after the ending performance ends. On the other hand, since it is desired to continue displaying the time display 811, for example, the display of the ending performance may continue in the main display area Dm, the change in the special symbols may be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, and as soon as the timing for the next change in the normal symbols to start arrives, the display in the small area Ds3 may be expanded and moved to the main display area Dm3.

Since the special symbol will be moved on the screen, it is preferable to move it before it becomes a low-speed fluctuation (reach, etc.). Therefore, in the above-mentioned display mode (movement of special symbols), the time difference between the end timing of the ending effect and the start timing of the next variation of the normal symbol is greater than the time it takes to shift to the low-speed variation of the special symbol. It may be possible to perform this only when a specific condition is met that the length is shorter than .

However, since the decision on the variable performance is made at the start of the variation, it will be after the end of the ending performance. Therefore, it is unclear during the ending performance whether or not the above-described display mode can be performed, so after the ending performance is completed, the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the above-mentioned specific conditions are met. In this case, the terminal position 812 may be moved to the right or a number such as "+2 seconds" may be displayed to notify that the ball launch timing has fallen later. In this case, it is thought that the player starts firing the ball when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, but if the player is notified that the ball firing timing has fallen back immediately after that, then The player who sees this can stop the ball from being launched. This allows ball loss to be minimized.

In the first embodiment described above, the specific display 810, the frame button display 813, and other displays are displayed on a portion of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, they may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen (full screen display), or may be displayed on different portions of the display screen.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time display 811 is displayed from the beginning of the ending performance has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time display 811 may be displayed midway through the ending performance, or may be displayed by operating the frame button 22. Also, the time display 811 may be displayed or disappear each time the frame button 22 is operated.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the time display 811 is displayed as a bar, but the time display 811 is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an arbitrary number may be displayed on the display screen, and the number may be displayed to count down to a target value (for example, 0 (zero)), or may be displayed to count up to a target value (for example, 600). . In this case, it is possible for the player to easily determine the timing at which the display reaches the target value (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812).

Further, this display is not limited to the case where it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. For example, a second display device different from the third symbol display device 81 or a 7-segment display device may be prepared, and a countdown or count-up display may be performed on the second display device or the 7-segment display device. It's okay.

Note that the time display 811 may be expressed using both a bar and a countdown (countup). For example, in addition to displaying the time display 811 as a bar, a number (for example, 3) is displayed on the display screen several seconds (for example, 3 seconds before) before the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, and the number is A countdown display may also be performed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily determine the timing at which the display becomes 0 (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid even if the frame button display 813 is not displayed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light emitting means may be disposed inside the frame button 22, and the light emitting means may be controlled to emit light at the timing when the frame button 22 can be operated. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the position of the operation target (frame button 22).

In the first embodiment, in the ending effect, the company name display effect is executed when the game state that enters after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is performed in the jackpot game. Although a case has been described in which the process is executed when the number of payouts is equal to or greater than eight rounds (a predetermined number or more), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the conditions for executing the company name display effect and the conditions for executing the card forgetting prevention display effect may be replaced.

In addition, at least one of the company name display effect and the card forget prevention display effect may be set to always be executed every time a jackpot is played, regardless of the type of jackpot, or may be set to be executed at a specified number of jackpots (for example, an odd-numbered jackpot during a winning streak, or a jackpot that is a multiple of three, etc.).

The content of the ending performance is not limited to the company name display performance or the card forget prevention display performance, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it is possible to display a string of text to calm the player, such as "Pachinko is a game. Be careful not to get addicted to it," to display a video explaining the store attendant call button to inexperienced players, or to display an action explaining the button operation to return the movable role to the standby position. While any of these displays are being executed, it is possible to display the frame button display 813 to encourage the operation of the frame button 22, or to display the time display 811 to notify the timing of the transition to the next performance.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the most advantageous state for the player is a special probability variable state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the state after the jackpot game is different depending on whether it is a variable probability state or a time saving state (normal state) (if it does not shift to a special variable probability state), the most advantageous state for the player is determined to be the variable probability state.

In addition, if the state after the end of a jackpot game is only the time-saving state and there is a difference in the number of lotteries that will continue the time-saving state, the state that will continue the time-saving state for the greatest number of lotteries will be considered the most advantageous state for the player.

In addition, if the state after the end of a jackpot game is only the high probability state, and one jackpot type continues in the high probability state until the next jackpot, while the other jackpot type transitions to a special high probability state after a specified number of draws (such as when the operation pattern of the electric role 640a in the normal state is set to the third operation pattern), the other jackpot type has an advantage in terms of the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a small jackpot game in the special high probability state, so the state after the end of the jackpot of the other jackpot type is considered to be the most enjoyable state for the player.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ending display effect is always executed in the ending effect is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be configured in which the ending display effect is not executed. In particular, for a jackpot type in which the number of prize balls paid out is extremely small compared to other jackpot types (for example, a sudden special jackpot or a sudden normal jackpot), omitting the ending display effect can prevent the player from being aware of the extremely small number of prize balls paid out, and can also start the pattern change sooner after the jackpot game ends.

In particular, when creating a presentation that allows the player to play without making the boundary between the special probability variable state and the jackpot game less noticeable (for example, a presentation that displays the total number of winning balls in the small win game and the jackpot game), the ending display presentation can be omitted during the consecutive wins and executed at the end of the consecutive wins, so that the special probability variable state and the jackpot game can be viewed as one advantageous state for the player.

The above content is not limited to the ending display effects. For example, company name display effects and card forgetting prevention display effects may be displayed in the ending display of the first big win that starts a consecutive win, but may not be displayed during the consecutive win, regardless of the type of big win.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the prize ball display 801 and the identification display 802 are displayed on the screen at the same timing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the prize ball display 801 is displayed on the screen, the identification display 802 may be displayed after the display is switched. In this case, the player can be made to understand separately the profit obtained in the jackpot game and the profit that can be obtained after transferring from the jackpot game, so that the burden on the player in playing the game can be reduced.

In the first embodiment described above, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are all set to the same length (5 seconds), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the duration of each effect can be set arbitrarily for each type of jackpot. For example, the execution period of the card forgetting prevention display effect may be set longer than the other effects (e.g., 10 seconds, etc.), or the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be executed repeatedly.

In addition, when performing it repeatedly, it may be repeated continuously, or it may be repeated with other effects in between. For example, the ending display effect (second time) may be displayed after the card forgetting prevention display effect ends. At this time, in the first ending display performance, the prize ball display 801 is displayed, but the identification display 802 and reliability display 803 are not displayed, and in the second ending display performance, the identification display 802 and reliability display 803 are displayed. The prize ball display may not be displayed.

This allows the timing of notifying the player of the profit (number of winning balls) that the player achieved in the jackpot game to be separated from the timing of notifying the player of the game status after the jackpot game ends, thereby reducing the burden on the player. Also, by displaying content that is of high interest to the player (identification display 802 in the above example) towards the end of the ending performance, the player's attention to the ending performance can be maintained at a high level.

In addition, if content that is of great interest to the player (in the above example, the identification display 802) can be displayed at a specific timing in the ending presentation, the frame button 22 may be operated before the timing to switch to that display. In other words, by displaying the frame button 813, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the third pattern display device 81, and by operating the frame button 22, it is possible to give the player the feeling that he or she is participating in the game, and by displaying the identification display 802 immediately after operating the frame button 22, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player misses the identification display 802.

Note that the length of the ending performance is not limited to several seconds, and the length can be set arbitrarily (for example, depending on the type of jackpot). That is, in addition to an ending effect that ends in a few seconds, an ending effect that takes several minutes may be prepared.

In the first embodiment described above, the lengths of the ending display performance, the company name display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance in the ending performance are set to be the same (5 seconds), and the ending performance depends on the combination of the performances executed. Although the case where the execution period changes has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the execution period of the ending performance is fixed and the company name display performance is set to be short, the card forgetting prevention display performance may be configured to be long instead.

In this case, a player who understands that the company name display effect has ended in a short period of time can know at that point that the card forgetting prevention display effect will be longer, and can therefore understand that the time available to change the volume and light settings will be longer, which can increase the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the company name display effect is executed after the ending display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed after the company name display effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display order of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance can be set arbitrarily, and the card forgetting prevention display performance may be executed before the company name display performance.

Further, any two of the ending display effect, company name display effect, and card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be executed simultaneously (performed in parallel). In this case, in order to avoid overlapping displays, it is preferable to separate the display positions on the third symbol display device 81. According to this, compared to the case where the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are executed in sequence (executed in series), the time required for the ending effect is equal to the amount of time required to execute the effects simultaneously. can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the company name display effect is executed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be prepared in which the ending display effect and the company name display effect are executed, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is omitted.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the frame button display 813 and the direction operation section display 816 are displayed after the ending display effect and the settings can be changed, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, the ending display effect may be executed after a period in which the frame button display 813 and the direction operation unit display 816 are displayed and settings can be changed has elapsed.

In this case, the period during which the frame button display 813 and the direction operation section display 816 are displayed may start after entering the ending effect (after the round game of the final round is finished), or may start after the end of the round game of the final round. It may also be started during the end of the round game at the end of the game. In either case, it is possible to smoothly transition from the ending display performance to the variable performance.

Note that the timing at which the direction operation section display 816 is displayed and the direction operation section 45 becomes operable is not limited to after the frame button 22 is operated. For example, there may be a case where the frame button display 813 is not displayed and the direction operation section display 816 is displayed so that the direction operation section 45 can be operated without operating the frame button 22.

In the above first embodiment, the directional control display 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the specific display 810 is moved to the edge of the display screen and visible even while the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is continued. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the card forgetting prevention display effect disappears when the volume or light intensity is adjusted, based on the determination that a player who is about to leave his/her seat is unlikely to adjust the volume or light intensity again.

In the above first embodiment, it was explained that operating the frame button 22 while the frame button display 813 is displayed transitions to the adjustment screen, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may transition to the adjustment screen while the frame button 22 is pressed, and return to the screen before operation when the frame button 22 is released. This allows the player to understand that using both hands is optimal for changing the settings of the volume and light intensity, and allows the player to take their hands off the handle 51, thereby suppressing the launch of balls during the ending performance.

In addition, before the player operates the frame button 22, a message may be displayed saying "You can change the light intensity and volume settings by pressing the frame button." This allows the player to immediately understand that two-handed operation is required. By requiring two-handed operation during the ending performance, it is possible to suppress the launch of balls at a timing when the player would be less profitable if they were to be launched. In other words, the notification may be made in a manner that causes the player to operate multiple operating means simultaneously at a timing when the player would be more profitable if they suppressed the launch of game balls.

In addition, for example, each time the frame button 22 is operated, it may be possible to switch between a state (display mode) in which the volume setting can be changed and a state (display mode) in which the light intensity setting can be changed.

For example, during the ending performance, while the frame button 22 is pressed, the screen will shift to the adjustment screen, and when the frame button 22 is released, the screen will return to the previous screen. Once the screen is moved to the presentation display screen, the control may be such that the volume and light intensity can be adjusted even if the frame button 22 is not pressed. This prevents the player from being forced to perform operations with both hands until after the ending performance has ended, so the player can change the settings of the volume and light intensity while operating the handle 51.

In the first embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated according to the frame button display 813 during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the specific display 810 moves to the edge of the screen, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, if the player operates the frame button 22 according to the frame button display 813 during execution of the company name display effect, the manufacturing company name (Company A) as the specific display 810 is displayed at the top left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The card may be moved to a corner (end side), and then a card forgetting prevention display may be displayed on the specific display 810. While the company name display effect is being executed, the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player that the settings of the volume and light intensity can be changed. good.

In addition, even if the specific display 810 is displayed at the edge of the display screen, if the volume or light setting is not changed within a specified time (e.g., within 2 seconds), the specific display 810 may be set to return to the center of the screen (the position before it was moved).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the settings of the volume and light intensity can be changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if there are variations (first aspect, second aspect) in the pattern of the special symbol variation effect during the special probability change, probability change, or time saving period that transitions from the ending effect, select one of them. It may also be possible to make it possible to change these settings. Here, the combination of the first aspect and the second aspect can be set arbitrarily, but for example, a combination of a black and white display mode and a color display mode, a cartoon-like display mode and an anime-like display mode, etc. For example, a combination of a display mode that requires a repeated press operation of the frame button 22 and a display mode that requests a long press operation of the frame button 22 is exemplified.

For example, if the setting of the music (theme song, etc.) played during a jackpot performance or during a variable performance can be changed, it may be possible to change the music setting during the ending performance. Instead of during the ending performance, it may be during a fanfare performance, during a round of play, during the interval between rounds, or during a period spanning all of these.

In the above first embodiment, it has been described that during the ending performance, the end timing of the ending performance is notified by the time display 811 and the end position 812, and the displayed performance changes in response to the operation of the frame button 22, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, notification of the end timing or start timing of the performance, or a change in the displayed performance in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed while the patterns are changing or during a reach, or may be performed during a performance during a jackpot game other than the ending performance.

For example, when this is done during the changing of the patterns or during a reach, the timing at which the end of the presentation is notified may be when the changing of the special patterns stops, or when the pseudo-continuous change as a presentation starts. In the former case, the number of reserved balls for the special pattern is reduced by one, making it possible to win a lottery for a new special pattern, so this is an appropriate timing to encourage the player to fire the ball. In the latter case, if the change in the special pattern itself takes several minutes, the player's concentration can be maintained by dividing it into short intervals along the way.

When the frame button 22 is operated in conjunction with the frame button display 813 at the end of the reach, if it is a jackpot, the screen shifts to the jackpot display screen, and if it is a miss, the display screen shifts to the miss display screen. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player looking at the frame button display 813 to understand the result of the change in the special symbol.

For example, it may be performed during a performance during a jackpot game excluding the ending performance. During the round, the operation of the frame button display 813 and the frame button 22 may be performed, for example, by promotion effects (for example, in a fanfare effect, the effect announces that there is a 4th round jackpot, but in reality it is a 15th round jackpot), etc. This can be used for a performance that notifies the player of a jackpot that will allow the player to obtain a profit higher than the profit expected to be obtained by the fanfare performance.

In particular, in the case of the first embodiment described above, where the game state after the end of a jackpot game changes depending on whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 during a round of play, by displaying the frame button display 813 during that round of play and encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the opening 751, causing the player to fail to check whether or not the ball has passed through the opening 751.

When the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a movable part that juts out in front of the display screen, if the frame button 22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display 813 during a round and the movable part is controlled to jut out in front of the display screen when a promotion performance is executed, the player can easily tell from the movement of the movable part that the promotion performance has been successful. Even if the frame button 22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display 813 during a round, when a promotion performance is not executed (when the notification in the fanfare performance and the actual notification are the same), the movable part is controlled not to jut out in front of the display screen, making it easy for the player to know that the promotion performance has failed.

For example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during the game instruction display effect (demo screen) that is executed when the first symbol is not drawn for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the notification can let the player know that the game instruction display effect has been completed.

In addition, for example, in a game in which a ball is to pass through a specified detection port within a specified time, a notification of the end timing of the effect or a change in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed if the ball has not yet passed through the specified detection port within the specified time. In this case, the notification can make the player aware that the ball has not passed through the detection port.

Also, for example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during the fanfare effect in a big win game or during the interval between rounds. In this case, the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a will be opened at the end of the effect, so the player can easily know the appropriate timing to shoot the ball.

In addition, for example, notification of the end of the effect and changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during a period that includes multiple rounds of play and multiple intervals between rounds in a jackpot game. This makes it possible to create an effect that lasts longer than the time set for a single round of play or the interval between rounds, and by making it possible to notify the player of the end of the long-lasting effect and change the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22, the player can be kept focused on the game without getting bored.

In the first embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effect has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the number of reserved balls for the first pattern becomes 0. In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be made visible to the player even before winning the jackpot.

Further, for example, it may be executed at the start of a long-term (for example, 60 seconds or more) fluctuation of the first symbol. In this case, players who are thinking of purchasing drinks or the like during their free time can be notified that the first symbol will begin to fluctuate for a long period of time, and also prevent them from forgetting their cards when they leave their seats. It can alert you.

In the first embodiment described above, the period during which the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed and the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable is described as being until the end of the ending performance, or during the first fluctuation after the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set during the high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol while the first symbol is fluctuating, or during the medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. In this case, the player can grasp the timing of the transition from the high-speed fluctuation display to the medium-speed fluctuation display, or the timing of the transition from the medium-speed fluctuation display to the low-speed fluctuation display (during the reach display, etc.) from the timing at which the period during which the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed and the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable ends.

Further, it may be possible to configure a period during which the direction operation section display 816 is displayed and the light amount and volume can be adjusted during the variation of the special symbol (including during the display of low-speed variation). In this case, the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed in the small area Ds3, or the display may be interchangeable between the small area Ds3 and the main display area Dm.

In this case, while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, a notification is made suggesting that an adjustable period is available, and then a notification of that period is made, the frame button display 813 and the like is displayed, the directional control display 816 can be displayed, and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted. In this case, even while the special symbols are being displayed in a changing state, the player's interest can be shifted in stages, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the player does not realize that an adjustable period is available.

In addition to this, the adjustment of the volume and light intensity may be controlled so that it remains effective from the next change onwards, and if the special symbol that changed when the volume and light intensity adjustment was made becomes a jackpot, the player may be controlled so that the jackpot game can be played while maintaining the volume and light intensity adjustment.

In addition, for example, the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until multiple fluctuations are completed, rather than being limited to the first fluctuation, or the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until the fluctuation of the first pattern reaches a predetermined state (for example, a long-term fluctuation, a fluctuation that results in a jackpot, etc.).

In addition, in the latter half of the variable performance that results in a jackpot, or in a fanfare performance, a period may be provided in which the directional control display 816 is displayed and the light intensity and volume can be adjusted. In this case, the volume can be set during the jackpot, and the player can know the start timing of the jackpot game from the end timing of the period.

In the first embodiment, the terminal position 812 is fixed, and the time display 811 moves over time, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the speed at which the time display 811 moves may be constant, or the speed at which the time display 811 moves may be changed midway. Also, for example, the right end of the time display 811 may be configured to move in the opposite direction (leftward) in some cases.

Further, for example, the terminal position 812 may be configured to be movable. That is, by moving the terminal position 812 while the time display 811 is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

Note that the movement of the terminal position 812 may be configured to wait for the time display 811 to arrive and move immediately after the time display 811 has arrived, or to move the terminal position 812 before the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It may be configured so that it moves at.

Further, the moving direction of the terminal position 812 as the moving destination of the time display 811 is not limited to the left-right direction. For example, it may move vertically or it may move in a spiral manner. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the direction operation unit 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen and the specific display 810 moves to a corner of the display screen by operating the frame button 22 during the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the specific display 810 may be positioned in the corner of the display screen before the frame button 22 is operated. Also, for example, the movable prop may be extended to near the center of the display screen by operating the frame button 22, and the display position of the specific display 810 may change to a position where it is not hidden by the movable prop.

In addition, for example, the specific display 810 may be set to disappear by operating the frame button 22 during the ending performance, or the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed only when the frame button 22 is operated during the ending performance, or a combination of these may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the display mode of the horizontal scale display 818 on the display screen changes when the volume is changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to or in place of this, a predetermined line may be output when the volume is changed.

For example, if the message "Please be careful not to forget to take your card" is output, the player can be reminded to be careful not to forget their card every time they change the volume.

The content, volume or voice (tone of voice) of the dialogue may also be changed in response to the changed volume. In particular, when the content of the dialogue (e.g., "Don't forget to take your card" or "Make sure you take your card home with you") or the tone of voice changes (e.g., the tone of voice of a different character), this makes it easy for the player to set the volume to their liking.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the comment displayed in the warning comment display 815 or the second warning comment display 819 in the ending performance matches the target that the player can change the settings for, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a comment that does not match the target that the player can change the settings for may be displayed.

In this case, if one of the pending starting winnings will result in a jackpot, the warning comment display 815 or the second warning comment display 819 will display an expectation message such as "Jackpot?!" or "Big chance occurring" (a comment display that gives the player hope that a jackpot may be attained), allowing the player to look forward to winning the next jackpot during the ending performance, thereby improving the player's focus on the ending performance and increasing the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22.

When an expectation is displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819 and a jackpot can already be expected, it is normal to refrain from firing the ball until the jackpot game starts in order to avoid wasting balls. It is. Therefore, even if the time display 811 is made to reach the terminal position 812 in time with the end of the ending performance, it is highly likely that the player's attention cannot be increased.

Therefore, the time display 811 may be configured to reach the terminal position 812 not when the ending presentation ends, but when the variable presentation of the lottery that results in a big win ends. In this case, the player's attention to the time display 811 and the terminal position 812 can be improved.

In this case, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may start to be displayed in the ending effect and continue to be displayed until the fluctuating effect of the lottery that becomes a jackpot ends, or may not be displayed in the ending effect. It may also be displayed after the transition to the subsequent variable performance.

In the former case, the player realizes that he has already won the jackpot even when he is watching the ending effect, so the player understands that there is no need to fire the ball immediately after the jackpot game ends. Can be done. Therefore, the player can suppress the ball from being launched.

In the latter case, when the ending performance is shifted to the variable performance, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed without waiting for the variable performance of the lottery that will become a jackpot, or the fluctuating performance of the lottery that will be a jackpot has started. It may be displayed later or at the same time as the start of the variable effect. In either case, the player can know that he will win the jackpot even before the fluctuating performance ends, so for example, the fluctuating performance may take a long time (for example, it takes 10 minutes for one fluctuation). ), it is possible for the player to suppress the ball launch, and it is easier to avoid the situation where the player leaves the gaming machine without realizing that there is a jackpot on the pending starting prize. can.

In addition, if there is a jackpot among the pending starting prizes, the expectation display will not be displayed in the ending performance, but the time display 811 and the end position 812 will be displayed during the variable performance, and the lottery that will be a jackpot will be displayed. It may be configured in such a manner that the end position 812 is reached at the timing when the variable performance ends.

In addition, in the case where there is a jackpot among the pending starting winnings, the display mode may be changed in accordance with the number of starting winnings that become a jackpot. For example, when the number of starting prizes that become a jackpot is 2, an expectation display such as "Jackpot x 2!?" may be displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819, or " Multiple jackpots!?" is an expectation display that indicates that there will be multiple jackpots, but it may be unclear how many starting prizes will be jackpots. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In this case, if the time display 811 is configured to reach the end position 812 at the timing when the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in a jackpot ends, the player's attention can be smoothly shifted to the jackpot game by setting the timing to the end of the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in the first jackpot after the end of the ending presentation.

In addition, the display position of comments that do not match the settings that the player can change may be set in small area Ds3, and the comment may be configured to become visible when frame button display 813 disappears as a result of frame button 22 being operated while frame button display 813 is displayed, or the display of the comment may be set to cover the entire display screen (full-screen display). In this case, the player's motivation to operate frame button 22 may be increased.

In the first embodiment, the transition from the card forget prevention display performance to the next variable performance is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single image (still image) may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 between the card forget prevention display performance and the next variable display screen. In this case, if the pattern variation starts at the start of the display of the single image, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 should be set to coincide with the time at which the single image starts to be displayed.

Further, the symbol variation may be started some time after the transition to the variation display screen after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is preferably set to the timing after the transition to the variable display screen after the end of the jackpot game.

In the above first embodiment, the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is configured as the appropriate timing for the player to start firing the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time display 811 may be displayed during a period in which the player can obtain a predetermined benefit by firing the ball, and the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 may be configured as the appropriate timing for the player to stop firing the ball. In this case, the player can be prompted to fire the ball while the time display 811 is moving to the right, and the player can be prompted to stop firing the ball at the appropriate timing.

In this case, if the specified conditions are met before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, a character string such as "Ready" may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, or the display on the display screen may be switched, to notify the player that the specified conditions have been met. In this case, the display of the time display 811 may be maintained even after the specified conditions are met, or the display of the time display 811 may be turned off when the specified conditions are met.

For example, if the gaming machine is controlled so that a character string is displayed on the display screen on the condition that the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 (special symbol 2, or both) becomes 4 (full), By checking the character string, the player can understand that he cannot win the special symbol 1 (or special symbol 2, or both) lottery even if he shoots any more balls. As a result, the player can be prompted to stop shooting the ball at an appropriate timing without performing controls such as rapidly changing the moving speed of the time display 811.

In the above first embodiment, a warning comment display 815 is displayed before pressing the frame button 22, and a second warning comment display 819 is displayed after pressing the frame button 22, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the system may be controlled so that after pressing the frame button 22, only the caution comment display 815 is displayed, the direction operation section 816 and the vertical scale display 817 are displayed, but the horizontal scale display 818 is not displayed. In this case, the content of the caution comment 815 that was displayed before pressing the frame button 22 matches the target (light intensity) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button 22 can be increased.

For example, if the caution comment display 815 has disappeared and only the second caution comment display 819 is displayed before pressing the frame button 22, the second caution comment display 819 may be displayed after pressing the frame button 22 without displaying the caution comment display 815, and the direction operation unit 816 and horizontal scale display 818 may be displayed but not the vertical scale display 817. In this case, the content of the second caution comment 819 that was displayed before pressing the frame button 22 matches the target (volume) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button 22 can be increased.

This allows the player to check in advance whether the setting of the object (volume or light intensity) that he or she wishes to change can be changed, and then select whether or not to operate the frame button 22, thereby reducing the burden of operating the frame button 22.

Furthermore, although a case has been described in which the frame button display 813 and the operation target when the frame button 22 is operated are displayed in different locations, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the triangle mark of the frame button display 813 is a musical note, the volume can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22, while if the triangle mark of the frame button display 813 is a light bulb mark. Alternatively, control may be performed so that the amount of light can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. That is, by changing the display mode of the frame button display 813 itself, the target that can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22 may be notified.

In addition, if there are multiple operating means corresponding to the frame button 22 and each has a different shape, the frame button display 813 can configure a display corresponding to the different shapes. It is possible to inform the player of what operations to perform. In this case, it may be configured such that the objects that can be adjusted change depending on the operating means operated.

In the second embodiment, a case has been described in which the slide member 2450 is integrally molded with the front protrusion 2457, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front protruding part 2457 and the slide member 2450 are molded separately, and the front protruding part 2457 moves up and down due to the load transmitted as the slide member 2450 slides back and forth. The structure may be such that the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b can be switched between protruding from the upper surface of the bottom portion 431a and not protruding from the upper surface of the bottom portion 431a.

In this case, compared to when the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are displaced in the forward/rearward direction, the component of the load applied to the ball from the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b along the flow direction of the ball in the central flow path 2431 can be made smaller, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is erroneously accelerated when the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are displaced forward.

In the above fourth embodiment, the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the obstruction rod portion 4425 to be attachable to the rolling plate portion 4421, the rolling plate portion 4421 can be used both when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is not attached and when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is attached to the rolling plate portion 4421, and costs can be reduced by making the rolling plate portion 4421 a common part.

Also, for example, the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 may be formed separately, and the obstruction rod portion 4425 may be configured to move in conjunction with the rolling plate portion 4421 when the rolling plate portion 4421 is in operation. This improves the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425. In this case, the drive device that drives the rolling plate portion 4421 may also be used as the drive device that drives the obstruction rod portion 4425, or a separate drive device may be provided.

In the fourth embodiment, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 is located to the right of the right end of the guide portion 4413, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 may be extended to the left and formed to cover the upper surface of the guide portion 4413. In this case, the ball rolling down the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 can be smoothly placed on the guide portion 4413. In other words, it is possible to prevent the height position of the rolling plate portion 4421 from lowering (sinking) due to the weight of the ball, and the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 from being located at a lower position than the upper surface of the guide portion 4413, and the ball that has reached the downstream side of the rolling plate portion 4421 from increasing the flow resistance when moving to the guide portion 4413 side. The same can be said about the upstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 and both ends of the opening and closing member of the variable winning device 65.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric accessory 4420 slides in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be rotated. For example, in the fourth embodiment, the rotational axis of the rotational displacement is the direction along the opening in which the rolling plate portion 4421 appears (the horizontally long opening formed on the back side of the flow path forming portion 4410). It may be arranged so that it extends.

A horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate is formed so as to hang downward from the rotation axis. A state in which the opening/closing plate hangs down corresponds to a non-guiding state, and in this state, an obstruction portion capable of obstructing the passage of the ball is formed at the downstream end of the opening/closing plate so as to correspond to the obstruction rod portion 4425. By rotating the opening/closing plate 90 degrees in the rising direction (reverse rotation direction) from the non-guiding state, the opening/closing plate is brought into a state in which it can guide the ball toward the guide portion 4413, and this state corresponds to the guiding state. In this state, the obstructing portion is retreated to the back side of the flow path forming section 4410.

With this configuration, even if the ball flows toward the plate-shaped portion 4412 side than the rotating shaft in the non-guiding state, the ball will be affected depending on the arrangement of the ball when the opening/closing plate is displaced in the backward rotation direction. can be lifted above the rotation axis.

Further, the rotation axis of rotational displacement may be arranged to extend in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the opening where the rolling plate portion 4421 appears and retracts in the fourth embodiment, for example. The guiding state is defined as a state in which the opening/closing plate extends from the rotating shaft in the same direction as the guiding state in the fourth embodiment. The vertical arrangement of the ball inlet 4411 and the ceiling part 4414 is upward so that the opening/closing plate can be rotated from the guided state to the state where it rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis (corresponding to the non-guided state). has been raised to. That is, according to this configuration, a state in which the opening/closing plate is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the guiding state is configured as a non-guiding state, and the rolling plate portion 4421 in the fourth embodiment and the obstruction The rod portion 4425 is constructed from the same part.

With this configuration, when the opening/closing plate is rotated from the guiding state to the non-guiding state, all of the balls riding on the top surface of the opening/closing plate in the guiding state are guided to the guide portion 4413 side. be able to. As a result, when the electric accessory 4420 is slid and displaced from the guided state to the non-guided state in the fourth embodiment, most of the balls riding on the upper surface of the rolling plate part 4421 in the guided state are transferred to the plate-like part 4411. Compared to flowing down to the side, the ball can be easily guided to the guide portion 4413 side.

In the above fifth embodiment, a ball receiving rotating member 5771 that can be rotated and displaced is disposed between the second specific winning port 700a and the opening 751, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, it may be formed from a rotating part that can be swiveled left and right, and can be operated to distribute the ball's flow path to either the left or right.

Furthermore, for example, an opening/closing plate that slides may be provided. In this case, the opening/closing plate may be used to open/close the flow path or opening 751 to the area between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

Alternatively, the opening/closing plate may be configured to be disposed on the flow path or opening 751 to the area between the pair of storage plate portions 715 to switch the flow path of the balls. That is, the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is opened while the opening 751 is closed, and the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is closed. On the other hand, the state in which the opening 751 is open may be configured to be switchable by an opening/closing plate.

In the above fifth embodiment, the ball receiving recess 5772 receives one ball at a time, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to receive a predetermined number exceeding one (e.g., two balls at a time). In this case, when the ball receiving rotation member 5771 rotates at a constant speed, multiple balls (a predetermined number) can be inserted together into the position between the pair of storage plates 715.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is always rotated clockwise, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be assumed that the rotation operation is always performed, but the operation timing of rotation in the counterclockwise direction is added at predetermined intervals. In this case, for example, even if ball jamming occurs between the ball receiving recess 5772 and the flow regulating member 5778, the ball jamming can be resolved by reversing the direction of rotation.

Further, in the case of a predetermined jackpot type, the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be stopped for the first 10 seconds of the round game, and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be rotated after the 10 seconds have elapsed. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down toward the pair of storage plates 715 (toward the opening 751) during the first 10 seconds, the balls guided toward the movable upper lid member 730 as the nail KG1 are In a state in which more balls miss, the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 700a during the first 10 seconds can be reduced, so the possibility that the ball will pass through the opening 751 can be increased.

Further, for each type of jackpot, the rotation direction of the ball receiving rotating member 5771, the rotation speed (including whether it is constant or variable), whether or not the rotation direction is reversed, etc. may be set. In this case, attention to the ball receiving rotating member 5771 can be improved.

In the fifth embodiment, the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is such that the ball does not spill laterally when the ball flows from the second specific winning opening 700a to the ball receiving recess 5772. Although a narrow case has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is made longer than the diameter of the ball, and the ball receiving recess 5772 is filled with balls, the ball passing through the second specific winning opening 700a The ball may be configured to spill laterally and flow toward the inclined plate portion 5718b.

In this case, even if the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is stopped, the ball entering the second specific winning hole 700a will not be delayed, so it is possible to perform control to stop the ball receiving rotating member 5771 at a predetermined timing. .

When the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is stopped during a round of play, it is possible to prevent balls from flowing into the position between the pair of storage plate sections 715 until the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is next started to operate, so that it is possible to delay the timing at which the ball is introduced into the position between the pair of storage plate sections 715 and the timing at which the ball passes through the opening 751.

In the sixth embodiment, the predetermined length of time that elapses from the time when the right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the time when the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is designed to be slightly longer than the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates 66, 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the predetermined length of time may be designed to be longer by taking into account the probability of the ball entering the through gates 66, 67, using the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates 66, 67 as a comparison target.

In the sixth embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the target suggestion display 6822 to encourage the player to aim at the through gates 66 and 67, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game, a time-saving state, a probability change state, or a special probability change state is played by hitting the right hand, the display screen may display "Right Hit" instead of the target suggestion display 6822. Also, when the target suggestion display 6822 is enlarged, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be enlarged as a whole. Alternatively, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 throughout the ending performance, or the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the middle of the ending performance.

For example, when the goal suggestion display 6822 is displayed as a fanfare effect, the goal suggestion display 6822 may be designed to suggest aiming at the second specific winning opening 700a or the opening 751 of the upper variable winning device 700. In this case, if the goal suggestion display 6822 is set to remain on the display screen during the first round of play until the passage of the ball is detected at the opening 751, the player By disappearing 6822, it is possible to know that the ball has passed through the opening 751, so that attention to the target suggestion display 6822 can be improved.

In addition to the method of encouraging the player to aim at the through gates 66, 67 on the display screen, such as the target suggestion display 6822, it is also possible to provide a light emitting means for illuminating the vicinity of the through gates 66, 67 on the game board 13, and to have the light emitting means illuminate at the same time as the target suggestion display 6822 is displayed. This allows the player to rely on the light to know where to aim the ball.

Although the above describes a case where the goal suggestion display 6822 is displayed in an ending performance, this is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from an ending performance to a variable performance, the display of the goal suggestion display 6822 may be configured to continue for a predetermined period of time even in the variable performance. The display period of the goal suggestion display 6822 may be set to a predetermined time width, or may continue until balls are detected entering the targeted ball entry hole (a predetermined number, for example, the number of balls allowed as reserved balls for the first pattern, four in this embodiment).

In the sixth embodiment, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is used to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game stop suggestion display 6831 may be used to prompt the player to stop operating the frame button 22. This allows a player who operates the frame button 22 without knowing that it is an inappropriate timing for operating the frame button 22 to know that he or she is operating the frame button 22 at an inappropriate timing, thereby reducing the burden on the player when playing the game.

The game stop suggestion display 6831 may also be configured with a message that prompts the player to stop executing "right hits" but not to stop "left hits" (for example, a comment saying "Please return to left hits").

In addition, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, the illumination elements 29 to 33 and the indicator lamp 34 may be made to emit a strong light or an abnormal color (for example, a deep red), or a comment such as "Please stop shooting balls" or "Please return to left-handed hitting" may be output at a loud volume from a speaker.

In the sixth embodiment, it was explained that the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed when the passage of a ball through the through gates 66, 67 is detected before the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, it may be displayed when a ball is detected entering a specified ball entry port even during a period when no balls are scheduled to enter the specified ball entry port.

The predetermined ball entry openings are not limited to the through gates 66 and 67, and may include various ball entry openings (general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, specific winning opening). 65a, second specific winning opening 700a, opening 751, etc.).

For example, periods when a ball is not scheduled to enter include during the execution of an ending effect, as well as periods other than a predetermined period on a right-handed machine (a gaming machine that plays the game with right-handed bats during a predetermined period such as a time-saving state). An example is the period of . That is, by setting the game stop suggestion display 6831 to be displayed when a ball entering the ball entrance located on the right side of the gaming area is detected during a period other than the predetermined period, inappropriate It is possible to prevent the player from hitting right at the right timing.

Further, for example, examples of the period in which no ball is scheduled to enter include the fanfare performance in a jackpot game and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. That is, by setting the game stop suggestion display 6831 to be displayed when a ball entering the ball entrance is detected during the fanfare performance or during the first interval time Int1 between rounds, the game stop suggestion display 6831 can be displayed. It is possible to suppress the firing of balls at the timing when the flow path to the second specific winning opening 700a is not open (closed), and the occurrence of wasted balls can be minimized.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game stop suggestion display 6831 prompts the user to immediately stop shooting the ball, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display may be changed in accordance with the number of balls reserved for the lottery due to balls entering a predetermined starting hole (for example, the second winning hole 640).

In other words, for example, the ball is controlled so that it is expected to land in a specified starting hole when it is released, and if there is still room before the number of reserved balls becomes full (4 balls) (for example, when the number of reserved balls is 2 balls), a comment that the player can understand as the remaining space is displayed as a game stop suggestion display 6831 (for example, "2 more balls"), or the game stop suggestion display 6831 is not displayed but the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is displayed, and when the number of reserved balls becomes full, it may be configured to suggest that it is not necessary to release the balls, such as the game stop suggestion display 6831 described in the sixth embodiment above or a comment such as "ready".

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed when ball shooting is detected, prompting the user to stop shooting the ball, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, or in conjunction with the game stop suggestion display 6831, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed (notified). As a result, the player's sense of regret can be reduced compared to the case where the player only feels the sense of regret that he hit the ball in vain. Not only that, but depending on the situation, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the ball as desired during the ending effect.

In this case, examples of information that is beneficial to the player include information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state for the first symbol or a high probability state for the first symbol, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a normal state, a time-saving state, a high probability state, or a special high probability state, information on whether the operating pattern of the electric device 640a will change or not after a predetermined number of lottery draws have passed after the jackpot game ends, information on whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls in the lottery for the first symbol that is currently reserved, and information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the setting of the jackpot probability for the first symbol (for example, the jackpot probability for the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability for the high probability state can be changed to 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)).

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the setting change is canceled (initialized) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the setting change of the light intensity or volume, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Various conditions are exemplified as conditions under which a setting change is canceled. For example, a transition to a game explanation display (so-called demo screen) that is executed on the display screen before the game starts may be used as a condition for canceling the setting change, or it may be controlled so that the time can be determined. The condition for setting change to be canceled may be that a predetermined time has arrived, or the condition for setting change to be canceled for the number of jackpots to be the same as a predetermined number of jackpots on the same day or multiple days.

Furthermore, the frame button 22 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the frame button display 813 is displayed in the game explanation display before the start of the game, the timing when the frame button display 813 is not displayed during the game, etc.). This may be set as a condition for canceling the setting change, or it may be set as a condition for canceling the setting change that the passing of a ball is detected in a predetermined prize opening or through gate 66, 67 during the ending performance. , the acquisition of a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type may be a condition for canceling the setting change, or a ball removal notification that is notified when the amount of balls stored in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount is executed. The condition for canceling the setting change may be that the setting change is canceled.

Further, the notification is set to be performed when it is determined that the ball is flowing down the right side game area 303, such as when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 at a timing when a right-handed game should not be played. , a notification to encourage the player to play the game with left-handed playing (for example, a notification that outputs a voice such as "Please return to playing left-handed"), and a left-pointing arrow and " A condition for canceling the setting change may be that a notification displaying the comment "Please return to left-handed batting" is executed.

In the seventh embodiment, a case was described in which both the volume and the light intensity can be changed in the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be switchable between a state in which only the volume can be changed, a state in which only the light intensity can be changed, and a state in which both the volume and the light intensity can be changed. This switching may be performed by operating the frame button 22, or may be performed by the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the performance being executed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, a case was described in which the player can grasp the volume and light intensity settings immediately before the volume and light intensity setting changes are canceled from the past light intensity display 7817 and past volume display 7818, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a numerical value indicating the difference between the current state and the immediately previous setting value may be displayed or sounded as "+1" or "-2" or the like. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the operations required to return to the settings before cancellation.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which settings for the volume and light intensity are suggested in a state before they are canceled, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the player is changing the settings of the volume or light intensity, the configuration may be such that the settings before the change are suggested. In this case, even if the player makes an intentional change, if he does not like the change, he can easily return to the original setting. Therefore, it is possible to lower the hurdles for changing settings of volume and light intensity.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the scattered frame button displays 8813 are materialized when they are combined, and the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled. However, this is not necessarily limited to the display mode. For example, the semi-transparent frame button display 8813 may be configured to materialize at a predetermined timing, not as a display to encourage the operation of the frame button 22 (regardless of whether the display is related to operation), but as a display that indicates the elapsed time of the ending performance.

In addition, for example, a single translucent frame button display 8813 may be displayed moving or stationary, and switched between a translucent state and a materialized state at a predetermined timing. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the frame button display 8813 will be materialized, thereby improving attention to the frame button display 8813.

In the eighth embodiment, the timing at which the frame button display 8813 materializes is displayed as the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mark or comment (such as "PUSH") suggesting the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated may be displayed in the horizontally elongated frame in which the time display 811 moves. In this case, the time display 811 can be used both to suggest the timing at which the ending performance will end and to suggest the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the scattered frame button displays 8813 are moved and combined and then further moved apart, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the frame button display 8813 is combined and materialized, the frame button display 8813 may be controlled to disappear after a period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid has passed.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which whether the frame button display 8813 is translucent or materialized corresponds to whether the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled or disabled, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, during the period in which the frame button display 8813 is materialized, a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is disabled and a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled may be configured.

For example, while the timing of switching between enabling and disabling the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the same manner as described in the eighth embodiment, the frame button display 8813 is displayed on the display screen immediately after the card forgetting prevention display effect is started. It may be configured so that it is materialized and displayed in the center of the screen.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which each period T81, T82, and T83 is set as a break between a period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is disabled and a period in which it is enabled, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, during each period T81, T82, and T83, the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled, and the difference between each period T81, T82, and T83 is set as a difference in the production mode that changes depending on the operation of the frame button 22. It's okay.

That is, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period T81, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting can be changed but the light intensity setting cannot be changed, when the frame button 22 is operated in the second period T82, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where both the volume setting and the light intensity setting can be changed, and when the frame button 22 is operated in the third period T83, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting cannot be changed but the light intensity setting can be changed. In addition to this, the difference between each period T81, T82, and T83 may be set as a difference in the performance display (moving image to be displayed) transitioned to by operating the frame button 22.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the periods T81, T82, and T83 are set to the same length, but the length is not necessarily limited to this. The length of each period T81, T82, T83 can be set arbitrarily, and the setting contents can be made to correspond to various conditions.

For example, the length of each period T81, T82, and T83 may be set differently for each type of jackpot, or the second period T82 may be set to be shorter during a streak in which the probability of winning continues multiple times, since it is unlikely that the settings will be changed at this point.

In addition, especially in the case of jackpot types where the volume and light intensity are large (maximum round jackpot, particularly intense (long) jackpot), the second period T82 is set to be longer to make it easier to change settings. You may do so. In this case, if the first period T81 is set short, it is possible to secure a long period for changing the settings of the volume and light amount in the ending effect, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which it is possible to change the settings of the light amount and volume by operating the frame button 22 according to the display mode of the frame button display 8813, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by operating the frame button 22, information that is profitable to the player may be displayed.

In this case, information that is beneficial to the player includes, as mentioned above, whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a low probability state of the first symbol or a high probability state of the first symbol. information, whether the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a normal state, a time-saving state, a variable probability state, or a special variable probability state, and the operation of the electric accessory 640a after a predetermined number of drawings has passed after the end of the jackpot game. Information on whether the pattern changes or does not change, information on whether or not there is a jackpot among the reserved balls of the lottery with the first symbol that is currently on hold, and the probability that the gaming machine will hit the jackpot with the first symbol. (For example, you can change the jackpot probability in a low probability state to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and set the jackpot probability in a high probability state to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2). Examples include information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the jackpot is configured so that it can be set at 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2). .

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device that displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner, and then displays the symbol in a fixed manner, and is equipped with a handle for launching a ball. Here are some things that are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the pattern starts to fluctuate due to, for example, the operation of the operating lever, and the fluctuation of the symbol starts due to, for example, the operation of the stop button, or As time passes, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which the player is given a predetermined gaming value with the necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. In this case, a large number of balls are paid out into the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, only balls can be treated as the gaming value in the gaming hall, which reduces the gaming value seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines coexist. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on where gaming machines can be installed can be resolved.

Below, we will explain the gaming machine of the present invention as well as the various invention concepts included in the above-mentioned embodiments.

<The means to guide the game ball is long>
a ball entry area, a guide means for guiding a game ball that has entered the ball entry area, a first detection means arranged downstream of the guide means to detect passage of the game ball, and a downstream side of the guide means. A first detecting device which is arranged on the side and can give a different benefit to the player when the passage of the game ball is detected, from the profit that can be given to the player based on the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball. 2 detection means, and the guide means is provided with a predetermined part for receiving the game ball flowing down from the ball entry area, and a predetermined part disposed downstream of the predetermined part and displaced in response to the displacement of the predetermined part. a first state in which it is easy to guide the game ball to the first detection means, and a second state in which it is easy to guide the game ball to the second detection means, depending at least on the arrangement of the downstream side part. A gaming machine A1 characterized in that it is configured to be able to change states in two states.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the passing of a game ball is detected in a predetermined detection area (second starting prize opening 27), it will be opened with a certain probability to enter the prize ball opening located on the back side. A movable accessory (second variable winning device 31) that can guide the game ball is provided, and the movable accessory is frequently opened and balls enter the prize ball opening frequently. There is a gaming machine in which a gaming state in which a player can win a large amount of payouts of prize balls is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal state (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169630).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, a movable member (opening/closing member 28b) is provided in another detection area (variable start winning port 28a), so no movable member is provided to open or close the specified detection area, and the game ball is always allowed to pass through the specified detection area. Under normal conditions, a recommended playing method is to make the game ball flow down the left side of the play area, but beginner players, in particular, may mistakenly shoot the game ball so that it flows down the right side of the play area.

When the passage of a gaming ball is detected in a specified detection area, a lottery is held for the opening action of the movable device (lottery for a small win), as well as a lottery for a special symbol (lottery for a big win). If a big win occurs as a result of the lottery for a special symbol, a penalty is imposed as the gaming state after the big win ends, and the player is forced to play in a less favorable state than under normal circumstances. Beginners may suspect that they have been penalized without knowing why, which may cause them to lose interest in the gaming machine and result in a situation where new players are not attracted to the machine. In other words, there was a problem that the system was not friendly to beginners and lacked fairness.

In response to this, with gaming machine A1, by maintaining the guiding means in the first state, a state can be created in which the gaming ball is easily guided to the first detection means, and in this state, the guiding of the gaming ball to the second detection means (predetermined detection area) can be suppressed. As a result, by utilizing the guiding means, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the second detection means, thereby improving the fairness of the game.

Note that the guide means may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion are formed integrally, or may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion are formed separately.

In the gaming machine A1, the downstream side part is capable of preventing the game ball from being guided to the second detection means in the first state, and prevents the game ball from being guided to the first detection means in the second state. A gaming machine A2 characterized in that it is configured to be preventable.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the downstream side can switch the detection means through which the gaming balls flowing down via the guide means pass.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the guide means includes an intermediate part that causes the game ball received by the predetermined part to flow down toward the downstream side part.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines A1 and A2, gaming machine A3 has an intermediate section that can prolong the period in which it is unclear whether a gaming ball flowing down through the guiding means will be guided to the first detection means or the second detection means.

Note that the intermediate portion may be configured to be displaceable in response to the displacement of the downstream side portion, or may be configured so as not to be displaced regardless of the displacement of the downstream side portion.

In the gaming machine A3, the intermediate section is configured so that the flow direction of the gaming ball does not change whether in the first state or the second state, and the gaming ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means on the downstream side. In the gaming machine A4,

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 has the following advantages: even if the guiding means switches between the first and second states while the gaming ball is being guided through the middle section after entering the ball entry area, it does not affect the flow direction of the gaming ball in the middle section, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which a change in the state of the guiding means is detected from a change in the flow pattern of the gaming ball being guided through the middle section.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the guide means is arranged in a position where the predetermined portion restricts entry of the ball from the ball entry area into the guide means in the first state, and in the second state. A gaming machine A5, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged at a position that allows the ball to enter the guide means from the ball entry area.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, by switching the state of the guiding means, it is possible to switch whether or not a new game ball can enter the guiding means.

Further, it is possible to draw attention to the passage of the game ball in the predetermined portion and the passage of the game ball in the downstream side portion. That is, the player's line of sight can be focused at a plurality of positions, and the points of attention of the guide means can be increased.

A gaming machine A6 in the gaming machine A5, wherein switching of the arrangement of the predetermined part and switching of the arrangement of the downstream part are performed at the same time.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, since switching is performed simultaneously at different positions, the player is given a choice between switching at a predetermined part or switching at a downstream part. It is possible to add a gameplay feature by allowing the player to visually recognize the game.

In gaming machine A5, gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined part and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream part are executed at different timings.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, since switching is performed at different positions at different timings, it is difficult for the player to notice the line of sight between the switching at a predetermined part and the switching at the downstream side. It is possible to add a game feature in that it can be visually recognized by shifting it. In addition, the movement of the player's line of sight can be guided.

A gaming machine A8 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, characterized in that the predetermined portion slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions.

Gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines A1 to A7, can prevent the movement of a specific part from being noticeable when viewed from the front. The specific part is a part that switches whether the ball can enter the guiding means, and is not a part that determines whether the ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means. Therefore, by preventing it from being noticeable, the movement of the downstream part can be made to stand out relatively.

A gaming machine A9 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, characterized in that the downstream portion is displaced in a rotating manner.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, there is a downstream side portion as a location where it is determined whether to be guided to the first detection means or the second detection means. movements can be highlighted.

A gaming machine A10 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the guiding means is configured so that the flow distance of the gaming ball flowing from the specified portion to the downstream portion is longer than the distance between the specified portion and the downstream portion when viewed from the front.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, gaming machine A10 makes it easier for the player to move his or her gaze from the designated area to the downstream area before the gaming ball that has flowed from the designated area reaches the downstream area.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the guiding means includes a preventing means for preventing the game ball from reaching the downstream side part without passing through the predetermined part.

According to the game machine A11, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A10, the prevention means can restrict the downward path of the game ball reaching the downstream side, so that the game ball does not take an unintended path. It is possible to avoid the situation where the ball reaches the downstream side and enters the wrong detection means.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A11, the guiding means is configured to receive a plurality of game balls received by the predetermined portion during the first period, rather than during a first period when the predetermined portion receives a plurality of game balls from the ball entry area. A gaming machine A12 characterized in that the second period during which the game ball passes through the downstream side part can be shortened.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the guide means reduces the timing shift of the passage of the game ball in the downstream side part rather than the shift in the timing when the predetermined part receives the game ball. Since it can be made smaller, it is possible to maintain the accuracy of switching the direction of flow of the game ball at the downstream side, while expanding the allowable range of deviation in the timing of receiving the game ball at a predetermined part, providing comfortable gaming. It can be made easier.

In the gaming machine A12, the gaming machine A13 is characterized in that the predetermined portion has a shape that applies a load to the gaming ball in a direction of accelerating the gaming ball when the predetermined portion is displaced.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A12, gaming machine A13 generates a load in a direction that accelerates the gaming ball when the specified part is displaced, and thus accelerates the gaming ball placed on the specified part when the specified part is displaced toward the gaming ball that passed through the specified part before the specified part was displaced, thereby creating a situation in which the distance between the gaming balls is reduced.

<Extend the downstream route>
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry area, a flowing means for causing the game ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting passage of the game ball flowing down the downstream area, The flowing down means includes a first movable part that causes the game ball to flow down, a second movable part that is arranged downstream of the first movable part and causes the game ball to flow down, the first movable part and the second movable part. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising: a predetermined part disposed between the parts and causing the game balls to flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a detection sensor into which a gaming ball can enter and a movable member that guides the gaming ball to the detection sensor (see, for example, JP 2015-181572 A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the falling path of the game ball toward the detection sensor is limited to the length of the movable member, so the falling of the game ball tends to be monotonous, which can easily cause players to get bored. For this reason, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the manner in which the game balls flow down.

In contrast, with gaming machine B1, the flow-down means arranged upstream of the detection means has multiple movable parts that sandwich a specific part, making it easier to vary the length and shape of the movable parts, and improving the way the gaming balls flow down.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the first movable part has an overlapping part that overlaps with the specified part in the vertical direction at least at the downstream end.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine B1, gaming machine B2 can also direct gaming balls to a specific part through the overlapping part, making it easier to prevent gaming balls from falling out between the first movable part and the specific part.

Gaming machine B3 is characterized in that the first movable part in gaming machine B1 or B2 has an inclined part at least at the downstream end for directing the flow direction of the gaming ball toward the specified part.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine B1 or B2, since the downward direction of the game ball can be directed toward the predetermined part by the inclined part, even when the downward flow of the game ball is disturbed, It is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling off between the first movable part and the predetermined part.

<Collecting balls densely on the downstream side>
Gaming machine BZ1 is equipped with a ball entry area, a flow-down means for causing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting the passage of a gaming ball flowing down the downstream area, wherein the flow-down means includes a predetermined means for making the interval at which multiple gaming balls that have entered the ball entry area at a predetermined interval flow down the downstream area shorter than the predetermined interval.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball flows down from a predetermined ball entry area, the game ball can be guided to the first detection means or the second detection means by the load applied from the game ball. A plurality of movable accessories that can configure two types of open states are arranged, and each movable accessory changes to an open state by transmitting a mechanical load when a predetermined number of game balls enter the prize ball opening. There is a gaming machine that is configured to close from the start (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202338).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the gaming ball is normally maintained in a state where it is not guided to either the first or second detection means, and so can be switched between a total of three states: a first state where the gaming ball is guided to the first detection means, and a second state where the gaming ball is guided to the second detection means. In either state, the path along which the gaming ball flows after entering the ball entry area is a single path, and the timing (interval) at which the ball enters the ball entry area and the timing (interval) at which the prize ball is paid out following that ball entry are almost the same. This means that the timing at which the player receives a benefit is limited to the interval (fixed interval) between the launch of the gaming balls, making it difficult to vary the pace of the game and to increase the player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine BZ1, the predetermined means of the flowing down means causes a case where the interval at which the game ball flows down the downstream area becomes shorter than the interval at which the game ball enters the ball entry area. Therefore, it is possible to cause the game balls to flow down the downstream area at intervals shorter than the firing intervals of the game balls. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to avoid the occurrence of profit given to the player at regular intervals when the game ball enters the ball entry area, and by adding speed to the game, the player's interest is increased. can be increased.

In the gaming machine BZ1, the predetermined means is configured to make the falling speed of the game ball on the ball entry area side larger than the falling speed of the game ball on the downstream area side. BZ2.

According to the game machine BZ2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BZ1, it is possible to configure a state in which a game ball flowing down the downstream area side is caught up with a game ball on the ball entry area side by a predetermined means. .

Gaming machine BZ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine BZ1 or BZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be displaceable in one direction or the other direction, and is configured to apply a predetermined load toward the downstream area to a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area by displacement in the one direction or the other direction.

According to the gaming machine BZ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BZ1 or BZ2, the flowing means is configured to be able to be reciprocated, and when the flowing means is displaced in one direction, the playing means is configured to move down the flowing means or The flow mode can be changed depending on whether or not the fluid flows down the flow means when the flow means is displaced in the other direction.

Gaming machine BZ4 is characterized in that in gaming machine BZ3, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means is positioned either at a non-branching position where no branching occurs in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball, or at a branching position where branching may occur in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

According to the game machine BZ4, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BZ3, while the game ball is flowing down the flowing means, the game ball can be watched more closely than when the game ball is placed at the branch position. It is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player who plays the game.

In gaming machine BZ4, gaming machine BZ5 is characterized in that the branching position is arranged on a side where visibility is higher than the non-branching position.

According to the game machine BZ5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BZ4, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player who gazes at the game ball.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a side where visibility becomes high. For example, it may be on the side closer to the player (front side), it may be on the side that is not easily hidden by game balls flowing down the gaming area, or it may be on the side that does not become dazzling when light emitting effects such as LEDs occur. It may be.

In the gaming machine BZ4 or BZ5, the branch position is arranged at a first position on the ball entry area side and a second position downstream from the first position, and the branch position is arranged at a first position on the ball entry area side and a second position downstream from the first position, and A gaming machine BZ6 characterized in that the non-branching position is located between.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BZ4 and BZ5, gaming machine BZ6 has the advantage that when a gaming ball flows down the flow means, it is placed at the branching position twice with an interval between them, so that when one gaming ball is guided to the flow means, the player's attention can be increased twice. This makes it possible to efficiently increase the player's attention to the gaming ball.

Gaming machine BZ7 is one of gaming machines BZ1 to BZ6, characterized in that the flow-down means has a larger inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane on the ball entry area side than the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane on the downstream area side.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ6, gaming machine BZ7 accelerates the gaming ball flowing down the flow means more on the ball entry area side, shortening the distance between the gaming ball and the downstream area side.

Gaming machine BZ8 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines BZ1 to BZ7, the ball entry area is larger than the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ7, gaming machine BZ8 makes it easier for multiple gaming balls to enter the ball entry area at the same time, and makes it easier for those gaming balls to become crowded (connected) in the downstream area.

Gaming machine BZ9 is characterized in that the ball entry area in gaming machine BZ8 can be divided and arranged in multiple locations.

According to the game machine BZ9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BZ8, there are provided a plurality of places where the game ball enters the falling means, so it is possible to increase the frequency of the game balls entering the falling means.

A gaming machine BZ10 is characterized in that the flow path of the gaming ball flowing down the flow means is different in accordance with the difference in the ball entry area into which the gaming ball enters, in the gaming machine BZ9.

According to the game machine BZ10, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BZ9, the period until the game ball passes the falling means, the arrangement of the game ball on the falling means, etc. Since the game ball can change depending on whether the ball is hitting the ball, it is possible to increase the player's interest in knowing from which area the game ball entered the falling means, and from which area the ball entered the ball. can improve their attention span.

Among any of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ10, gaming machine BZ11 is characterized by having a flow path restriction means for preventing gaming balls flowing down the flow means from straying from the flow path toward the downstream area.

According to the game machine BZ11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ10, the game ball that enters the ball entry area is configured to surely reach the downstream area by the downstream path restriction means. Can be done.

<Technical idea of receiving a game ball at a position far from the ball entry area>
A switching means capable of switching a state between a first state in which a game ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry area is restricted, and the switching means A gaming machine C1 comprising: a downstream area in which a game ball can flow downward, the downstream area being disposed on a side remote from the ball entry area of the switching means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the landing position of a game ball on a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the game ball can be guided to the prize ball opening and a state in which entry of the game ball into the prize ball opening is restricted. However, there are multiple downstream positions near the prize ball opening and upstream positions upstream from the downstream position, and regardless of whether the game ball lands at the downstream position or the upstream position, the game ball There is a gaming machine that is configured to be able to pass through a prize ball opening (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-029531).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, at the same time that the game ball that landed at the upstream position approaches the prize ball opening, another game ball lands at the downstream position, and multiple game balls cluster together and form the prize ball opening. When attempting to pass through the ball, there is a problem that the ball may become clogged or the resistance to the ball's flow may become large. In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the game ball is configured to flow down to the switching means on the side away from the ball entry area (the landing position of the game ball on the switching means is restricted). ), the game balls can be aligned while flowing down the switching means, and it is possible to avoid clogging the balls and increasing the flow resistance of the game balls when trying to pass through the ball entry area. Therefore, improvements can be made from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball.

A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the gaming machine C1 is provided with a prevention means for preventing the flow of water to the switching means outside the flowing region.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C1, gaming machine C2 can prevent the gaming ball from passing outside the flow-down area and reaching the switching means by using a prevention means.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C2, at least a portion of the switching means is disposed behind the front surface of the gaming board that constitutes the gaming area.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C2, the position where the game ball lands on the switching means is made to appear at least on the game area side (the front of the game board), and at least a part of the other part is made to appear closer to the front of the game board. By arranging it on the rear side, it is possible to reduce the length of the switching means encroaching on the game area while ensuring the falling length of the game ball on the switching means to the rear side of the front surface of the game board. Thereby, it is possible to secure a wide area for arranging other components and improve the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the switching means has a first section in which the gaming ball can roll and a second section that is located downstream of the first section, and the gaming ball that lands on the switching means from the flow-down area is configured to easily land on the first section.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, by rolling over a long distance on the switching means, it is possible to suppress the bouncing of the game ball and calm down the falling of the ball, and also to prevent the ball from entering the ball. It is possible to ensure the length of the ball to reach the ball area, and it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

In the game machine C4, the switching means includes a guide path between the first part and the second part that can bridge the game ball in the first state and the second state. Machine C5.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C4, gaming machine C5 provides a guide path that maintains the rolling of the gaming ball after it lands on the first part of the switching means, regardless of the state of the switching means. This increases the variety of how the gaming ball flows down compared to when there is a one-to-one correspondence between the state of the switching means and the change in the way the gaming ball flows down.

A gaming machine C6 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine C5, the length of flow of the gaming balls along the guide path is configured in a plurality of types.

Gaming machine C6 can increase the variety of game balls flowing down in addition to the effects of gaming machine C5.

Note that various aspects are exemplified as factors for changing the length of the game ball flowing down the guide route. For example, it may be configured to change depending on the position of the ball entering the switching device, or it may be configured to change depending on the relative relationship between the timing of the ball entering the switching device and the timing at which the state of the switching device is switched. It's okay to be.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the switching means includes an approach means for moving the game ball closer to the guide route over a predetermined range on the upstream side of the guide route. C7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C5 and C6, gaming machine C7 can use the approaching means to move the gaming ball closer to the guidance path before the gaming ball gets on the guidance path, thereby preventing the gaming ball from getting stuck in the bridge to the guidance path.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the approach means is an inclined surface that moves the gaming ball in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part of the switching means or the guide path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C7, gaming machine C8 has the following advantages: the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means is perpendicular to the inclination direction of the inclined surface, so that the load applied to the gaming ball by the inclined surface does not accelerate or decelerate the flow speed of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means, and the impact can be minimized.

Gaming machine C9 is any one of gaming machines C4 to C8, characterized in that the second section is configured to limit the simultaneous acceptance of multiple gaming balls.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines C4 to C8, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where more game balls than expected enter the second part.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the switching means is characterized by having a ball entry restriction means that restricts the gaming ball from entering the guide path side when the state is switched between when the gaming ball lands in a specified section on the end side of the flow-down area and when the gaming ball passes through the specified section. C10.

According to the gaming machine C10, in any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, when the switching means executes the state switching in a minute time, it is easy to avoid the game ball from accidentally entering the guide route side. be able to.

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the switching means in any of gaming machines C1 to C10 is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball in the downstream portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the gaming machine C11 can stabilize (rectify) the flow pattern of the gaming balls downstream of the switching means.

<Multiple incoming balls are influenced by previous incoming balls and tend to pass through the detection means>
A downstream area where a game ball can flow down, a downstream area disposed on the downstream side of the downstream area, a first downstream area where a game ball can flow down after passing through the downstream area, and the downstream area. a second downstream area configured to allow a game ball that has passed but does not flow down the first downstream area to flow down, and provides a predetermined profit when the game ball flows down the second downstream area. The game ball can be given to the player and the game ball is placed in the downstream area more than in the first case where the game ball flows down from the downstream area to the downstream area with no game ball placed in the downstream area. In the second case where the game ball flows down from the downstream area to the downstream area while the game ball is arranged, the game ball is configured to more easily flow down the second downstream area. A gaming machine D1.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port and a specific ball entry port are arranged at the back of the opening/closing means, and the specific ball entry port may be blocked by a plate member that slides, or the board member may be retracted. When the plate member is in the state where the board member allows the entry of game balls, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means enter the specific ball entrance. There are gaming machines that are configured so that the subsequent gaming state is set to be advantageous for the player by entering a ball into a specific ball entrance (for example, see paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-150122). reference).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when one gaming ball is received by the opening and closing means, it is assumed that the ball will enter the specific ball entry port, so the player feels reassured and it is difficult to draw attention to the second and subsequent balls entering the opening and closing means. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the gaming balls being received by the opening and closing means.

In contrast, gaming machine D1 is configured so that among the gaming balls received in the downstream area, the gaming ball that is received multiple times is more likely to be received in the second flow-down area than the gaming ball that is received first, so that attention can be sustained on the gaming balls that have flowed down to the downstream area.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, it is configured so that gaming balls that enter the downstream area second or later are more likely to enter the second flow-down area than gaming balls that enter the downstream area the first time.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1, it is possible to maintain the player's attention for a long time on the game ball that has flowed down into the downstream area.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, when multiple gaming balls are placed in the downstream area at the same time, the gaming balls are configured to flow easily down the second flow area.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the gaming ball that has flowed down to the downstream area while the gaming ball is placed in the downstream area. can. Further, it is possible to make the player aware of the manner in which the game balls are launched.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a plurality of gaming balls are parked in the downstream area so that the gaming balls can be easily received in the second downstream area. .

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, attention can be drawn to the manner in which the gaming balls are arranged in the downstream area.

Any of the game machines D1 to D4 is provided with an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state in which the downstream path of the game ball from the downstream region is opened and a second state in which the path is narrowed compared to the first state, and the downstream A gaming machine D5 characterized in that the side area is configured such that the game ball is difficult to be guided to the second downstream area immediately after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state. .

In addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D4, gaming machine D5 can lengthen the period during which the player's attention is maintained on the downstream area after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

In the game machine D5, from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state, a game ball that enters the downstream area after a predetermined period of time is larger than a game ball that enters the downstream area within a predetermined period of time. A gaming machine D6 characterized in that it is configured to easily flow down the second downstream region.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D5, gaming machine D6 can maintain attention to the downstream area for a long time after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D6, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state, the change in the period until the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow area flows down the second flow area can be suppressed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine D6, gaming machine D7 makes it possible to reduce attention in the downstream area and relax the player by making the flow-down pattern (flow-down period) of the gaming ball constant after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state and a predetermined period has elapsed.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D5 to D7, and is characterized by having a guide ball selection means configured not to guide the first gaming ball that enters the flow-down area after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state, into the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D5 to D7, gaming machine D8 requires multiple gaming balls to enter the second flow area in the first state of the opening/closing means in order to receive gaming balls, which can increase attention to the opening/closing means and the number of gaming balls passing through the opening/closing means.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D8, it is configured so that the number of gaming balls that can be received in the second flow area is equal to the number of gaming balls that cannot be received in the second flow area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D8, gaming machine D9 can avoid players having excessive expectations due to the occurrence of cases where an excessively large number of gaming balls are received, such as when all balls enter the second flow area.

Gaming machine D10 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D9, a maximum number of gaming balls that can be received by the downstream area is set, and gaming balls exceeding that maximum number are configured to be received by the second flow-down area.

Gaming machine D10 can improve attention to the downstream area and the second flow area in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D9.

A gaming machine D11, which is any one of the gaming machines D1 to D10, and is characterized in that a downstream area can be placed at a position where passing game balls easily flow into the first downstream area.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, a state is easily created in which the gaming balls arranged in the downstream area easily flow into the first downstream area.

A gaming machine D12, which is any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, and includes a retention means for retaining game balls placed in the downstream area in the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, gaming machine D12 can restrict gaming balls placed in the first flow area from flowing toward the second flow area by using a retention means.

A gaming machine D13 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, the second downstream area is arranged above the first downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, gaming machine D13 can prevent gaming balls placed in the first flow area from flowing into the second flow area by using the height difference of the placement.

<Switching between contact and non-contact with the game ball>
a downstream area through which game balls can flow, and an opening/closing means switchable between a first state that opens the path of game balls passing through the flow-down area and a second state that narrows the path more than the first state; a downstream area disposed downstream of the flow-down area, a first flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area to flow down, a second flow-down area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area but do not flow down the first flow-down area to flow down, and a contact enabling means switchable between a contact state in which the game balls that have passed through the downstream area can come into contact with the game balls and a non-contact state in which they do not come into contact with the game balls, and a predetermined benefit can be awarded to a player when a game ball flows down the second flow-down area, and the opening/closing means is switchable from the first state to the second state when the game ball is in contact with the contact enabling means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple movable parts in the flow path of gaming balls that enter a ball entrance that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member, and the flow path of the gaming balls can change due to the load from the movable parts (see, for example, JP 2017-000562 A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movable member is configured so that it can always come into contact with the falling game ball, so the falling state of the game ball that enters the ball entry hole does not change, and the player There is a problem that there is a high possibility that players will get bored, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the abutting means can be switched between a contacting state in which it can come into contact with the game ball that has passed through the downstream area, and a non-contacting state in which it does not make contact. Therefore, the manner in which the game ball flows can be made to be significantly different depending on whether the game ball contacts the contactable means or when it does not contact the contactable means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the falling manner of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the game from the viewpoint of increasing the player's interest.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the gaming machine E1 is configured such that the gaming ball that receives a load via the gaming ball that is in contact with the abutting means can flow down the second downstream region.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, it is possible to improve attention to the downward flow state of the gaming ball in the downstream area.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E1 or E2, when the opening and closing means is switched from the second state to the first state while a gaming ball is in contact with the contactable means, the gaming ball that has flowed down from the flow-down area to the downstream area can flow down the second flow-down area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines E1 and E2, gaming machine E3 attracts more attention to the contactable means because, if a gaming ball is in contact with the contactable means at the time the opening/closing means is opened, the gaming ball that has passed through the opening/closing means after the opening/closing means is opened is more likely to flow down the second flow area.

<The game ball is accepted into the second game area after passing through the state where the game ball can be stopped from passing.>
A downstream area in which a game ball can flow down, an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state in which a path for a game ball passing through the downstream area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state; a downstream region disposed on the downstream side of the region; a first downstream region configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream region to flow down; and a first downstream region that is configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream region to flow down. a second downstream area configured to allow game balls that do not flow down the first downstream area to flow down, and when a game ball flows down the second downstream area, a predetermined profit can be given to the player; A gaming machine EZ1 characterized in that a state is changed from a state in which the passing of game balls in a predetermined part of the downstream region is prevented to a state in which the game balls can flow down into the second downstream region.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a ball entry port and a special ball entry port are located behind an opening/closing means, and the special ball entry port is configured to be switched between a state in which it is blocked by a sliding plate member and a state in which the plate member is retracted to allow game balls to enter. When the plate member is in a state in which balls are allowed to enter, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means are configured to enter the special ball entry port, and there are gaming machines in which balls entering the special ball entry port set the game state to one advantageous to the player (see, for example, paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP 2015-150122 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the positions of the ball entrance and the specific ball entrance are almost the same except for the difference between the left and right, so it is difficult to tell at a glance through the opening and closing means whether the game ball has entered the specific ball entrance. When a notification is issued on the liquid crystal device due to a game ball entering the specific ball entrance, there is a problem in that the display on the liquid crystal device is easier to understand, and so the player's attention is concentrated on the liquid crystal device. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention on the game ball that has been accepted by the opening and closing means.

In response to this, the gaming machine EZ1 is configured so that the gaming ball flows down into the second flow area after passing through a state in which the passage of the gaming ball is prevented at a specific part of the downstream area, so that the player's gaze can be focused on the gaming ball stopped in the downstream area in preparation for entering the second flow area, and attention can be maintained on the gaming ball that has been accepted by the opening and closing means.

In gaming machine EZ1, gaming machine EZ2 is characterized in that the predetermined portion is located in the first downstream region.

According to the gaming machine EZ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ1, it is possible to improve attention to the ball entering the first downstream area, which is an area that does not affect the provision of a predetermined profit.

Gaming machine EZ3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing through by a predetermined gaming ball.

According to the game machine EZ3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine EZ1 or EZ2, even if the game ball deviates from the second flow area and flows down, there is a feeling that the game ball may block a predetermined part, so that the game It is possible to maintain a high level of attention to the ball.

Gaming machine EZ4 is characterized in that in gaming machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing through by a predetermined member different from the gaming ball, and the size of the predetermined member in a front view is set to be smaller than the size of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EZ1 and EZ2, gaming machine EZ4 can make the specified member that prevents the passage of the gaming ball less noticeable than the gaming ball, thereby increasing attention to the gaming ball.

Among any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ4, gaming machine EZ5 is characterized in that the first flow area is filled with gaming balls, and then the following arriving gaming balls are received in the second flow area.

According to the gaming machine EZ5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ4, it is possible to shift the player's line of sight from the first downstream area to the second downstream area, so it is possible to shift the player's line of sight from the first downstream area to the second downstream area. The period during which the second downstream area is visually recognized can be made longer than when the second downstream area attracts attention.

Furthermore, when a ball enters the second flow area, the first flow area is filled with game balls, so even if you lose sight of the game ball that has entered the second flow area, you can see at a glance that the ball is ready to enter the second flow area.

The gaming machine EZ5 is provided with a state switching means capable of switching between a retention state in which game balls are kept in the first downstream area and a discharge state in which game balls are discharged from the first downstream area, and the opening/closing means is A gaming machine EZ6 characterized in that the state of the state switching means is switched in response to state switching.

According to the gaming machine EZ6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ5, it is possible to associate the state switching between the opening/closing means and the state switching means, so that by visually recognizing either one, it is easy to predict the state of the other. can do.

The gaming machine EZ7 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EZ5 or EZ6, an upper limit is set on the number of gaming balls that can be received in the first flow area.

According to the gaming machine EZ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ5 or EZ6, by checking the number of game balls placed in the first downstream area, it is possible to determine how many more game balls are allowed to pass through the downstream area. For example, it is possible to easily predict whether a game ball will be accepted into the second downstream area.

Any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ7 is provided with a displacing means that is configured to be displaceable, and the displacing means can be set in a dischargeable state in which the received game balls can be discharged to the downstream area and in the dischargeable state in which the received game balls can be discharged into the downstream area. A game machine EZ8 characterized in that the game machine is displaced so as to switch between a state in which it cannot be discharged to a downstream area and a state in which it cannot be discharged.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ7, the gaming machine EZ8 is configured so that whether or not the gaming ball is discharged to the downstream area, where the player's attention is high, changes depending on the state of the displacement means, as a prerequisite for the gaming ball to be received in the second flow-down area, thereby improving attention to the downstream area and the displacement means.

In other words, if the game balls that have passed through the downstream area are sure to flow down to the downstream area, by knowing the number of game balls passing through the downstream area, it is possible to predict from experience the timing at which the game balls will flow down to the second downstream area. Therefore, there is a possibility that there will not be a large disadvantage even if the player plays the game without looking at the downstream area.

In contrast, in a situation where the flow of game balls into the downstream area can be switched depending on the state of the displacement means, a discrepancy occurs between the number of game balls passing through the flow area and the number of game balls flowing into the downstream area, so it is necessary to turn one's gaze to the downstream area as well. This can increase the attention to the downstream area.

The gaming machine EZ9 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to reduce the falling velocity of the received gaming ball compared to the descending velocity of the gaming ball flowing down the downstream area.

According to the gaming machine EZ9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ8, it is possible to reduce the falling speed of the game ball received by the displacement means, thereby preventing the occurrence of a situation in which the player loses sight of the game ball received by the displacement means. can be easily avoided.

In the gaming machine EZ8 or EZ9, the displacement means includes a ball receiving part capable of receiving up to a predetermined number of game balls, and the game balls received in the ball receiving part are displaced by displacement of the displacement means. Game machine EZ10.

According to the game machine EZ10, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine EZ8 or EZ9, the number of game balls that are displaced due to the displacement of the displacement means can be limited to a predetermined number with respect to the ball receiving part, so that the displacement By setting the displacement speed of the means within a predetermined range, the number of game balls that can be discharged from the displacement means to the downstream area in a predetermined period can be suppressed within a predetermined range.

<Means for notifying the end of the ending>
A gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game; and a notification means for notifying a player of the end of the duration of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp the end of the duration.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, transition to a state where special symbol variable play is possible when the jackpot play ends (see, for example, JP 2015-019743 A). However, with the conventional gaming machines described above, it is difficult to know when the jackpot play ends, which is a source of dissatisfaction for players who want the lottery for special symbols to start immediately after switching to a state where special symbol variable play is possible.

For example, as a general game progression, after a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of special symbol 1, there is a distribution in which, after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a state in which it is easier to obtain the lottery of special symbol 2, which is more advantageous than special symbol 1. There are gaming machines, but in such gaming machines, immediately after the jackpot game ends, the lottery for special symbol 2 starts without being won, so if the lottery for special symbol 1 is pending, the special symbol will be drawn after the jackpot game ends. 1 was executed, and if the player won a jackpot in that lottery, there was a possibility that the player would be disadvantaged.

To avoid this situation, it is preferable to win the lottery for special symbol 2 as soon as possible after the jackpot ends, before winning the jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 after the jackpot ends, so it is desirable to start firing the game balls as soon as it becomes possible to win the lottery for special symbol 2.

On the other hand, the ball entrance is generally opened and closed by an electric device to win the lottery for special symbol 2, but the electric device is kept closed during the jackpot game and can be opened after the jackpot game ends. Therefore, even if game balls are shot before the electric device is opened, many of them will likely be wasted.

Due to these circumstances, even if you fire the game ball toward the electric accessory side during a jackpot game, the electric accessory will remain closed and you will not be able to win the special symbol 2 lottery, so you want to avoid firing the game ball. In addition, in order to obtain the special symbol 2 lottery before winning the special symbol 1 lottery, there is an entrance on the downstream side of the electric accessory that is opened as soon as the jackpot game ends. It is thought that the player wants to hit the game ball into the ball.

In contrast, with conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to know when the big win game would end, making it difficult to time the release of the gaming ball.

In response to this, gaming machine G1 is equipped with a notification means that notifies the player so that the player can grasp the end point of a specified performance, making it easier to determine the timing for launching the gaming ball by using the notification from the notification means as a guide.

In the gaming machine G1, the predetermined performance is such that at least one of a first performance or a second performance whose notification content is different from the first performance is executed, and the duration period can be changed depending on a combination of notifications, and The notification means is configured to be able to communicate the difference in the duration of the predetermined effect to the player, and includes an ending means indicating the end point of the predetermined effect, and a time notification indicating the time elapsed from the current time to the end point. A gaming machine G2 comprising means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 allows the player to know the duration and end time of the currently ongoing specified effect, even if multiple durations of the specified effect are available.

The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the time notifying means includes pseudo time notifying means that indicates a pseudo time with a predetermined time difference from the time elapsed from the current time until the end of the predetermined performance. G3.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the gaming machine G3 can notify the player of a favorable timing before the end of a specified performance by the pseudo-time notification means. This allows, for example, the time that may pass between the time the gaming ball is launched and the time it reaches the specified ball entrance to be consumed during the execution of the specified performance, making it easier to realize a game in which the gaming ball flows into the specified ball entrance immediately after the end of the specified performance.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the predetermined performance can be executed at least immediately before the end of a predetermined bonus game, and the mode of execution changes depending on the type of the bonus game. The game machine G4 is characterized by:

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the type of bonus game can be associated with a predetermined performance.

Gaming machine G5 is one of gaming machines G1 to G4, characterized in that the notification means notifies a time a predetermined period before the end of the predetermined performance period.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the end of the predetermined performance period can be known in advance by the notification means.

The timing of the specified performance period is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be during a specified specific game, during a pattern change, or while waiting for a pattern change.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, a predetermined still image or video is displayed in the display area of the display means at the end of the predetermined performance to calm the player down.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, gaming machine G6 can effectively prevent players from becoming addicted to the game.

A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the display on the display means is switched after the end of the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, gaming machine G7 can also switch the display, making it easier for the player to understand that the end of a specific presentation has passed.

The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G7, after the end of the predetermined performance, a specific performance can be executed continuing from the predetermined performance.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, a specific performance can be executed during the execution of a predetermined performance, compared to a case where a new performance is executed after the end of the predetermined performance. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long performance time.

A gaming machine G9 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines G1 to G8, the predetermined performance is executed in a manner that is visible in at least a portion of the display area of the display means.

According to the gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, a predetermined effect can be confirmed by visually checking the display area of the display means, so that it is possible to confirm a predetermined effect by visually checking the display area of the display means. Compared to the case where a predetermined effect is executed outside the gaming area, etc., the burden on the player can be reduced.

A gaming machine G10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G8 or G9, it is possible to configure a case in which the mode of display in the display area of the display means differs at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8 or G9, it is possible to improve attention to the aspect at a predetermined timing.

Note that different aspects at a predetermined timing are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, there are cases in which the operation starts at a predetermined timing and cases in which it is stopped and maintained at a predetermined timing, or cases in which it becomes operable at a predetermined timing and cases in which it becomes inoperable at a predetermined timing. Examples include different cases.

A gaming machine G11 that is characterized by executing an illusion effect that creates the illusion that the specified effect has ended before the end of the specified effect in the gaming machine G8 or G9.

According to the gaming machine G11, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8 or G9, the player's concentration can be increased for each illusion production.

A gaming machine G12, which is any one of gaming machines G8 to G11, is characterized in that from the end of the specified performance, a suggestion display is displayed in the display area of the display means, suggesting that a specified profit can be obtained by shooting a gaming ball, until a specified condition is met.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G8 to G11, gaming machine G12 can inform the player viewing the display area of the appropriate timing for firing the gaming ball through suggestive displays, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

Note that the aspect of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be that a predetermined period of time has elapsed, or that a predetermined number of game balls have passed through a predetermined ball entrance, or that the passage thereof has been detected.

A gaming machine G13, in which the suggestion display in the gaming machine G12 is a display suggesting that the player should aim for a specific ball entrance or an opening/closing lottery ball entrance that executes a lottery for opening or closing a specific ball entrance or an electric device that opens and closes the specific ball entrance.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G12, the gaming machine G13 makes it possible to clarify the aim of the released gaming ball through suggestive displays, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

In the gaming machine G12 or G13, in the predetermined performance, a display is configured that continues until a predetermined firing timing, and if the firing is not performed even after the predetermined firing timing, or a game ball is detected at a predetermined detection port. The gaming machine G14 is characterized in that, if one of these notifications is not made, the predetermined notification is continued until one of the notifications is made.

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G12 or G13, if it is confirmed that the predetermined notification is continued, it is possible to check whether the game ball has been fired after the predetermined firing timing. The player can be made aware of whether the game ball is not detected at the predetermined detection port or not.

A gaming machine G15 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines G12 to G14, a predetermined notification is made when a predetermined number of balls are detected or more than the predetermined number of balls are detected during the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G12 to G14, gaming machine G15 can notify the player by a predetermined notification that a predetermined number of balls or more have entered the game during a predetermined performance, allowing the player to use this as a hint to adjust the strength of the game balls being fired, etc., thereby reducing the burden of playing the game.

Note that the mode of the predetermined notification is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a predetermined four-letter phrase may be displayed, a display may be displayed to make players hesitate to shoot the game ball, a predetermined light emitting means may be activated, or a predetermined sound may be displayed. It may also be something that outputs.

Gaming machine G16 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines G1 to G15, the predetermined performance is executed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting performed by the player, or is executed with a predetermined light emission intensity or a predetermined light emission color regardless of the light emission intensity setting performed by the player.

According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G15, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice the sound or light depending on the player's settings.

<Setting the period for changing the volume and light intensity at the ending>
The game is characterized by comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance related to the game, and a change means capable of configuring a changeable state in which a predetermined setting related to the game can be changed during the execution of the predetermined performance. Game machine H1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that transition to a state where a special symbol variable game is possible after a jackpot game ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the player does not hold the handle for a long time between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special symbol variation game is possible, so it is easy for the player to keep holding the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that the game ball is easily fired by mistake. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing game balls.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the changeable state can be configured during a predetermined performance, so that free time during the predetermined performance can be used to change the predetermined settings. can. This makes it easier for the player to take his/her hand away from the handle, making it easier to prevent the game ball from being erroneously fired. That is, it can be improved from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing game balls.

The gaming machine H1 is characterized by comprising a notification means for informing the player of the end of the duration of the predetermined performance so that the player can grasp the end, and in the changeable state, the performance by the notification means is continued. H2.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H1, gaming machine H2 can inform the player of the best time to grip the handle again after changing a certain setting. This makes it easier for the player to avoid suffering disadvantages due to not firing the gaming ball at the appropriate time.

A gaming machine H3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine H1 or H2, the changeable predetermined setting can be configured to be switchable in the changeable state.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, there are a plurality of predetermined settings that can be changed, so that even if the player has a long free time, the player does not have anything on hand. This can make it easier to avoid conflicts.

A gaming machine H4, in the gaming machine H3, wherein in the changeable state, the predetermined setting that can be changed or the predetermined setting that is being changed is displayed by a display means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, it is possible to make it clear through display which of the predetermined settings related to the game are to be changed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the gaming burden on the player.

A gaming machine H5 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, a visible area of a predetermined display on the display means is changed by a predetermined operation performed in the changeable state.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the player can change the visible area of a predetermined display on the display means by a predetermined operation performed by the player. Displays that are considered to be of interest can be placed in front of the player's line of sight. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the game without feeling bothered by moving his/her line of sight.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H5, a state can be configured in which a part of the display area of the display means is made invisible by a specified operation executed in the changeable state.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, a part of the display area of the display means becomes invisible due to a predetermined operation, so that a display that may become invisible can be made visible. It is possible to make the player who wants to keep the game consider whether or not to perform a predetermined operation. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the player performs a predetermined operation needlessly.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, when the predetermined setting is changed in the changeable state, the change is returned under a predetermined condition, or the change is invalidated under a predetermined condition. A gaming machine H7 featuring the following.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, gaming machine H7 resets or invalidates a specified setting when a specified condition is met, allowing the player to understand that the specified condition has been met from the sense of incongruity.

The predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be the start of a jackpot game, the continuation of a jackpot game a predetermined number of times, the detection of a predetermined number of game balls or more in a predetermined period of time by a predetermined detection means, or the operation of a predetermined operation means at a predetermined timing.

In the gaming machine H7, the predetermined condition is achieved by operating a predetermined operating means operated to change the predetermined setting.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H8 allows the user to reverse or nullify a specified change in settings by operating a specified operating means, making it easy to intentionally reverse or nullify a specified change in settings.

Gaming machine H9 is characterized in that in gaming machine H7, the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing, regardless of the timing at which the predetermined setting change is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H9 achieves a predetermined condition at a predetermined timing, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the predetermined condition is never achieved.

Note that the predetermined timing is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the special figure variation may be executed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined content may be notified, or a predetermined time such as noon may be set.

In the gaming machine H7, the gaming machine H10 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is achieved when a predetermined state passes for a predetermined period of time.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H10 allows the player to know that a certain time has passed since a certain state was maintained by reverting or nullifying a certain setting change.

Note that the predetermined state is not limited at all. For example, when a jackpot game is played consecutively, the jackpot type of the jackpot won may be repeated in the same way (or more than or less than a predetermined number of rounds), the operating means may not be operated, or the special figure fluctuation It is also okay if it is not executed.

A gaming machine H11 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines H1 to H10, a predetermined target amount can be set in advance for the predetermined setting, and that, in the changeable state, the gaming machine H11 is equipped with a difference notification means that allows the difference between the predetermined setting and the target amount to be grasped.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, gaming machine H11 allows the same player to easily return the specified settings to the state before they were returned or invalidated by changing the specified settings while grasping the difference from the target amount using the difference notification means, even if the specified settings are reverted or invalidated, provided that the player playing the game is the same.

As a result, even if the gaming machine is controlled so that the changes to the specified settings are reverted or nullified in consideration of the burden on the subsequent player when the player is replaced, by maintaining the specified settings as the previous player's settings, the specified settings can be easily reverted to their previous state. Therefore, even if the specified settings are unintentionally reverted or nullified even though the player playing has not been replaced, the specified settings can be easily reverted to their previous state, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

<Changing the display mode of the same display depending on the situation>
It is characterized by comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined display performance related to a game, and configured to be able to change the display position or display size of the predetermined display performance while executing the predetermined display performance. A gaming machine I1.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory placed on the front side of the display device and the display on the display device can be combined to make an integrated shape visible (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to decide the placement position, size, and shape of the display according to the placement position, size, and shape of the movable accessory, so the display area of the display device is effectively utilized. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of performance.

In response to this, gaming machine I1 is configured so that the display position or displayed size of a specified display effect can be changed while the specified display effect is being executed, making it possible to improve the game in terms of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device without being affected by the shape of the movable props.

Gaming machine I2 is characterized in that, in gaming machine I1, the predetermined display effect is configured to be less distinctive when it is displayed on the edge of the display area than when it is displayed in the center of the display area.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, attention to a predetermined display performance can be adjusted depending on where in the display area it is displayed.

Note that the manner in which the distinguishability is reduced is not limited at all, and various manners are exemplified. For example, it may be displayed semitransparently, or the display size may be reduced.

The gaming machine I3 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine I1 or I2, the change is executed by operating a predetermined operating means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the player can select whether or not to change the display mode of a predetermined display performance. This can increase the player's desire to participate in the game.

<Button operation related>
The predetermined performance can be switched from a first state to a second state by operating a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance related to a game and a predetermined operation means during execution of the predetermined performance. A gaming machine IZ1 characterized by comprising: a performance switching means configured as follows.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that transition to a state where a special symbol variable game is possible after a jackpot game ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the player does not hold the handle for a long time between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special symbol variation game is possible, so it is easy for the player to keep holding the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that the game ball is easily fired by mistake.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine IZ1, it is possible to switch the performance to be performed by operating a predetermined operation means during a predetermined performance, so that the idle time during the predetermined performance can be used to The time can be used to operate the operating means. Since the effects can be switched by operating the operating means, it is possible to effectively increase the player's desire to operate the operating means. This makes it easier for the player to take his/her hand away from the handle, making it easier to prevent the game ball from being erroneously fired.

The gaming machine IZ1 is provided with an operation notification means that can notify that the predetermined operation means can be operated, and by operating the predetermined operation means in accordance with the notification from the operation notification means, the predetermined production mode can be changed. A gaming machine IZ2 is characterized in that a switch can be made.

According to the gaming machine IZ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ1, since the operation of the predetermined operating means is assisted by the operation notification means, even an inexperienced player can operate the predetermined operating means without hesitation. can do.

In the gaming machine IZ2, the gaming machine IZ3 is characterized in that the notification from the operation notification means is executed during a part of the duration of the predetermined performance.

According to the gaming machine IZ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is performed during a part of the duration of the predetermined performance, so that the predetermined performance cannot be visually recognized during other times. This allows for some leeway.

Note that the timing of notification from the operation notification means is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the notification from the operation notification means may be performed from the middle of a predetermined performance, the notification from the operation notification means may be performed until the middle of a predetermined performance, or the notification from the operation notification means may be performed until the middle of a predetermined performance. The notification from the operation notification means may be executed throughout the execution of the performance. Further, in the case where a notification from the operation notification means is executed during the execution of a predetermined performance, the operation may be valid during the execution of the notification, or the operation may be invalidated. Also good.

A gaming machine IZ4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ3, the performance cannot be switched by operating the specified operating means during a specified period in the latter half of the specified performance.

According to the gaming machine IZ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ3, by disabling the operation of the predetermined operation means during the second half predetermined period of the predetermined performance, the predetermined effect during the second half predetermined period It can draw attention to the performance.

Gaming machine IZ5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine IZ4, the display of the operation notification means in the display area of the display means is hidden during the specified period in the latter half of the specified performance.

According to the gaming machine IZ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ4, it is possible to grasp by visually checking the display area of the display means that a period in which the operation of a predetermined operating means is invalid has entered.

In any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ5, when a plurality of types of effects are prepared that can be switched by operating the predetermined operating means, an attached notification for predicting the effect to be performed by operating the predetermined operating means. A gaming machine IZ6 characterized by comprising means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ5, the gaming machine IZ6 can predict the effect that will be executed by operating a specified operating means using the attached notification means, reducing the disappointment and sense of futility caused by switching to an unexpected effect despite operating the specified operating means, and the player only needs to operate the specified operating means when switching to a preferred effect, eliminating the hassle of repeatedly operating the specified operating means.

A gaming machine IZ7, which is any one of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ6, wherein the predetermined operation means can be operated from the middle of the predetermined performance.

According to the game machine IZ7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines IZ1 to IZ6, attention can be drawn to a predetermined effect until the predetermined operating means becomes operable.

In the gaming machine IZ6 or IZ7, the attached notification means includes a display for suggesting a specific operation timing, and the specific operation timing ensures a predetermined adjustment period until the end of the predetermined performance. A gaming machine IZ8 characterized in that the timing is set as a possible timing.

According to the gaming machine IZ8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ6 or IZ7, the specific operation timing can change depending on the length of the adjustment period. You can predict the development of the performance.

A gaming machine IZ9 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ8, the mode of performance switched by operating the predetermined operating means is returned to the mode before switching under a predetermined condition.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ8, the gaming machine IZ9 returns the presentation to the state before it was switched under a specified condition, allowing the player to operate the specified operation means again. This allows the player to operate the specified operation means a greater number of times, enhancing the atmosphere of the player participating in the game.

A gaming machine IZ10 is any one of gaming machines IZ2 to IZ9, characterized in that the notification from the operation notification means has multiple types of modes in which the number of the predetermined operation means operated simultaneously differs.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ2 to IZ9, the gaming machine IZ10 allows for one or more of the specified operating means to be operated simultaneously, and by deliberately requiring the player to operate two specified operating means, the player can immerse himself in the game and kill time when there is no need to launch game balls. In this case, the player's hands can be removed from the ball launching handle, which reduces the risk of erroneous launching of game balls and avoids unnecessary disadvantages caused by wasting launched game balls.

Gaming machine IZ11 is characterized in that in any one of gaming machines IZ2 to IZ10, the notification from the operation notification means includes a notification that is executed when a predetermined profit that can be obtained when a ball enters a predetermined ball entrance reaches an upper limit.

In addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines IZ2 to IZ10, the gaming machine IZ11 allows the player to visually recognize a notification from the operation notification means, so that the player can understand that the predetermined profit that can be obtained by the ball entering a predetermined ball entrance has reached its upper limit.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3, and IZ1 to IZ11, The gaming machine Z1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of a slot machine is that it is equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, and then displays the identification information definitively, and that is The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, and when the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped. and a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information is specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machine Z2 is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3, and IZ1 to IZ11. Among them, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine includes an operation handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined play area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined time, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters (or passes through) an operating port arranged at a predetermined position in the play area. In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning port) located at a specific position within the game area opens in a specific manner, allowing balls to win, and a value (including not only prize balls but also data written to a magnetic card, etc.) is awarded according to the number of winning balls.

Gaming machine Z3 is any of gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3 and IZ1 to IZ11, characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the combined gaming machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a string of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then definitively displaying the identification information, a gaming machine equipped with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, in which the variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of a start operating means (e.g., an operating lever), the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of a stop operating means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the definitive identification information at the time of stopping is a specific identification information as a necessary condition, the gaming machine uses balls as a gaming medium, and is configured so that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display of the identification information and a large number of balls are paid out when the special gaming state is generated."

10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board)
22 Frame button (part of the operation means)
64b Third winning opening (detection means, second detection means, first detection means)
66, 67 Through gate (opening/closing lottery entrance)
81 Third symbol display device (part of production execution means, part of notification means, part of change means, part of production switching means, part of operation notification means, display means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of production execution means, part of notification means, part of change means, part of production switching means, part of operation notification means)
410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
413 Central opening (placed behind part of the ball entry area, part of the downstream area, and part of the branch position (second position))
414 Ball passage opening (part of ball entry area)
420 Previous design components (part of prevention measures)
422 Joint part (part of guide means, prevention means)
423 Partition plate (part of guide means, prevention means)
428 Ball guide protrusion (part of downstream area)
430 Middle member (part of flow path restriction means)
431 Central channel (part of the guide means, intermediate part, part of the downstream means, part of the non-branching position, part of the guide route, predetermined part)
440 Upper stage member (part of flow path restriction means)
450 Slide member (part of the guide means, part of the flow means, part of the switching means, first movable part)
451 Tip part (predetermined part, first part)
452 Left guide plate part (part of prescribed means, part of non-branching position)
452a Inclined surface section (approach means, overlapping section, inclined section)
453 Right guide plate part (part of prescribed means, part of non-branching position)
453a Slanted surface section (approach means, overlapping section, inclined section)
470 Tilting member (part of the guide means, downstream part, part of the branch position (second position), second part, second movable part)
640 Second winning opening (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
640a Electric accessories (part of the guide means, part of the switching means)
700a 2nd specific prize opening (flowing area, part of guide ball selection means)
715 Storage plate section (part of downstream area, part of first downstream area, part of guide ball selection means, part of retention means)
730 Movable upper lid member (opening/closing means)
740 Moving bed member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
751 Opening (second downstream area, part of guide ball selection means)
782 Ball extraction opening (part of the first downstream area)
810 Specific display (part of a predetermined display effect)
811 Time display (part of notification means, time notification means)
812 End position (part of notification means, end means)
813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
815 Caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
819 2nd caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
B3 Sphere arrangement (part of branch position, 1st position)
DR1 route (part of downstream area)
2458a Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
2458b Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
5770 Switching device (displacement means)
5772 Ball holder recess (ball holder)
6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
6822 Goal suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
7817 Past light amount display (difference notification means)
7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple landing positions for game balls on a movable component that can be switched between a state in which game balls can be guided to a prize ball opening and a state in which game balls are restricted from entering the prize ball opening, including a downstream position near the prize ball opening and an upstream position upstream of the downstream position, and the game ball is configured to be able to pass through the prize ball opening regardless of whether it lands at the downstream position or the upstream position (Patent Document 1).

JP2017-029531A

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines have a problem in that there is room for improvement in terms of improving the way the gaming balls flow down. The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be improved in terms of improving the way the gaming balls flow down.

To achieve this objective, the gaming machine described in claim 1 is equipped with a switching means that can switch between a first state in which the gaming ball can be guided to the ball entry area and a second state in which the ball is restricted from entering the ball entry area, and a flow-down area in which the gaming ball can flow down toward the switching means, and the flow-down area is located away from the ball entry area in front of the switching means.

The gaming machine described in claim 1 can be improved in terms of improving the flow of the gaming balls.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a first embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the winning unit. It is a rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded front perspective view of the winning unit. FIG. 2 is an exploded rear perspective view of the winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a winning unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a winning unit. (a) is a front view of the winning unit, (b) is a side view of the winning unit as viewed in the direction of arrow XVb in FIG. 15(a), and (c) is a side view of the winning unit as seen in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15(a). It is a top view of the winning unit when viewed from the direction. (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along the line XVIa-XVIa in FIG. 15(c). It is a sectional view of the winning unit taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15(c). It is a sectional view of the winning unit taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). It is a sectional view of the winning unit taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 15(c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVII-XVII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15 (c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XIX-XIX in Figure 15 (c). (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit along the line XXIIIa-XXIIIa in FIG. 15(c). (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) to (d) are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 1A to 1D are front perspective views of the winning unit. 13A and 13B are front perspective views of the winning unit. (a) and (b) are partial sectional views of the winning unit taken along the line XXIXa-XXIXa in FIG. 15(b). 15(a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit taken along line XXIXa-XXIXa in FIG. 15(b). (a) to (c) are diagrams showing an example of time-measured changes in the state of the electric accessory. A diagram explaining the relationship between hold type, game status, special pattern type, and variable time. A cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilt member, and the transmission member taken along line XXXIII-XXXIII in Figure 23 (a). A cross-sectional view of the slide member, the tilt member, and the transmission member taken along line XXXIII-XXXIII in Figure 23 (a). 23(a) is a sectional view of the slide member, the tilting member, and the transmission member taken along the line XXXIII-XXXIII in FIG. 23(a). FIG. 15(c) is a cross-sectional view of the plate member, base plate, slide member, tilt member, and transmission member taken along line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. (a) and (b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. (a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. (a) to (c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device in range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable upper lid member and the movable floor member taken along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 37(a). (a) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the movable upper lid member and the movable floor member taken along the line XLa-XLa in FIG. 37(a). (a) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the first special operation pattern, (b) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the second special operation pattern, and (c) is a diagram showing the time-counting changes of the second specific winning port in the third special operation pattern. (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main controller, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, and (c) is It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 1 random number table, and (d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first winning random number counter and the judgment value in the special symbol 2 random number table. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing correspondence relationships. (a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning type counter in the first winning type selection table and the jackpot type for special patterns, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second winning random number counter in the second winning random number table and the winning type for normal patterns. It is a top view of a front frame and an outer frame. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division settings and effective line settings of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. (a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of a jackpot performance, (b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of an ending performance, (c), (d) and (e) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect that is part of the jackpot effect. (a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a company name display performance displayed in the ending performance, and (b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display performance displayed in the ending performance. 13A is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed during the ending effect, and FIG. 13B is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen immediately after the ending effect has ended. This is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the ending performance and the jackpot type for special patterns. It is a sectional view of the winning unit in the second embodiment taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). A cross-sectional view of the winning unit taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15 (c). 13A is a schematic diagram showing a winning unit in the third embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a schematic diagram showing another example of the winning unit. 13A and 13B are schematic diagrams illustrating a winning unit according to a fourth embodiment. (a) and (b) are front views of the upper variable winning device in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the sixth embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in an ending effect in the seventh embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an example of a display screen for a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect. FIG. A figure showing an example of the change over time in the frame button display during the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time in the validity of the frame button operation, and the frame button operation.

Embodiments of the present invention will now be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to Figs. 1 to 50, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as a "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. Fig. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment, Fig. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and Fig. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the front side of the page is referred to as the front (front) side, and the back side of the page is referred to as the rear (back) side of the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1. In addition, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side will be explained respectively. Furthermore, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the figure (for example, see FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-back direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer shell 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined into a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer shell formed to have substantially the same external shape as the outer frame 11. The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two locations, upper and lower on the left side when viewed from the front (see Fig. 1), in order to support the inner frame 12. A frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails KG1, winning holes 63, 64, etc. is removably attached to the inner frame 12. A ball (game ball) flows down the front surface of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that fires a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a ball firing unit 112a that guides the ball fired from the ball firing unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

The illustration of the nail KG1 shows the outer shape of the nail KG1 as viewed in the length direction unless otherwise specified. That is, the nail KG1 is generally formed with a bulging shape at the front end (similar to a shape of a safety pin), but the shape of the bulging part is illustrated, and the shape of the thin part that is driven into the base plate 60 is not illustrated. Therefore, even if the gap between the nails KG1 in FIG. 2 is less than the diameter of the ball, the ball can pass through if the gap between the thin parts (not shown) of the nail KG1 is longer than the diameter of the ball.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, there is a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front, and a lower tray unit 15 that covers the lower side. Metal hinges 19 are attached to two places, top and bottom, on the left side when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so that they can be opened and closed toward the front, with the side where the hinges 19 are provided serving as the axis for opening and closing. The locks on the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 can be released by inserting a special key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a specified operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, etc., and is provided with a window 14c having a substantially elliptical opening in its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 is visible to the front side of the Pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls that juts out forward and is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4). In addition, a frame button 22 is provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the performance displayed on the third pattern display device 81 (see Figure 2) or when changing the content of the Super Reach performance.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, at the corners). These light-emitting means are controlled to change the light-emitting mode by lighting up or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when hitting a jackpot or when reaching a predetermined reach, thereby playing a role in enhancing the performance effect during the game. Illumination sections 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the periphery of the window section 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination parts 29 to 33 function as performance lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination part 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED when there is a jackpot or a reach effect. Or it will blink to notify you that you are hitting the jackpot, or that you are one step away from hitting the jackpot. Further, in the upper left part of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), there is provided a display lamp 34 which has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can display when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error has occurred.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching transparent resin to the underside of the right-side illumination section 32 from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the certificate stamps and the like affixed to the attachment space K1 (see Figure 2) on the front of the game board 13 can be seen from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in order to create a more dazzling appearance, a plated member 36 made of chrome-plated ABS resin is attached to the area around the illumination sections 29-33 in the pachinko machine 10.

Below the window 14c, a ball lending operation unit 40 is provided. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a number display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, balls are lent out according to the operation. Specifically, the number display unit 41 is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED is lit to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card, etc. inserted into the card unit. In addition, in pachinko machines where balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the ball dispensing operation unit 40 is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the ball dispensing operation unit 40 to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

The lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17 has a substantially box-shaped lower tray 50 with an open top surface formed in the center thereof for storing balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 17. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operating handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to drive a ball to the front of the game board 13.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball firing unit 112a, a firing stop switch 51b for stopping firing of balls during a period of being pressed, and rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by a change in electrical resistance is built-in. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes. The ball is fired with a strength (launching strength) corresponding to the player's operation, thereby driving the ball into the front of the game board 13 with a flight distance corresponding to the player's operation. Furthermore, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are off.

A ball removal lever 52 is provided at the front lower part of the lower tray 50 to operate when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. This ball removal lever 52 is always biased to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed on the bottom of the lower plate 50 opens. The ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is ejected. This operation of the ball removal lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50.

As shown in Figure 2, the game board 13 is constructed by assembling a number of nails KG1 and windmills WF for guiding balls, as well as rails 61, 62, a general winning opening 63, a first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640, a third winning opening 64b, a variable winning device 65, an upper variable winning device 700, normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, a variable display unit 80, etc., on a base plate 60 machined into a roughly square shape when viewed from the front, and the peripheral portion of the board is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see Figure 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. Winning unit 400 in which general winning hole 63, first winning hole 64 and second winning hole 640 are arranged, variable winning device 65 in which third winning hole 64b is arranged, upper variable winning device 700, variable display unit 80 is disposed in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The construction of the base plate 60 is not limited to resin materials. For example, it may be made of wood with thin plates glued together, and the various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 may be formed so that they cannot be seen by the player from the front side.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1). The configuration of the game board 13 will be described below, mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into an approximately arc shape is set up on the front of the game board 13, and an inner rail 61 formed of a strip-shaped metal plate like the outer rail 62 is set up inside the outer rail 62. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see Figure 1) surround the front and back, forming a game area in front of the game board 13 where games are played based on the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (where prize holes and the like are arranged and where shot balls flow down) that is partitioned in front of the game board 13 and is formed by the two rails 61, 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails.

The above-mentioned play area is a narrow interpretation, and in a broader sense, the play area may be expressed as the area where the game balls flow down until the profit given to the player by the game balls that flow down is determined. In this sense, the play area is not limited to the area on the front side of the game board 13. For example, the upstream path of the detection sensor 462 described later may also be included in the play area.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left in FIG. 2) to prevent a ball that has been guided to the top of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide path again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight part of the ball, and when a ball is launched with more than a predetermined force, it hits the return rubber 69 and loses its momentum. is reflected toward the center while being attenuated. Furthermore, between the lower right end of the inner rail 61 and the upper right end of the outer rail 62, there is a resin arc member 70 formed with an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface. It is fixed by being driven into the plate 60.

The play area 301 on the front side of the playboard 13 is largely divided into a left play area 302, a right play area 303, and a lower play area 304 with respect to the center frame 86 located in the center inside position.

The left side game area 302 is a game area where game balls hit from the left, which are launched with a reduced launch strength, flow down, and the right side game area 303 is a game area where game balls hit from the right, which are launched with a greater launch strength than game balls hit from the left, flow down. The lower game area 304 is a game area where game balls that have passed through the left side game area 302 or the right side game area 303 flow down.

The lottery based on winning will be explained in detail below. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is held when a ball wins a prize (a ball that is expected to give the player some kind of benefit (e.g., the payout of a prize ball, the execution of a lottery, or the benefit of moving to a more advantageous state)) in the first winning slot 64, the second winning slot 640, or the third winning slot 64b, and a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is held when the ball passes through the normal winning slots 66, 67.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 1 lottery) that is held for balls that enter the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b, a win/loss determination is made as to whether or not the special pattern is a jackpot (or a miss), and if it is determined that the special pattern is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is also determined.

In the special pattern lottery (special pattern 2 lottery) that is held for balls that enter the second winning slot 640, a determination is made as to whether the special pattern is a big win, a miss, or a small win. If it is determined that the special pattern is a big win, the type of big win is also determined, and if it is determined that the special pattern is a small win, the type of small win is also determined.

That is, in the special symbol lottery held for the ball entering the second winning hole 640, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot by the special symbol lottery held for the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b. In addition to this determination, if it is not a jackpot, a determination is made as to whether it is a small hit or a miss.

In the present embodiment, a small win is provided as a win that is other than a loss but has a different nature from a jackpot. That is, a jackpot generates an opportunity (a turning point in the game) to shift the gaming state to a high-probability state, a time-saving state, etc., but a small win does not generate an opportunity to shift the gaming state.

In addition, even if you win a small win in a high probability state, the high probability state will not end when the small win ends (except when the upper limit is reached), and you will not win a small win in the normal state or time saving state. Even if you win, the high probability state will not be triggered by the end of the small win. However, a small win is positioned as a win that satisfies the condition for operating the variable prize winning device 65, similar to a big win.

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, the special symbol is determined to be a jackpot with a probability of 1/320, and in the special symbol's high probability state (also referred to as the special symbol's variable probability state), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot in 32 minutes. It is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot with a probability of 1. Note that the probability of a jackpot is an example, and can be set to various values as long as the probability in the low probability state of the special symbol does not become less than 1/10 of the probability in the high probability state of the special symbol.

For ease of explanation, the lottery for the special symbol held when the gaming ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 1," and the lottery for the special symbol held when the gaming ball enters the second winning slot 640 is referred to as the "lottery for special symbol 2."

In addition, in this pachinko machine 10, when the special symbol is in a low probability state, there is a probability of 318/320 that the special symbol will be a small hit in the special symbol 2 lottery, and when the special symbol is in a high probability state, the probability is 318/320. It is determined that the special symbol is a small hit in the special symbol 2 lottery with a probability of . Note that the probability of a small win is just an example, and can be set with various numerical values.

When the special symbol becomes a small win (wins), a small win game is performed and the variable winning device 65 opens and closes. A player can win a certain amount of prize balls by entering a game ball into a specific winning hole 65a arranged inside the variable winning device 65 during a small winning game. In the small winning game of this embodiment, an operation is performed in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and then closed 1.8 seconds later.

The operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 in the small win of the special symbol may be a single pattern, or multiple types of patterns may be provided. For example, the operation pattern may be configured so that the number of times the specific winning port 65a is opened and closed, or the opening and closing time are different depending on the type of small win. Specifically, the operation pattern may be an opening for 1.8 seconds, an opening for 0.12 seconds is repeated 15 times at intervals of several seconds (a total opening of 1.8 seconds), or another operation pattern may be used.

When a special symbol becomes a jackpot (wins), the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a special gaming state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, or the second specific winning opening 700a of the upper variable winning device 700 is closed for a predetermined period of time. The opening operation is repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds) (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (regular number) have been won). As a result, a large amount of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a, so a larger amount of prize balls than usual are paid out. The fact that prize balls are paid out when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a and the number of balls to be paid out will be described later.

There are six types of jackpots for special symbols: "jackpot A," "jackpot B," "jackpot C," "jackpot a," "jackpot b," and "jackpot c." Details will be described later, but the number of rounds of the special game and the operation pattern of the electric device 640a after the special game ends are configured to differ depending on the jackpot type.

When a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, variable display of the special symbol starts on the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, and after a predetermined time (for example, 11 seconds to 60 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, A special symbol indicating the lottery result is displayed in a stopped state. If a ball enters the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the number of times the ball enters the winning hole is Each type of special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) corresponding to the lottery conducted based on the ball entering the mouth is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B. It is also shown on the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the number of reserved balls for the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b (the number of reserved balls for the special symbol 1), or the second winning hole 640 If the number of reserved balls (the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2) remains, the lottery of the next special symbol is performed and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

In this embodiment, even if there are still reserved balls for special pattern 1 and special pattern 2, when the display of the corresponding next special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) is completed, a lottery is held for the corresponding next special pattern (special pattern 1 or special pattern 2) and the display of the corresponding next special pattern is started. In other words, even if the display of the corresponding next special pattern (for example, special pattern 2 for special pattern 1) is not completed, the display of the corresponding next special pattern is completed, and the drawing of the corresponding next special pattern is started.

In addition, in this embodiment, even if both the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 and the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 remain, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 are equal to the number of reserved balls of the corresponding destination special symbol. When the fluctuating display ends, the next corresponding special symbol is drawn, and the fluctuating display corresponding to the lottery is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery may be performed preferentially in the order of acquisition (order of ball entry), or the lottery may be performed alternately with the special symbol 1 and the special symbol 2.

In addition, it may be configured such that the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 2 is executed preferentially than the lottery based on the reserved balls of special symbol 1, and in this case, the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 is 0. It is possible to avoid executing a lottery based on the reserved balls of the special symbol 1 while the number of balls is maintained.

In the lottery for the normal symbol (second symbol), a judgment is made as to whether or not the normal symbol is a winning symbol. If the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the electric device 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is driven for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds, 2.0 seconds, or 3.9 seconds), and the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 640. In other words, if the normal symbol is a winning symbol, the ball is allowed to enter the second winning hole 640, and as a result, the lottery for the special symbol is more likely to be held.

When the normal pattern (second pattern) is drawn, the second pattern display device 83 starts displaying the normal pattern, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.05 seconds or 1 second) has elapsed, the normal pattern indicating the lottery result is displayed stationary. If a ball passes through the normal winning openings 66, 67 while the second pattern display device 83 is displaying the variable display, the number of passes is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and is also shown by the second pattern reserved lamp 84. When the variable display by the second pattern display device 83 ends, if there are reserved balls remaining for the normal winning openings 66, 67, the next normal pattern is drawn and the variable display corresponding to the lottery starts.

In this embodiment, as added value after a jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transition to a special probability state of special symbols (high frequency special symbol probability state accompanied by small wins) from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot (for example, jackpot A, jackpot a described below), the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transition to a high probability state of special symbols (special symbol probability state) (for example, jackpot B, jackpot b, jackpot c described below), and the pachinko machine 10 is configured to transition to a time-saving state of normal symbols after a jackpot game until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed (for example, jackpot C, jackpot c described below).

In addition, in this embodiment, when a special symbol is given a variable probability state after the end of the special gaming state, a case has been described in which the variable probability state of the special symbol continues until the next jackpot. For example, the probability variable state (high probability state) of the special symbol is given from the end of the special game state until the 100th special symbol lottery is completed, and the special symbol is given a variable probability state (high probability state) after the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times. After that, the normal state may be set.

It should be noted that the number of times the special symbol is drawn in which the probability variable state (high probability state) of the above-mentioned special symbol is given is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times or 200 times.

The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state of the normal symbol is drawn is not limited to 100 times. For example, it may be 50 times, 5 times, or 0 times. The number of times the special symbol that results in the time-saving state is drawn may be set to be different from the number of times the special symbol that results in the special symbol's high probability state is drawn.

Here, the "high probability state of special symbols" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of a jackpot, a state in which the probability is changing (probability changing).In other words, the state is in a special gaming state. This is a gaming state that is easy to transition to.

In this embodiment, the "special probability changing state of special symbols (probability variation of special symbols with high frequency of small hits)" is a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the jackpot ends, so-called probability variation state (probability variation state). ), and is in a state where small wins occur frequently.In other words, while playing the game in a state where it is easy to transition to the special gaming state, even before transitioning to the special gaming state, the player is in a state where small winnings occur with high frequency. This is a game state in which you can win a large number of prize balls. The winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a game state is formed in which it is easy for a ball to enter the second winning hole 640. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a third operation pattern described later.

In this embodiment, the "high probability state of the special symbol (the special symbol is changing in probability)" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, which is the so-called state in which the probability is changing (in the course of changing the probability). In other words, it is a gaming state in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. The winning probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is increased, and a game state is formed in which it is easy for the ball to enter the third winning hole 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a second operation pattern described later.

On the other hand, "low probability state of special symbols" refers to the time when the special symbols are not in a special probability state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is in a normal state, i.e., the probability of winning a jackpot is lower than when the special symbols are in a special probability state.

In addition, the "time saving state (time saving medium) of normal symbols" is a mode of a low probability state of special symbols, and the winning probability of the normal symbols increases and the winning unit 400, which will be described later, operates to enter the third winning hole. Refers to a game state in which it is easy for a ball to land in the 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a second operation pattern described later.

In addition, the "normal state" is an aspect of the low probability state (not the high probability state) of the special symbol, and the state of the game that is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (the jackpot probability is also normal symbol (second symbol)). This refers to a state in which the probability of winning has not changed, and it is not easy for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b. The electric accessory 640a is operated in a first operation pattern described later.

During the special probability change of the special symbol, the probability change of the special symbol, and the time reduction of the normal symbol, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is changed, and basically compared to the normal state. , is set so that a state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b side is maintained for a long time.

In this embodiment, when the electric role 640a is in a non-energized state (non-energized state, i.e., the moving plate member 641 described later is located in the front position and has entered the first ball sending path KR1), the game ball is more likely to be guided to the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b than when the electric role 640a is in an excited state (energized state, i.e., the moving plate member 641 described later is located in the rear position and has retreated from the first ball sending path KR1). Therefore, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, and during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b, making it easier to draw a special symbol.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the normal symbol, The number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened when a normal symbol is a hit may be increased compared to the normal state.

In addition, during the probability change of the special symbol or the time reduction of the regular symbol, the winning probability of the regular symbol (second symbol) does not change, and the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened, At least one of the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened may be changed.

In addition, during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time for which the electric device 640a associated with the second winning slot 640 is opened or the number of times the electric device 640a is opened may be left unchanged, and only the probability of winning the normal symbol (second symbol) may be increased compared to the normal state.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B each having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed at the lower left side of the gaming area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display information according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming status of the pachinko machine 10. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are used differently depending on whether the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the third winning hole 64b, or the second winning hole 640. It is configured. Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning port 64 or the third winning port 64b, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, and on the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning port 640. In this case, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in special probability change, probability change, short time, or normal mode, or to indicate whether or not it is in change. It can be indicated by the state, and whether the stopped symbol is a symbol corresponding to a special probability variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a probability variable jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot, a symbol corresponding to a small hit, or a missing symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or it is held. In addition to indicating the number of balls by lighting, a seven-segment display device displays the number of rounds during jackpots and errors. Note that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the respective LEDs emit light in different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and by combining the emitted light colors, it is possible to indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

When a ball enters the first winning slot 64, the third winning slot 64b, or the second winning slot 640 while the special pattern (first pattern) is being displayed on the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, the number of balls entering is reserved for each type of winning slot (i.e., for each type of special pattern, the number of balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b corresponding to special pattern 1 is separate from the number of balls entering the second winning slot 640 corresponding to special pattern 2) up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37A, 37B and also by the third pattern display device 81.

In this embodiment, the ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b, and the ball entering the second winning slot 640 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of times of reservation is not limited to four, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (e.g., eight times).

In this pachinko machine 10, a lottery is held when a prize is won in either the first prize slot 64, the third prize slot 64b, or the second prize slot 640. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not there is a jackpot (jackpot lottery), and if it determines that there is a jackpot, it also determines the type of jackpot. The types of jackpots that can be determined here include a 15R special jackpot, an 8R jackpot, and a 4R jackpot. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B not only shows whether the result of the lottery is a jackpot or not as the stopping symbol after the fluctuation has ended, but also shows a symbol according to the type of jackpot if there is a jackpot.

Here, a "15R special probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a special probability jackpot state (a high probability state of special symbols with frequent small wins) after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15, and an "8R probability jackpot" refers to a probability jackpot that transitions to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 8.

In addition, in "4R jackpot", after the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, the jackpot shifts to a low probability state and becomes a time-saving state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations), or the maximum This is a jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of four rounds.

The play area is provided with multiple general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball wins. A variable display unit 80 is also provided in the center of the play area.

The variable display unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 consisting of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that displays a third pattern in synchronization with the display change in the first pattern display device 37A, 37B, triggered by a win (initial win) in either the first winning port 64, the third winning port 64b, or the second winning port 640; a second pattern display device 83 consisting of an LED that displays a second pattern in a variable manner, triggered by the passage of a ball through the normal winning port (through gate) 66, 67; and a second pattern reserved lamp 84 that indicates the number of reserved balls corresponding to the number of times the game ball has passed through the normal winning port 66, 67, by its lit state.

In addition, a center frame 86 is arranged on the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81. The third pattern display device 81 can be seen through an opening in the center of this center frame 86.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), so that, for example, three symbols on the left, middle, and right can be displayed. Two symbol rows are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbols), and these third symbols are scrolled vertically for each symbol row, and the third symbols are variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It looks like this.

The third symbol display device 81 of this embodiment is different from the first symbol display device 37A, 37B that displays the gaming state under the control of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4). A decorative display is made in accordance with the display on the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Note that instead of the display device, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, reels or the like.

In this embodiment, the third symbol is composed of 10 main symbols numbered "0" to "9". In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when the result of the lottery for special symbols performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are lined up (a variable display that finally stops with the same main symbols lined up) is performed, and the jackpot occurs (a transition to a special game state begins) after the variable display ends.

On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned (a variable display that ultimately stops when the same main symbols are not aligned) is performed. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, a variable display is performed in which the specific small win symbol eventually stops.

For example, if the special symbol lottery result is a normal jackpot, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned. On the other hand, if it is a special variable jackpot or a variable jackpot, one of the numbers "0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9" including odd numbers will be added. A variable display is performed in which the main symbols are aligned. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a failure, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number are not aligned. Further, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, a variable display is performed in which a symbol with the words "Prize Balls Ready" stopped at the center of the display area of the display device.

The second symbol display device 83 alternately displays an "○" symbol and an "x" symbol as a display symbol (second symbol) for a predetermined period of time each time the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67. This is a fluctuating display that lights up. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a win, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the symbol "○" after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the second symbol display device 83 stops displaying the "x" symbol after the second symbol is displayed in a fluctuating manner.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the "○" symbol), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is moved to a predetermined symbol. It is configured to be activated (opened) for only a certain amount of time.

The time it takes for the second symbol to change (change time) is set to be shorter during the special symbol's probability change or during the normal symbol's time-saving mode than during the normal game state. As a result, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, the second symbol's change display is performed for a short time, so that more normal symbols (second symbols) can be drawn than during the normal game state. This increases the chances of winning the normal symbol, giving the player more opportunities to have the game ball picked up by the electric role 640a located upstream of the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 64b. Therefore, during the special symbol's probability change and during the normal symbol's time-saving mode, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to win the third winning hole 64b or the second winning hole 640.

Note that if the state is made such that it is easier for the ball to enter the third winning slot 64b or the second winning slot 640 by increasing the probability of winning or increasing the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction, the time taken for the second symbol to change display may be constant regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time taken for the second symbol to change display is set shorter during the special symbol probability change or the normal symbol time reduction than during the normal state, the winning probability of the normal symbol may be constant regardless of the game state, and the opening time or number of times the electric device 640a opens for one normal symbol win may be constant regardless of the game state.

Normal prize winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 are assembled to the game board in areas on both sides of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls fired into the game area 301, the balls flow down the left side game area 302 or the right side game area 303. (The nail KG1 arrangement on the upstream side is configured to collect the balls into the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67).

The relationship between the balls shot into the game area 301 and the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 is not limited to this. For example, the game area 301 may be configured such that some of the balls that flow down from the balls shot into the game area 301 pass through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is held up to a maximum of four times in total, and the number of balls that are held is displayed on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and the second symbol is held as well. The lamp 84 is also illuminated. The second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided in four, which corresponds to the maximum number of holding lamps, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

The variable display of the second symbol can be performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this embodiment, as well as by changing the display of the second symbol by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83. This may be performed using a part of the 3-symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be lit in a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, since the number of reserved balls is shown by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol retention lamp 84 may not be lit.

In addition, the maximum number of balls that can be reserved for passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67 is not limited to 4 times, but may be 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can also set it. In addition, the number of ordinary winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 arranged on the base plate 60 is not limited to two, and may be one, or other plurality (for example, three or more). It may be.

In addition, the installation positions of the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67 are not limited to both the left and right sides of the variable display unit 80, but may be, for example, on either the left or right side of the variable display unit 80, or above or below the variable display unit 80.

A first winning hole 64 into which a ball can enter is disposed below the variable display unit 80. When a ball enters this first winning hole 64, the passage of the ball is detected by a first winning hole switch (detection sensor 442 described later) provided on the back side of the game board 13, and the first winning hole switch is turned on. When the first winning hole switch is turned on, a lottery is performed for special pattern 1 by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first pattern display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning hole 64 when viewed from the front, a second winning hole 640 in which a ball can be won is arranged. When a ball enters the second winning port 640, the second winning port switch (detection sensor 462 to be described later) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning port switch, the main control device At 110 (see FIG. 4), a special symbol 2 is drawn, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

It should be noted that the second winning opening 640 is configured so that only balls that have passed through the inside of the winning unit 400 win, and winnings that do not go through the winning unit 400 are prevented, but details will be described later.

Furthermore, below the second winning hole 640 when viewed from the front, a third winning hole 64b in which a ball can be won is provided. When a ball enters the third winning port 64b, a third winning port switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and due to the turning on of the third winning port switch, the main control device 110 ( (See FIG. 4), a special symbol 1 is drawn, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is displayed on the first symbol display device 37A.

It should be noted that the third winning opening 64b is configured so that only balls that have passed through the inside of the winning unit 400 win, and winnings that do not go through the winning unit 400 are prevented, but details will be described later.

In addition, the first winning port 64, the third winning port 64b and the second winning port 640 are each a winning port (prize ball port) from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters the winning port and the first winning port switch, the third winning port switch or the second winning port switch is turned on.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640. are configured the same, but the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640 are different. Different numbers, for example, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b is three, and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball enters the second winning hole 640. may be configured as five. Further, the magnitude relationship between the number of prize balls and the number of prize balls may be reversed.

An electric device 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640 (and the third winning opening 64b). Normally, this electric device 640a is in a de-energized state (forward closed state), making it difficult for the ball to win the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the second pattern is displayed in a variable manner in response to the passage of a ball through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67, and a "○" pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83, the electric device 640a is in an excited state (rear open state), making it easier for the ball to win the second winning opening 640.

During the special probability of a special symbol, it is possible to create an environment in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning slot 640 than in the normal state. On the other hand, the first winning slot 64 does not have the electric device 640a that is provided in the second winning slot 640, and the ball is always able to win.

The probability of a jackpot occurring when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 and when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is the same in both low and high probability states. However, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot A, a) that provides the maximum profit (number of winning balls in the special game state) as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is set to be higher when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 than when a ball enters the first winning slot 64.

Therefore, since it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second winning opening 640 due to the electric device 640a located upstream of the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b during normal play, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a jackpot by shooting the ball with a shooting strength that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning opening 64, which does not have the electric device 640a, and by having the ball enter the first winning opening 64, gaining more opportunities to win the jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, if the electric device 640a located upstream of the second winning hole 640 and the third winning hole 64b is controlled to operate by passing the ball through the normal winning hole (through gate) 66, 67, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric device 640a, and it is likely to win the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball with a shooting strength that makes it easy for the ball to reach the electric device 640a, pass the normal winning hole (through gate) 66, 67 to operate the electric device 640a, and aim for the ball to win the jackpot by winning the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment can allow the player to change the way the ball is shot, between a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the first winning port 64, and a shot with a shooting intensity that makes it easier for the ball to reach the electric device 640a, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in a special probability variable state, during probability variable, during time-saving mode, during normal mode, etc.). This allows the player to vary the way the ball is shot, making the game more enjoyable.

In this embodiment, during a jackpot game, the electric device 640a is driven in the same operating pattern as in the normal state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to configure the device so that it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b during a jackpot game.

In this embodiment, a case has been described in which both the ball that has flowed down the left play area 302 and the ball that has flowed down the right flow area 303 can reach the first winning opening 64 or the electric device 640a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that only balls that have flowed down the left flow area 302 reach the first winning opening 64, and only balls that have flowed down the right flow area 303 reach the electric device 640a.

In this case, normally, the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64 so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and the ball is fired toward the first winning opening 64. It is more advantageous for the player to obtain a large number of jackpot lottery machines by winning a prize, and to aim for a jackpot.

On the other hand, during the special probability of a special symbol, during the probability of a special symbol, or during the time-saving period of a normal symbol, if the electric device 640a attached to the second winning port 640 is controlled to operate by passing the ball through the normal winning port (through gate) 66, 67, the ball is likely to be picked up by the electric device 640a and it is likely to win at the second winning port 640. Therefore, it is more advantageous for the player to shoot the ball toward the side where the electric device 640a is located so that it passes to the right of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "right hit"), pass through the normal winning port (through gate) 67 to operate the electric device 640a, and aim for the ball to win at the second winning port 640 to win the jackpot.

Thereby, depending on the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible for the player to change the way he shoots the ball between "hitting to the left" and "hitting to the right." Therefore, since the player can change the way he or she hits the ball, the player can enjoy the game.

In addition, in this case, in a situation where "right-handed hitting" should be performed, by displaying a specific image (right-handed navigation) on the third symbol display device 81, the player can control the (special) probability-changing state of the special symbol or the normal symbol. The configuration may be such that the benefits of being in a time-saving state can be reliably obtained.

In the right-handed navigation, the text "Aim to the right!!" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and three right-pointing arrows are displayed above and below the text. By displaying these characters and arrows, it is possible to make the player feel that the ball should be launched into the path (channel) provided on the right side of the game board 13. Therefore, it is possible for the player to reliably obtain benefits due to the variable probability state of the special symbols and the shortened time state of the normal symbols.

In addition, if a player is performing a "right hit" even though a "left hit" should be performed, it is preferable to be able to notify the player that the recommended game mode and the game mode being performed are different. For example, a warning image may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

This warning image (right-hit warning image) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined that the player is making a right hit even though it is not the period in which the player should hit the ball (right hit) into the path (flow path) provided on the right side of the game board 13. More specifically, it is displayed when it is determined that the player is making a right hit in the normal state (a state in which the special symbol is not in a special bonus state, nor in a normal symbol time-saving state).

For example, in a pachinko machine where the electric accessory 640a is controlled so that it is difficult to guide the ball to the second winning hole 640 in the normal state (it is difficult to let the ball enter the second winning hole 640 even if you hit right). Suppose. In this case, if the ball is hit right in the normal state, the chance to receive a special symbol lottery will be reduced compared to the case where the ball is hit to the left and aimed at the first winning hole 64. That is, if the player hits right in the normal state, it becomes difficult to hit the jackpot, resulting in a loss for the player. Therefore, by displaying the right-handed hitting warning image and encouraging left-handed hitting, the player is configured to prevent (suppress) the player from making a loss.

If it is determined that the player is playing right-handed in the normal state, the words "Warning" and "Please play left-handed!!" are displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The characters are displayed. By displaying these characters, it is possible to remind the player that he should not play right-handed (he should play left-handed). Furthermore, by checking the presence or absence of the right-handed hitting warning screen, the clerk at the hall can easily determine whether or not there is a player who is playing an irregular game method of playing right-handed in the normal state.

The method for determining whether or not a right-handed hit is made is to determine whether or not the ball has entered the normal winning opening (through gate) 67 (see Figure 2), into which the ball can flow if a right-handed hit is made.

In addition, it is easy to configure the device to display a right-hit warning image when it detects that a ball has entered the normal winning port (through gate) 67 (see Figure 2) in a normal state, but this is not limited to this. For example, when it detects that a ball has entered (entered) the specific winning port 65a in a state other than a big win game or a small win game, it may be configured to determine that an illegal game is being played (not limited to a right-hit game, but also including a game mode in which a load is applied to the variable winning device 65 to open the specific winning port 65a and force the game ball to enter) and to display a right-hit warning image. This allows the hall staff to easily determine whether or not there is illegal play by simply checking for the presence or absence of a right-hit warning image.

In addition, for example, when it is detected that a ball has entered the specific winning port 65a in a state other than during a big win or small win game, a signal indicating that cheating is occurring may be output to the hall computer. This allows the operator of the hall computer to easily determine whether or not cheating is possible, and the machine number (location) of the pachinko machine 10 where the cheating is occurring.

Further, for example, by narrowing the right flow path of the variable display device unit 80, a range through which the game balls are forced to pass is formed, and a detection sensor capable of detecting the passage of the game balls is arranged in this range. You can do it like this. In this case, based on the fact that the detection sensor detects the passing of the game ball, it can be determined that the ball is being hit to the right.

In addition, for example, a detection sensor may be provided that can detect the displacement of a movable member (e.g., a windmill) located to the left of the top position of the variable display unit 80 (corresponding to the center position in FIG. 2). In this case, when a game ball is being shot, it can be determined that a right shot is being performed based on the fact that no displacement of the movable member is detected even after the expected operation timing has passed.

In this embodiment, a variable winning device 65 is disposed below the first winning hole 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific winning hole (large opening hole) 65a is provided approximately in the center thereof.

In the pachinko machine 10, when a small win is obtained in the lottery for a special symbol that is performed as a result of winning in the second winning port 640, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit up to show the stopping symbol for the small win. In addition, the stopping symbol corresponding to the small win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to notify the occurrence of the small win. After that, a small win game in which the ball is likely to win is executed. For this small win game, the specific winning port 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 1.8 seconds have elapsed or until 10 balls (the specified number) have won).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won in a lottery of special symbols held due to winning in the first winning slot 64, the third winning slot 64b, or the second winning slot 640, the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is lit up to show the jackpot stop symbol after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot, and the occurrence of the jackpot is notified. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is more likely to win. In this special game state, the specific winning slot 65a or the second specific winning slot 700a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls (prescribed number) have won).

The opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is taking place is one form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger number of prize balls than usual (in this embodiment, 15 balls based on the winning of one ball) as an added gaming value (game value).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for driving the opening/closing plate to open and close. Normally, the specific winning hole 65a is in a closed state in which a ball cannot enter a prize or it is difficult to enter a prize. In the event of a jackpot, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate forward, temporarily forming an open state in which the ball easily enters the specific winning hole 65a, and distinguishing between the open state and the normal closed state. It operates by repeating the following states alternately. In addition, the opening/closing mode of the second specific winning opening 700a will be described later.

The variable winning device 65 is designed with a horizontal length so that it can receive not only balls that pass through the inside of the winning unit 400, but also balls that do not enter the winning unit 400 but flow down the outside left and right sides of the winning unit 400 while being guided by the nail KG1. In other words, the horizontal width of the specific winning opening 65a is designed to be longer than the horizontal width of the winning unit 400.

Whether or not the player is easily guided into the winning unit 400 varies depending on the state of the nail KG1 arranged upstream of the winning unit 400, but in this embodiment, depending on the state of the nail KG1, the player has an advantage. It is possible to prevent the situation from becoming too difficult or too disadvantageous (it is possible to balance the advantages).

That is, for example, if the ball is likely to be guided inside the winning unit 400 with a high probability, the ball may be passed through the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b where the ball is guided through the inside of the winning unit 400. It is advantageous for the player to be able to receive lots of special symbols frequently when the time required for the lottery is shortened or when the probability is variable.

On the other hand, when a ball enters the variable winning device 65 in a jackpot game or a small winning game, the ball that enters the winning unit 400 enters the second winning port 640 or the second winning device 65 before reaching the variable winning device 65. The number of balls that are picked up by the third winning hole 64b and reaches the specific winning hole 65a is reduced. In addition, if there are fewer balls that deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down on the left and right sides of the winning unit 400, it is disadvantageous to a game where prize balls are frequently paid out by balls entering the specific winning opening 65a. be.

For example, if the probability of the ball being guided into the winning unit 400 is low, the ball may be passed through the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b through which the ball is guided through the winning unit 400. When the lottery time is shortened or the probability is changed, the interval between special symbols being drawn tends to become long, which is disadvantageous for the player from the viewpoint of gaming efficiency.

On the other hand, when balls enter the variable winning device 65 in a big win game or a small win game, fewer balls enter the inside of the winning unit 400, so fewer balls are picked up by the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b and are unable to reach the specific winning port 65a. In addition, more balls deviate from the winning unit 400 and flow down the left and right sides of the winning unit 400, so when the specific winning port 65a is open, it is expected that a large number of balls will enter the specific winning port 65a and a large number of prize balls will be paid out, which is advantageous for the player.

Thus, even if the state of nail KG1 makes it easier or harder for the ball to be guided into the winning unit 400, if the state of nail KG1 works to the player's advantage during the period in which the player is trying to win a special pattern by drawing a lottery and hit a jackpot, it can work to the player's disadvantage during the jackpot game, whereas if the state of nail KG1 works to the player's disadvantage during the period in which the player is trying to win a special pattern by drawing a lottery and hit a jackpot, it can work to the player's advantage during the jackpot game. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being too advantageous or too disadvantageous depending on the state of nail KG1 (a balance of advantages can be achieved).

Note that the special game state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is provided in the gaming area, and when the LED corresponding to the jackpot is lit on the first symbol display device 37A, 37B, the specific winning opening 65a Or, when the second specific winning opening 700a is opened for a predetermined time and the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a while the specific winning opening 65a or the second specific winning opening 700a is open. As a special game state, a game state may be formed in which a large opening hole provided separately from the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time.

In addition, the number of specific winning holes 65a or second specific winning holes 700a is not limited to two, but may be one or a plurality of three or more (for example, three), and the arrangement position is also that of the first winning hole 64. It is not limited to the lower side, but may be placed on the left and right sides or the upper side of the variable display unit 80, for example.

The right corner of the lower side of the game board 13 is provided with an attachment space K1 for attaching stamps, identification labels, etc., and the stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 can be seen through a small window 35 in the front frame 14 (see Figure 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71. Balls flowing down the gaming area that do not win in any of the winning ports 63, 64, 64b, 65a, 640, and 700a, enter the first out port 71, left out port 71L, or right out port 71R. and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

The first out port 71 is arranged below the first winning port 64. The left out opening 71L is arranged on the left side of the specific winning opening 65a, and the right out opening 71R is arranged on the right side of the specific winning opening 65a.

In this embodiment, the specific winning opening 65a is located near the bottom edge of the play area, so the gap between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a is narrow. Therefore, if the multiple balls rolling along the bottom edge of the play area on the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a were all configured to head toward the first outlet 71, there is a possibility that balls will get stuck between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning opening 65a, causing play to be interrupted.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left out port 71L and the right out port 71R are provided, so that the ball rolling on the lower edge of the gaming area on the right and left outside of the specific winning port 65a is transferred to the first out port. 71, the ball can be ejected to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the left out port 71L or the right out port 71R. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation where balls become jammed between the inner rail 61 and the specific winning a prize opening 65a, and therefore it is possible to avoid interruption of the game.

The game board 13 has numerous nails KG1 planted in it to appropriately distribute and adjust the direction in which the balls fall, and various components (gimmicks) such as windmills WF are also arranged on it.

As shown in FIG. 3, the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 is mainly equipped with control board units 90, 91 and a back pack unit 94. The control board unit 90 is unitized with a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized with a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 is made up of a back pack 92 forming a protective cover portion and a dispensing unit 93. In addition, each control board includes an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for communicating with various devices, a random number generator used for various lotteries, and a controller used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit and the like are installed as necessary.

The main control device 110, the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each control device and each board.

Further, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) have a box base and a box cover connected in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). connection). Furthermore, a seal (not shown) is affixed to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover, spanning the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102 or forcefully open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and box cover It is cut into two sides. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 is equipped with a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and opening upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently sloping toward the downstream side, a case rail 132 connected vertically to the downstream side of the tank rail 131, and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream part of the case rail 132, which pays out balls using a specified electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see Figure 4). The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 is attached to the tank rail 131 to impart vibration to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball jam (return to normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball jam in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4), for example. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on to return the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201, which is a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 contains a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, a RAM 203 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202, and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 executes the main processes of the pachinko machine 10, such as the jackpot lottery, the display settings on the first pattern display devices 37A, 37B and the third pattern display device 81, and the lottery for the display results on the second pattern display device.

In addition, in order to instruct the sub-control devices such as the dispensing control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113 to operate, various commands are sent from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices via a data transmission/reception circuit, but such commands are sent only in one direction, from the main control device 110 to the sub-control devices.

RAM 203 has various areas, counters, and flags, as well as a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of MPU 201 and the return addresses of control programs executed by MPU 201 are stored, and a work area (working region) in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. Note that RAM 203 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving a backup voltage from power supply device 115 even after power to pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all data stored in RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage or the like, the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of the power cutoff (including when the power cut occurs; the same applies hereinafter) are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power-on due to resolution of a power outage; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off, based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by a main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed during a startup process (not shown) when the power is turned on. Note that the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power outage signal SG1 from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is input to the MPU 201. When input to , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing during a power outage is immediately executed.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the audio lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol holding lamp, and the lower side of the opening/closing board of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening/closing the front side and a solenoid for driving electric accessories is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. Send.

The input/output port 205 is also connected to various switches 208, which are made up of a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 (described below) provided in the power supply device 115. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is a calculation device, has a ROM 212 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal register of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to be able to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Note that, similar to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured so that a power outage signal SG1 is input from the power outage monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to an occurrence of a power outage, etc., and the power outage signal SG1 is When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as processing during a power outage.

The MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 is connected to an input/output port 215 via a bus line 214 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, payout motor 216, launch control device 112, etc. are each connected to the input/output port 215. In addition, although not shown, a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid-out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. Note that the prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to launch the ball. . The ball firing unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in accordance with the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 controls the output of audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker not shown) 226, the output of turning on and off a lamp display device (illumination sections 29 to 33, display lamps 34, etc.) 227, and the output of fluctuation effects (fluctuation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114, such as display) and preview presentation. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 222 that stores control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, etc., and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 consisting of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, display control device 114, audio output device 226, lamp display device 227, other devices 228, frame button 22, etc. are connected to the input/output port 225, respectively.

The audio lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and uses the determined display mode as a command. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the content of the time presentation. When the stage is changed, a back image change command including information regarding the changed stage is sent to the display control device 114 in order to display a back image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is the main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to commands sent from the audio lamp control device 113.

The voice lamp control device 113 also receives a command (display command) from the display control device 114 that indicates the display content of the third pattern display device 81. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a voice corresponding to the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content, and also controls the turning on and off of the lamp display device 227 in accordance with the display content.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and controls the variation effects of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on commands received from the voice ramp control device 113. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command to notify the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 to the audio lamp control device 113. The audio lamp control device 113 matches the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the audio output from the audio output device 226 by outputting audio from the audio output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by this display command. be able to.

The power supply device 115 has a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the necessary operating voltage to each of the control devices 110-114, etc. through a power supply path not shown. In summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in an externally supplied 24-volt AC voltage, generates a 12-volt voltage for driving various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, motors, etc., a 5-volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc., and supplies the necessary voltages to each of the control devices 110-114, etc.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 and the MPU 211 of the dispensing control unit 111 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of 24 volts DC, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and when this voltage falls below 22 volts, it determines that a power failure (power failure, power cut) has occurred and outputs the power failure signal SG1 to the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111. By outputting the power failure signal SG1, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 recognize the occurrence of a power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Note that the power supply unit 251 is configured to maintain the output of the 5 volt voltage, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value for a sufficient time to execute the NMI interrupt processing, even after the voltage of 24 volts DC stabilized falls below 22 volts. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the dispensing control unit 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt processing (not shown) normally.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and sends a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 to clear the backup data. It is transmitted to the device 111.

Next, the overall configuration of the winning unit 400 will be described. FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the winning unit 400, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the winning unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the winning unit 400 includes a plate member 410 having a plurality of insertion holes 411 through which fastening screws are inserted when the winning unit 400 is fastened to the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) so as to cover the opening of the base plate 60.

That is, the part on the front side of the plate member 410 is a part disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and the part on the back side of the plate member 410 is a part disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The portion is a portion disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 rather than the front side surface facing the glass unit 16.

The plate member 410 of the winning unit 400 is provided with a ball receiver 412 at the left and right center position of the upper end, which is formed in a shape capable of receiving a ball from above and sending the ball backward. The thrown ball enters the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13.

Some of the balls guided inside the winning unit 400 are configured to win in the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2). The ball is once sent backward inside the winning unit 400, then its flow direction is reversed, and after it is placed again on the front side of the plate member 410, it wins in the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b; the details of the flow of the ball will be described later.

Figures 7 and 9 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit 400, and Figures 8 and 10 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit 400. Figures 7 and 8 show the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric role 640a, and Figures 9 and 10 show the excited state (rear open state) of the electric role 640a. Details of the arrangement of the electric role 640a in the non-excited state and the excited state will be described later.

As illustrated in FIGS. 7 to 10, the winning unit 400 includes a plate member 410 fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2), and a plate member 410 disposed on the front side of the plate member 410. A front design member 420 is fastened and fixed, a middle member 430 is arranged on the back side of the plate member 410 and fastened and fixed to the plate member 410, and a middle member 430 is arranged above the middle member 430 and fastened and fixed to the middle member 430. A slide member 450 is provided between the middle member 430 and the upper member 440, and a slide member 450 is supported by the middle member 430 so as to be slidable back and forth and constitutes an electric accessory 640a.

The plate member 410 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes a central opening 413 that is drilled in a generally rectangular shape that is long in the vertical direction and has a left-right width that allows a ball to pass through at the left-right center position, a ball passage opening 414 that is drilled to the upper right side of the upper end of the central opening 413 and is large enough to allow a ball to pass through after it has landed on the front end of the slide member 450, a sliding opening 415 that is continuously formed below the ball passage opening 414 and is expanded outward to the left and right from the left-right width of the ball passage opening 414 so that the slide member 450 can be inserted through it, a support opening 416 that is continuously formed below the sliding opening 415 and is drilled in a generally rectangular shape that corresponds to the outer shape of the protrusion 437a of the middle member 430, and through which the protrusion 437a is inserted and supported, and a ball discharge opening 417 that is continuously formed below the support opening 416 and is drilled to a left-right width that allows a ball to pass through.

The ball passage opening 414, the sliding opening 415, the support opening 416, and the ball discharge opening 417 are configured symmetrically on the left and the same symbols are used for the left-hand components, and the description is omitted.

The central opening 413 is an opening through which the balls that are guided by the central flow path 431 of the middle member 430 and flow down to the front side pass to the front side. In addition, when the electric device 640a is in the excited state (retracted open state), it also functions as an opening through which the balls pass to the rear side and are guided to the second winning port switch (detection sensor 462 described later), but details will be described later.

The ball passage opening 414 is an opening through which a ball riding on the slide member 450 in the non-excited state (see FIG. 5) can pass through on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 is guided to the back side of the plate member 410 by passing through the ball passage opening 414.

The sliding opening 415 is an opening that supports the distal end portion 451 of the sliding member 450 in a sliding manner when the sliding member 450 moves back and forth. The plate member 410 includes a slide support portion 418 that extends rearward from the left and right ends of the slide opening 415 while maintaining the shape of the inner surface of the slide opening 415. As a result, the slide member 450 can be supported at a position rearward of the slide opening 415, so even if the slide member 450 slides with a displacement width greater than or equal to the longitudinal width of the slide opening 415, the slide member 450 450 displacements can be stabilized.

Through the support opening 416, the protruding portion 437a of the middle member 430 projects to the front side. An opening 435a of a detection sensor 435 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed in the protruding portion 437a of the middle member 430, in front of the plate member 410. That is, of the balls received by the slide member 450 in a non-excited state, those that did not pass through the ball passage opening 414 before the slide member 450 was placed in an excited state pass through the opening 435a disposed in front of the support opening 416 directly below them.

The ball discharge opening 417 is an opening for allowing the ball that has passed through the opening 435a provided on the front side of the support opening 416 to pass therethrough and throwing the ball to the back side.

The front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and comprises a front plate 421 that constitutes the design surface, a joint 422 that is formed at the upper end of the front plate 421 in the center position on the left and right and protrudes from the rear side in a shape that can receive the lower edge of the ball receiving portion 412, a pair of partition plates 423 that extend downward from the lower end of the joint 422, and a pair of partition plates 423 that protrude outward to the left and right at a height position that can support the protrusion 437a of the middle member 430 at the lower part of the partition plate 423. The ball guide ribs 427 are formed on the rear side of the front plate 421, and extend from the rear of the front plate 421. The ball guide ribs 427 are formed on the rear side of the front plate 421, and extend from the rear of the front plate 421. The ball guide ribs 427 are formed on the rear side of the front plate 421, and extend from the rear side ...

Because the front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, even if the front plate 421 covers the front side, the structure on the back side and the balls flowing down can be seen through the front plate 421. In other words, the player can see the state of the electric role 640a (the slide member 450 and the tilt member 470) and the way the balls flow down the back side of the front plate 421.

The joint 422 is formed in a shape that can receive the ball receiving portion 412 so that the seam with the lower edge of the ball receiving portion 412 of the plate member 410 is not noticeable, so that the ball receiving portion 412 and the front plate portion 421 appear integrated when viewed from the front (see Figure 5).

Therefore, it is not only possible to design the ball receiving part 412 and the front plate part 421 to have separate designs, but also to form a complete design by combining the ball receiving part 412 and the front plate part 421.

The joint portion 422 also has the function of restricting the downward direction of the ball on the front side of the plate member 410. That is, the ball received on the slide member 450 in the non-excited state is prevented from directly flowing into the center position of the left and right sides with the momentum of flowing down to the left and right inwards by colliding with the joint portion 422. That is, the flow path of the ball received on the slide member 450 is limited by the state of the slide member 450 and the joint portion 422.

Therefore, the ball received by the slide member 450 in the de-energized state is guided rearward by riding on the slide member 450, or the ball is disposed in front of the support opening 416 by switching the slide member 450 to the energized state. It will be guided to the opening 435a.

The partition plate 423 has the function of restricting the direction in which the balls flow downward on the front side of the plate member 410. In other words, by disposing the partition plate 423, the balls that pass through the central opening 413 on the front side are prevented from being discharged to the outside left or right, and the flow path of the balls is restricted so that they flow exclusively downward.

The curved wall portion 425 is formed so that the ball flows outwardly to the left and right. This makes it easy to distinguish between a ball guided by the curved wall portion 425 and flowing backward through the ball discharge opening 417 and a ball flowing backward through the central opening 413 when viewed from the front.

Moreover, unlike the case where the ball flow path is formed so that it does not flow outward to the left and right, by leaving a left and right distance between the front and rear positions of the central opening 413 and the front and rear positions of the ball discharge opening 417, it is possible to arrange a specific member. Space can be secured. In addition, in this embodiment, a space (receiving recess 465) is formed for arranging a member (first member 481) for transmitting driving force to the electric accessory 640a, but the details will be described later.

The upper surface of the eaves portion 426 is formed as a smooth surface with the same inclination as the upper surface of the joint portion 422, and functions as a part that switches the flow direction of a ball resting on the upper left and right sides of the joint portion 422 to the left and right outward directions, but details will be described later.

The ball guide protrusion 427 is formed along the path of the balls that flow down toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 among the balls placed on the slide member 450, and functions as the part that comes into contact with the balls as they flow down.

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate part 421 is worn out due to friction with the ball after long-term use, it can be worn from the tip of the ball guide protrusion 427, so that the ball and the front plate are worn out. The contact area of the portion 421 with the rear surface can be maintained small.

In addition, since the front design member 420 is formed from a light-transmitting resin material, scratches reduce the degree of transparency regardless of whether they occur on the front or back side. In other words, the larger the area on which scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to see the components arranged behind the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member 420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency through the front design member 420.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the location of scratches can be limited to the ball guide ridge 427, minimizing scratches on the front design component 420 and ensuring visibility of the ball as it flows down.

The middle member 430 is a member that supports the slide member 450, and is disposed at a central channel 431 formed at a position sandwiched between the slide members 450 from the left and right, and below the slide member 450 in a non-excited state. A pair of left and right detection sensors 435 are provided.

The central flow path 431 has a bottom portion 431a formed with a left-right width slightly longer than the diameter of the ball and slopes downward toward the front side, and a bottom portion 431a that is erected upward on the left and right sides of the bottom portion 431a to prevent the ball from passing through. It includes a left wall part 432 and a right wall part 433, and a rear wall part 434 that stands upwardly behind the bottom wall part 431a so as to prevent the ball from passing through.

The left wall 432 is configured to secure a gap 432a between it and the rear wall 434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the right wall 433 is configured to secure a gap 433a between it and the rear wall 434 that is slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere.

The gap 433a is located at a position shifted toward the front side from the gap 432a. In this embodiment, the gaps 432a and 433a are arranged such that the front end of the gap 432a and the rear end of the gap 433a are approximately aligned in the longitudinal direction.

The left wall portion 432 has a positioning portion 432b formed in such a shape that an upper half portion is cut out from the rear end portion. The right wall portion 433 has a positioning portion 433b formed in such a shape that an upper half portion is cut out from the rear end portion. The positioning parts 432b and 433b are used for positioning when assembling the upper member 440 to the middle member 430, and the details will be described later.

In the rear side of the left wall portion 432, the right side facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the left side that does not face the central flow path 431 has a horizontal width shorter than that of the front side. A notch 432c is thus formed.

In the rear side of the right wall portion 433, the left side facing the central flow path 431 is a smooth surface, while the right side that does not face the central flow path 431 has a horizontal width shorter than that of the front side. A notch 433c is thus formed.

The cutout portions 432c and 433c are formed with similar front and rear widths and function to avoid interference with the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450 during sliding movement, but the details will be described later.

The rear wall 434 is formed as a curved wall that connects the rear ends of the gaps 432a and 433a. This allows the ball that passes through the gap 432a and abuts against the rear wall 434 to be smoothly redirected toward the front side.

The detection sensor 435 is configured as a detection sensor that does not involve drawing a symbol even if the passage of a ball is detected. That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor 435, neither the special symbol lottery nor the normal symbol lottery is executed, and the payout of the prize ball is executed. In this embodiment, in response to the detection sensor 435 detecting the winning of one ball, control is performed so that five prize balls are paid out.

The upper member 440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and includes an upper flow path component 441 that configures a flow path that slopes downward toward the rear for the ball received in the ball receiving portion 412 to flow down, a detection sensor 442 that detects balls that have flowed down the upper flow path component 441, an upper cover member 443 that is fastened and fixed as an upper cover for the upper flow path component 441 and that secures the detection sensor 442 to the upper flow path component 441, a ceiling component 444 that configures at least the ceiling of the central flow path 431 of the middle member 430, and a left wall portion 445 and a right wall portion 446 that guide the flow of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450.

The upper member 440 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, so that the ball flow path (the central flow path 431 and the flow path guided by the slide member 450) below the upper member 440 can be seen through the upper member 440 from the player's line of sight looking down at the winning unit 400 through the base plate 60. In other words, the player can see the ball rolling on the slide member 450 and flowing down the central flow path 431.

The detection sensor 442 detects the ball that enters the first winning hole 64 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes the detection sensor 442, a lottery for special symbol 1 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

The upper cover member 443 is arranged so that the path along which the ball flows to the left is rearward of the rear end of the left wall portion 445. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball flowing down the upper flow path component 441 is positioned above the flow path guided by the left wall portion 445. This makes it possible to prevent the visibility of the ball guided by the left wall portion 445 from being reduced by the ball flowing down the upper flow path component 441.

The left side wall portion 445 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the left-right center end of the curved portion matches the front-rear position of the left end of the rear wall 434 of the middle member 430.

The right side wall portion 446 is formed as a wall portion that extends in the front-rear direction and curves toward the left-right center at the rear end. The front-rear position of the tip end of the curved portion at the left-right center matches the front-rear position of the right end of the rear wall portion 434 of the middle member 430.

That is, both the left side wall part 445 and the right side wall part 446 are formed so as to be continuous with the rear wall part 434 that forms the rear ends of the gaps 432a and 433a of the middle member 430, so as to guide the ball into the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured. In other words, the rear end of the right wall 446 is located at a position shifted toward the front side than the rear end of the left wall 445 .

The slide member 450 is made of a non-permeable resin material and includes a pair of left and right end portions 451, a left guide plate portion 452 and a right guide plate portion 453 that extend rearward from the left and right inner portions of the end portions 451, and a central fixing portion 454 that connects and fixes the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 at the rear end.

By forming the slide member 450 from a non-transparent resin material, the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member 450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths 463 of the lower member 460) can be hidden (masked so that they are difficult to see) by the slide member 450. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the balls rolling on the slide member 450 and the balls flowing down the underside of the slide member 450 (for example, balls flowing down the left and right paths 463 of the lower member 460) appear to overlap at the player's line of sight (the line of sight looking diagonally downward from the front side of the winning unit 400) even when the middle member 430 is formed from a light-transparent resin material.

The pair of tip portions 451 are formed in a symmetrical shape with the central flow path 431 in between, and are arranged in symmetrical positions with the central flow path 431 in between, with the left and right pair facing inward at the same angle with respect to the horizontal. It is formed into a plate shape with the left and right sides tilting downward at the same angle toward the rear side.

The left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 extend rearward while following the slope of the tip portion 451, and the length of the left guide plate portion 452 is longer than that of the right guide plate portion 453. long. Therefore, the left guide plate portion 452 is lower in the vertical position at the rear end than the right guide plate portion 453.

The left guide plate portion 452 has an inclined surface portion 452a formed near the right edge of the rear half of the plate so that the degree of the downward inclination toward the right of the plate top surface increases. The right guide plate portion 453 has an inclined surface portion 453a formed near the left edge of the rear half of the plate so that the degree of the downward inclination toward the left of the plate top surface increases.

The inclined surface portions 452a, 453a are formed with a front-rear width sufficient to allow the slide member 450 to be disposed to face the gaps 432a, 433a in the left-right direction, regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in a non-energized state or an energized state.

In other words, when the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 passes through the gaps 432a, 433a, regardless of whether the slide member 450 is in a non-excited state or an excited state, the ball can flow along the inclination of the inclined surface portions 452a, 453a, so that the flow direction can be shifted inward to the left and right.

Since the right guide plate portion 453 has a shorter extension length, it is possible to secure a space behind the right guide plate portion 453. In the present embodiment, by arranging the solenoid SOL41 for driving the electric accessory 640a in the vacant space, the winning unit 400 is configured to fit the solenoid SOL41 (in a substantially square shape when viewed from above). be able to.

The width (left-right width) of the inclined surface portions 452a, 453a can be set as desired. For example, they may be configured to extend upward to the top side of the bottom surface portion 431a of the central flow path 431, so that they partially overlap when viewed from above. In this case, the balls can flow down smoothly.

11 and 13 are exploded front perspective views of the winning unit 400, and FIGS. 12 and 14 are exploded rear perspective views of the winning unit 400. 11 to 14, the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and members lower than the middle member 430 are also illustrated in an exploded manner. Further, FIGS. 11 and 12 show the winning unit 400 viewed from diagonally above, and FIGS. 13 and 14 show the winning unit 400 viewed from diagonally below.

The winning unit 400 comprises a lower member 460 disposed below the middle member 430 and fastened to the middle member 430, a tilting member 470 supported on the lower member 460 between the middle member 430 and the lower member 460 so as to be tiltable forward and backward and constituting an electric role 640a, and a transmission member 480 which transmits the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 to the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 to 14, additional explanation will be given regarding the configurations of the plate member 410, front design member 420, middle member 430, upper member 440, and slide member 450 of the winning unit 400.

The front design member 420 includes a ball guide protrusion 428 formed as a pair of protrusions for guiding the ball to flow down, at a position slightly shifted outward from the left and right intermediate positions of the pair of partition plates 423.

The protruding tip (rear end) of the ball guide protrusion 428 is shaped to slope downward toward the front, so when a ball arriving from the rear is guided, it does not apply a downward load to the ball. It is possible to make it easier to give the ball, and it is possible to make it easier to avoid the ball from bouncing back.

The ball guide ridge 428 is formed along the flow path of the ball that passes through the central opening 413 of the plate member 410 to the front side, and functions as the part that comes into contact with the flowing ball. The ball guide ridge 428 is formed from a pair of ridges that are offset outward to the left and right from the left and right center of the flowing ball. This makes it easier for the ball to come into contact with the left and right inner corners of the ball guide ridge 428, so that wear of the ball guide ridge 428 can occur from the corners. This makes it possible to suppress damage to the left and right central parts of the ball guide ridge 428.

As a result, even if the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 wears down due to friction with the ball over a long period of use, the wear can start from the tip of the ball guide ridge 428, so the contact area between the ball and the rear surface of the front plate portion 421 can be kept small.

Further, since the front design member 420 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, the degree of transmission is reduced due to scratches regardless of whether they occur on the front side or the back side. In other words, the larger the area where scratches occur, the more difficult it becomes to visually recognize the member disposed on the rear side of the front design member 420 through the front design member 420. In this embodiment, in order to ensure visibility of the ball flowing down the back side of the front design member 420, it is desirable to maintain a high degree of transparency of the front design member 420.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the location where scratches occur can be limited to the ball guide protrusion 428, the scratches occurring on the front design member 420 can be minimized and the visibility of the falling ball can be reduced. can be secured.

The middle member 430 includes a support extension part 436 that extends to the left and right outside of the left wall part 432 and the right wall part 433 and supports the detection sensor 435 from above, and a plate-shaped member on which the detection sensor 435 is placed. The extending portion 436 includes a base plate 437 to which the left and right ends are fastened and fixed.

On the opposite surface side (lower surface side) of the bottom surface section 431a disposed between the left wall section 432 and the right wall section 433, a locking plate section 431b projects vertically downward from a position closer to the rear end side. will be established. The locking plate portion 431b functions as a portion that defines the end of movement of the slide member 450, and details will be described later.

The support extension 436 has an upper surface formed as a smooth surface along the front-rear direction, and is provided with an opening 436a that is drilled in a rectangular shape that opens above the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and allows the ball to pass through, and a protrusion 436b that is formed on the upper surface and protrudes upward in a manner that extends in the left-right direction.

The protrusion 436b is disposed at a position where the front side of the middle member 430 smoothly communicates with the edge of the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 when the middle member 430 is in the assembled state (see FIG. 9). This prevents balls flowing downward along the front side of the tip 451 from entering the gap between the tip 451 and the detection sensor 435 when the slide member 450 is in the excited state (see FIG. 9), causing the balls to unintentionally stop flowing downward. In other words, the protrusion 436b can guide the balls as they flow downward, making the balls flow smoothly.

Further, the protruding portion 436b is arranged directly below the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when the slide member 450 is in a non-excited state (see FIG. 7). Therefore, when a ball is placed on the tip 451, even if the weight of the ball causes the tip 451 and the left guide plate 452 or the right guide plate 453 to flex and deform in the direction of falling forward. Since the joint between the tip portion 451 and the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 can be supported from below by the protrusion portion 436b, the above-mentioned bending deformation can be suppressed.

The base plate 437 is vertically perforated in some places to form openings. That is, in the protrusion 437a that is formed to protrude to the front in order to arrange the detection sensor 435, an opening larger than the opening of the detection sensor 435 is bored in a position that does not block the opening of the detection sensor 435, An opening 437b for passing the plunger SOL41a of the solenoid SOL41 is formed at the lower side of the solenoid SOL41 that is fitted and supported at the end, and an opening 437b for passing the plunger SOL41a of the solenoid SOL41 through the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 at the central rear end. An opening 437c having a sufficient front-to-back width to allow displacement is formed.

The base plate 437 has a receiving recess 437 d extending in the front-rear direction as a part for receiving the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member 470 on the lower side, and a receiving recess 437 d for receiving the first member 481 of the transmission member 480 that transmits the driving force to the tilting member 470 . An inclined surface portion 437e that forms the ceiling of the route and slopes downward toward the rear, and a slope that slopes downward toward the rear at the front end portions of a pair of extending walls that extend downward from the left and right ends of the sloped surface portion 437e. A stopper 437f is provided.

The inclination stopper 437f allows the tilting member 470 to be set in a non-excited state to a position slightly more inclined than the upright position, while still blocking the path of the ball. It can be kept small. This makes it possible to shorten the time required for the opening and closing operations of the tilting member 470, thereby suppressing the occurrence of ball biting, which will be described in detail later.

The ceiling structure part 444 of the upper stage member 440 includes a slope part 444a which is arranged to face the bottom part 431a of the middle stage member 430 in the vertical direction and which slopes upwardly toward the front, and a part which is arranged on both left and right sides of the slope part 444a. A pair of extending portions 444b extending downward from the rear end portion with an L-shaped cross section are provided.

The inclined surface portion 444a constitutes the ceiling portion of the central channel 431, and since the inclined surface portion 444a is inclined upward as it moves forward, the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central channel 431 increases as it moves forward. growing. That is, since the flow path area increases toward the downstream side, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging in the downstream mode in which the fluid flows forward in the central flow path 431.

The extension part 444b is designed so that when the upper member 440 is assembled to the middle member 430, it can be aligned by engaging the left and right inner ends of the rear end with the alignment parts 432b and 433b of the middle member 430. There is.

By assembling in this way, the front-back position of the rear surface of the extension portion 444b matches the front-back position of the rear end portions of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 (front ends of the gaps 432a and 433a). That is, a gap 444c is provided between the extension portion 444b and the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 which are arranged opposite to each other in the front-rear direction, and this gap 444c is arranged directly above the gaps 432a and 433a. It is configured to be continuously connected to the gaps 432a and 433a.

In other words, the gaps 432a and 433a constitute the lower side of the opening through which the ball passes, and the upper side of the opening, of which the gaps 432a and 433a constitute the lower side, is constituted by the gap 444c. As a result, the upper sides of the gaps 432a, 433a are opened, and when the ball bounces, unlike the case where the ball can jump over the gaps 432a, 433a and flow down, the ball passes through the position outside the gaps 432a, 433a, 444c. This can be prevented.

The slide member 450 has a pair of protrusions 455 that extend in the front-to-rear direction and protrude downward from the lower surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. The protrusions 455 are designed to have a width smaller than the widths of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, and the protruding end portion (lower end portion) is shaped to follow the movement direction (front-to-rear direction) of the slide member 450.

When the slide member 450 moves back and forth, the protrusion portion 455 is supported by the support extension portion 436 of the middle member 430, but in this case, the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension portion 436 can be suppressed. Therefore, the movement resistance of the slide member 450 can be suppressed, and the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 can be prevented from falling forward (deformation) due to the weight of the ball on the upper surface.

The protrusions 455 are formed along the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 and function as ribs, thereby increasing the rigidity of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453, which are long in the front-rear direction.

The protruding portion 455 is disposed further rearward than the tip portion 451. In other words, the protrusion 455 is not formed on the lower surface of the tip 451, and does not increase the rigidity of the tip 451.

This allows the ease of elastic deformation of the slide member 450 to be changed for each part. In other words, by configuring the tip portion 451 to tolerate a certain degree of elastic deformation, for example, when the slide member 450 moves forward, even if a ball becomes caught between the front end portion of the slide member 450 and the front design member 420, the load generated by the elastic deformation and elastic recovery of the tip portion 451 can quickly release the ball from being caught.

When the tip portion 451 is elastically deformed, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are also elastically deformed, so that the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 have an elongated shape in the front-rear direction. There is also a possibility that the cross-sectional area of the flow path of the balls flowing down the upper surfaces of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 may be narrowed.

In this case, the flow resistance of the ball that has already passed through the ball passage opening 414 and is rolling on the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 increases, which may cause the time it takes for the ball to pass over the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 to be longer than usual.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 are formed with protrusions 455, and the protrusions 455 function as ribs, so that the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 Even the right guide plate portion 453 can be prevented from being elastically deformed. Thereby, the size of the cross-sectional area of the falling path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the left guide plate section 452 and the right guide plate section 453 can be maintained, and the upper surface of the left guide plate section 452 or the right guide plate section 453 can be maintained. This makes it easier to manage the time the ball passes.

Therefore, it is possible to simultaneously achieve both the effect of the tip portion 451 being easily elastically deformed and the effect of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 being less easily elastically deformed.

Next, the configuration of the winning unit 400 other than the plate member 410, front design member 420, middle member 430, upper member 440, and slide member 450 will be explained.

The lower member 460 forms multiple ball rolling paths. That is, the lower member 460 has a central path 461 along which the ball picked up by the tilting member 470 rolls, and left and right paths 463 along which the ball that has passed the detection sensor 435 rolls. The ball that has rolled along the central path 461 is detected as having passed by the detection sensor 462 disposed behind it.

The detection sensor 462 detects the passage of the ball that has entered the second winning port 640 (see FIG. 2). That is, when the ball passes through the detection sensor 462, a lottery for special symbol 2 is executed, and the prize ball is paid out.

The lower member 460 also includes a bearing portion 464 that constitutes the lower half of the receiving portion that supports the tilting member 470 in a tiltable manner, a receiving recess 465 that extends in the front-rear direction as a portion for receiving a first member 481 of a transmission member 480 that transmits a driving force to the tilting member 470, and a bearing portion 466 that constitutes the lower half of the receiving portion that supports the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 that transmits a driving force to the slide member 450 in a tiltable manner.

The bearing part 464 is configured as a recessed part whose upper part is open, and when the middle stage member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower stage member 460 with the supported protrusion 473 of the tilting member 470 disposed, the bearing part 464 and the middle stage member 464 are connected to each other. A tilting member 470 is pivotably supported by the member 430 so as to be tiltable.

The receiving recess 465 is formed at a position between the central path 461 and the left and right paths 463 as an area that is long enough in the front-rear direction to receive the first member 481, which is long in the front-rear direction, and deep enough to allow vertical displacement of the first member 481. By preventing the first member 481 from falling out of the receiving recess 465, deformation of the first member 481 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

The bearing part 466 is configured as a recessed part with an open upper part, and when the middle member 430 is fastened and fixed to the lower member 460 with the second member 485 of the transmission member 480 disposed, the bearing part 466 and the middle member are connected. 430, the second member 485 is pivotally supported in a tiltable manner.

In the non-energized state, the tilting member 470 rises as shown in FIG. 11 and assumes a posture that restricts the ball from entering the center path 461 side, while in the energized state, it is tilted (see FIG. 9) and moves toward the center path 461 side. This position allows the ball to enter the ball.

The tilting member 470 includes a plate-like portion 471 that is gently curved inward (upward) toward the tip, a pair of cylindrical portions 472 that protrude in the left-right direction from the lower end of the plate-like portion 471, supported protrusions 473 that protrude from the left and right ends of the cylindrical portions 472 and are coaxial with the cylindrical portions 472 and have a smaller diameter than the cylindrical portions 472, and a transmitted portion 474 that extends from the outer periphery of the right cylindrical portion 472 in a C-shape in side view and abuts against the first member 481 of the transmitting member 480 to receive the load.

The plate-like portion 471 is formed to have a horizontal width approximately equal to the diameter of the ball, and is configured to prevent a plurality of balls from landing at the same time.

The cylindrical portion 472, like the supported protrusion 473, is a portion that is rotatably supported by the lower member 460. The cylindrical portion 472 is configured to ensure an area that can bear the sliding load during rotation and the load in the direction of gravity caused by the load from the ball, so mechanical wear can be reduced compared to when it is supported only by the supported protrusion 473.

The transmission member 480 includes a first member 481 configured such that the plunger SOL 41a is inserted in the left-right direction at the rear end portion to prevent it from falling off in the vertical direction, and a second member that interlocks with the first member 481. 485.

The plunger SOL41a is restricted from moving in the front, back, left and right directions except for the up and down direction by the opening 437b of the base plate 437, and the first member 481 into which the plunger SOL41a is inserted in the left and right direction is moved in the left and right direction by the receiving recess 465. Since the movement of the first member 481 and the plunger SOL41a are restricted, it is possible to easily prevent the first member 481 and the plunger SOL41a from being disconnected from each other due to falling off in the left-right direction.

When the excitation state of the solenoid SOL41 is switched and the plunger SOL41a is displaced in the vertical direction, the first member 481 is displaced in the vertical direction and the second member 485 is displaced in a direction tilting forward and backward, as will be described in detail later.

15(a) is a front view of the winning unit 400, FIG. 15(b) is a side view of the winning unit 400 as viewed in the direction of arrow XVb in FIG. 15(a), and FIG. 15(c) is a front view of the winning unit 400. 15A is a top view of the winning unit 400 when viewed in the direction of arrow XVc in FIG. 15(a). FIG.

In FIGS. 15(a) to 15(c), the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 15(b) and 15(c), the positions of the front and rear sides of the base plate 60 to which the winning unit 400 is assembled are illustrated with imaginary lines. In this embodiment, the ball flowing down the front side of the front side of the base plate 60 reaches the winning unit 400.

As shown in FIG. 15(c), when the electric accessory 640a is in a non-excited state, the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is arranged on the left and right sides of the eave portion 426, and the tip portion 451 As shown in the figure, it slopes downward toward the rear.

Therefore, if a ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 evades the ball receiving portion 412 and lands on the tip portion 451 via the eaves portion 426, or if the ball lands on the tip portion 451 directly without passing through the eaves portion 426 (a diving ball), it is pulled backward along the slope of the tip portion 451. Then, when the ball reaches a position where it can pass through the ball passage opening 414 (see FIG. 11), it flows along the slope of the tip portion 451 along the top surface of the slide member 450 toward the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

Figures 16(a) and 16(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XVIa-XVIa in Figure 15(c). Figure 16(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric device 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470), while Figure 16(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric device 640a. Also, Figures 16(a) and 16(b) illustrate some of the nails KG1 that are set into the base plate 60.

The state of the slide member 450 is changed by sliding in the front-rear direction, and is configured so that it is difficult to distinguish between a non-energized state and an energized state when viewed from the front. This makes it difficult to predict whether the game ball flowing down toward the slide member 450 will roll on the upper surface of the slide member 450 or flow downward on the front side of the tip portion 451.

The state of the tilting member 470 is changed by a tilting action, and is configured to make it easy to distinguish between the non-energized state and the energized state. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the ball is in a state where it can enter the second winning hole 640 (see Figure 2).

The manner in which the balls flow down to the winning unit 400 will be described with reference to Figures 16(a) and 16(b). Note that since the winning unit 400 is formed with a bilaterally symmetrical shape in the cross section shown in Figures 16(a) and 16(b), only one side will be described and the other side will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 16(a), a ball that misses the ball receiving portion 412 and flows down will flow along route DR1, for example, via the eaves portion 426. In this case, the ball will not flow down the shortest distance to the ball passage opening 414 because it is blocked by the eaves portion 426, and the time it stays on the tip portion 451 will be extended. In addition, because the inclination of the eaves portion 426 causes the ball to flow down with a velocity component to the left and right outward, after landing on the slide member 450 and bouncing, the ball will tend to bounce back to the left and right outward.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper surface of the slide member 450 is inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides, the direction of the ball's rebound can be shifted toward the left and right inner sides. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the balls that have flowed down along the path DR1 spill to the left and right outside of the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, a nail KG1 is implanted at a position where the distal end portion 451 of the slide member 450 faces the ball flowing outward to the left and right. Therefore, even if the ball flows toward the left and right outside of the tip portion 451, the ball with greater force can more easily return to the slide member 450 side by colliding with the nail KG1. When a ball flows toward the left and right outside of the tip 451, if the momentum of the ball is insufficient, it will not bounce back even when it collides with the nail KG1, and the contact between the nail KG1 and the tip 451 of the slide member 450 will be reduced. The ball will flow down between them.

Even if the water flows down a route different from route DR1, due to the influence of the arrangement of nails KG1, it will usually reach point DR1a, which is the same point where route DR1 reaches slide member 450, and will be guided to slide member 450.

The ball that flows down over the nail KG1 that is planted in series at a position facing the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and reaches the point DR1a has the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the nail KG1 side. Since the slide member 450 is formed to protrude, it is prevented from falling between the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 and the nail KG1.

In addition, although the ball bounced off the nail KG1 may fly toward the left and right inner parts of the tip 451 (the forward position of the ball passage opening 414), the arrangement of the eaves 426 is designed so that the ball and the eaves 426 can easily collide. That is, in this embodiment, even in the case of an irregular flow pattern caused by the ball being bounced off the nail KG1, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the forward position of the ball passage opening 414 without passing through point DR1a is suppressed. In this embodiment, the frequency of balls that are bounced off the nail KG1 and reach the forward position of the ball passage opening 414 without passing through point DR1a is adjusted and designed so that it is about 1 in 10 balls bounced off the nail KG1.

As shown in FIG. 16(b), when the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) is excited and the ball flows down the path DR1, the ball does not land on the slide member 450 and It flows while maintaining the velocity component in the left and right direction caused by the inclination of 426.

Since there is no extension of the tip 451 of the slide member 450 to the left and right sides, it is not possible to narrow the gap between the slide member 450 and the nail KG1, and the ball deviates to the left and right sides of the opening 436a and flows down. do. In addition, due to the design of the eaves section 426 described above, the occurrence of a situation in which the ball reaches the front position of the ball passing opening 414 in an irregular downward manner due to the ball being bounced off by the nail KG1 is suppressed, and the ball is prevented from reaching the front position of the ball passage opening 414. This suppresses the occurrence of a situation in which the light passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

In other words, when a ball flows down as illustrated by route DR1, if the slide member 450 is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to be guided inwardly to the left and right along the upper surface of the tip 451, whereas if the slide member 450 is in an excited state, the ball is unlikely to enter directly into the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and is likely to flow down the outer left and right sides of the front design member 420.

Next, the manner in which a ball flows down after landing on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 in a non-energized state will be described. A ball that has landed on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 flows inward to the left and right along the slope of the tip 451, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state until it passes through the ball passage opening 414, the ball will flow behind the tip 451 without any problems, increasing the likelihood that it will enter the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b (see Figure 2).

As another case, a case will be described in which the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is riding on the tip portion 451.

The ball arrangement B1 in FIG. 16(a) is shown as resting on the left and right outer ends of the slide member 450. When the slide member 450 is switched to an excited state while there is a ball in the ball arrangement B1, the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member 410, so the ball cannot move rearward as the slide member 450 moves, and the ball flows down the left and right outer sides of the front design member 420.

Ball arrangement B2 in FIG. 16(b) is illustrated as a state in which the center of the ball is arranged above the left and right outer edges of the opening 436a of the middle member 430. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement B2, since the rear of the ball is blocked by the plate member 410, the ball will not move backward as the slide member 450 moves. Can not.

Whether the ball flows down the outer left or right side of the front design member 420 or toward the opening 436a depends on the momentum of the ball at the time and the deviation of the ball's center position. A ball that flows down toward the opening 436a passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and a prize ball is paid out to the player.

Therefore, if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when there is a ball in the ball arrangement B2, the whereabouts of the ball is uncertain, and the profit that the player obtains changes depending on the ball's whereabouts. It is possible to improve the player's attention to the slide member 450 when there is a ball in the arrangement B2.

Ball arrangement B3 in FIG. 16(b) is illustrated as a state in which a ball is arranged in front of the ball passage opening 414. When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state with a ball in ball arrangement B3, the rear of the ball is open at the ball passage opening 414, so that the ball moves rearward as the slide member 450 moves due to the load it receives from the slide member 450 (it moves rearward by being pushed by the slide member 450).

That is, even if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state when a ball is placed in the ball arrangement B3, that ball (only one ball) can be caused to flow down to the rear of the ball passage opening 414. In this case, since the upper surface of the distal end portion 451 of the slide member 450 is inclined downwardly toward the rear, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from spilling forward while the slide member 450 is moving.

According to this embodiment, the ball arrangement B3 is formed symmetrically, so when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state with balls riding on both the left and right ball arrangement B3, the balls are Both of them move rearward with the movement of the slide member and flow down to the rear of the ball passage opening 414.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even if the slide member 450 is switched from a state in which a ball is placed on the tip 451 to an excited state, the change will depend on the arrangement of the ball on the tip 451. The ball is configured so that the downward flow path of the ball changes after the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state. Therefore, when the ball is placed on the tip portion 451, attention to the movement of the ball and the slide member 450 can be improved.

When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state, the further downstream (toward the ball arrangement B3 side) the ball arrangements B1 to B3 are, the greater the potential gain for the player becomes. Therefore, even after the ball lands on the slide member 450, the potential profit that the player can obtain continues to increase, so that the player's attention to the falling ball can be improved.

Further, the number of balls on the slide member 450 is not limited to one, and for example, balls may be arranged at the ball arrangement B1 and the ball arrangement B3 at the same time. In this case, the slide member 450 is held until the ball in the ball arrangement B3 passes backward through the ball passage opening 414 and the ball in the ball arrangement B1 reaches the ball arrangement B3 side (about 0.2 seconds in this embodiment). If the ball is maintained in the de-energized state, the player can potentially obtain a higher profit, so the player's ability to pay attention to the movement of the ball and slide member 450 can be improved.

17 is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15(c), FIG. 18 is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c), and FIG. is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 15(c). 17 to 19, the non-excited state (advanced closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

In the non-excited state (advanced closed state) of the electric accessory 640a, as shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position and the tilting member 470 is placed in the closed position.

First, referring to Figures 17 and 19, the configuration of the flow path for the ball rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 will be described. When the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position, the front-to-rear width between the front design member 420 and the slide member 450 becomes less than the diameter of the ball, so the ball is prevented from flowing into the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, and the ball on the tip 451 is introduced to the rear of the ball passage opening 414.

The ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls on the slide member 450 along a region surrounded by the middle member 430 and the upper member 440. The upper member 440 includes a ceiling surface 447 disposed opposite to the upper surface of the slide member 450.

The ceiling surface 447 is different from the slope of the upper surface of the slide member 450, and is formed as a plane extending along the front-rear direction (in this embodiment, the direction of displacement of the slide member 450). Therefore, the cross-sectional area of the flow path formed between the top and bottom of the ceiling surface 447 and the slide member 450 increases as it goes toward the rear (downstream side), so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball clogging and prevent the ball from clogging. It is possible to avoid an increase in flow resistance.

In addition, as a result, even if the ball rolling backward on the slide member 450 bounces upward, or even if the ball bounces backward due to a load pushing the ball backward, the ball will not touch the ceiling surface. 447 can be easily avoided.

As shown in FIG. 19, the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 is lower than the vertical position of the ceiling surface 447. Therefore, even if the ball has bounced close to the ceiling surface 447, the height of the ball can be lowered to the inclined surface portion 444a before the ball passes through the gap 444c and joins the central channel 431.

That is, the ball can be made to join the central channel 431 after reducing its momentum. As a result, even if balls are introduced into the central flow path 431 from the left and right at arbitrary timing and there is a possibility of collision, the balls that are newly guided to the central flow path 431 will not be able to be placed in the center flow path 431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation in which a large load is applied to a ball that has been holding the ball to the extent that it causes the ball to flow backwards. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the backflow of the balls within the central channel 431 and to make the flow of the balls smoother.

This effect occurs not only for the ball guided by the right guide plate portion 453, but also for the ball guided by the left guide plate portion 452, since the height position of the ceiling surface 447 is the same on the left and right.

The ceiling surface 447 includes a curved guide portion 447a formed as a curved surface at the rear end portion and smoothly connected to the left side wall portion 445 and the right side wall portion 446. When the ball bounces on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and collides with the curved guide part 447a, the ball can be directed downward along the shape of the curved guide part 447a, so the ball can be brought closer to the slide member 450 side. Can be done.

Thereby, the ball can be smoothly displaced below the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a, so that the ball can smoothly merge into the central channel 431.

As shown in Figures 17 and 19, the forward and backward movement of the ball rolling on the top surface of the slide member 450 is several centimeters (approximately 3 to 5 centimeters), but the length (left-right width) that it occupies on the front side of the base plate 60 is kept to approximately 1 to 2 centimeters on each side (see Figure 16).

In other words, the slide member 450 is configured so that the range in which the slide member 450 is arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 (the area it occupies when viewed from the front) can be made smaller compared to the length of the path along which the ball is guided. This allows the space in the play area occupied by the slide member 450 to be reduced while still ensuring a sufficient length for guiding the ball with the slide member 450, so that space can be secured in the play area for arranging other electric devices, winning slots, etc.

As shown in FIG. 19, the inclined surface portion 444a of the upper member 440 and the right guide plate portion 453 (and left guide plate portion 452, see FIG. 17) of the slide member 450 have the same inclination angle in the front and rear direction. There is. As a result, a right opening RT (an opening defined by the right gap 444c, the inclined surface part 444a, and the right guide plate part 453) through which the ball passes from the right guide plate part 453 to the central flow path 431, and the left guide plate part The same area as the left opening LT (opening defined by the left gap 444c, the inclined surface part 444a, and the left guide plate part 452) through which the ball passes from 452 to the central flow path 431 is ensured.

In other words, since the left and right openings LT, RT are located at different front-to-rear positions, the area (vertical width) of the openings LT, RT may be smaller for the rear left opening LT due to the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a being lower; however, in this embodiment, the vertical position of the right guide plate portion 453 (and the left guide plate portion 452, see Figure 17) of the slide member 450 is similarly lowered in response to the vertical position of the inclined surface portion 444a being lowered, so that the vertical widths of the left and right openings LT, RT can be ensured to be the same.

This makes it easier to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance of the ball when it joins the central flow path 431 changes depending on whether the ball is guided to the right guide plate portion 453 or the left guide plate portion 452.

On the other hand, the length of time the ball rolls on the slide member 450 differs depending on whether the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453 or the left guide plate portion 452 (the left guide plate portion 452 is longer than the right guide plate portion 453 by at least 11 mm (the diameter of the ball)), so the time it takes for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening 414 and join the central flow path 431 differs, but details about the time it takes for the ball to flow down will be given later.

Note that in FIGS. 17 to 19, the left and right openings LT and RT are illustrated with imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. In addition, although the figure is illustrated slightly smaller to avoid overlapping with other solid lines, it is not intended to limit the shape to a small one, and the shape is smoothly guided from the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 to the central flow path 431. shall be of sufficient size and arrangement to be

Next, the central flow passage 431 will be described with reference to FIG. 18. The ball guided by the slide member 450 is introduced into the central flow passage 431 along the slope of the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a at the openings LT and RT, which are located at different positions on both the left and right sides.

The introduced ball flows down toward the front side along the central flow path 431, and when the tilting member 470 is in the closed position, it collides with the ball guide protrusion 428 and flows down, winning the prize. It falls off from the unit 400 and flows down toward the third prize opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

Here, since the balls received in the ball receiving part 412 flow down into the upper flow path forming part 441 in order, the number of balls does not suddenly increase, and the slope of the upper cover member 443 is lower than the upper flow path forming part 441. It is parallel to 441. On the other hand, a plurality of balls may be arranged in the central flow path 431 at the same time, such as balls being guided simultaneously from the left and right sides of the center flow path 431, and the balls may become connected or float due to the load generated between the balls. there is a possibility.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the inclined surface portion 444a that constitutes the ceiling portion of the central flow passage 431 is inclined upward as it approaches the front, so the cross-sectional area (opening area) of the central flow passage 431 becomes larger as it approaches the front. In other words, since the flow passage area becomes larger as it approaches the downstream side, the occurrence of ball clogging can be suppressed when the balls flow forward through the central flow passage 431. In other words, even in a flow passage configuration in which the balls join at an intermediate position, a large flow passage area is ensured, so it is possible to avoid an increase in the flow resistance of the balls.

20 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVII-XVII in FIG. 15(c), FIG. 21 is a cross-sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c), and FIG. is a sectional view of the winning unit 400 taken along the line XIX-XIX in FIG. 15(c). 20 to 22, the excitation state (backward open state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

In addition, in Figures 20 to 22, the left and right openings LT and RT are shown by imaginary lines as the opening arrangement when the slide member 450 is in the forward position, similar to the illustrations in Figures 17 to 19.

When the electric device 640a is in an excited state (retracted and open state), the sliding member 450 is positioned in a retracted position and the tilting member 470 is positioned in an open position, as shown in Figures 20 to 22.

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, when the slide member 450 is placed in the retracted position, the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is placed rearward of the front side surface of the plate member 410. This makes it possible to prevent a new ball from landing on the slide member 450.

That is, a new ball is introduced toward the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b (see FIG. 2) located downstream of the central channel 431 located downstream of the slide member 450. do not have. Therefore, if the excited state is maintained beyond the time required for the balls riding on the slide member 450 to flow completely on the front side of the tilting member 470, all the balls guided to the winning unit 400 will be picked up by the tilting member 470. I can. In addition, since the balls guided by the slide member 450 are not added, it is possible to prevent the number of balls entering the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b from becoming excessive. Note that details of ball entry control will be described later.

As shown in Figures 20 and 22, a narrow protrusion 455 is formed on the underside of the slide member 450, and the narrow protrusion 445 is supported by the support extension 436 of the middle member 430. This prevents the slide member 450 from tilting in the forward/backward direction, and reduces the contact area between the slide member 450 and the support extension 436 when the slide member 450 moves forward/backward, thereby reducing frictional resistance.

When the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state and a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 when it is displaced from the forward position to the backward position, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 are Since the upper surface slopes downward toward the rear, ball sliding is suppressed, and the ball moves rearward integrally with the slide member 450 (with the same amount of displacement as the slide member 450). In addition, the load applied via slide member 450 accelerates the ball backwards.

On the other hand, if the ball is on the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part 453 when the slide member 450 is switched from the energized state to the de-energized state and is displaced from the backward position to the forward position, the upper surface of the slide member 450 Due to the relationship with the slope, the vertical height of the slide member 450 at the front and rear positions where the ball is arranged is lowered, and the vertical distance between the slide member 450 and the ball is widened.

That is, the ball will land on the slide member 450 again after floating with respect to the slide member 450, and the ball will be prevented from moving forward together with the slide member 450.

In addition, when the ball is subjected to spin in the forward rotation direction when the slide member 450 starts to displace (before the vertical distance between the ball and the slide member 450 is increased), the falling speed of the ball on the slide member 450 is increased. can be done.

When the slide member 450 is switched from the de-energized state to the energized state, the balls already on the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part 453 remain on the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part 453. As a result, the branching of the flow path is determined on the downstream side.

On the other hand, as described above in FIG. 16, when the slide member 450 is switched from a non-excited state to an excited state, the ball positioned in front of the ball passage opening 414 may fall toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435. In other words, at a position in front of the ball passage opening 414, it is possible that the ball's flow path may branch off, with the ball either passing through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 and being discharged outside the play area, or flowing along a different flow path.

In this embodiment, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 is configured to be located closer to the front than the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. This can improve attention to the detection sensor 435, and the flow path branches off to the opening 435a side of the detection sensor 435, making it easier to see the ball passing through the opening 435a.

As shown in FIG. 21, even when the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position, the inclined surface portion 452a is positioned in the left opening LT. That is, the inclined surface portion 452a is formed with a front-to-rear width sufficient to be positioned in the left opening LT regardless of the position of the slide member 450. The same is true for the inclined surface portion 453a.

When a ball is introduced into the central flow passage 431 and passes through the central flow passage 431, if the tilting member 470 is still positioned in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and passes through the detection sensor 462.

In other words, the position in front of the tilting member 470 is the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined; either the ball passes through the detection sensor 462 and is discharged outside the play area, or the ball flows along a different flow path.

In this embodiment, the tilting member 470 is configured to be positioned closer to the front than the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453. This increases the attention to the tilting member 470, and the flow path branches off to the detection sensor 462 side, making it easier to see the ball flowing down to the detection sensor 462 side.

In this way, the winning unit 400 is configured so that the position where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined is located on the front side. Furthermore, by configuring the ball to pass through multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) with a sufficient amount of time between them, rather than passing through them immediately, a player who is paying attention to the ball can have time to move their eyes.

In addition, by narrowing the distance between the multiple positions where the branching of the ball's flow path is determined (the position in front of the ball passage opening 414 and the position in front of the tilting member 470) when viewed from the front (see Figure 16), a player who is focusing on the ball can have more room to move their eyes.

As shown in FIG. 21, the supported protrusion 473, which serves as the rotation axis of the tilting member 470, is disposed at a position further rearward than the front end of the central flow passage 431. In addition, in the closed position, the tilting member 470 is slightly tilted forward in response to the inclination of the inclined stopper 437f of the middle member 430 (see FIG. 18).

As a result, even if the tilting member 470 is energized and displaced toward the open position when a falling ball is placed in front of the tilting member 470 in the closed position, the front surface of the tilting member 470 has already moved forward. Since it is slanted toward the ball, it is easy to apply a downward load to the ball, and the ball can be ejected downward quickly. That is, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 and the time period in which the displacement of the tilting member 470 to the open position is inhibited is prolonged.

Furthermore, since the rotation angle during the opening/closing operation of the tilting member 470 can be reduced, the time required for the opening/closing operation can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily control the timing of opening and closing, and it is also possible to prevent excessive balls from entering the ball.

In this embodiment, the horizontal width of the plate-shaped portion 471 of the tilting member 470 is formed to be approximately the diameter of the ball (see FIG. 16), and it is difficult to pick up multiple balls while moving from the open position to the closed position. Since the structure is such that it is not possible to do so, it is possible to easily prevent over-entering balls.

The inclined surface portion 437e, which constitutes the ceiling of the flow path through which the balls picked up by the tilting member 470 flow, is formed as an inclined surface parallel to the central path 461 at the rear side, and is configured so that the angle of the upward inclination toward the front increases at the front side, which is the side closer to the tilting member 470.

As a result, even if a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 bounces due to a collision with the tilting member 470, the ball can be smoothly introduced into the path between the central path 461 and the inclined surface portion 437e. . Therefore, the tilting member 470 is closed due to the weight of the ball riding on the tilting member 470 and the high resistance of the ball flowing into the path between the central path 461 and the inclined surface portion 437e, which prevents the ball from being displaced. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the displacement towards the position is delayed.

As shown in FIG. 22, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state, the vertical position of the slide member 450 at the same front-back position rises, so the lower edge of the right opening RT rises, and the area through which the ball can pass is increased. becomes smaller. The same applies to the left opening LT.

At this time, the ball that reaches the rear end of the left side wall portion 445 or the right side wall portion 446 bounces up due to the vertical position of the slide member 450 rising at that position. This may increase the kinetic energy of the ball.

On the other hand, the vertical distance between the inclined surface portion 444a and the slide member 450 is narrower than when the slide member 450 is in the forward position, increasing the resistance of the ball to flow downward and enhancing the effect of the inclined surface portion 444a in slowing down the momentum of the ball. This allows the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball to be sufficiently reduced before it is guided into the central flow path 431.

Figures 23(a) and 23(b) are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XXIIIa-XXIIIa in Figure 15(c). Figure 23(a) illustrates the non-excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470), while Figure 23(b) illustrates the excited state of the electric role 640a. Note that Figures 23(a) and 23(b) show cross sections passing through the midpoint of the gap 444c in the front-to-rear direction.

In the present embodiment, the left opening LT and the right opening RT are shifted in position in the front and back, so that the openings are different from each other, which is often seen when the left and right openings are arranged on a straight line extending in the left-right direction. It is possible to avoid the problem that the balls passing through collide with each other in the left-right direction, and the loads generated by the balls are balanced by being directed outward in the left-right direction, resulting in a stagnation in the flow of the balls.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the ball on the left guide plate part 452 passes through the right opening RT which is arranged on the front side of the left opening part LT introduced into the central flow path 431, and the ball on the right guide plate part 453. is introduced into the central flow path 431, there is a possibility that the ball attempting to pass through the right opening RT and the ball flowing down the central flow path 431 will collide (see FIG. 23(a). )reference). In this case, even if the shape of the flow path is designed so that this is unlikely to occur, there is a possibility that the loads applied to each other by the balls will become unbalanced and the flow of the balls will stop.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state and is displaced to the retreat position, it does not affect the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central channel 431, but the right guide plate portion By raising the vertical position of the ball on the guide plate 453, it is possible to create a gap between the ball placed in the central channel 431 and the ball on the right guide plate 453, albeit for a moment. can. During this time, the balls placed in the central flow path 431 flow along the slope of the central flow path 431, thereby making it possible to unbalance the loads that the balls apply to each other.

In addition, when the slide member 450 is switched to a non-excited state and displaced to the forward position, the vertical position of the ball flowing down the central flow path 431 is not affected, but the vertical position of the right guide plate portion 453 is lowered, so that a gap can be created (floated) between the ball above the right guide plate portion 453 and the right guide plate portion 453, albeit for a moment. When the ball above the right guide plate portion 453 displaces downward to fill this gap, it is believed that the ball is pushed by the load from the balls arranged in the central flow path 431 and displaces outward to the left and right, thus disrupting the balance of the loads that the balls impart to each other.

In this manner, in this embodiment, even if the loads applied by the balls to each other become balanced at the joining point to the central flow path 431, the state of the slide member 450 can be switched to change the position of one of the balls with the balanced loads, thereby breaking the load balance. This makes it possible to maintain a smooth flow of balls from the slide member 450 through the central flow path 431.

Note that since the above-mentioned effect of disrupting the load balance occurs at the timing when the state of the slide member 450 is switched, the operation pattern of the slide member 450 may be designed in consideration of this effect. That is, the higher the frequency of switching the state of the slide member 450, the easier it is to lose the balance of the loads between the balls flowing down, so that the balls can flow down smoothly.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 24 to 28, variations in the flow path of the ball that has reached the position where the tip portion 451 of the slide member 450 is disposed will be described.

24(a) to FIG. 24(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. In FIGS. 24(a) to 24(d), the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and the flow of the ball after riding on the tip portion 451 is illustrated in chronological order. In addition, in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(d), illustration of the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper stage member 440 is omitted in order to improve the visibility of the falling ball. The guide points are illustrated with imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the right and left outer sides of the tip 451 (ball arrangement B1, (see FIG. 16(a)). The ball that landed on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left wall 445 or right wall 446 of the upper member 440, as shown in FIG. 24(b). do.

Then, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the balls flow into the central flow passage 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flow down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage 431. Then, as shown in FIG. 24(d), the balls pass through the central opening 413 at the front end side of the central flow passage 431 and flow downward.

As shown in FIGS. 24(a) to 24(d), when the electric accessory 640a is maintained in a non-excited state during the period during which the ball passes through the winning unit 400, the ball that has landed on the tip 451 It falls down the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

25(a) to 25(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 25(a) and 25(b) show the non-energized state of the electric role 640a, 25(c) and 25(d) show the energized state of the electric role 640a, and 25(a) to 25(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip 451 in chronological order. Note that in 25(a) to 25(d), the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper member 440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip 451 of the slide member 450 (ball arrangement B1, see FIG. 16(a)) as shown in FIG. 25(a). The ball that lands on the tip 451 then flows down the left or right inner side toward the front side of the ball passage opening 414, and passes through ball arrangement B2 (see FIG. 16(a)) as shown in FIG. 25(b).

When the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state as shown in FIG. 25(c) when the ball flowing down is placed in the ball arrangement B2, the ball flows to the left and right inward due to inertia, as shown in FIG. 25(d). As shown in FIG. 3, the ball flows downward on the front side of the ball passage opening 414 and passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in Figures 25(a) to 25(d), if the electric device 640a is switched to an excited state within a short time after a ball is placed on the tip 451, the ball on the tip 451 may fall down the front side of the ball passage opening 414 and pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

However, if the electric device 640a is switched to an excited state in such a short time that inertia does not act on the inside left or right, the ball on the tip 451 may come off the opening 435a and flow down the outside left or right of the detection sensor 435.

26(a) to 26(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 26(a) and 26(b) show the non-energized state of the electric role 640a, 26(c) and 26(d) show the energized state of the electric role 640a, and 26(a) to 26(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip 451 in chronological order. Note that in 26(a) to 26(d), the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper member 440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, when the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state, the ball is likely to land on the left or right outer part of the tip 451 of the slide member 450 (ball arrangement B1, see FIG. 16(a)) as shown in FIG. 26(a). The ball that lands on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 as shown in FIG. 26(b) and flows down the slide member 450 along the left side wall 445 or right side wall 446 of the upper member 440.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the balls flow into the central flow passage 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flow down toward the front side along the inclination of the central flow passage 431. Then, as shown in FIG. 26(d), the balls pass through the central opening 413 at the front end side of the central flow passage 431 and flow downward, where they are picked up by the tilting member 470 and flow down toward the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 26(a) to 26(d), when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the de-energized state to the energized state while the ball passes through the winning unit 400 and is maintained in the energized state, the tip The ball that landed on the portion 451 falls down the front side of the central opening 413, is picked up by the tilting member 470, and enters the second prize opening 640 (an opening that is opened and closed by the tilting member 470, see FIG. 2).

27(a) to 27(d) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. 27(a), 27(b) and 27(d) show the non-energized state of the electric device 640a, 27(c) shows the energized state of the electric device 640a, and 27(a) to 27(d) show the flow of the ball after it hits the tip 451 in chronological order. Note that in 27(a) to 27(d), the plate member 410, front design member 420 and upper member 440 are omitted from the illustration in order to improve the visibility of the flowing ball, and the parts that guide the flowing ball are shown with imaginary lines.

As described above, in the non-excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the ball lands on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 on the right and left outer sides of the tip 451 (ball arrangement B1, (see FIG. 16(a)). The ball that landed on the tip 451 then passes through the ball passage opening 414 and flows down on the slide member 450 along the left side wall 445 or the right side wall 446 of the upper member 440, as shown in FIG. 27(b). do.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(c), the liquid flows into the central flow path 431 via the inclined surface portions 452a and 453a of the slide member 450, and flows down toward the front side along the slope of the central flow path 431. At this point, the electric accessory 640a is in an excited state as shown in FIG. 27(c), similar to that shown in FIG. 26(c).

Thereafter, before the ball passes through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central channel 431, the electric accessory 640a is switched to the non-excited state as shown in FIG. 27(d). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27(d), the ball that has passed through the central opening 413 on the front end side of the central channel 431 flows downward.

As shown in Figures 27(a) to 27(d), when the electric device 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state while a ball passes through the winning unit 400, and then switched back to a non-energized state, the ball that lands on the tip 451 falls down the front side of the central opening 413 and flows down toward the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, at the time when the electric accessory 640a is switched to the excited state after the ball passes through the ball passing opening 414, it is unclear whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member 470 or not. Ru.

That is, depending on how the state of the tilting member 470 changes after the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the ball may fall down the front side of the tilting member 470 and flow toward the third prize opening 64b, or it may tilt. It depends on whether the ball is picked up by the member 470 and flows down toward the second prize opening 640, and it is unclear in which direction the ball will flow down until it reaches the tilting member 470. This makes it possible to maintain a high level of attention to the ball passing through the ball passing opening 414 and flowing down toward the front side position of the tilting member 470.

When the ball lands on the tip 451, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will flow into the ball passage opening 414 or not, thereby improving the attraction, and when the ball passes through the central opening 413, it becomes a branching point as to whether the ball will be picked up by the tilting member 470 or not, thereby improving the attraction. This makes it possible to increase the attraction of the ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 at multiple positions.

28(a) and 28(b) are front perspective views of the winning unit 400. In Fig. 28(a) and 28(b), the excited state of the electric device 640a is illustrated, and the flow of the balls flowing down the front side of the tip 451 is illustrated by arrows. Note that in Fig. 28(a) and 28(b), in order to improve the visibility of the flowing balls, the plate member 410, front design member 420, and upper member 440 are omitted, and the areas that guide the flow of the balls are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 28(a), when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the path passes through the left and right positions (ball arrangement B1, see FIG. 16(a)) where it lands on the left and right outer parts of the tip portion 451. When the ball flows down, the ball flows to the left and right outside of the opening 436a. That is, the ball does not pass through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

As shown in FIG. 28(b), when a ball with a velocity component to the left and right inward flows downward toward the front position of the slide member 450, there is a possibility that the ball will enter the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

On the other hand, because the tip 451 of the slide member 450 is positioned far back (see FIG. 20), the balls flowing down are prevented from landing on the tip 451. This prevention effect is also strengthened by the reduction in the opening area enclosed by the ball passage opening 414 and the tip 451.

That is, since the distal end portion 451 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear, the slide member forms an opening together with the ball passage opening 414 when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position (see FIG. 17). A slide member that can form an opening together with the ball passage opening 414 when the slide member 450 is placed in a retracted position (see FIG. 20) than the upper and lower positions of the portion 450 (corresponding to the rear edge of the tip portion 451). The vertical position of the portion 450 (corresponding to the front edge of the tip portion 451) is higher.

Therefore, when the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position, the lower edge (corresponding to the edge formed by the tip 451) of the opening surrounded by the ball passage opening 414 and the tip 451 is raised in the vertical direction, thereby reducing the opening area. This makes it easier to prevent a ball with a velocity component to the left and right inward as it flows down toward the front position of the slide member 450.

In this way, the balls flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 in the excited state of the electric accessory 640a generally deviate to the left and right outside of the winning unit 400, and a part of the balls enter the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435.

On the other hand, when the electric device 640a is in an excited state, balls flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 are prevented from landing on the slide member 450, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which new balls are introduced toward the second winning hole 640 (see Figure 2) or the third winning hole 64b, which are located downstream of the slide member 450, when the electric device 640a is in an excited state.

As shown in Figures 24 to 28, the winning unit 400 can branch the flow of a ball that has landed on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 at multiple positions. First, immediately after a ball has landed on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 in a non-excited state (first branch position), if the slide member 450 is switched to an excited state, the ball can flow down toward the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435 (see Figure 25 (c)).

On the other hand, the balls that have not flowed down into the opening 435a flow from the tip 451 along the slope. If the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while the ball is riding on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, the ball remains on the slide member 450. Further, if the slide member 450 is switched to the excited state while riding on the bottom surface part 431a (see FIG. 26(c)), the ball still remains on the bottom surface part 431a.

A ball flowing backward down the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 is constantly pulled inward to the left or right due to the left-right inclination formed across the entire front-to-rear width of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453, and flows backward. This allows the ball to be pulled toward the downstream central flow path 431 before it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453. Therefore, the flow of the ball into the central flow path 431 can be made smoother than if the ball were to change direction to the central flow path 431 only after it reaches the rear end of the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453.

The ball that flows into the central flow path 431 rolls forward along the inclination of the central flow path 431. When the ball falls from the front end of the central flow path 431 (second branch position), if the tilting member 470 of the electric device 640a is in a non-energized closed position, the ball falls downward (see FIG. 24(d)). If the tilting member 470 of the electric device 640a is in an energized open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows backward (see FIG. 26(d)).

In this embodiment, the flow direction of the game ball rolling on the slide member 450 is set to include the front and rear directions, so that the game ball can roll over a path length that is greater than or equal to the dimensions of the slide member 450 and tilt member 470 when viewed from the front.

As a condition for the development of the pachinko machine 10, for example, the width dimension of the electric accessory 640a when viewed from the front cannot be extended indefinitely, and a limit on the length is set (for example, 55 mm), but according to the present embodiment The horizontal width dimension of the electric accessory 640a when viewed from the front satisfies the conditions for the development of the pachinko machine 10, and the actual rolling length of the ball via the electric accessory 640a can be further extended. As a result, in the configuration in which the ball flows over the electric accessory 640a and is guided to the winning port on the downstream side, it is possible to lengthen the time required for the ball to flow down while narrowing the space for placing the electric accessory 640a in front view. can.

Furthermore, as the electric accessory 640a, the portion (the tip portion 451 and the tilting member 470) that comes into contact with the flowing game ball is provided at a remote position. As a result, the length of the game ball flowing down can be increased by the length of the central flow path 431 in between, exceeding the shape of the electric accessory 640a.

Figures 29(a) and 29(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XXIXa-XXIXa in Figure 15(b). Figure 29(a) illustrates the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position (de-energized state), and Figure 29(b) illustrates the state immediately after the slide member 450 is switched from the state shown in Figure 29(a) to the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position (energized state). Figures 29(a) and 29(b) also illustrate balls that were positioned on the slide member 450 or in the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 slid.

As shown in Figures 29(a) and 29(b), when the slide member 450 slides, the ball resting on the left guide plate portion 452 is displaced backward together with the slide member 450 by the amount of displacement of the slide movement. Furthermore, since the left guide plate portion 452 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see Figure 17), a backward load is applied to the ball, and the ball accelerates.

On the other hand, the ball riding on the central channel 431 when the slide member 450 slides rolls on the fixed floor surface without being particularly displaced rearward. Therefore, even if the balls flow down the same path, the balls that were on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slid and the balls that were on the left guide plate portion 452 when the slide member 450 slid The time required for the ball to flow down is different for the ball that is not riding on the ball and is riding on the central flow path 431, but the details of the difference in the time required will be described later.

In addition, in FIGS. 29(a) and 29(b), when two balls are arranged in the downstream region formed by the slide member 450 and the central flow path 431, Although the figure shows a state in which one ball is arranged in each case, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is conceivable that the balls are arranged only in the left guide plate section 452 or the right guide plate section 453, or that the balls are disposed only in the central channel 431. Further, the number of balls arranged is not limited to two, but may be one, or may be three or more.

Figures 30(a) and 30(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the winning unit 400 taken along line XXIXa-XXIXa in Figure 15(b). Figure 30(a) illustrates the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position (non-excited state), and Figure 30(b) illustrates the state immediately after the slide member 450 is switched from the state shown in Figure 30(a) to the state in which the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position (excited state). Figures 30(a) and 30(b) also illustrate balls that were positioned on the slide member 450 or in the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 slid.

As shown in FIGS. 30(a) and 30(b), the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slid is similar to the ball that was on the left guide plate section 452. Together with the slide member 450, it is displaced backward by the displacement amount of the slide movement. Furthermore, since the right guide plate portion 453 forms an inclined surface that slopes downward toward the rear (see FIG. 19), a backward load is applied to the ball, and the ball is accelerated.

On the other hand, the ball riding on the central channel 431 when the slide member 450 slides rolls on the fixed floor surface without being particularly displaced rearward. Therefore, even if the balls flow down the same path, the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slides and the ball that was on the right guide plate section 453 when the slide member 450 slides. The time required for the ball to flow down is different for the ball that is not riding on the ball and is riding on the central flow path 431, but the details of the difference in the time required will be described later.

The time required for a ball to flow down the slide member 450 and pass the front end of the central flow passage 431 will be described. In this embodiment, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls down the right guide plate portion 453, if no sliding motion of the slide member 450 occurs while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 will pass the front end of the central flow passage 431 in approximately 2.0 seconds.

On the other hand, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 rolls down the left guide plate part 452, if the slide member 450 does not slide while the ball is flowing down, the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 will It passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 in about 2.4 seconds.

The slide member 450 constitutes half of the path from passing through the ball passage opening 414 to passing through the front end of the central flow path 431. In other words, when a ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 flows down on the right guide plate portion 453, if the slide member 450 slides before about 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414, the ball receives a load from the slide member 450, whereas if the slide member 450 slides after about 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414, the ball does not receive a load from the slide member 450.

Furthermore, when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 flows down on the left guide plate portion 452, the slide member 450 slides before approximately 1.2 seconds have passed after the ball has passed through the ball passage opening 414. In this case, the ball receives a load from the slide member 450, while if the slide member 450 slides approximately 1.2 seconds after the ball passes through the ball passage aperture 414, the ball is loaded. No load is applied from the slide member 450.

In the present embodiment, even if the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passage openings 414 at the same timing, the ball may receive a backward load from the slide member 450 depending on the timing of the slide operation of the slide member 450. and a case in which the ball does not receive a backward load from the slide member 450 may occur at the same time.

In other words, if the sliding member 450 slides after approximately 1.0 second has elapsed since the ball passed through the ball passage opening 414 but before approximately 1.2 seconds have elapsed, the ball flowing down the left guide plate portion 452 will be subjected to a backward load, and the ball flowing down the right guide plate portion 453 will not be subjected to a backward load.

When the slide member 450 slides backward while a ball is resting on it, the time it takes for the ball to pass through the ball passage opening 414 and pass the front end of the central flow passage 431 is reduced by approximately 0.5 seconds.

The breakdown of this 0.5 seconds is roughly 0.3 seconds saved by the amount of forward and backward displacement of the slide member 450 (approximately 12 mm), and 0.2 seconds saved by the acceleration caused by the load applied to the ball from the slide member 450.

A ball that rolls backward on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 passes through gap 432a or gap 433a (see FIG. 24(b)) and flows into the central flow passage 431. Since gaps 432a and 433a are offset from each other in the front-to-back direction, it is possible to prevent a head-on collision between the balls in the left-to-right direction when a ball passes through gap 432a and a ball passes through gap 433a at the same time. This makes it possible to prevent a situation in which a ball that passes through gap 432a or gap 433a is pushed back by a collision with the ball and flows back.

When the electric role 640a is in the excited state, a ball flowing down the front position of the slide member 450 is prevented from reaching the slide member 450 (see Figure 28), so the ball that takes the longest time to reach the tilt member 470 after the electric role 640a is switched to the excited state is the ball that was on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 at the time the electric role 640a is switched to the excited state, and no balls after that will reach the tilt member 470.

Figures 31(a) to 31(c) are diagrams showing an example of the change over time in the state of the electric role 640a. Note that Figure 31(a) shows the change over time in the first operation pattern, Figure 31(b) shows the change over time in the second operation pattern, and Figure 31(c) shows the change over time in the third operation pattern.

Figures 31(a) to 31(c) explain the operation pattern of the electric device 640a, which is controlled when the passage of a ball is detected through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66, 67.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the nail arrangement is designed so that the ball flowing down toward the electric accessory 640a passes through the normal prize openings (through gates) 66 and 67 without leaking, and the ball is Compared to the firing interval (0.6 second interval), the operation time of the electric accessory 640a triggered by the ball passing through the normal prize opening (through gate) 66, 67 (single lottery of normal symbols) (The operating time in the standard operating pattern, which corresponds to the interval between drawings for normal symbols) is longer, so during the pinball game, the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is less likely to be interrupted, and the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is always constant. It is likely to be maintained in a state where it is greater than 0. Therefore, the operation of the electric accessory 640a is performed repeatedly according to the standard operation pattern without any interval.

As shown in FIG. 31(a), in the first operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time t1a (0.1 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member 450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for an operation time t1b (3.9 seconds in this embodiment), and this pattern is repeated as a reference operation pattern RP1.

In addition, in detail, as a breakdown of the 0.1 second that constitutes the non-excited state, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member 450 is maintained at the forward position for 0.05 seconds. has been done.

When the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position, the ball can rest on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, but 0.1 seconds is not enough time compared to the time (about 0.2 seconds) required for the ball to move from ball position B1 to ball position B3 (see Figure 16 (a)).

Therefore, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the first operating pattern, the ball is prevented from passing through the ball passage opening 414 and is prevented from being introduced into the central flow path 431, so that the ball can be prevented from entering the second winning hole 640 or the third winning hole 64b (see Figure 2).

As shown in FIG. 31(b), in the second operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time t2a (1.8 seconds in this embodiment), then the slide member 450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) for an operating time t2b (0.2 seconds in this embodiment), then the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for the waiting time t2a, then the slide member 450 is maintained in an excited state (retracted position) for the operating time t2b. This pattern is repeated as the standard operation pattern RP2.

In addition, in detail, as a breakdown of the 1.8 seconds that constitute the non-excited state, the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner for 0.05 seconds, and after that, the slide member 450 is maintained at the forward position for 1.75 seconds. has been done.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided toward the central flow path 431.

The following describes the relationship between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that passes before the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage 431. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds for the ball to reach ball position B1 to B3, the ball begins to pass through the ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position.

When a ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the first left ball entry period TIL1 (0.2 to 0.6 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 2.4 seconds later, the first left discharge period TOL1 (2.6 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment). In this case, the ball reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, so there is no change in the ball's flow speed due to the load from the slide member 450.

In addition, when the ball is guided by the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the second left ball entry period TIL2 (0.6 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passage period is shortened by 0.5 seconds due to the backward load from the slide member 450, so that the ball passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after the second left discharge period TOL2 (2.5 to 3.7 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

On the other hand, when the ball is guided to the right guide plate part 453, the ball passes after the first right ball entry period TIR1 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. The ball that has passed through the opening 414 passes through the front end of the central channel 431 after a first right discharge period TOR1 (2.2 to 2.8 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.0 seconds later. In this case, since the ball reaches the central flow path 431 before the slide member 450 operates, the downward velocity of the ball does not change due to the load from the slide member 450.

In addition, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the second right ball entry period TIR2 (0.8 to 1.8 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, and the ball passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 after the second right discharge period TOR2 (2.3 to 3.3 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

Therefore, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric device 640a is in a de-energized state (the sliding member 450 is in the forward position and the tilting member 470 is in the closed position) at the timing when the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage 431. Therefore, since the ball is not picked up by the tilting member 470, it is not guided to the second winning opening 640 (see Figure 2), but is guided to the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the ball (for a ball that enters the ball late), a load is applied to the ball during operation of the slide member 450, and the time required for the ball to pass is shortened. Thereby, when the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state, the time required for the ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 to pass through the front end of the central channel 431 (when flowing down via the left guide plate section 452 Although the slide member 450 is operated in an operation pattern with a shorter period than the time required for (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment), the ball is moved into the central channel 431 within the period of the operation pattern of the slide member 450. can be passed through from the front end.

Therefore, the ball that passes through the ball passage opening 414 when the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position for the first time (nth time) can pass through the front end of the central flow passage 431 when the slide member 450 is positioned in the forward position for the second time (n+1th time) via the slide member 450 being positioned in the retracted position.

That is, the passing of the ball through the ball passing opening 414 and the passing of the ball from the front end of the central flow path 431 are completed in one set for the n-th state and the n+1-th state in which the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. can be done.

As shown in FIG. 31(c), in the third operation pattern, the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-energized state (advance position) for a waiting time t3a (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and then the slide member 450 is maintained in an energized state (retracted position) for an operating time t3b (2.0 seconds in this embodiment), and this pattern is repeated as the reference operation pattern RP3.

In more detail, the 2.0 seconds that constitute the non-energized state are broken down into 0.05 seconds during which the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and after this period the sliding member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 1.95 seconds.

When the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball can ride on the tip 451 of the slide member 450, and if the slide member 450 is maintained in the forward position for 0.2 seconds thereafter, the ball will pass through the ball. It passes through the opening 414, rolls on the slide member 450, and is guided toward the central flow path 431 side.

The correspondence between the position and timing at which the ball arrives and the time that elapses until the ball passes the front end of the central flow path 431 will be explained. Since it takes approximately 0.2 seconds to reach ball placement B1 to B3, the ball begins to pass through ball passage opening 414 0.2 seconds after slide member 450 is placed in the advanced position.

When the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion 452, the ball passing opening 414 is opened after the third left ball entry period TIL3 (0.2 to 0.8 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. The ball that has passed through passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after a third left discharge period TOL3 (2.6 to 3.2 seconds in this embodiment), which is 2.4 seconds later.

Further, when the ball is guided to the left guide plate portion 452, the ball is guided after the fourth left ball entry period TIL4 (0.8 seconds to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) after the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. The ball that has passed through the passage opening 414 receives a backward load from the slide member 450, so that the passage period is shortened, and the fourth left discharge period TOL4 (1.9 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414) is reached. In this embodiment, it passes through the front end of the central flow path 431 after 2.7 to 3.9 seconds).

On the other hand, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the third right ball entry period TIR3 (0.2 to 1.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and then passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 2.0 seconds later, the third right discharge period TOR3 (2.2 to 3.0 seconds in this embodiment).

In addition, when the ball is guided by the right guide plate portion 453, the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414 after the fourth right ball entry period TIR4 (1.0 to 2.0 seconds in this embodiment) from when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, and the passing period is shortened by receiving a backward load from the slide member 450, so that the ball passes through the front end of the central flow passage 431 after the fourth right discharge period TOR4 (2.5 to 3.5 seconds in this embodiment), which is 1.5 seconds after passing through the ball passage opening 414.

Therefore, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the third operating pattern, when the ball passes through the ball passage opening 414, the electric device 640a is in an excited state (the slide member 450 is in the retracted position and the tilt member 470 is in the open position) at the timing when the ball passes the front end of the central flow passage 431, so the ball is picked up by the tilt member 470 and guided without fail to the second winning opening 640 (see Figure 2), and is not guided to the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

As described above, in this embodiment, due to the arrangement of the ball (for a ball that enters the ball late), a load is applied to the ball during operation of the slide member 450, and the time required for the ball to pass is shortened. Thereby, when the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state, the time required for the ball that has passed through the ball passing opening 414 to pass through the front end of the central channel 431 (when flowing down via the left guide plate section 452 Even if the operating pattern is such that the period during which the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than the time required for the slide member 450 to be maintained in the retracted position (approximately 2.4 seconds in this embodiment), The sphere can be passed through the front end of the central channel 431.

Therefore, in the standard operating pattern, the ball that rides on the slide member 450, which is positioned in the forward position when the electric device 640a is in the non-energized state, and flows down to the central flow path 431 can be picked up by the tilting member 470, which is positioned in the open position when the electric device 640a is in the energized state. In other words, the passage of the ball through the ball passage opening 414 and the passage of the ball from the front end of the central flow path 431 can be completed in the standard operating pattern RP3.

As described above, the ball guided by the electric device 640a passes through different ball entrances depending on the operation pattern of the electric device 640a. First, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the first operation pattern, the ball does not pass through the ball passage opening 414, but passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, or falls off the opening 435a.

Therefore, there is no support for the special symbol lottery, and the special symbol lottery is solely based on the ball entering the first winning slot 64, so the special symbol lottery can occur frequently without any intervals. is difficult. When the ball flowing down the front side of the slide member 450 passes through the opening 435a, the prize ball is paid out, which only provides support in terms of increasing the number of game balls the player has.

Next, when the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, the electric device 640a is de-energized when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 passes the front end of the central flow path 431, and the tilting member 470 is positioned in the closed position, so that the ball flows down the front side of the tilting member 470 toward the third winning opening 64b (see Figure 2).

This allows the lottery for special pattern 1 to be held more frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the third winning slot 64b, a prize ball is paid out, which helps increase the number of game balls the player has in hand.

Next, when the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled in the third operation pattern, the electric accessory 640a is brought into an excited state at the timing when the ball that has passed through the ball passage opening 414 passes through the front end of the central channel 431, Since the tilting member 470 is placed in the open position, the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470 and flows down toward the second prize opening 640 (see FIG. 2), that is, toward the detection sensor 462 (see E5).

Therefore, the special symbol 2 can be drawn frequently. In addition, when a ball enters the second winning hole 640, a prize ball is paid out, which provides support for increasing the number of game balls the player has.

By being able to set the third operating pattern from the first operating pattern in this way, even in a design in which the electric device 640a is constantly driven to open and close, it is possible to switch between a case in which a ball enters the second winning hole 640 and a case in which a ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640.

In other words, when the drive control of the electric device 640a is executed in the first or second operation pattern, the ball is prevented from entering the second winning hole 640, and when the drive control of the electric device 640a is executed in the third operation pattern, the ball frequently enters the second winning hole 640.

Figure 32 is a diagram explaining the relationship between reservation type, game state, special symbol type, and variable time. Note that, to make it easier to understand, only special symbol 2 is illustrated, and special symbol 1 is omitted.

For special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is set the same in both low and high probability states, and if a losing pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 5 or 20 seconds, and if a winning pattern is determined based on the reserved special pattern 1, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the lottery state of the special symbol 2 is set to either the low probability state or the high probability state mentioned above, and the game progresses with varying time varying based on the set game state. do.

As shown in FIG. 32, in a low probability state (normal state or time-saving state in this embodiment), if a losing symbol or a small winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 10 minutes. On the other hand, in a low probability state, if a big winning symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

The reason why the fluctuation time is set to a long time of 10 minutes is to reduce the profit that the player can obtain if a ball enters the second winning port 640 in a low probability state. As a result, even if a ball flowing down inside the winning unit 400 accidentally enters the second winning port 640, the fluctuation of the special pattern 2 can be prolonged unless the game state is shifted to a high probability state, making it difficult for the player to obtain a profit from the lottery for the special pattern 2.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls of special symbol 2 is allowed up to 4, so if a jackpot symbol is determined by the reserved balls of special symbol 2, the jackpot based on that determination will occur after 10 to 30 minutes. (the fluctuation of the special symbol stops) may occur.

Therefore, a player who is playing the game at the timing when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the pending special symbol 2, and a player who is playing the game at the timing when the jackpot based on the reserved special symbol 2 occurs. A different situation may occur, or a situation where no player is playing the game at the timing when a jackpot occurs.

In such a case, if the machine immediately transitions to a special game mode when a jackpot occurs, the player currently playing the machine, or players playing another pachinko machine nearby, may be surprised by the sudden start of the special game mode, which may lead players to suspect a malfunction.

In response to this, it is possible to determine the conditions for transitioning to the special game state when a jackpot is determined. In this embodiment, after a jackpot is determined (after the special symbols have stopped varying), the player can transition to the special game state by passing the ball through the through gates 66, 67 in accordance with the instructions displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

That is, by controlling so that the transition to the special game state is not made until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will suspect that there is a malfunction. Note that the locations through which the ball passes in order to transition to the special game state are not limited to the through gates 66 and 67; for example, when the ball passes through the general prize opening 63, the ball passes through to the special game state. It may be controlled as follows.

In addition, in a high probability state (high probability state or special high probability state in this embodiment), if a losing symbol is determined based on the reservation of special symbol 2, the variation time is determined to be 5 seconds or 20 seconds.

Further, in the high probability state, when the small winning symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the high probability state, when the jackpot symbol is determined based on the suspension of special symbol 2, the fluctuation time is determined to be 20 seconds.

In the high probability state, the fluctuation time when the small winning symbol is determined based on the suspension of the special symbol 2 is set to be short, so the state where the ball frequently enters the second prize opening 640 (this implementation In the case where the drive control of the electric accessory 640a is executed in the third operation pattern), the player can frequently perform small winning games and open the specific winning opening 65a, It is possible to frequently obtain prize balls based on balls that enter the mouth 65a.

In addition, the setting of the variation time of the special symbol is not limited to this, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, various variations may be added to the variation time of each symbol, or the length of the variation time may be changed depending on the number of reserved special symbols. When the length of the fluctuation time changes depending on the number of reserved special symbols, generally speaking, when the number of reserved symbols is small, compared to when the number of reserved symbols is large (nearly full), The variable time is set to be long.

This embodiment solves the problem that occurred in conventional machines, where the player receives an unexpected profit by firing a ball so as to win the special symbol 2 lottery at an inappropriate timing. be able to.

That is, even in the conventional model, as in this embodiment, there is a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port related to the lottery of special symbol 1 is high, and a state in which the frequency of balls entering the ball into the second ball entry port related to the lottery of special symbol 2 is high. There have been examples of configurations in which it is possible to switch between a state in which the frequency of ball entry increases.

However, if the number of installed electric accessory 640a is limited to one, the electric accessory 640a is installed to be attached to either the first ball entrance or the second ball entrance, and the electric accessory 640a is installed to accompany the other ball entrance. It is assumed that the electric accessory 640a is not installed in the ball and the ball is always in a state where the ball can enter.

In this case, if the ball entry efficiency of one ball entry port (corresponding to the first winning port 64, see Figure 2) located in the center of the game board 13 is higher than that of the other ball entry port, or if the player's profits are extremely high if a ball entry into the other ball entry port results in a jackpot, the player may shoot the ball toward the other ball entry port even if the game provided by the pachinko machine 10 indicates that it is the right time to let the ball enter the first ball entry port.

Even if a measure is taken to reduce the efficiency of digesting the fluctuation based on the ball entering the other ball entrance by making the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in a low probability state extremely long, the number of reserved special symbols 2 First, when a variation is started based on the suspension of special symbol 1, the ball enters the other ball entrance in advance to fluctuate the special symbol 2, and then the game proceeds in which the ball enters one ball entrance. If it is possible to make the special symbol 2 fluctuate while playing the game provided by the pachinko machine 10 by doing so, it can be said that the deterrent effect is low.

In the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, even if the timing is right for a ball to land in one ball opening, if the ball enters the other ball opening and results in a jackpot, the pachinko machine enters a special game state. If the game provided by the machine 10 ends up giving the player a benefit that is not intended, there is a problem in terms of the fairness of the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the electric accessory 640a (slide member 450 and tilting member 470) driven by the single solenoid SOL41 operates the first ball entrance (third prize opening) related to the special symbol 1 lottery. 64b)), the second ball entry port (equivalent to special symbol 2) is supported to increase the frequency of balls entering the slot (corresponding to 2 (corresponding to the second winning hole 640), while supporting the player to increase the frequency of balls entering the second ball entering hole related to the special symbol 2 lottery (equivalent to the electric accessory 640a). In the state where the drive is controlled by the third operation pattern), it is possible to reduce the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port related to the special symbol 1 lottery.

Furthermore, it is possible to configure a state in which the frequency of balls entering the first ball entry port (corresponding to the third winning port 64b) related to the drawing of special pattern 1 and the frequency of balls entering the second ball entry port (corresponding to the second winning port 640) related to the drawing of special pattern 2 are both low (a state in which the electric device 640a is driven and controlled by the first operating pattern).

This makes it possible to prevent players from receiving benefits that were not intended for the game provided by the pachinko machine 10, improving the fairness of the game.

33 to 35 are cross-sectional views of the slide member 450, the tilting member 470, and the transmission member 480 taken along the line XXXIII-XXXIII in FIG. 23(a). 33 to 35, the switching operation of the electric accessory 640a from the de-energized state to the excitation state is illustrated in chronological order. In FIG. 33, the de-energized state of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and in FIG. 34, A state in which the arrangement of the slide portion 450 is maintained at the forward position while the first member 481 is raised is illustrated, and FIG. 35 illustrates an excited state of the electric accessory 640a. Further, in FIGS. 33 to 35, the outer shape of the plate member 410 is illustrated with imaginary lines for reference of arrangement.

As shown in Figures 33 to 35, when the electric role 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, there is a discrepancy between the operation timing of the sliding member 450 and the operation timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, only the tilting member 470 moves from the start of the operation to the intermediate position (see Figures 33 and 34), and from the intermediate position, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 move (see Figures 34 and 35). At this time, the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 end their operations at approximately the same time (see Figure 35).

This will be explained in detail below. Since the first member 481 operates integrally with the plunger SOL41a (see FIG. 11) of the solenoid SOL41, it moves up and down in synchronization with the drive timing of the solenoid SOL41.

On the other hand, in the configuration in which the driving force is transmitted from the first member 481 to the second member 485 via a pair of transmission plate parts 482 formed at the rear end of the first member 481, the non-operation of the electric accessory 640a is In the excited state, the upper plate portion 482a is in contact with the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is maintained between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486.

The second member 485 is rotatably supported around a rotating shaft portion 485a, and is locked to the locking plate portion 431b via the slide member 450 (see FIG. 18), so that the second member 485 is in a non-excited state ( (see FIG. 33) is configured to be the final position of displacement in the forward rolling direction.

When the first member 481 rises from the non-energized state, the position of the second member 485 and the arrangement of the slide member 450 are maintained until the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact, and only the tilting member 470 tilts. In other words, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentrated and transmitted to the tilting member 470.

In the process of the first member 481 rising, after the lower plate part 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact, the second member 485 moves to the rotating shaft part 485a in such a manner that the eccentric protrusion 486 is lifted by the lower plate part 482b. Rotates in the backward direction around .

In this way, when switching the electric feature 640a from an excited state to a non-excited state while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), the timing at which the tilting member 470 requires a driving force is shifted from the timing at which the sliding member 450 requires a driving force.

In particular, since the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is retracted from above the first member 481 after the transmission of the driving force to the slide member 450 is started (see FIG. 34), the transmission target portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is The movement is left to its own weight, and the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is used to move the slide member 450.

In addition, as described above, when the electric device 640a is switched from a non-energized state to an excited state, the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 starts first, so the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 can start regardless of the operating resistance of the sliding member 450.

Therefore, even if a ball is placed on the slide member 450, it is possible to avoid a situation where the tilting operation of the tilting member 470 is delayed due to the influence of the weight of the ball, so that the tilting member 470 is opened. By arranging the ball at this position, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the start timing of the period in which the ball is guided toward the second winning a prize opening 640 deviates from the control.

In addition, even if a ball is positioned on the front side when the tilting member 470 starts to displace, and the ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 18), the driving force is transmitted to the tilting member 470 without being allocated to the sliding member 450, so a force sufficient to expel the ball downward can be generated. Therefore, the state in which the ball is pinched between the tilting member 470 and the front design member 420 can be quickly resolved.

On the other hand, at the stage where the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 12) is transmitted to the sliding member 450 (see FIGS. 34 and 35), the driving force allocated to the tilting member 470 becomes extremely small, and the driving force is transferred to the sliding member 450. Therefore, when a ball is placed on the slide member 450, a backward load applied to the ball via the slide member 450 can be secured.

In this embodiment, the path of the ball flowing down toward the tilting member 470 is surrounded by the plate member 410 and the front design member 420, so that the ball does not deviate from the tilting member 470 (see FIG. 21). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 34, even before the tilting member 470 is fully opened, the weight of the ball is applied to the tilting member 470, so that the tilting member 470 is displaced to the open position (pushed down). Therefore, the ball can be configured to be easily picked up by the tilting member 470.

Also in the switching operation of the electric accessory 640a from the energized state to the non-excited state (the operation returning from FIG. 35 to FIG. 33), there is a difference between the operating timing of the slide member 450 and the operating timing of the tilting member 470.

That is, from the start of the operation (see FIG. 35) to the intermediate position (see FIG. 34), the transmitted portion 474 of the tilting member 470 is pushed down by the first member 481 of the transmitting member 480, and the lower plate portion 482b of the first member 481 When the locking projection 487 of the second member 485 is pushed down, the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 operate together. On the other hand, since the slide member 450 has already reached the forward position at the halfway position (see FIG. 34), only the tilting member 470 is operated from the halfway position.

As a result, when the electric role 640a is switched from an excited state to a non-excited state, the slide member 450 can be positioned in the forward position before the tilt member 470 completes its operation. This makes it easier for the ball to land on the tip 451 (the period during which the ball is picked up by the tip 451 can be extended as much as possible), and also makes it easier for the ball to be picked up by the tilt member 470 (the period until the tilt member 470 reaches the closed position can be extended).

Further, in the present embodiment, the protrusion 455 is not formed on the lower side of the tip end 451 of the slide member 450, and the tip end 451 is allowed to undergo elastic deformation in the vertical direction. Therefore, in the switching operation from the energized state (see FIG. 35) to the de-energized state (see FIG. 33), the ball gets caught between the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 (see FIG. 20), causing the displacement of the slide member 450. Even if a situation occurs in which the forward displacement of the slide member 450 may be suppressed, the forward displacement of the slide member 450 can be continued by elastically deforming the distal end portion 451, so that the rising operation of the tilting member 470 interlocked with the slide member 450 will not become defective. This can be avoided and the rising operation of the tilting member 470 can be completed reliably.

As described above, in this embodiment, while using the driving force of the same solenoid SOL41 (see FIG. 11), when switching the electric role 640a from a non-energized state to an excited state, the timing at which the tilting member 470 requires a driving force is shifted from the timing at which the sliding member 450 requires a driving force.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the non-excited state to the energized state, the tilting member 470 starts operating first, and then the sliding member 450 starts operating. , the timing at which the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 end their operations is set to be approximately the same.

Load transmission from the slide member 450 side will be explained. As shown in FIG. 33, a locking protrusion 487 is formed at the lower end portion of the second member 485 (a portion below the rotation shaft portion 485a) so as to protrude along the axial direction of the rotation shaft portion 485a.

The locking protrusion 487 is disposed so as to abut against the lower plate 482b of the first member 481 in the front-rear direction. The frictional force generated at this abutting portion can suppress unintended rising (floating) of the first member 481 when the electric role 640a is in a non-excited state, making it easier to maintain the tilting member 470 in the closed position.

Furthermore, even if a load (rearward load) is applied to the slide member 450 in a direction that moves the slide member 450 backward and, in conjunction with this, rotates and displaces the second member 485 in the backward direction when the electric device 640a is in a non-energized state, the lower plate portion 482b is positioned in the direction of movement of the locking protrusion 487, so that the rotational displacement of the second member 485 and the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 are also stopped.

In this case, since the direction of movement of the locking protrusion 487 (direction along a circle centered on the rotating shaft section 485a) and the direction of movement (vertical direction) of the first member 481 intersect (orthogonal to each other), , the first member 481 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted through the locking protrusion 487. Thereby, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the slide member 450 is unexpectedly displaced backward in the non-excited state.

This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts, such as, for example, inserting a thin metal wire (such as a piano wire or wire) from outside the pachinko machine 10 (see Figure 1) into the play area, applying a load to the sliding member 450 via the thin metal wire, and changing the position of the electric device 640a.

In particular, countermeasures can be taken for the slide member 450, which protrudes from the front side of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) in the de-energized state, and which would be easy for a person committing fraud to apply a load to. , it is possible to prevent the continuation of fraudulent acts.

Figure 36 is a cross-sectional view of the plate member 410, base plate 437, slide member 450, tilt member 470, and transmission member 480 taken along line XVIII-XVIII in Figure 15(c). In Figure 36, unnecessary components of the winning unit 400 are omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure, and the figure shows a state in which the operation of the tilt member 470 is temporarily stopped due to a ball being caught between the tilt member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e while the electric role 640a is being switched from an excited state to a non-excited state.

As described above, the movements of the tilting member 470 and the sliding member 450 are linked via the transmission member 480. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, when a ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball bite occurs), the forward movement of the sliding member 450 is restricted, and the ball flowing down the front side of the ball passage opening 414 (see FIG. 16) of the plate member 410 is unlikely to be picked up by the sliding member 450.

Therefore, if a ball becomes caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e (ball biting occurs), it is easier to avoid a situation in which an unexpectedly large number of balls become trapped inside the winning unit 400.

As a result, when a ball is caught between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e, the balls are picked up one after another by the slide member 450, and the balls flow down one after another toward the tilting member 470, and the tilting member It is possible to avoid a situation in which the following balls overlap one after another with respect to the ball sandwiched between the tilting member 470 and the inclined surface portion 437e, causing malfunction of the tilting member 470.

Returning to FIG. 2, in this embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 is disposed at approximately the center of the left-right width of the play area, forming the upper part of the center frame 86. Some of the balls shot along the rails 61 and 62 collide with the nails and reach the upper variable winning device 700.

37(a) and 37(b) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of FIG. 2. In FIG. 37(a), the closed state of the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated, and in FIG. 37(b), the open state of the upper variable winning device 700 is illustrated.

The upper variable winning device 700 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 so as to close an opening formed in the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction, and forms a path for the balls to flow down between it and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A base plate member 710, a movable upper cover member 730 that can be slid in the front and back direction through an inverted V-shaped opening 711 formed in the upper side of the base plate member 710 in the front and back direction, and the movable upper cover member 730. A detection sensor in which a second specific winning opening 700a is formed through which a game ball passing through the front side of the board can pass (win), and a rectangular opening bored in the lower side of the base plate member 710 in the front-rear direction. A movable floor member 740 that can be slid forward and backward through 712 and an opening 751 through which the ball can pass are arranged on the front side of the base plate member 710 to allow the ball to flow down the front side of the base plate member 710. A plurality of detection sensors 750 configured to be able to detect passage are provided.

In addition, the game balls that have passed through the front side of the movable floor member 740 are connected to an intermediate rail member that is formed into a curved shape by a band-shaped metal plate and is planted on the front side of the base plate 60, similar to the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62. It is accepted by 781.

A ball opening 782 is formed in the base plate 60 at the rear position of the lowest end of the intermediate rail member 781 . The ball received by the intermediate rail member 781 passes through the ball removal opening 782 and is guided to a ball ejection path (not shown).

The upper variable winning device 700 is positioned to form a play area between it and the glass unit 16 arranged on the front side. Because the glass unit 16 is transparent, the player can see the second specific winning port 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 when looking from the front.

In addition, on the back side of the glass unit 16, a resin plate member of a size that overlaps with the second specific prize opening 700a and the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in front view is arranged, and the resin plate member and the base plate member 710 are connected. The configuration may be such that the ball flows down between the two. In this case, the visibility of the game ball can be varied depending on whether a transparent member or an impermeable member is used as the resin plate member. For example, when an impermeable member is adopted, the upper variable prize winning device 700 can be configured to make it difficult to visually recognize the passing of the ball to the specific winning hole 700a and the opening 751.

The base plate member 710 has an inverted V-shaped opening 711 on the upper side, the left and right ends of which are close to the left and right central ends of the center frame 86, a rectangular opening 712 on the lower side, a pair of inclined rolling plate parts 713 extending from the inverted V-shaped opening 711 to the front side and inclining downward toward the second specific winning opening 700a, and a pair of inclined rolling plate parts 713 extending from the inverted V-shaped opening 711 to the front side at a position below the inclined plate parts 713 and on the left and right outer sides of the detection sensor 750 and inclining downward toward the detection sensor 750. It is equipped with an inclined outer wall plate portion 714, a pair of plate-shaped portions extending toward the front below the second specific winning opening 700a with a gap that can receive balls that have passed through the second specific winning opening 700a, a pair of left and right storage plate portions 715 with their lower ends positioned close to the rectangular opening 712, a pair of left and right receiving portions 716 extending toward the front below the detection sensor 750 in a U-shape with a left-right width that can receive balls that have passed through the opening 751, and a pair of left and right discharge openings 717 drilled in the front-rear direction according to the inner shape of the receiving portions 716 and discharging the balls received by the receiving portions 716 to the rear side.

The inclined rolling plate portion 713, the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, the storage plate portion 715, and the receiving portion 716 are extended to a sufficient position to prevent the balls from spilling between the glass unit 16. In other words, when viewed from the front, the balls do not penetrate the inclined rolling plate portion 713, the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, the storage plate portion 715, and the receiving portion 716, but flow down along their shapes.

The inclined outer wall plate 714 forms a gap between the inclined rolling plate 713 and the upper side of the detection sensor 750 into which the ball can enter. This allows the ball that has deviated to the left or right outside above the detection sensor 750 to be guided along the incline toward the detection sensor 750.

The storage plate part 715 is arranged at a position that is the same distance left and right from the central axis of the second specific winning opening 700a. That is, the central axis of the second specific winning a prize opening 700a is arranged on a plane that is parallel to the left and right side surfaces of the storage plate part 715 and is arranged at an intermediate position between the pair of storage plate parts 715. Thereby, the ball that entered the second specific winning hole 700a can easily flow into the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

The movable upper cover member 730 has a plate portion 731 that is bent in an inverted V shape when viewed from the front and slopes downward outward to the left and right. When the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the plate portion 731 protrudes to the front side of the base plate 60, and balls placed on the movable upper cover member 730 are swept outward to the left and right along the slope of the plate portion 731.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the open state, the plate portion 731 is retracted to the rear of the front end surface of the base plate 60, and the ball riding on the plate portion 731 falls toward the inclined rolling plate portion 713. do.

At this time, when the upper variable prize winning device 700 is in the closed state, the balls flowing down along the slope of the plate section 731 have a velocity directed toward the left and right outer sides, so Easy to land. Then, it flows along the inclination toward the left and right inner sides of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, and passes through the second specific winning opening 700a.

In other words, it is easier to make the ball flow down the top surface of the plate portion 731 in a roundabout direction compared to the shortest distance to the second specific winning opening 700a, and it is possible to lengthen the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific winning opening 700a.

Since the movable upper lid member 730 is tilted to both the left and right sides, the above-mentioned effect of prolonging the time it takes for the ball to pass through the second specific prize opening 700a can be produced in multiple paths, so that the ball can flow down. By slowing down, it is possible to prevent the ball from slowing down.

In other words, it is easy to keep the ball flowing smoothly even though it prolongs the time it takes for the ball to pass, so it is possible to avoid a situation where the player stops shooting the ball because he or she suspects that the ball is jammed. That is, it is possible to promote the shooting of the ball.

Furthermore, by prolonging the time it takes for the balls to pass, even if a plurality of balls are placed near the upper side of the second specific winning port 700a, they will always pass through the second specific winning port 700a. Therefore, by keeping the second specific winning opening 700a in view, the player can avoid losing sight of the ball that has passed through the front side of the movable upper lid member 730.

The vertical distance between the plate portion 731 and the inclined rolling plate portion 713 is longest at the center on the left and right, and becomes shorter toward the outside on the left and right. Furthermore, at the outside ends on the left and right, the vertical distance is configured to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Therefore, for example, when a ball is resting on the left or right outer end of the inclined rolling plate portion 713, when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state and the plate portion 731 of the movable upper cover member 730 slides forward, a load is generated from the plate portion 731 in a direction pushing the ball inward to the left or right.

As a result, it is possible to avoid the ball passing through the front side of the plate part 731 from staying at the left and right outer ends of the inclined rolling plate part 713, and also to shorten the period until the ball reaches the second specific winning port 700a. Excessive length can be avoided.

The movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 synchronize and move in opposite front and rear directions by the driving force of a solenoid 763, which will be described later. In FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b), the outer shapes of the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are such that when the gap between them and the glass unit 16 is sufficiently short to prevent a ball from passing through, are shown as solid lines, and when the gap between the glass unit 16 and the glass unit 16 is long enough to allow a ball to pass through, it is shown as an imaginary line.

In other words, when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state, the movable floor member 740 is retracted to the rear, allowing balls to be discharged below the storage plate section 715 (see Figure 37 (a)), and when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the open state, the movable floor member 740 is extended forward, making it impossible to discharge balls below the storage plate section 715 (see Figure 37 (b)).

When the ball flowing down the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 in the open state of the upper variable winning device 700 is detected to have passed through the second specific winning opening 700a, the prize ball is paid out, while the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 , functions as a specific area for changing the game state based on the entry of a ball. That is, with the requirement that the ball has passed through the opening 751 during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is controlled to be a high probability state, but the details will be described later.

Figures 38(a) to 38(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. Figures 38(a) to 38(c) show an example of how balls enter the upper variable winning device 700 in chronological order.

In FIGS. 38(a) to 38(c), the outlines of the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are indicated by solid lines and imaginary lines. The meaning is the same as that shown in FIG. 37(b).

As shown in FIG. 38(a), when the upper variable prize winning device 700 is in the open state, the ball that has passed the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 rolls on the inclined rolling plate part 713 and passes through the second specific prize winning opening 700a. Or, for example, a ball that falls from directly above the second specific winning opening 700a directly flows into the second specific winning opening 700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate part 713.

The balls that pass through the second specific winning opening 700a are stored in order in the area formed by the storage plate section 715 and the movable floor member 740, as shown in FIG. 38(b). Then, when the storage plate section 715 is filled with balls up to near the top end (ball P1, the fourth ball to pass through the second specific winning opening 700a, is positioned near the top end of the storage plate section 715), ball P2, which passes through the second specific winning opening 700a following ball P1, cannot enter the gap between the storage plate sections 715 and flows left and right and passes through the opening 751 (see FIG. 38(c)).

In other words, when the storage plate 715 is filled with balls up to near the top end, it is not the balls positioned inside the storage plate 715, but rather the balls that follow and reach near the top end of the storage plate 715 that pass through the opening 751.

According to the example shown in FIG. 38, more balls than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 pass through the second specific prize opening 700a. For example, the ball will pass through opening 751.

Figures 39(a) to 39(c) are enlarged front views of the upper variable winning device 700 in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. Figures 39(a) to 39(c) show an example of how balls enter the upper variable winning device 700 in chronological order.

In FIGS. 39(a) to 39(c), the outlines of the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are indicated by solid lines and imaginary lines. The meaning is the same as that shown in FIG. 37(b).

As shown in FIG. 39(a), when the upper variable winning device 700 is in the open state, balls are maintained stored in the area formed by the storage plate section 715 and the movable floor member 740, and balls that pass the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 roll on the inclined rolling plate section 713 and pass through the second specific winning opening 700a, or, for example, balls that fall from directly above the second specific winning opening 700a flow directly into the second specific winning opening 700a without passing through the inclined rolling plate section 713.

In the state shown in FIG. 39(a), similar to the state shown in FIG. 38(b), a ball P1 that can be positioned near the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 by riding on the balls stored between the storage plates 715 flows down.

In this state, when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched to the closed state, the movable floor member 740 retreats to the rear, and the balls stored in the area between the storage plate sections 715 are discharged from the bottom (see Figure 39 (b)).

Although FIGS. 39(b) and 39(c) illustrate a state in which only one ball is ejected, the number of ejected balls depends on the length of time that the movable floor member 740 is retracted backward. If the time is short, some of the balls will be ejected, and if the time is long, all the balls will be ejected.

Since the balls are ejected from the area between the storage plate parts 715, the fourth ball P1 that has passed through the second specific prize opening 700a is one ball ( In other words, the ball P2, which is placed downward by the number of ejected balls) and has passed through the second specific prize opening 700a following the ball P1, also enters the area between the storage plates 715, as shown in FIG. 39(c). Therefore, the ball P2 is arranged near the upper end of the storage plate section 715.

From the state shown in Figure 39 (c), if a ball passes through the second specific winning port 700a following ball P2, it cannot enter the gap between the storage plates 715, but flows to the left and right and passes through the opening 751.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 39, more balls than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 enter the second specific winning opening 700a. Even if the ball passes through the opening 751, the ball does not necessarily pass through the opening 751.

Whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 depends on whether or not the following ball P2 passes through the second specific prize opening 700a and reaches the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate 715. It depends on whether the state in which the ball P1 is arranged (see FIG. 38(c)) is maintained.

The balls are discharged from the storage plate 715 when the movable top cover member 730 is closed (see FIG. 39(b)). Since the number of balls discharged is related to the length of the opening and closing operation, the more frequently the movable top cover member 730 is opened and closed, and the longer the movable top cover member 730 is closed, the more difficult it becomes to maintain the state in which ball P1 is positioned near the upper end of the storage plate 715 (see FIG. 38(c)), and the more difficult it becomes for the ball to pass through the opening 751. Details of the operation control of the movable top cover member 730 will be described later.

Figures 40(a) to 40(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 taken along line XLa-XLa in Figure 37(a). In Figures 40(a) to 40(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate 60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from a closed state to an open state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 40(a) to 40(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is illustrated as a side view viewed from the right, rather than as a cross-sectional view.

The drive transmission device 760 includes a first member 761 journaled on a rotating shaft XXXVII fixedly positioned near the rear side of the base plate 60, a second member 762 journaled on a rotating shaft J2 fixedly positioned near the front side of the base plate 60, a solenoid 763 configured to allow a plunger 763a to slide vertically by electromagnetic force, and a transmission member 764 into which the plunger 763a of the solenoid 763 is fitted and which slides vertically in sync with the sliding movement of the plunger 763a.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is in the closed state (see Figure 40 (a)), the first member 761 is supported in a forward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, the movable upper cover member 730 is positioned in an advanced position, the second member 762 is supported in a backward-leaning position by a support portion (not shown) on the base member 60 side, and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in a retreated position.

When the upper variable winning device 700 is in the open state (see FIG. 40(c)), the first member 761 is in a backward position, the movable upper cover member 730 is in a retracted position, the second member 762 is in a forward position, and the movable floor member 740 is in an advanced position.

The first member 761 has a protruding portion 761a projecting from the right side to the right with a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 is located on the protruding portion 761a side (in this embodiment) so as to be located below the protruding portion 761a. In this embodiment, a rear extending portion 764a extends to the rear side), and a bent portion extends above the rear extending portion 764a to the projecting portion 761a side in parallel with the rear extending portion 764a and has a bent tip. A provision part 764b is provided.

The second member 762 has a protrusion 762a projecting from the right side to the right with a circular cross section, and the transmission member 764 is located on the protrusion 762a side (this embodiment In this embodiment, a rear extending portion 764c extends to the rear side), and a bent portion extends below the rear extending portion 764c to the projecting portion 762a side parallel to the rear extending portion 764c and has a bent tip. An extension portion 764d.

The solenoid 763 is configured to pull the plunger 763a upward when an electromagnetic force is generated (excited state), and when the electromagnetic force disappears (de-excited state), the force of the coil spring and gravity pull the plunger 763a downward.

The interlocking movement of the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 40(a), when the solenoid 763 is in the de-energized state, the plunger 763a is placed at the lower end position, and the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is placed at the lower end position. .

When the solenoid 763 is energized, the transmission member 764 is slid upward, but in the process of sliding, the protruding portion 762a is first pushed up onto the upper surface of the bent extension portion 764d, and the second The member 762 begins to rotate in the forward rotation direction (see FIG. 40(b)).

During this time, the rear extending portion 764a is similarly slid upward, but the gap between the rear extending portion 764a and the protruding portion 761a is only filled, and the protruding portion 761a absorbs the load from the rear extending portion 764a. Not given. In other words, the first member 761 still maintains the forward tilted posture.

When the transmission member 764 slides further upward from the state shown in FIG. 40(b), the first member 761 rotates in the rearward direction with the protrusion 761a pushed up against the upper surface of the rearward extension 764a, changing to a rearward tilted position (see FIG. 40(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 until the first member 761 reaches from the forward-tilted posture to the backward-tilted posture and the amount of vertical displacement required for the second member 762 to reach from the backward-tilted posture to the forward-tilted posture are determined. The amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 up to this point is the same.

Therefore, the second member 762 assumes a forward-leaning position before the first member 761 assumes a backward-leaning position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion 764d is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion 762a in the forward-leaning position of the second member 762, so that an upward load from the bent extension portion 764d to the second member 762 is prevented from being applied to the second member 762 after the second member 762 assumes the forward-leaning position.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending downward on the rear end side of the bent extension portion 764d comes into contact with the protrusion portion 762a, and by restricting the diagonal forward and downward displacement, rotation of the second member 762 in the backward rotation direction is prevented. This prevents movement.

In this case, since the load applied to the transmission member 764 from the protrusion 762a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, the transmission member 764 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion 762a. The arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in Figures 40(a) to 40(c), when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from the closed state to the open state, the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 do not operate simultaneously, but there is a time lag in the operation timing.

That is, the movable floor member 740 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable top cover member 730 starts moving toward the retracted position. This makes it possible to ensure that even if a ball passes the front side of the movable top cover member 730 immediately after the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the retracted position, the movable floor member 740 is already positioned in the forward position at that time.

This prevents the movable floor member 740 from being positioned in the forward position until the ball has passed the front side of the movable top cover member 730, and prevents the ball from passing the front side of the movable floor member 740 and not being stored between the storage plates 715.

In addition to this, in this embodiment, due to the shape of the movable upper lid member 730, the period until the ball rolling on the upper surface of the plate part 731 passes through the second specific prize opening 700a is designed to be longer. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the balls are not stored between the storage plate portions 715.

Figures 41(a) to 41(c) are cross-sectional views of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 taken along line XLa-XLa in Figure 37(a). In Figures 41(a) to 41(c), the front and rear end faces of the base plate 60 are shown in imaginary lines, and the manner in which the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from an open state to a closed state is illustrated in chronological order. Note that in Figures 41(a) to 41(c), for ease of understanding, the drive transmission device 760 is illustrated as a side view viewed from the right, rather than as a cross-sectional view.

The interlocking of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 will now be described. As shown in FIG. 41(a), when the solenoid 763 is in an excited state, the plunger 763a is positioned at the upper end position, and the transmission member 764 of the drive transmission device 760 is positioned at the upper end position.

When the solenoid 763 is de-energized, the force of the coil spring of the solenoid 763 and gravity move the plunger 763a downward, causing the transmission member 764 to slide downward. During this sliding movement, the first member 761 begins to rotate in the forward direction with the protrusion 761a being pushed down against the underside of the bent extension 764b (see FIG. 41(b)).

During this time, the rear extending portion 764c is similarly slid downward, but the gap between the rear extending portion 764c and the protruding portion 762a is only filled, and the protruding portion 762a absorbs the load from the rear extending portion 764c. Not given. In other words, the second member 762 still maintains the forward tilted posture.

When the transmission member 764 further slides downward from the state shown in FIG. The posture changes to a reclined position (see FIG. 41(c)).

In this embodiment, the amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 for the first member 761 to reach from the forward-tilted position to the forward-tilted position, and the amount of vertical displacement required for the second member 762 to reach from the forward-tilted position to the backward-tilted position. The amount of vertical displacement required of the transmission member 764 up to this point is the same.

Therefore, the first member 761 assumes a forward-leaning position before the second member 762 assumes a backward-leaning position. In this embodiment, the rearward extension length of the bent extension portion 764b is set to a length that does not exceed the front end portion of the protruding portion 761a in the forward-leaning position of the first member 761, so that a downward load from the bent extension portion 764b to the first member 761 is prevented from being generated after the first member 761 assumes a forward-leaning position.

Furthermore, the rear surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end of the bent extension 764b abuts against the protrusion 761a, restricting the displacement diagonally forward and upward, thereby preventing the first member 761 from rotating in the backward direction.

In this case, since the load applied to the transmission member 764 from the protrusion 761a is mainly a load in the front-rear direction, the transmission member 764 is prevented from being displaced in the vertical direction due to the load transmitted via the protrusion 761a. The arrangement of the transmission member 764 can be easily maintained.

As shown in Figures 41(a) to 41(c), when the upper variable winning device 700 is switched from the open state to the closed state, the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 do not operate simultaneously, but there is a time difference in the operation timing.

That is, the movable upper lid member 730 starts moving toward the forward position in advance, and then the movable floor member 740 starts moving toward the retreating position. As a result, regarding the ball that causes the movable upper lid member 730 to close (for example, the ball that passes through the second specific prize opening 700a after the specified number of balls), the time required for the ball to reach the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 is You can extend the time.

That is, since the time until the movable floor member 740 is moved to the retreat position and the balls begin to be discharged from the storage plate section 715 can be extended, the balls that trigger the closing of the movable upper cover member 730 can be detected by the opening of the detection sensor 750. The possibility of passing through section 751 can be increased.

In particular, since the ball that triggers the closing of the movable upper lid member 730 passes through the front side of the plate part 731, it is not affected by the inclination of the plate part 731 and flows down while maintaining a velocity in the left and right inward directions. There are many. Therefore, since it is possible to shorten the period until reaching the second specific winning opening 700a, it is possible for the player to reach the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate section 715 before the movable floor member 740 is displaced to the retreat position. can increase expectations.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the distance from the second specific winning opening 700a to the detection sensor 750 is short, and the vicinity of the upper end of the storage plate portion 715 is positioned directly below the second specific winning opening 700a. This makes the player think that if the ball simply passes through the second specific winning opening 700a, it may pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750, increasing the player's sense of anticipation.

Next, referring to FIG. 42, the opening pattern of the second specific winning port 700a that opens in the first round in the big win game of this embodiment will be described. In the explanation of FIG. 42, FIG. 2, FIG. 4, and FIG. 37 to FIG. 41 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 42(a) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning hole 700a in the first special operation pattern, and FIG. 42(b) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning hole 700a in the second special operation pattern. FIG. 42(c) is a diagram showing the time measurement change of the second specific winning opening 700a in the third special operation pattern.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines a jackpot, it starts controlling the determined type of jackpot game after the special symbol variation display (symbol variation performance) ends. Hereinafter, the operation control of the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 performed when a jackpot game is awarded will be explained.

In addition, in Figures 42(a) to 42(c), "top open, bottom closed" means a state in which the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the advanced position, and "top closed, bottom open" means a state in which the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the advanced position and the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the retracted position. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing of the displacement of the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 is shifted, but in Figures 42(a) to 42(c), this is illustrated in a simplified manner that does not express the shift in timing.

First, a case where the operation of the first special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on a first special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to move the upper lid member until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the solenoid 730 in the forward position, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of the round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means, and to displace the movable upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position and open the second specific winning opening 700a. The movable upper lid member 730 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the first special operation pattern, in the round game R of the first round, the state in which the moving floor member 740 is placed in the forward position is always continued, so as described above with reference to FIG. In the process of passing through the second specific prize opening 700a, a number of balls larger than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 is transferred to the storage plate part 715 side. It can be flowed down towards. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause the ball to pass through the opening 751.

When the first round game R ends, the timer means drives and controls the solenoid 763 to hold the movable upper lid member 730 in the forward position until the first inter-round interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) has elapsed, After the first inter-round interval time Int1 has elapsed, the second round round game R is started.

The first interval time Int1 between rounds should be set to a time sufficient for the ball that passed the front side of the movable top cover member 730 immediately before the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the forward position to pass the front side of the movable floor member 740, and in this embodiment is set to approximately 2 seconds.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) and the specific winning hole 65a is opened. Then, in the round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls), the specific winning hole 65a is closed, and the second round round game R ends.

Thereafter, the third round to maximum 15th round round games R are repeated with the first inter-round interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the specific winning opening 65a is opened and closed.

When the final round R of play ends, the timer means keeps the specific winning port 65a closed until the first interval time Int1 between rounds and the ending time ED (e.g., 11 seconds) have elapsed, and the big win game ends with the passage of that time.

Next, a case where the operation of the second special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as will be described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on a second special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, when the special symbol variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 causes the timer means (not shown) to move the upper lid member until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed. The solenoid 763 is driven and controlled so as to hold the solenoid 730 in the forward position, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of the round game R is started.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means, and to displace the movable upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position and open the second specific winning opening 700a. The movable upper lid member 730 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or the specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) has passed. When the winning (winning) is satisfied, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper lid member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning opening 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the second special operation pattern, in the round game R of the first round, the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retreat position and the movable floor member 740 is placed in the forward position, and the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position. The state in which the movable floor member 740 is disposed and the movable floor member 740 is disposed in the retracted position is switched approximately every second.

In other words, the ball can be guided to the second specific winning port 700a side, and the ball can be stored in the position between the storage plate portion 715, and the guidance of the ball to the second specific winning port 700a side is restricted. At the same time, the state in which the balls stored in the position between the storage plate portions 715 are discharged is switched approximately every second.

In this embodiment, the discharge of balls from the position between the storage plate parts 715 is completed in approximately 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the moving floor member 740 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 1 second, a maximum of 5 balls can flow down the front side of the moving floor member 740 from the position between the storage plate parts 715. Also, considering the ball launch interval allowed for the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the number of balls passing the front side of the moving upper cover member 730 while the moving upper cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 1 second is at most about 3 balls.

Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. 39, in the process of passing a prescribed number of balls to the second specific winning opening 700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gap between the storage plate parts 715 can be discharged. be done. In addition, the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plate parts 715 is greater than the number of balls that can be guided to the gap between the storage plate parts 715 per unit time (about 1 second). , it is possible to configure a state in which more balls are stored in the gaps between the storage plate parts 715 than the maximum number of balls (four in this embodiment) that can be stored in the gaps between the storage plate parts 715. Have difficulty. Therefore, it is difficult to cause the ball to pass through the opening 751.

On the other hand, since the opening 751 is not apparently closed, there is a possibility that a ball may enter the opening 751 on rare occasions due to irregular falling patterns of the ball, inclination when the pachinko machine 10 is installed, etc. Since the player can be made to think that there may be a prize, the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700 can be improved.

Note that the control after the first round of play R is completed is the same as when operating with the first special operation pattern, so a description will be omitted.

Next, a case where the operation of the third special operation pattern is executed will be described. In this embodiment, as described later, a jackpot type is prepared in which the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 operate based on the third special operation pattern. When a jackpot of this jackpot type is determined, the MPU 201 drives and controls the solenoid 763 so that when the special pattern change display (pattern change performance) ends, the timer means (not shown) holds the movable upper cover member 730 in the forward position until a predetermined opening time OP1 (10 seconds) has elapsed, and after the opening time OP1 has elapsed, the first round of round play R is started.

That is, the solenoid 763 is driven to start measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) with the timer means, and to displace the movable upper lid member 730 from the forward position to the backward position and open the second specific winning opening 700a. The movable upper lid member 730 is controlled to operate for a long time.

Then, when the round end condition (the round play time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operating time T1) has elapsed or a specified number of pachinko balls (10 in this embodiment) have won) is met in the first round of the round game R, the solenoid 763 is driven and controlled to displace the movable upper cover member 730 to the forward position and close the second specific winning hole 700a, and the first round of the round game R ends.

In the third special operation pattern, in the first round round game R, the movable upper lid member 730 is maintained at the backward position and the movable floor member 740 is maintained at the forward position for about 1 second, and the movable upper lid member 730 is maintained at the forward position. , and a state in which the movable floor member 740 is maintained at the retreated position for about 0.2 seconds are alternately switched.

In other words, the state in which the ball can be guided to the second specific winning opening 700a side and the state where the ball can be stored in the position between the storage plate portion 715 is maintained for about 1 second, and the second specific winning opening 700a side A mode in which the guidance of the balls is restricted and the state in which the balls stored in the positions between the storage plate parts 715 are discharged is maintained for about 0.2 seconds is alternately repeated. According to this time setting, the state in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retreated position can be formed approximately 25 times at maximum in the first round of the round game.

In this embodiment, the discharge of a ball from a position between the storage plates 715 is completed in approximately 0.2 seconds per ball. Therefore, while the moving floor member 740 is positioned in the retracted position for approximately 0.2 seconds, a maximum of one ball can flow down the front side of the moving floor member 740 from a position between the storage plates 715. In addition, considering the ball launch interval permitted by the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second interval in this embodiment), the number of balls passing the front side of the moving upper cover member 730 while the moving upper cover member 730 is positioned in the retracted position for 1 second is at most about three.

Therefore, as described above with reference to Figure 39, in the process of passing a specified number of balls through the second specific winning port 700a, a state is created in which the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plate sections 715 can be discharged.

In addition, since the number of balls that can be discharged from the gap between the storage plates 715 per second unit time (approximately 0.2 seconds) is smaller than the number of balls that can be guided into the gap between the storage plates 715 per unit time (approximately 1 second), it is easier to create a state in which more balls than the maximum number of balls that can be stored in the gap between the storage plates 715 (four in this embodiment) are stored in the gap between the storage plates 715 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern. Therefore, it is easier to cause the balls to pass through the opening 751 than in the case described above for the second special operation pattern.

On the other hand, the balls stored in the gaps between the storage plates 715 are discharged at a rate of one each time the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are displaced (at approximately 1.2 second intervals). Therefore, depending on the frequency with which the balls pass in front of the movable top cover member 730 and the time interval, it is possible that the first round of play R will end without the ball passing through the opening 751.

According to the third special operation pattern in this embodiment, by increasing the frequency with which the ball passes the front side of the movable top cover member 730, the possibility of the ball passing through the opening 751 can be increased, so that the ball shooting mode in the first round of round play R can be easily made to be continuous shooting (a mode in which ball shooting is not stopped and balls are continuously shot at the ball shooting interval allowed by the pachinko machine 10 (0.6 second intervals in this embodiment)).

This makes it easier to prevent players from taking single shots (a technique in which the firing of balls is intentionally stopped and balls are fired one at a time with an interval of 0.6 seconds or more as a technical intervention to obtain benefits such as excess prize balls), thereby making it possible to standardize the benefits that players can obtain regardless of their level of experience.

Note that the control after the first round of play R is completed is the same as when operating with the first special operation pattern, so a description will be omitted.

The contents of ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of ROM 202 in main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 43(a), ROM 202 of main control device 110 stores at least a first win random number table 202a, a first win type selection table 202b, a second win random number table 202c, and a variation pattern selection table 202d as part of the fixed value data described above.

The first win random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first win random number counter, which is updated periodically (e.g., every 2 msec). If the value of the first win random number counter obtained based on the start winning matches any of the determination values specified in the first win random number table 202a, it is determined to be a jackpot with a special symbol.

The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the first winning type selection table 202b and the second winning random number table 202c will be described later.

Figure 43(b) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the first winning random number table 202a, Figure 43(c) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1, and Figure 43(d) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first winning random number counter C3 and the judgment value in the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2.

As shown in FIG. 43(b), the first winning random number table 202a is a table in which a special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 is set to determine whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a gaming ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b is a jackpot, and a special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 is set to determine whether or not the value of the first winning random number counter C3 obtained when a gaming ball enters the second winning slot 640 is a jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43(c), the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 determines a win in the special symbol 1 lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b. This is a table in which random numbers (judgment values) are set. In the special symbol 1 lottery, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, if it is determined that the obtained value of the first winning random number counter C3 is a value of "1 to 319", it is determined that the win is a loss.

On the other hand, the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2, as shown in FIG. This is a set table. In the special symbol 2 lottery, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that it is a jackpot. Further, it is determined whether the acquired value of the first winning random number counter C3 is "1 to 318", and if it is "1 to 318", it is determined that it is a small win. Otherwise, if it is determined that it is "319", it is determined that it is a failure.

In this way, the first winning random number counter C3 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 319. In this first winning random number counter C3, when the special symbol 1 is drawn based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64 or the third winning hole 64b, the random number that becomes the jackpot for the special symbol 1 is one, and the random number Since the total number of random numbers that will be a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 320, the probability that the special symbol 1 will be a jackpot is "1/320".

On the other hand, when the lottery for special pattern 2 is drawn based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640, the random number value that results in a jackpot for special pattern 2 is 1, and since the total number of random numbers that result in a jackpot is 1 out of a total of 320, the probability of a jackpot for special pattern 2 is 1/320. Also, since the total number of random numbers that result in a small jackpot is 318, the probability of a small jackpot for special pattern 2 is 318/320.

The above explanation of the special pattern 1 random number table 202a1 and the special pattern 2 random number table 202a2 corresponds to the low probability state in this embodiment. In the high probability state, the value of the acquired first random number counter C3 is changed so that if it is "1 to 9" in addition to "0", it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot with special pattern 1 or special pattern 2 in the high probability state is "1/32".

Figure 44(a) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the first win type counter C2 in the first win type selection table 202b and the jackpot type for special symbols, and Figure 44(b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the second win random number counter C4 in the second win random number table 202c and the win for normal symbols.

The first win type selection table 202b (see FIG. 44(a)) is a data table that stores judgment values for determining the jackpot type, and the judgment values of the first win type counter C2 are specified in correspondence with each jackpot type and the type of winning slot that triggered the selection of the special symbol. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is judged to be a jackpot, the value of the first win type counter C2 obtained based on the start winning is compared with the first win type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the first win type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when a jackpot is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (a lottery based on the ball entering the first prize opening 64 or the third prize opening 64b), the value of the first winning type counter C2 becomes "0". to 19'' is defined in association with jackpot A (see 202b1 in FIG. 44(a)).

When jackpot A is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the third operation pattern continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to not just a probability change, but a special probability change (a special symbol probability change accompanied by frequent small wins). Therefore, before winning the next jackpot, the player can place a ball into the special winning hole 65a opened by a small win, and can receive a payout of many prize balls.

Note that if the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the 15th round jackpot game (special game) is set to a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is changed to the first one. The state set in the operation pattern 2 continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

A situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round is a situation in which the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round after a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed without the ball being launched to the upper variable winning device 700 satisfactorily. It is assumed that the game has ended.

This situation may occur due to ball jamming in the ball launching unit 112a or in the game area. In contrast, in this embodiment, when a jackpot with a special symbol is determined, the jackpot game is controlled so that it does not start until the ball passes through the through gates 66 and 67, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the jackpot game starts without noticing the ball jam.

After a special jackpot is determined, the display on the third symbol display device 81 is preferably designed to prevent the player from being confused as to whether to aim at the through gates 66, 67 or the upper variable winning device 700. For example, immediately after a jackpot is determined, arrows pointing to the through gates 66, 67 and the upper variable winning device 700 may be displayed to encourage the player to aim, and after the jackpot game has started, the arrows pointing to the through gates 66, 67 may be removed, leaving only the arrow pointing to the upper variable winning device 700. This allows for a smooth game flow in which the ball passes through the through gates 66, 67 and then enters the upper variable winning device 700.

Furthermore, if the upper variable prize winning device 700 is in the closed state, the ball fired toward the upper variable prize winning device 700 will flow left and right along the slope of the movable upper lid member 730, flow through the gaming area 301, and enter the through gate. It will pass through 66 and 67.

The range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "20 to 49" is associated with and defined as jackpot B (see 202b2 in FIG. 44(a)).

In the case of jackpot B, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing 8 rounds of the jackpot game (special game) is a high probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the second operation pattern. The state set to continues until the next jackpot is won.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to the probability change. Therefore, the player cannot basically receive a large number of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the player must proceed with the game in order to win the next jackpot in a short time. .

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a will be set to the second operating pattern, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "50 to 99" is associated with the big winning type C (see 202b3 in FIG. 44(a)).

In the case of jackpot C, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set as the second special operation pattern, and it is difficult for the ball to pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. The game state after executing 4 rounds of jackpot games (special games) is a low probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the second operation pattern is the special symbol lottery 100 times. Continue until finished.

In this case, the gaming state corresponds to time saving. Therefore, the player cannot basically receive a large number of prize balls before winning the next jackpot, so the player must proceed with the game in order to win the next jackpot in a short time. .

In addition, because the operating pattern of the electric device 640a is the same as the game state after the big win B, it is not possible to determine whether the currently executing game state is a high probability state or a low probability state from the operating mode of the electric device 640a. Therefore, if the currently executing game state is not notified as to whether it is a high probability state or a low probability state, a game mode can be configured in which the player is forced to guess. On the other hand, it is also possible to notify as to whether the currently executing game state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In a jackpot based on the drawing of special pattern 1 (a drawing based on a ball entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b), there is a 20% chance of winning a 15-round jackpot, while there is a 50% chance of a 4-round jackpot, so you basically cannot expect to win a large number of prize balls. On the other hand, a 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than a 15-round jackpot game, so you can start shooting balls earlier in order to try to win a subsequent jackpot.

On the other hand, if a jackpot is awarded in the drawing of special pattern 2 (drawing based on the ball entering the second winning slot 640), the value of the first winning type counter C2 in the range of "0 to 29" is associated with jackpot a (see 202b4 in Figure 44(a)).

When jackpot a is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, just as in the case of jackpot A, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the third operation pattern (corresponding to a special probability change) continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

The range of the value of the first winning type counter C2 from "30 to 49" is associated with the big win b (see 202b5 in Figure 44 (a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after 15 rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operating pattern, and this state continues until 100 special symbol lottery draws are completed.

When a jackpot b is obtained, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round is set to the first special operation pattern, and the ball easily passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. When the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) is executed is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role 640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to a high probability state) continues until the next jackpot is obtained.

A jackpot c is defined in association with a range in which the value of the first winning type counter C2 is "50 to 99" (see 202b6 in FIG. 44(a)).

If the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after eight rounds of jackpot play (special play) will be set to a low probability state, and the operating pattern of the electric role 640a will be set to the second operating pattern, and this state will continue until 100 special symbol lottery draws have been completed.

When a jackpot c is hit, the operation pattern of the upper variable winning device 700 in the first round becomes the third special operation pattern, and depending on the manner in which the player shoots the ball, the ball may or may not pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

If the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after four rounds of jackpot play (special play) is set to a high probability state, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the second operation pattern (corresponding to a high probability state) continues until the next jackpot is won.

On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the opening 751 in the first round, the game state after executing the four rounds of the jackpot game (special game) will be a low probability state, and the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a will be the first one. The state set in the second operation pattern (corresponding to time saving) continues until the special symbol lottery is completed 100 times.

In either case, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is the same as the second operation pattern, so whether the currently executed gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state can be determined from the operation mode of the electric accessory 640a. cannot be determined. Therefore, it is possible to configure a game mode in which the player is made to predict whether the game state currently being executed is a high probability state or a low probability state without being informed.

On the other hand, it may be possible to notify whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state. In fact, whether the game state after the end of a jackpot game is a high probability state or a low probability state depends on whether the ball passes through the opening 751 in the first round, so in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment in which the player can see the opening 751, the player can often know whether the currently active game state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

Therefore, if you design a fluctuating effect for the third symbol on the premise that the player does not know whether the current gaming state is a high probability state or a low probability state, it is necessary to It is preferable to provide a device to make the portion 751 difficult to see or to draw the eye away from the opening portion 751.

For example, as a way to make the opening 751 difficult to see, the light intensity of the irradiation means that irradiates the upper variable winning device 700 with light may be reduced especially near the opening 751, or it may be made extremely strong near the opening 751 to create a dazzling effect. The visibility of the opening 751 itself may be reduced by It may be possible to lower the value of the target.

In the jackpot based on the lottery of special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second prize opening 640), there is a 30% probability of winning a 15-round jackpot, while a 50% probability of winning a 4-round jackpot. , Basically, you cannot expect a large amount of prize balls.

On the other hand, the possibility of winning a 15-round jackpot is set higher than when special symbol 1 is drawn. Therefore, compared to when special symbol 1 is drawn, when special symbol 2 is drawn, the expectation that a 15-round jackpot may be won can be increased.

The second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 44(b)) is a data table in which winning judgment values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 204" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 44(b)). Also, in the high probability state of normal symbols, "5 to 239" are stipulated as the judgment value for winning a normal symbol (see 202c2 in FIG. 44(b)).

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4, which is obtained based on the ball passing through the normal winning openings (through gates) 66 and 67, and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. Then, it is determined whether the normal symbol is a hit or not.

And, whether in the high probability state of the normal symbol or the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal symbol hits frequently. Therefore, a state can be created in which the electric accessory 640a operates frequently.

Next, we will explain the ending presentation in this embodiment. First, we will explain the upper tray 17 of the pachinko machine 10 and the group of operation buttons located near the upper tray 17.

Figure 45 is a top view of the front frame 14 and outer frame 11. In the front frame 14, the upper tray 17 for storing balls is formed in a roughly box-like shape with an open top that protrudes forward, and prize balls and loan balls are discharged into this upper tray 17. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is formed with a downward slope to the right when viewed from the front (see Figure 1), and this slope guides balls dropped into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see Figure 4).

A frame button 22 is also provided on the top surface of the upper tray 17. This frame button 22 is generally operated by the player, for example, to change the stage of the performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or to change the content of the Super Reach performance, but in this embodiment, it is used to execute a specific performance by operating it during a jackpot game (during a jackpot performance), and details will be described later.

Further, on the upper surface of the upper tray 17, a second ball rental operation section 40b having the same function as the above-mentioned ball rental operation section 40 is arranged. The second ball rental operation section 40b is provided with a second frequency display section 41b, a second ball rental button 42b, and a second return button 43b.

When bills, cards, etc. are inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) located to the side of the pachinko machine 10 and the second ball lending operation unit 40b is operated, balls are lent in accordance with the operation.

Specifically, the second number display section 41b is an area where the remaining balance information of the card, etc. is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up to display the remaining balance in numbers as the remaining balance information. The second ball lending button 42b is operated to obtain loan balls based on the information recorded on the card, etc. (recording medium), and loan balls are supplied to the upper tray 17 as long as there is a remaining balance on the card, etc. The second return button 43b is operated when requesting the return of a card, etc. inserted in the card unit.

In addition, in pachinko machines in which balls are directly dispensed from a ball dispensing device to the upper tray 17 without going through a card unit, i.e., in so-called cash machines, the second ball dispensing operation unit 40b is not necessary, but in this case, a decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation part of the second ball dispensing operation unit 40b to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines that use a card unit and cash machines.

Further, a ball removal operation section 44 is arranged on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 to the left of the second ball lending operation section 40b. By pushing and operating the ball removal operation part 44, the balls can be caused to flow down from the upper tray 17 toward the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 1), so the player can shoot all the balls stored in the upper tray 17. You can end the game at any time.

Further, a direction operation section 45 is disposed on the upper surface of the upper tray 17 to the right of the frame button 22. The direction operation section 45 has four operation sections that can be independently operated and are arranged in positions corresponding to the up, down, left, and right directions when viewed from above. When it is possible to make adjustments, adjust the light emission intensity of a display device such as the third symbol display device 81 or a light emitting means such as an LED, or switch the type of performance related to the game (for example, variable performance) in multiple ways. It is operated by a player or the like when switching between the two.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, Fig. 46(a) is a diagram showing the area division settings and effective line settings of the display screen for the variable performance, and Fig. 46(b) is a diagram showing an example of the actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of ten types of main symbols numbered from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of numbers "0" to "9" attached to the rear symbol made of a wooden box, among which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , a large number is added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, for the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8), attached designs imitating characters such as a plane, a furoshiki, and a helmet are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. Small even numbers are added in green to the lower right side of the attached symbol, and are displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 4) is a jackpot, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. The system is structured so that a jackpot occurs after the fluctuating display ends. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbols are not aligned.

For example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which the odd number "7" is added are aligned. In addition, in the case of "Jackpot B" or "Jackpot B" (see Figure 44), a fluctuating display in which the main symbols with odd numbers "1, 3, 5, 9" added except "7" are aligned. If it is "Jackpot C" or "Jackpot C" (see FIG. 44), a variable display is performed in which the main symbols to which even numbers "0, 2, 4, 6, 8" are added are aligned.

On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a variable display is performed in which the main symbols of the same number do not line up. Note that in this embodiment, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a continuous notice performance may be performed to suggest (predict) that there is a high possibility of a special symbol jackpot. In that case, when the variable display is performed, a so-called "chance eye" is always displayed, which is a combination of predetermined main symbols (for example, the combination of main symbols is "3", "4", and "1" in order from the left symbol row Z1 on the pay line L1).

As shown in FIG. 46(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, with the lower two-thirds being the main display area Dm where the third symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the other part being the main display area Dm. The upper one-third of the area is a sub-display area Ds that displays preview effects, characters, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3: left, middle, and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in each of the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the third symbols described above are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and a variable display is performed by periodically scrolling from top to bottom for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order.

In addition, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three rows, top, middle, and bottom, for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The middle section of this main display area Dm is set as the active line L1, and with each play, the third symbols are stopped and displayed on the active line L1 in the following order: left symbol column Z1 → right symbol column Z3 → center symbol column Z2. When the third symbols stop, if they line up on the active line L1 in a combination of jackpot symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a jackpot video is displayed as a jackpot.

On the other hand, the sub-display area Ds is elongated horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided equally in the left-right direction into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3. Of these, small area Ds1 is an area that displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have entered the first winning slot 64, the third winning slot 64b, or the second winning slot 640 but have not yet been changed, and small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas that display preview performance images.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 46(b), a total of nine main symbols of the third design are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a video (not shown) is displayed in the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely than usual to transition to a jackpot. In the small area Ds2 in the center, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action other than the predetermined action is performed, or another character appears, providing a preview performance.

If a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b while the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "straw hat" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

Similarly, if a ball enters the second winning slot 640 while the third pattern display device 81 (first pattern display device 37) is displaying a variable number of balls, the number of balls that have entered is reserved up to a maximum of four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37 and also in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. In the small area Ds1, one reserved ball number pattern (in this embodiment, a "star-shaped" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of reserved ball number patterns displayed. In other words, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is one, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is four. In addition, when no reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is zero, that is, that there are no reserved balls.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved balls when a ball enters the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b is displayed horizontally in the upper half of the small area Ds1 (see FIG. 46(b)), whereas the number of reserved balls when a ball enters the second winning slot 640 is displayed horizontally in the lower half of the small area Ds1.

In this embodiment, the balls entering the first winning slot 64 or the third winning slot 64b and the balls entering the second winning slot 640 are each configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to four times, and may be set to three or less, or five or more times (e.g., eight times). In addition, instead of displaying the reserved ball number pattern in the small area Ds1, the reserved ball number may be displayed as numbers in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the four divided areas may be displayed in different forms (e.g., colors or lighting patterns) according to the number of reserved balls. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four reserved lamps indicating the number of reserved balls, the number being the maximum number of reserved balls, and the number of reserved balls may be displayed according to the number of reserved lamps that are lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the jackpot performance performed on the third symbol display device 81 will be explained. FIG. 47(a) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the jackpot effect, FIG. 47(b) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect, and FIG. 47(c) is a schematic diagram for explaining an example of the flow of the ending effect. ), FIG. 47(d), and FIG. 47(e) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the ending display effect displayed in the ending effect that is part of the jackpot effect.

In the main control device 110, when a ball enters the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, or the third winning hole 64b (starting winning), a special symbol lottery is performed using this as a trigger, and then a special symbol lottery is performed. A variable display of a special symbol (first symbol) is executed in the first symbol display device 37. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 47(a), a variation pattern command and a stop type command are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and as a result, the third symbol display device 81 A variable display of the third symbol is performed in accordance with the variable display of 37.

When the third symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the high-speed variable display of the third symbol is started first, and then after a predetermined time (for example, 1 to 60 seconds) has passed, the display switches to a medium-speed variable display of the third symbol, and then to a low-speed variable display of the third symbol. If the special symbol lottery result is a jackpot, a stop display of the same numbered main symbol (third symbol) is displayed, the variable performance ends, and then the jackpot performance starts. On the other hand, if the special symbol lottery result is a miss, a stop display of the same numbered main symbol (third symbol) is displayed, the variable performance ends, and if there is a pending start winning, the next special symbol is drawn and the next variable performance starts.

As shown in FIG. 47(a), the big win effect is divided into three periods: a period during which a fanfare effect is performed, a period during which a round effect is performed, and a period during which an ending effect is performed.

The fanfare effect is intended to heighten the player's sense of anticipation by informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 is about to enter a special game state and that the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a, which is normally closed, will be repeatedly opened. The round effect is intended to inform the player of the number of rounds that will soon begin, encourage the player to fire balls toward the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a, and inform the player that a large number of prize balls will be paid out.

As shown in FIG. 47(b), in the ending presentation, an ending display presentation is executed to notify the player of the end of the special game state and to inform the player of the game value that will be granted to the player after the jackpot ends (the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol, whether or not a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out before the next jackpot is won, the time period for normal symbols, etc.).

In addition, depending on the circumstances, the ending performance may include a company name display that notifies the player of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10, and a card forget prevention display that suggests the player perform an operation to return cards (recording media, coins, etc.) that have a remaining balance when the game ends or when the player leaves the seat, but details will be provided later.

When a jackpot is generated on the third symbol display device 81, as shown in FIG. 47(a), first, a fanfare command is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 in time with the stopped display of the third symbol. As a result, on the third symbol display device 81, a fanfare effect is started following the variable effect.

Next, at the same time as the fanfare effect ends, the main control device 110 sends a round number command indicating the first round to the sound lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, following the fanfare effect, a round effect corresponding to the first round starts. In this embodiment, after the pachinko machine 10 transitions to the special game state, that state continues until the opening and closing of the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a is repeated a number of times according to the type of jackpot (up to 15 rounds, see FIG. 44(a)).

After the first round starts and the second specific winning hole 700a is opened, when a predetermined period of time (for example, until 30 seconds elapses or until 10 balls are won), the second specific winning hole 700a is opened. is closed and the first round ends. Then, the second round starts immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 42), and a round number command indicating the second round is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, a round presentation corresponding to the second round is started following a round presentation corresponding to the first round.

After the second round starts and the specific winning hole 65a is opened, when a predetermined time has elapsed (for example, 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won), the specific winning hole 65a closes and the second round ends. Then, immediately after the inter-round interval time Int1 (see FIG. 42), the third round begins, and a round number command indicating the third round is sent from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, following the round presentation corresponding to the second round, the round presentation corresponding to the third round begins.

When the third round starts, opening/closing control of the specific winning a prize opening 65a is performed as in the case of the second round. After that, every time a new round is started, a round number command indicating the new round number is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp control device 113, and the opening/closing control of the specific winning opening 65a is performed. It will be done. As a result, each round effect from the first round to the final round (maximum 15 rounds) is executed in order.

Then, an ending command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the timing when the opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a of the final round is completed. As a result, the ending effect is started on the third symbol display device 81. As mentioned above, in the ending performance, the end of the special gaming state is notified to the player, and in the ending display performance, the gaming value given to the player after the end of the jackpot (the magnitude of the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the next jackpot) The player is informed of whether or not he can expect to pay out a large amount of prize balls by the time he obtains the ball, and whether or not he can expect to pay out a large amount of prize balls by the time he obtains the ball, and for a short period of time when it is a normal symbol.

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(c), a prize ball display 801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an identification display 802 showing the content "100 chances" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, a reliability display 803 showing the content "Don't give up yet" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

The time display 811 serves to notify the user of the end of the ending performance (including the case where only the ending display performance is performed), and the right edge moves from the appropriate timing towards the end position 812, but details will be given later.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot C" (see Figure 44), or when the result of the drawing is "jackpot c" and the ball does not pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 (see Figure 37) during the jackpot game. The identification display 802 indicates that the electric device 640a will continue to be controlled to operate in the second operating pattern from the end of the jackpot until 100 special symbol drawings have been completed, and the probability of a jackpot with a special symbol is low (1 in 320 in this embodiment).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 allows the player to recognize that there is a small possibility of hitting the jackpot next time.

In other words, by visually checking the ending display effect on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of anticipation for the next big win, which motivates the player to continue playing.

In addition, in the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(d), a prize ball display 801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an identification display 802 showing the content "Probability fluctuation entry" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device 81. In addition, a reliability display 803 showing the content "High expectation" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the result of the drawing is "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (see Figure 44). The identification display 802 indicates that from the end of the jackpot until the next jackpot for the special symbol, the electric device 640a will continue to be controlled to operate in the second operating pattern, and the probability of a jackpot for the special symbol is high (1 in 32 in this embodiment).

In addition, the identification display 802, reliability display 803, and time display 811 on this screen indicate that the lottery result is "Jackpot C" and the ball passed through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 (see FIG. 37) during the jackpot game. In that case, the prize ball display 801 is different from the numerical value shown in FIG. 47(d), and is set to "600" shown in FIG. 47(c).

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 allows the player to know that he or she can expect to win the jackpot next time.

That is, by visually recognizing the ending display performance on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the player can have a sense of expectation of the next jackpot, and therefore can be motivated to continue playing the game.

Note that the contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to these, and various embodiments are exemplified. For example, the identification display 802 may display "Next jackpot confirmed", and the reliability display 803 may display "Preparing for further prize balls".

In the ending display performance, for example, as shown in FIG. 47(e), a prize ball display 801 showing the number of prize balls paid out in the big win game is displayed at a position slightly above the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and an identification display 802 showing the content "Rush Start" is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the third pattern display device 81. Also, a reliability display 803 showing the content "Super High Expectations" is displayed above the identification display 802, and a time display 811, which will be described later, is displayed below the identification display 802.

This screen is displayed when a special symbol is drawn and the lottery result is "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" (see Figure 44). Until the next jackpot occurs, the state in which the operation of the electric accessory 640a is controlled by the third operation pattern continues, and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high (1/32 in this embodiment). means.

By configuring the display in this way, even if the player cannot understand the meaning of the identification display 802, the reliability display 803 allows the player to recognize that in addition to expecting the next big win, he or she can also win even more profit.

In other words, by visually viewing the ending display presentation on the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the player can be made to feel a sense of anticipation for the next big win, as well as a sense of anticipation for further profits (for example, the possibility of an increase in prize balls through winning small wins before the next big win is achieved), which can motivate the player to continue playing.

In this way, the identification display 802 is configured to change the display according to the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and by visually recognizing the ending display performance, the player can obtain the result after the end of the jackpot game. You can make profit predictions.

The contents of the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 are not limited to the above, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of "rush entry", it may be "super probability change entry", "small win rush entry", or a unique name such as "super advantageous mode" may be given to the display.

Next, the company name display performance and the card forgetting prevention display performance in the ending performance will be explained. In the ending performance in the example shown in FIG. 47(b), a company name display command is sent from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in time with the ending display performance ending. As a result, in the third pattern display device 81, the company name display performance starts following the ending display performance.

Next, a card forgetting prevention display command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113 at the timing when the company name display effect ends. As a result, in the third symbol display device 81, the card forgetting prevention display effect is started following the company name display effect.

The ending effect ends when the card forgetting prevention display effect ends. After the ending performance ends, if there is a pending starting prize, the next special symbol will be drawn and the next variable performance will start. On the other hand, if there is no pending starting prize (if the number of pending balls is 0), a variable standby screen is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

FIG. 48(a) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a company name display effect displayed in the ending effect, and FIG. 48(b) is a diagram illustrating a display screen of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the ending display effect is followed by a company name display effect, and the company name display effect is followed by a card forgetting prevention display effect (see FIG. 47(b)). explain.

In the example shown in Figures 48(a) and 48(b), the execution time of the ending performance is divided equally among the ending display performance, the company name display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the execution time of the ending performance is set to 15 seconds. In this case, the ending display performance, the company name display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance are each assigned 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), in the company name display performance, the name of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 10 (Company A) is displayed as a specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81.

Also, as shown in FIG. 48(b), when the display switches to the anti-forgetting-of-card display effect, a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's insertion port is displayed as a specific display 810 near the center of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a comment saying "Please be careful not to forget to take your card" is displayed below it.

In the ending performance in the example shown in Figures 48(a) and 48(b), after the ending display performance, which runs for 5 seconds, ends, the company name display performance is executed for 5 seconds, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed for 5 seconds, so there is a gap of 10 seconds from the end of the ending display performance to the start of the next variable performance. In this embodiment, it is designed to make effective use of that free time.

As shown in Figures 48(a) and 48(b), during the execution of the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, a time display 811 whose right end moves to the right as time passes is displayed near the bottom edge of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, a frame button display 813 that shows a frame button 22 in a schematic manner is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen of the third pattern display device 81, and a scale display 814 is displayed to the right of the frame button display 813, with scales arranged vertically to show the current light emission intensity (the light emission intensity of the light emitting means such as the LEDs (e.g., the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamps 34 (see Figure 1)) arranged in the pachinko machine 10, or the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device 81) so that the player can understand the setting value (indicating that the setting value is the second highest out of five levels), and a warning comment display 815 with the content "Be careful of long-term light" is displayed below the frame button display 813 and the scale display 814.

In this embodiment, during the ending performance, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the pressing operation of the frame button 22 is controlled to be valid. That is, during the ending performance, when the frame button display 813 is not displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation of the frame button 22 is invalidated.

On the screen of the third pattern display device 81, the frame button display 813 and scale display 814 are hidden halfway through the card forgetting prevention display performance (at the point when 4 seconds remain), but the specific display 810, time display 811, and warning comment display 815 continue to be displayed until the card forgetting prevention display performance ends.

Here, even if the game ball enters the first winning hole 64, the second winning hole 640, or the third winning hole 64b, the fluctuation of the special symbols is stopped while the ending effect is being executed, so the special symbols are suspended. The number of pitches does not decrease. Therefore, even if the ball enters the first winning hole 64, second winning hole 640, or third winning hole 64b when the number of reserved balls for special symbols is full, the player cannot receive the special symbol lottery. . On the other hand, after the ending performance ends, the special symbols will begin to change, so the number of reserved balls for the special symbol will decrease from full, and by placing the ball into the starting hole, the player can receive the special symbol. The possibility of being able to receive a drawing of a design increases.

Further, during the jackpot game including the ending performance, the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a is set to the normal operation pattern. In this embodiment, since the first operation pattern (see FIG. 31(a)) is used, the game ball is unlikely to be picked up by the slide member 450. On the other hand, once the ending performance is finished, the electric accessory 640a is driven in an operation pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot, so the game ball is more likely to be picked up by the slide member 450, so the game ball can win the second prize. It becomes easier for the ball to enter the opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b (see FIG. 2).

For these reasons, it is easy for players to think that after a round game ends, it would be less of a loss to start firing the ball after the ending effect ends, but in conventional gaming machines, when the ending effect ends It was difficult to understand. In other words, since the game result is shown in the ending display effect, it is easy for the player to think that the variable effect will start immediately, and the ball will be fired as soon as the screen changes from the ending display effect, but in reality, the company name is displayed. There may be times when there is an ending effect left for the effect or card forget prevention display effect, and by the time the player notices this, the ball has already been fired, and the player may waste several balls by firing during the ending effect. You may feel dissatisfied if you do so.

In contrast, in this embodiment, the movement of the time display 811 is set so that the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 at the same time as the ending performance ends. In other words, the right end of the time display 811 moves to the right over time, and the variable performance begins after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, making it easier to understand the length of the ending performance and when it will end, and making it easier to avoid a situation where a ball is fired during the ending performance.

Although the movement mode of the time display 811 is not limited in any way, in this embodiment, the display mode of the time display 811 and the end position 812 is the length between the left end of the time display 811 and the end position 812. The design is based on the length of 10 seconds. If it is 10 seconds or more until the end of the ending performance when the ending performance starts, the right end of the time display 811 remains stopped or is extremely slow until about 10 seconds until the end of the ending performance. The right end of the time display 811 is set to move at a constant speed, and the right end of the time display 811 is set to start moving at a constant speed to the right as time passes, at a timing of about 10 seconds until the end of the ending performance.

On the other hand, if there are less than 10 seconds until the end of the ending effect when the ending effect starts, the right end of the time display 811 immediately starts moving. In this case, the moving speed of the time display 811 is set as the speed at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 at the same time as the end of the ending effect (that is, if it is 5 seconds until the end of the ending effect) , the speed is set at twice the speed when moving to the terminal position 812 over 10 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 48(a) and 48(b), the characters "GO" indicating the start of launching the game ball are always displayed above the terminal position 812. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 or several seconds before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 (for example, when the fired ball reaches the through gates 66 and 67 The word "GO" may be displayed an average number of seconds before the start. In this case, the characters "GO" may be displayed from a hidden state, or "GO" may be displayed from a semi-transparent state to a materialized state.

In this case, if the player starts shooting the ball when the "GO" character appears, it becomes easier to prevent the ball from passing through the through gates 66 and 67 before the ending performance ends, and the player no longer needs to follow the moving time display 811 with his or her eyes. This reduces the burden on the player when playing the game.

Note that the manner in which the letters "GO" are displayed is not limited in any way. For example, it may be replaced with a comment such as "Start launching the ball" or "Start launching when the bar reaches". Furthermore, the size of the letters "GO" does not always need to be the same. For example, the character "GO" may gradually become larger as the right end of the time display 811 moves. In this case, the maximum size of the letters "GO" is displayed semitransparently, and the timing when the gradually increasing size of the letters "GO" matches the maximum size shown semitransparently is shown. , the right end of the time display 811 may be controlled to match the timing at which it reaches the terminal position 812.

In the state shown in Figure 48, if the player does not operate the frame button 22, after the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 during the card forgetting prevention display performance shown in Figure 48 (b), the screen of the third pattern display device 81 will switch to the screen shown in Figure 46 (b), and the variable performance will begin.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the screen of the third symbol display device 81, it generally indicates that the frame button 22 can be operated. The switching of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the player operates the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 48 will be described.

Figure 49(a) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen for the card forgetting prevention display effect that is displayed during the ending effect, and Figure 49(b) is a diagram illustrating an example of the display screen immediately after the ending effect has ended.

Figure 49 (a) illustrates the screen of the third pattern display device 81 that is switched when the player operates the frame button 22 (see Figure 45) in the state shown in Figure 48 (b) (state in which the frame button display 813 is displayed).

Even when the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the state shown in FIG. 49(a) by operating the frame button 22, the right end of the time display 811 is moves to the right as time passes, and after the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 switches to the screen shown in FIG. 49(b), and the variable effect is started.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the player operates the frame button 22, the specific display 810, which is a still image (or video) showing the card being returned from the card unit's slot and the comment "Please be careful not to forget to take your card", is moved to the upper left corner of the screen of the third pattern display device 81 and the display mode is reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the distinctiveness of the specific display 810, making it easier to direct the player's attention to parts other than the specific display 810.

A direction operation section display 816 schematically showing the direction operation section 45 is displayed near the center of the screen, and on the left side of the direction operation section display 816, scales are arranged vertically and indicate the current setting value of the light emission intensity. A vertical scale display 817 is displayed so that the player can understand it (it is displayed as the second set value from the top out of five levels), and below the direction operation unit display 816, scales are displayed on the left and right. A horizontal scale display 818 is displayed that displays the current volume setting values in a line so that the player can understand them (displays the third setting value from the top (right) out of five levels). .

Further, below the caution comment display 815, a second caution comment display 819 with the content "Please be careful with long-term sound" is displayed. The caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are displayed in correspondence with the types of objects for which the player can check the setting values.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the vertical scale display 817 can be changed by operating the up and down buttons of the directional operation unit 45. In other words, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand how to operate.

As shown in FIG. 49(a), when the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed on the display screen, the setting value of the horizontal scale display 818 can be changed by operating the left and right buttons of the directional operation unit 45. In other words, the direction in which the scales are lined up corresponds to the direction of the button operated to change the setting value of the scale, allowing the player to easily understand how to operate.

Further, when the direction operation section display 816 is not displayed on the display screen, the operation of the direction operation section 45 is controlled to be invalid. Thereby, the player can recognize whether the current operation of the direction operation section 45 is valid or invalid simply by checking the presence or absence of the direction operation section display 816.

A display resembling a light bulb is provided near the end of the vertical scale display 817, allowing the player to easily understand that the vertical scale display 817 can be used to set the light emission intensity (the light emission intensity of light-emitting means such as LEDs (e.g., the illumination units 29-33 and the display lamp 34 (see FIG. 1)) arranged in the pachinko machine 10, and the brightness of the screen of the third pattern display device 81). In addition, a display resembling musical notes is provided near the end of the horizontal scale display 818, allowing the player to easily understand that the horizontal scale display 818 can be used to set the volume.

The state shown in FIG. 49(b) differs from the state shown in FIG. 46(b), which is similar to the state in which the special symbol variation effect is started, in that the direction operation section display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display are 818 is arranged in the small area Ds3 in a reduced state.

Therefore, even after the ending effect has ended and the variable effect has been executed, the direction control display 816 will continue to be displayed for a while, allowing you to change the light emission intensity setting or change the volume setting. can do.

In this embodiment, the directional control display 816 continues to be displayed during the high-speed change display of the first change performance that begins after the ending performance ends, and is hidden after the high-speed change display of that change performance ends.

As a result, at least at the timing when the symbols are displayed in a stopped state and the variable presentation ends, the directional operation unit display 816 is hidden and the operation of the directional operation unit 45 is invalidated, so that the player does not operate the directional operation unit 45, and it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is concentrating on operating the directional operation unit 45 and misses the stopped display of the symbols.

During high-speed fluctuations, there will be spaces in the reserved balls, so the player will start firing balls to enter the lottery for the special symbol, but since the directional control unit 45 can be operated with one hand, it is possible to avoid impeding the firing of the balls. While the player has fired several balls (after going through the firing state), the directional control unit display 816 is hidden.

From the second variable performance that is started after the end of the ending performance, the direction operation unit display 816 is hidden. That is, the screen of the third symbol display device 81 is brought into a state as shown in FIG. 46(b), and a variable effect is executed.

Figure 50 is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence between the ending effects and the jackpot type in the special pattern. As shown in Figure 50, in this embodiment, the ending display effect is executed regardless of the jackpot type (indicated by a circle in Figure 50).

In addition, the company name display effect is executed when the game state to be entered after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, so that players who see the company name display effect can have a sense of anticipation for the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In this embodiment, the company name display effect is executed in the ending effect of "Jackpot A" or "Jackpot A" which is a jackpot type that enters a special probability variable state after the end of the jackpot game (indicated by ○ in FIG. 50), and other The company name display effect is not executed in the ending effect of the jackpot game of the jackpot type (indicated by x in FIG. 50).

The conditions for executing the company name display effect correspond to the game state that is entered after the end of a jackpot game, and do not correspond to the number of payouts in the jackpot game. In other words, even if the number of payouts in the jackpot game is, for example, 0, the company name display effect will be executed.

In this embodiment, the number of balls paid out in a jackpot game of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is the maximum number of balls out of all jackpot types, so when the company name display effect is executed, the player can feel that a jackpot game with the maximum number of balls paid out has been executed.

The card forget prevention display effect is executed when the number of balls paid out in a jackpot game is equal to or greater than the number of balls for eight rounds (a specified number or more), allowing players who see the card forget prevention display effect to feel the joy of winning many prize balls.

In this embodiment, a card forget prevention display effect is executed in the ending effects of the 15-round jackpot type "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" and the 8-round jackpot type "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" (indicated by a circle in Figure 50), but a card forget prevention display effect is not executed in the ending effects of jackpot games of other jackpot types (indicated by an x in Figure 50).

In this way, in this embodiment, the content of the ending performance differs depending on the type of jackpot. The ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance each last for 5 seconds, so the execution time of the ending performance differs depending on the different combinations.

For example, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot A" or "jackpot a" is performed over 15 seconds, the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot B" or "jackpot b" is performed over 10 seconds, and the ending performance in a jackpot game with a jackpot type of "jackpot C" or "jackpot c" is performed over 5 seconds.

Due to these circumstances, it may be difficult for the player to predict the end of the ending performance, leading to confusion about the timing of the ball's release; however, in this embodiment, the end of the ending performance can be ascertained from the time display 811 (see FIG. 48).

In other words, even if the duration of the ending performance is different, the speed at which the right end of the time display 811 moves (or the starting point of the movement of the time display 811 is changed) is changed so that the ending performance ends when the time display 811 reaches the end position 812, and by visually checking the time display 811, the player will not be confused about the timing of firing the ball. This reduces the burden on the player when playing the game.

Note that the execution time of the ending performance is specified according to the type of jackpot and remains constant, but the content during the ending performance can change. For example, even if the execution time of the ending performance is 15 seconds, if certain conditions are met (or randomly), the ending display performance can be set to 10 seconds, and the company name display performance and the card forget prevention display performance can be executed in the remaining 5 seconds. In particular, when the first jackpot is won, the player's interest can be increased by setting the ending display performance to be longer.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52. In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the bottom surface part 431a as a part that supports the ball flowing down the central channel 431 in the winning unit 400 is configured as a fixed plate part, but in the winning unit 2400 of the second embodiment In this case, the shape of the portion that supports the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is configured to change. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

51 and 52 are cross-sectional views of the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment taken along the line XVIII-XVIII in FIG. 15(c). In FIG. 51, the non-excited state (forward closed state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated, and in FIG. 52, the excited state (retracted open state) of the electric accessory 640a is illustrated.

The electric device 640a includes the same tilting member 470 as in the first embodiment, and a sliding member 2450 that is partially different in shape from the sliding member 450 in the first embodiment. The sliding member 2450 only has a partially different shape, and its operating mode is the same as that of the sliding member 450 in the first embodiment.

The difference between the slide member 2450 and the slide member 450 in the first embodiment will be explained. The slide member 2450 includes a lower protrusion 2456 that protrudes downward from the front end of the central fixing part 454 and a front protrusion 2457 that protrudes forward from the front end of the central fixing part 454 .

In the winning unit 400 in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it was possible to assemble the slide member 450 by covering it from above, in the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment, the front protruding portion 2457 has a shape that projects further forward than the rear end of the rear wall portion 434. Therefore, the assembly method cannot be used as is.

In contrast, in this embodiment, a continuous notch 2431d is formed in the bottom surface portion 431a, the locking plate portion 431b, and the rear wall portion 434 with a left-right width (in this embodiment, a left-right width of about 3 mm) centered on the cross section shown in Figure 51. That is, the notch 2431d is formed as an opening that cuts from the upper end to the lower end of the rear wall portion 434 and continues from that position to a midpoint on the bottom surface portion 431a and to a midpoint on the locking plate portion 431b.

The lateral width of the notch 2431d is formed to be slightly longer than the lateral width of the front protrusion 2457, so that in the arrangement shown in FIG. 52, the arrangement of the front protrusion 2457 of the slide member 2450 and the arrangement of the notch 2431d of the middle member 2430 can be overlapped.

Therefore, the front protrusion 2457 of the slide member 2450 can pass through the middle member 2430 in the vertical direction through the notch 2431d, so it is possible to assemble the slide member 2450 by covering the middle member 2430 from above. There is.

The lower protrusion 2456 is a part that protrudes to a position where it can abut against the rear surface of the locking plate portion 431b outside the notch 2431d, and is used to determine the front movement end of the slide member 2450.

In the first embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member 450 was determined at the position where the front end of the central fixing part 454 abutted against the rear surface of the locking plate part 431b (see FIG. 18), but in the second embodiment, the front movement end of the slide member 2450 is determined at the position where the front surface of the lower protrusion part 2456, which protrudes directly downward from the front end of the central fixing part 454, abuts against the rear surface of the locking plate part 431b, so that the front movement end position of the slide member 2450 in the second embodiment and the front movement end position of the slide member 450 in the first embodiment are the same position.

The front protrusion 2457 has a pair of ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b that protrude upward. The ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are arranged side by side in the front and rear at left and right positions that allow them to enter the notch 2431d, and the front ball interference protrusion 2458a is formed so that its upper end is lower than the rear ball interference protrusion 2458b.

The front-to-rear inclination angle of the straight line passing through the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458b and the upper end position of the ball interference protrusion 2458a is formed to be the same as the front-to-rear inclination angle of the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a of the middle member 2430.

The protrusion length of the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b is such that when the slide member 2450 is placed in the forward position, it protrudes upward by 1 to 2 mm from the upper surface of the bottom surface portion 431a ( (See Figure 51). As a result, when the slide member 2450 is placed in the retracted position, the upper end positions of the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b are cut inside 2431d (the upper and lower sides of the middle member 2430 (inside the wall thickness dimension in the direction).

As a result, when the slide member 2450 is placed in the forward position, the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b can be brought into contact with the balls flowing down the central channel 2431, while the slide member 2450 is When placed in the retracted position, the ball flowing down the central channel 2431 can be configured so as not to come into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b.

With the configuration described in Figures 51 and 52, in addition to the action produced by the winning unit 400 described in the first embodiment, the winning unit 2400 in the second embodiment can change the flow speed of the balls flowing down the central flow path 2431 depending on the circumstances.

For example, when the slide member 2450 is in an excited state (retracted position), the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b retract to the outside of the central flow path 2431, so that the ball flowing down the central flow path 2431 is no longer decelerated by contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b.

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excitation state (retracted position), the ball riding on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7) , is pushed backward by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and is accelerated in the downstream direction (direction of arrow B).

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the entire area of the ball's downward flow path constituted by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central channel 2431 , the velocity of the ball tends to increase.

Further, for example, when the slide member 2450 is in the de-energized state (advanced position), the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom part 431a toward the center flow path 2431, so that the center flow path The ball flowing down 2431 comes into contact with the ball interference protrusions 2458a and 2458b and is decelerated. As a result, the deceleration effect of the ball flowing down in the central channel 2431 is more likely to occur compared to when the slide member 2450 is in the excited state (retracted position), and the flow mode of the ball can be stabilized (rectified). ).

In addition, as described above in the first embodiment, even if a ball is placed on the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 (see FIG. 7) when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (forward position), the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 is displaced in a direction that creates a gap between the ball (a direction that does not push the ball, the direction of arrow F), so that the change in the flow speed of the ball is suppressed (it is not accelerated).

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the non-excited state (advanced position), the entire area of the ball's downward flow path constituted by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central channel 2431 In this case, the velocity of the ball tends to slow down.

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the slide member 2450 is changed to an excited state (retracted position), the action of increasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431, whereas when the slide member 2450 is changed to a non-excited state (advance position), the action of decreasing the ball's flow speed occurs throughout the entire ball flow path formed by the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the central flow path 2431.

Therefore, when the slide member 2450 changes to the de-energized state (forward position) and when the slide member 2450 changes to the excited state (retracted position), the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 and the center The difference in time (difference in length) required for the ball to pass through the downstream path formed by the flow path 2431 can be increased.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 53. In the first embodiment, the internal flow path in the winning unit 400 is formed as a flow path extending forward and backward, but in the winning unit 3400 of the third embodiment, the internal flow path is formed as a flow path extending left and right. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

53(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit 3400 in the third embodiment, and FIG. 53(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning unit 3400b as another example of the winning unit 3400. be. In addition, in FIG. 53, the narrow diameter portion of the nail KG1 that is driven into the base plate 60 is illustrated by a solid line, and the bulging portion at the front end portion is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The winning unit 3400 is arranged, for example, on the downstream side of the through gate 67 in the right side gaming area 303 (see FIG. 2), and is configured as a unit that guides the ball placed in the gaming area 301.

The winning unit 3400 includes a flow path forming section 3410 formed from a plate-shaped member disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), It is slid forward and backward so that the state changes between a protruding state in which it is placed inward (corresponding to the forward position) and a retracted state in which it is retracted to the outside of the play area (corresponding to the retreating position). A slide member 3420.

The slide member 3420 is arranged separately as a first slide member 3421 near the ball inlet 3411 of the flow path configuration section 3410 and a second slide member 3422 near the ball outlet 3412, and these are integrally configured on the back side so that they slide and displace integrally.

That is, the second slide member 3422 goes into the extended state in synchronization with the first sliding member 3421 into the extended state, and the second slide member 3422 goes into the retracted state in synchronization with the first slide member 3421 into the retracted state. The slide member 3420 is integrally constructed so that.

We will explain the variations in the flow patterns of balls that enter the winning unit 3400. When the ball that entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, if the first slide member 3421 is in a retracted state, or if the first slide member 3421 is in a protruding state but is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be guided to the right (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), the ball is discharged from the mid-way discharge section 3413 to the outside (outside the left side) of the flow path configuration section 3410. In this embodiment, the ball that passes through the mid-way discharge section 3413 is configured to flow down by avoiding the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b.

On the other hand, when the ball that has entered through the ball inlet 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, if the first slide member 3421 maintains the protruding state for a length of time (e.g., 0.2 seconds) sufficient to guide the ball, the ball is guided inside the flow path configuration section 3410.

The subsequent downward flow path of the ball changes depending on whether the second slide member 3422 is in a protruding state or in a retracted state at the timing when the ball guided inside the flow path forming part 3410 reaches the ball outlet 3412. do.

That is, if the second sliding member 3422 is in the protruding state, the ball passes directly above the second winning opening 640 while rolling on the upper surface of the second sliding member 3422, and goes to the third winning opening 64b side. Flow down. In addition, in this embodiment, a detection sensor SE1 capable of detecting passage of a ball is arranged upstream of the third winning opening 64b, and this detection sensor SE1 is the detection sensor 442 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 7). It works in the same way.

That is, when the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passing opening SE1a, the first winning opening switch is turned on, and due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (Fig. 4)), the special symbol 1 is drawn by lottery.

On the other hand, if the second slide member 3422 is in a retracted state, the ball flows down toward the second winning opening 640. In this embodiment, a detection sensor SE2 capable of detecting the passage of the ball is disposed upstream of the second winning opening 640, and this detection sensor SE2 functions in the same way as the detection sensor 462 in the first embodiment (see FIG. 11).

That is, when the detection sensor SE2 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passing opening SE2a, the second winning opening switch is turned on, and due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (Fig. 4)), the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery.

The second winning opening 640 is located directly below the second slide member 3422, and is positioned so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, but the distance between the detection sensor SE2 and the nail KG1 directly above it, and the distance between the detection sensor SE2 on the opposite side (right side) and the flow path configuration part 3410 are designed to be longer than the diameter of the ball. In other words, the second slide member 3422 is in a retracted state, and some of the balls that flow down towards the second winning opening 640 side are configured to be able to flow down away from the second winning opening 640.

Although not shown in the figure, a variable winning device 65 that opens and closes during small win play is disposed below the winning unit 3400, so that balls that flow below the winning unit 3400 (balls that do not enter either the second winning port 640 or the third winning port 64b and deviate, for example balls that flow toward the midway discharge section 3413) can be made to enter the specific winning port 65a that is opened during small win play.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), the intermediate discharge section 3413 may be omitted and the general winning opening 63 may be located directly below the first slide member 3421. In this case, when the ball that has entered through the ball entrance 3411 reaches a position where it interferes with the first slide member 3421, if the first slide member 3421 is in a retracted state, or if the first slide member 3421 is in a protruding state but is switched to the retracted state in an extremely short time (shorter than the time it takes for the ball to be guided to the right (e.g., 0.2 seconds)), the ball will enter the general winning opening 63.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(b), a detection sensor SE3 capable of detecting the passage of a ball is disposed upstream of the general winning opening 63, and this detection sensor SE3 functions in the same manner as the detection sensor 435 (see FIG. 11) in the first embodiment. In other words, when the detection sensor SE3 detects that a ball has passed through the ball passage opening SE3a, neither the drawing of the special symbol nor the drawing of the normal symbol is performed, and the payout of the prize balls is performed.

As shown in FIG. 53(b), the winning ports may be arranged close to each other so that the balls ejected from the ball outlet 3412 to the left do not spill. In addition, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(b), by arranging the third prize opening 64b close to the ball outlet 3412, the third winning opening 64b is arranged in the vicinity of the ball outlet 3412, so that the third winning opening 64b is arranged in the vicinity of the ball outlet 3412. ) The ball guided by the ball is surely entered into the third winning hole 64b.

As a result, compared to the embodiment shown in FIG. 53(a), the ball may collide with the nail KG1 and change its flowing path, causing the ball to deviate from the third prize opening 64b. It is possible to avoid a situation in which a prize ball cannot be obtained due to a ball guided outside (to the left) of the flow path forming portion 3410 in the protruding state.

Next, the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 54. In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 has an electric device 640a that is composed of multiple components spaced apart, and the interval between the timing when the upstream component hits the ball and the timing when the downstream component hits the ball is extended. However, in the winning unit 4400 of the fourth embodiment, the electric device 4420 is composed of a single component. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIGS. 54(a) and 54(b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing a winning unit 4400 in the fourth embodiment. In FIG. 54(a), the electric accessory 4420 is in the forward position where it extends over the area (game area) between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). The states are illustrated, and FIG. 54(b) shows a state in which the electric accessory 4420 is retracted from the gaming area and placed at the rear position.

In Figures 54(a) and 54(b), the outline of the part of the electric device 4420 that is located inside the winning unit 4400 in a position that blocks the passage of the ball is shown in solid lines and the inside is painted with a dotted pattern, while the outline of the part that is located in a position that does not block (allows) the passage of the ball is shown in imaginary lines.

In FIG. 54, the thin-diameter portion of the nail KG1 that is driven into the base plate 60 is shown in solid lines, and the bulging portion at the front tip is shown in imaginary lines.

The winning unit 4400 is formed from a plate-like member disposed between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), and has a flow path configuration that constitutes a downward flow path of the ball. part 4410, and an electric accessory 4420 that is arranged inside the flow path forming part 4410 and changes the flow path of the ball.

The electric device 4420 is equipped with a rolling plate 4421 that has an upper surface for rolling the ball and is guided so that it can be displaced in the forward and backward directions, and an obstruction rod 4425 that protrudes from the downstream end of the rolling plate 4421 and is formed with enough strength to obstruct the flow of the ball.

In this embodiment, when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section 4410 through the ball inlet 4411 that is open and formed at the upstream end of the flow path configuration section 4410 reaches the position where the electric accessory 4420 is placed, the electric The falling path of the ball differs depending on whether the accessory 4420 is placed in the forward position or the backward position.

First, when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section 4410 reaches the position where the electric device 4420 is located, if the electric device 4420 is located in the forward position (see FIG. 54(a)), the ball rolls on the upper surface of the rolling plate section 4421 and flows to the left side (the specific winning opening 65a side) through the flow path configuration section 4410.

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned at a distance of 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere from the front surface of the base plate 60. For example, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned so as not to obstruct the flow of the sphere downward through the flow path configuration portion 4410 by entering an opening formed in a plate-like member disposed between the flow path configuration portion 4410 and the glass unit 16 and covering the flow path configuration portion 4410 from the front side.

On the other hand, if the electric device 4420 is positioned in the retracted position when the ball that has entered the flow path configuration section 4410 reaches the position where the electric device 4420 is positioned (see FIG. 54(b)), the ball flows down the front side of the rolling plate section 4421 and down the flow path configuration section 4410 (towards the second winning opening 640).

At this time, the obstruction rod portion 4425 is positioned in a front-rear position where it can collide with the ball flowing down the flow path configuration portion 4410 and obstruct (prevent) the passage of the ball. As a result, when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the retracted position (see FIG. 54(b)), even if a ball bounces off a plate-shaped portion of the flow path configuration portion 4410 (for example, the plate-shaped portion 4412 positioned below the rolling plate portion 4421) and flies toward the obstruction rod portion 4425, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing over (passing) the obstruction rod portion 4425 and flowing through the guide portion 4413 that guides the ball toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In other words, the ball that flies toward the obstruction rod 4425 has its momentum to the left suppressed by the obstruction rod 4425, and either falls directly below and enters the second prize opening 640, or is bounced to the right. After that, the ball rolls on the upper surface of the plate-shaped part 4412 and enters the second winning hole 640.

In this way, in this embodiment, depending on whether the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward or backward position, the ball that enters the ball entrance 4411 will either pass downward through the electric device 4420 and roll down the plate-shaped portion 4412, or pass to the left through the electric device 4420 and roll down the guide portion 4413.

One of the purposes of forming the route and the winning openings 65a, 640 like the winning unit 4400 is to guide the majority of balls that have entered the ball entrance 4411 to the specific winning opening 65a side (guiding state), and to It is conceivable to control the operation of the electric accessory 4420 so as to be switchable between a state (non-guidance state) in which the majority of balls that enter the entrance 4411 are not guided to the specific winning a prize opening 65a side.

This control can be achieved by switching the operating pattern (opening/closing length) of the electric accessory 4420, but if the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion 4421 of the electric accessory 4420 is short, the non-guiding state is established. Also, a situation where the ball is guided to the specific winning hole 65a side is likely to occur.

For example, even if the time for which the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position is set to be shorter than the time required for a ball to pass through the rolling plate section 4421 several seconds after the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position, if the ball arrives at the same time that the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position (if there is almost no difference between the timing of the ball's arrival and the timing when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position) or if the ball arrives with greater momentum than usual (for example, if there is a rotation in an accelerating direction), the ball may pass through to the guide section 4413 while the rolling plate section 4421 is positioned in the forward position.

As a countermeasure for this, firstly, the rolling plate portion 4421, which is normally designed with a horizontal length of 55 mm or less, may be designed with a longer horizontal length (for example, 77 mm or 100 mm). . In this case, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the time when the rolling plate portion 4421 is placed in the forward position as the electric accessory 4420 is in the non-guiding state.

In addition, by designing the width of the rolling plate portion 4421 to be longer, the number of balls that can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position can be increased.

When the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed with a normal left-right length (55 mm or less), at most two to three balls can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 at the same time, but when the rolling plate portion 4421 is formed with a longer length (for example, 100 mm), it is possible to create a situation in which four or more balls can ride on the rolling plate portion 4421 at the same time.

When four or more balls are simultaneously placed on the rolling plate portion 4421 and the electric device 4420 is displaced to the retracted position, the four or more balls are guided toward the second winning opening 640 at once, so the number of reserved special symbols 2 can be increased to four (full) in a short time.

In addition, unlike the case where balls are guided one by one to the electric device 640 as described in the first embodiment, multiple balls on the top surface of the electric device 4420 simultaneously fall toward the second winning opening 640 immediately after the electric device 4420 is displaced to the retracted position, so the length of time that the electric device 4420 is required to maintain its position in the retracted position in order to allow multiple balls to flow down toward the second winning opening 640 can be shortened. In other words, the design freedom of the operation pattern of the electric device 4420 can be improved.

Secondly, as the next measure, the obstruction rod portion 4425 can be configured to cut off the flow of balls moving from the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 to the guide portion 4413 just before the rolling plate portion 4421 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position.

That is, the arrangement position of the obstruction rod part 4425 is a position that extends toward the guide part 4413 side from the downstream end of the rolling plate part 4421 (in this embodiment, it is located diagonally orthogonally to the upper surface of the rolling plate part 4421). By projecting toward the upper left direction and toward the guide portion 4413 side), the ball can prevent the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 from touching the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 in the guided state of the electric accessory 4420 (see FIG. 54(a)). Even if the ball is about to pass, if the electric accessory 4420 is placed in the non-guiding state immediately after that (see FIG. 54(b)), the flow of the ball that has passed can be blocked by the obstruction rod portion 4425. .

As a result, even if the horizontal length of the rolling plate portion 4421 is short, the electric accessory 4420 is moved to the guide portion 4413 immediately before switching from the forward position to the backward position. It is possible to make it difficult for the moving ball to be guided to the specific winning opening 65a side.

In other words, balls attempting to pass the rolling plate portion 4421 to the left can be pulled back toward the second winning opening 640 by the obstruction rod portion 4425. This makes maximum use of the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421, increasing the number of balls that land on the electric device 4420 when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the forward position, and increasing the number of balls that fall toward the second winning opening 640 when the electric device 4420 is positioned in the backward position.

This also allows more balls than would be expected from the left-right length of the rolling plate portion 4421 to flow down toward the second winning opening 640 immediately after the electric device 4420 is displaced from the forward position to the backward position.

In other words, in addition to the balls resting on the rolling plate section 4421, balls that are pulled back (backflowed) by the obstruction rod section 4425 after passing the downstream end of the rolling plate section 4421 can also be made to flow down toward the second winning hole 640, thereby improving the winning frequency of the second winning hole 640.

On the other hand, in the channel forming part 4410, a ceiling section 4414 is formed in such a manner as to cover the channel from above so that the ball does not flow into the electric accessory 4420 except for the ball inlet 4411. That is, since the introduction of balls into the electric accessory 4420 is limited to the ball entrance 4411, there may be a situation where the number of balls staying on the electric accessory 4420 becomes larger than expected (for example, if the balls are in two or more stages) It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the materials accumulate in a manner such that they accumulate.

In this way, according to the present embodiment, the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether the ball passes over the rolling plate portion 4421 or not. That is, when the period during which the electric accessory 4420 is maintained in the forward position exceeds the time required for the ball to pass on the rolling plate portion 4421, the ball will flow toward the specific winning port 65a side for the first time.

This differs from the case described in the first embodiment above, where as long as the tip portion 451 has passed, whether the ball has passed over the left guide plate portion 452 or the right guide plate portion 453 does not affect the switching of the ball's flow path.

The state of the electric role 4420 shown in FIG. 54(a) corresponds to the non-excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470) in the first embodiment described above, and the state of the electric role 4420 shown in FIG. 54(b) corresponds to the excited state of the electric role 640a (slide member 450 and tilt member 470) in the first embodiment described above. In this case, the rolling plate portion 4421 corresponds to the slide member 450, and the obstruction rod portion 4425 corresponds to the tilt member 470.

Next, the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. In the first embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 was described as a case in which balls that pass through the second specific winning port 700a flow down toward the gap between a pair of storage plate sections 715. However, in the upper variable winning device 5700 of the fifth embodiment, a switching device 5770 is provided for switching the flow of balls that pass through the second specific winning port 700a. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals and their description will be omitted.

Figures 55(a) and 55(b) are front views of the upper variable winning device 5700 in the fifth embodiment in the range XXXVIIa of Figure 2. Figure 55(a) illustrates the upper variable winning device 5700 in a closed state, and Figure 55(b) illustrates the upper variable winning device 5700 in an open state.

As shown in Figures 55(a) and 55(b), the upper variable winning device 5700 in the fifth embodiment is equipped with a base plate member 5710 formed by partially reusing the configuration of the base plate member 710 in the first embodiment.

The base plate member 5710 is provided with a pair of left and right intermediate plate sections 5718 in the space created between the inclined rolling plate section 713 and the inclined outer wall plate section 714 by lowering the arrangement of the lower components from the inclined outer wall plate section 714, and a pair of left and right discharge openings 5719 drilled in the front-to-rear direction in a shape that fits along a part of the intermediate plate section 5718 and the edge, for discharging balls received by the intermediate plate section 5718 to the rear side.

The intermediate plate portion 5718 is a plate-like portion extending toward the front side toward the space created between the inclined rolling plate portion 713 and the inclined outer wall plate portion 714, and is equipped with a prevention wall portion 5718a for preventing balls from spilling out from the left and right outer ends, an inclined plate portion 5718b connected to the lower end of the prevention wall portion 5718a and extending in an upwardly inclined direction toward the left and right position of the second specific winning opening 700a, and an arc plate portion 5718c connected to the extended end of the inclined plate portion 5718b and formed in an arc shape with a curvature radius slightly longer than the radius of the ball receiving rotation member 5771, centered on the rotation axis J51 of the ball receiving rotation member 5771 of the switching device 5770.

The switching device 5770 includes a ball receiving rotating member 5771 that is rotatable around a rotation axis J51, and a pair of flow control members 5778 that are arranged on the left and right sides of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 at positions that face each other on the left and right.

The flow-down restriction member 5778 is formed in an arc shape with a radius of curvature slightly longer than the radius of the ball-receiving rotation member 5771, centered on the rotation axis J51, and is configured to be displaceable between a forward position where it protrudes further forward than the front surface of the base plate member 5710 to restrict the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member 5771, and a retracted position where it retreats further back than the front surface of the base plate member 5710 to allow the passage of balls discharged from the ball-receiving rotation member 5771.

The ball receiver rotating member 5771 is a disc-shaped member that is rotatable around a rotation axis J51 that is arranged directly below the left-right center of the second specific winning opening 700a and extends in the front-rear direction, and is Four ball receiving recesses 5772 are formed at 90 degree intervals from the outer circumferential side so as to be able to receive the balls that have passed through 700a.

The drive device that drives the ball receiving rotating member 5771 and the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member 5778 are different from the solenoid 763 (see FIG. 40) and are not shown. In this case, the drive device that drives the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may also be used as the drive device that drives the flow-down restriction member 5778.

In this embodiment, in the first round of play, the solenoid 763 is driven in the first special operating pattern (see FIG. 42(a)), and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is constantly rotated in the clockwise direction at a rotational speed of 90 degrees per second.

The flow-down restriction member 5778 is set so that its operating mode during the first round of play can be changed depending on the type of jackpot. For example, for jackpots A, B, a, and b (see FIG. 44), it is always fixed in the forward position, for jackpot C, it is always fixed in the backward position, and for jackpot c, it is driven to switch between the forward and backward positions every second.

The following describes the flow of balls that pass through the second specific winning opening 700a. In this embodiment, a ball that passes through the second specific winning opening 700a is always received in one of the ball receiving recesses 5772 of the ball receiving rotating member 5771.

When the ball receiving rotation member 5771 rotates with the ball received in the ball receiving recess 5772, the ball received in the ball receiving recess 5772 is displaced in accordance with the change in the position of the ball receiving recess 5772.

During the rotation of the ball bearing rotating member 5771, the lower edge of the ball bearing recess 5772 (the lower edge of a pair of edges at the radially outer end of the ball bearing recess 5772 around the rotation axis J51) If the flow regulating member 5778 is placed in the retracted position when the side that forms the downward flow surface of the ball is flush with the top surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b, the ball that is flush with the inclined plate portion 5718b. The ball will be ejected from the receiving recess 5772, and the ball will pass through the ejection opening 5719 and be ejected from the upper variable winning device 5700. The balls thus discharged are not stored in the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

On the other hand, when the lower edge of the ball receiving recess 5772 is flush with the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 5718b during rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771, if the flow-down restriction member 5778 is positioned in the forward position, the discharge of balls is restricted by the flow-down restriction member 5778, and the rotation of the ball receiving rotation member 5771 continues without balls being discharged from the ball receiving recess 5772. After that, when the ball receiving recess 5772 is positioned between the pair of left and right arc plate portions 5718c, the balls can flow through the gap between the pair of arc plate portions 5718c and flow down toward the gap between the pair of storage plates 715, where they can be stored.

That is, in this embodiment, depending on the operation mode of the switching device 5770, there are two cases in which the ball that has passed through the second specific prize opening 700a flows down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715, and a case in which the ball that has passed through the second specific winning hole 700a flows down toward the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715. It is possible to configure a case where the ball that has passed through the prize opening 700a is discharged without reaching the gap between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

Therefore, even if the movable upper cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are driven in the first special operation pattern so that the balls guided into the gap between the pair of storage plate sections 715 are stored without being discharged during a round of play, when the position of the flow control member 5778 during a round of play is switched, particularly in the case of a jackpot c, depending on the timing of the balls entering the second specific winning port 700a, the number of balls guided to the pair of storage plate sections 715 may be sufficiently large (in this embodiment, five or more) or may be less than that, thereby increasing the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700.

In addition, it is not enough for one ball to pass from the switching device 5770 to the pair of storage plate sections 715; only when a number of balls (five or more in this embodiment) that exceeds the number that fills the position between the pair of storage plate sections 715 is passed can the balls be reliably passed through the opening 751, so that the player's attention to the upper variable winning device 700 can be maintained at a high level for a long period of time.

According to this embodiment, the ball flows down slower when it passes through the second specific winning opening 700a and is displaced by the ball receiving rotating member 5771 than when it passes through the second specific winning opening 700a. This makes it possible to delay the time it takes for the ball that has passed through the second specific winning opening 700a to reach a position between the pair of storage plates 715. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a ball that passes through the front side of the movable upper cover member 730 immediately after the movable upper cover member 730 is placed in the retracted position from immediately reaching a position between the pair of storage plates 715.

Next, a sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 58. In the first embodiment, the time display 811 explained the case where the ending time of the ending performance of the jackpot game can be grasped, but the firing time display 6811 in the sixth embodiment allows the appropriate ball to be fired just before the end of the ending performance. The display of the third symbol display device 81 is designed so that the timing can be grasped. Note that the same parts as in each of the embodiments described above are given the same reference numerals, and the explanation thereof will be omitted.

FIGS. 56(a) and 56(b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the sixth embodiment. FIG. 56(a) shows the display screen after the specific display 810 is moved from the center by operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45), and FIG. 56(b) shows the display screen after the specific display 810 is moved from the center by operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. The display screen after being switched by operating the frame button 22 in the shown state is illustrated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56(b), when the frame button 22 is operated while the card forgetting prevention display effect is being executed, the direction operation section display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display 818 will indicate the ball. The display is switched to a firing position suggestion display 6820 that suggests a position where the player may gain a profit by firing and aiming, and a firing time display 6811 is displayed superimposed on the time display 811.

The launch position suggestion display 6820 includes a play area display 6821 that (schematically) displays an illustration, photo, etc. of the play area (at least a part of it), and a target suggestion display 6822 that indicates a part of the play area display 6821 with an arrow or the like so that the player knows that he or she should aim at the target by launching the ball.

In this embodiment, the firing position suggestion display 6820 indicates the entire game board 13 (see FIG. 2) as the game area display 6821, and the through gates 66, 67 (see FIG. 2) as the target suggestion display 6822. At the same time, the comment "Aim here" is displayed.

Note that the launch position suggestion display 6820 is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of displaying the entire game board 13 as the game area display 6821, a portion of the game board 13 may be displayed. For example, as a portion including the through gates 66, 67, only the portion above the windmill WF (see FIG. 2) may be displayed, or only the area around the through gates 66, 67 (or the area around either of the through gates 66, 67) may be displayed.

In cases where a portion of the game board 13 is displayed, the game area display 6821 may be displayed as a still image or as a moving image. For example, in the launch position suggestion display 6820, the game area display 6821 may be configured to display a schematic view of the periphery of the ball about to be launched, and the game area display 6821 may be moved (displayed as a moving image) along the path along which the ball is launched, flows down, and reaches the through gates 66, 67, and when the ball reaches the through gates 66, 67, the game area display 6821 may be fixed (displayed as a still image) at the display of the periphery of the through gates 66, 67.

Furthermore, for example, instead of displaying an arrow to point to the target position when shooting a ball, the target suggestion display 6822 may be displayed so that the position lights up, or other parts other than that position may be displayed. It may be displayed in a dark manner to make it relatively conspicuous.

Further, the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822 may be fixed from the beginning or may be fixed after being moved. For example, the light may be moved along the path along which the ball is emitted, and when the light reaches the through gates 66 and 67, it may be fixed at the position where it reaches the through gates 66 and 67.

By displaying the firing position suggestion display 6820 in this way, the player can easily understand where he should aim the ball after the ending performance ends. Thereby, the game can proceed smoothly after the ending effect is finished.

Like the time display 811, the right end of the launch time display 6811 is displayed as moving rightward over time, and the speed of movement is the same as that of the time display 811. Also, the right end of the launch time display 6811 is positioned closer to the terminal position 812 than the right end of the time display 811, and the right end of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

In this embodiment, the length of time that elapses from the timing when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the timing when the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is the length of time when the ball is fired. It is designed to be slightly longer than the average length that elapses from the time the target reaches the through gates 66, 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822).

Therefore, the ending performance of the currently active jackpot game will end before the ball shot at the timing when the right tip of the shot time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 passes through the through gates 66 and 67.

In this way, by firing the ball using the firing time display 6811 as a guide, it is possible to avoid the fired ball passing through the through gates 66, 67 during the jackpot game (before the end of the ending effect). Thereby, it is possible to maximize the profit obtained by the player in the lottery of the second symbol executed when a ball is detected in the through gates 66, 67.

In other words, the lottery for the second symbol, which is generally executed when a ball is detected in the through gates 66, 67 during a jackpot game, is held with a normal probability, and the profit that the player can obtain is therefore minimal. If the jackpot game ends, the probability of the lottery for the second symbol can increase depending on the type of jackpot, so by preventing the ball from passing through the through gates 66, 67 during a jackpot game, the profit that the player can obtain in the lottery for the second symbol (profit that changes depending on differences in the operation pattern of the electric device 640a) can be maximized.

Furthermore, by using the launch time indicator 6811 as a guide to launch the ball, the length of time from the end of the jackpot game to the first time the ball passes through the through gates 66, 67 after the end of the jackpot game can be shortened compared to when the ball is launched after the right tip of the time indicator 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

In this way, by using the launch time display 6811 as a guide when launching the ball, it is possible to minimize the occurrence of a ball launched just before the end of a jackpot game passing through the through gates 66, 67 during the jackpot game (before the ending performance ends), thereby maximizing the profits that the player can obtain, while at the same time shortening the period until the ball passes through the through gates 66, 67 after the jackpot game ends, making the game progress smoother.

FIG. 57 is a diagram illustrating a display screen of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 57 shows the display screen when the right tip of the firing time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 from the state shown in FIG. 56(b).

As shown in FIG. 57, when the right end of the launch time display 6811 reaches the end position 812, the display mode of the target suggestion display 6822 switches. In this embodiment, the shape of the frame surrounding the comment in the target suggestion display 6822 changes, and the "aim" portion is enlarged.

In other words, the timing at which the "aim" portion of the target suggestion display 6822 is enlarged coincides with the timing at which the right end of the launch suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812. Therefore, even if the player does not view the launch time display 6811, by allowing the player to view the launch position suggestion display 6820, the player can be prompted to launch the ball at the appropriate launch timing based on the timing of the change in the target suggestion display 6822.

By visually checking the launch position suggestion display 6820, the player can grasp not only the target position to launch the ball, but also the timing to launch the ball. This reduces the burden on the player, who must select only the top portion of the display on the third symbol display device 81 as needed.

FIGS. 58(a) and 58(b) are diagrams illustrating display screens of a card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect. FIG. 58(a) shows a display screen that is switched from the state shown in FIG. 56(a) when passage of a ball is detected at the through gates 66, 67 before the end of the ending performance.

Further, in FIG. 58(b), if time has passed since the display in FIG. 58(a) and the firing suggestion display 6811 is displayed, the timing at which the right tip of the firing suggestion display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 is shown. The display in is illustrated. That is, the arrangement of the right end of the time display 811 in FIG. 58(b) is the same as the arrangement of the right end of the time display 811 in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 58(a), when the player shoots the ball from the state shown in FIG. 56(a) without operating the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45), if the passage of the ball is detected through the through gates 66, 67 before the ending performance ends, the direction operation unit display 816, vertical scale display 817, and horizontal scale display 818 are switched to a game stop suggestion display 6831 to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball.

In this embodiment, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is an illustration that resembles a crossing gate installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the crossing gate being lowered is displayed along with the comment "Stop." This can prompt the player to stop shooting balls, thereby reducing the number of balls that are shot before the ending performance is completed.

As shown in FIG. 58(b), when time has elapsed since the game stop suggestion display 6831 was displayed, the game stop suggestion display 6831 changes to a game preparation suggestion display 6841 for prompting the player to prepare for firing a ball. can be switched to

In this embodiment, the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is an illustration that imitates a crossing gate installed at a railroad crossing, and a still image of the crossing gate raised is displayed along with the comment "START." This allows the player to understand that the period during which ball launch is suspended has ended, and urges the player to prepare to launch the ball.

In this embodiment, if the player does not operate the frame button 22, the launch time display 6811 (see FIG. 56(b)) is not displayed, but the timing at which the game stop indication 6831 is switched to the game preparation indication 6841 coincides with the timing at which the right end of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812.

Therefore, if a ball is detected by the through gates 66, 67 before the end of the ending performance, a benefit similar to that obtained by operating the frame button 22 in the state shown in FIG. 56(a) (i.e., the benefit of being able to grasp the appropriate timing for firing the ball by visually checking the firing time display 6811) can be obtained.

Thereby, for example, when the frame button 22 is not operated due to a malfunction of the frame button 22, it is possible to avoid an excessive decrease in the profits obtained by the player. In other words, since the shooting position suggestion display 6820 (see FIG. 56(a)) is not displayed because the frame button 22 is not operated, the player cannot grasp the appropriate ball shooting timing. Even if the player starts firing the ball before the ending effect ends, the game stop suggestion display 6831 or the game preparation suggestion display 6841 is displayed, so that the player is not informed of the ball launch. It is possible to stop the ball from being shot or to have the player prepare to shoot the ball at an appropriate timing.

Note that the modes of the game stop suggestion display 6831 and the game preparation suggestion display 6841 are not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, instead of an illustration of a circuit breaker, an illustration of the handle 51 of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) with an x mark may be displayed. For example, it may be configured as a moving image instead of a still image. For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen of the third symbol display device 81 instead of a part of the display screen.

Note that the contents of the caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 are not limited to the contents illustrated in FIG. 58, and various forms are exemplified. For example, the content may correspond to shooting a ball. That is, an illustration imitating the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) may be displayed, and a counterclockwise arrow may be added to the handle 51 to indicate that the ball should be stopped, or a clockwise arrow may be placed on the handle 51. The surrounding arrows may also be written to indicate the timing to start firing the ball. Furthermore, a comment (such as "full" or "one vacant") corresponding to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol may be displayed.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 59 and 60. In the first embodiment, when the frame button 22 is operated while the card forget prevention display effect is being performed, the direction operation section display 816, the vertical scale display 817, and the horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the light intensity and the volume can be adjusted. However, the situation suggestion display 7821 in the seventh embodiment is designed to display comments about the currently executed light intensity and volume settings in response to the light intensity and volume settings performed by the player. Note that the same parts as those in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIGS. 59(a), 59(b), and 60 are diagrams illustrating display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the seventh embodiment. 59(a) and 60, display screens in different jackpot games with the same timing as the ending performance (the position of the right tip of the time display 811 is the same timing) are illustrated, and in FIG. 59(b), the display screen in FIG. 59( A display screen after a period of time has elapsed from the state shown in a) is illustrated.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59(a), when the frame button 22 (see FIG. 45) is operated according to the frame button display 813 (see FIG. 48(b)) in the ending effect, the third symbol display device 81 A direction operation unit display 816, a vertical scale display 817, and a horizontal scale display 818 are displayed on the display screen, and a situation suggestion display 7821 is displayed above them.

The situation suggestion display 7821 is designed to display various comments, but in FIG. value).

That is, in this embodiment, the settings for the light intensity and volume are initialized (returned to the maximum values) by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) when a specified period of time has elapsed since the settings were changed. This is set, and the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the situation suggestion display 7821 in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is executed.

This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which, for example, if the left and down switches (switches operated to decrease the volume or light intensity) of the directional control unit 45 (see Figure 45) are functioning but the right and up switches (switches operated to increase the volume or light intensity) are malfunctioning, once the light intensity or volume has been reduced to its minimum, the light intensity or volume cannot be increased at all thereafter, even if the player changes.

By visually checking that the comment "Cancel" is displayed on the status indication display 7821, the player can understand that the changes to the light intensity or volume settings have been initialized (returned to maximum value). If the player who previously changed the light intensity or volume settings is the same player who is currently playing, it is likely that the player will want to return the light intensity or volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value).

In contrast, in this embodiment, in the ending performance of the first jackpot game after the initialization is performed, the light intensity setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the vertical scale display 817 as the past light intensity display 7817 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading), and the volume setting in the state immediately before the initialization (returned to the maximum value) remains on the horizontal scale display 818 as the past volume display 7818 (corresponding to the part shown in light shading).

Therefore, the player operates the direction operation section 45 using the past light amount display 7817 as a guide to change the setting of the light amount, and also operates the direction operation section 45 using the past volume display 7818 as a guide to change the setting of the volume. By doing so, it is possible to easily restore the light intensity and volume settings to the state immediately before initialization (returning to the maximum value).

As described above, the past light intensity display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed during the ending performance of the first big win game after the light intensity and volume are initialized by the sound lamp control device 113 (see Figure 4), but are set to disappear if that timing is missed, making it more difficult (more time consuming) to change the light intensity and volume settings.

As a result, the player can be induced to operate the direction operation section 45 at the timing when the past light amount display 7817 and the past volume display 7818 are displayed, so that the player can It can improve your attention.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), when the player operates the directional control unit 45 to return the light intensity and volume settings to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value), the comment "Cancel" in the status indication display 7821 is changed to the comment "Restoration complete."

The player can see that the light intensity and volume settings have been restored to the state they were in immediately before they were initialized (returned to maximum value) by visually checking that the comment "Return Completed" is displayed on the status indication display 7821. As a result, the setting change has been executed, and the light intensity and volume will not be initialized (returned to maximum value) by the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) until a specified time has elapsed.

In the display shown in FIG. 60, the comment "Automatic continuation" is displayed in the situation suggestion display 7821, and the volume and light intensity settings are maintained as set by the player. Therefore, since the player does not need to change the settings of the volume or the amount of light, he or she can concentrate on watching the movement of the time display 811 and determining the timing for firing the ball.

In this way, by changing the content of the situation suggestion display 7821 in the ending performance and, depending on the content, encouraging the player to operate the directional operation unit 45 to change the light intensity or volume settings, it is possible to improve the player's ability to focus on the ending performance.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 61 to 63. In the first embodiment, the frame button display 813 is always displayed during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the frame button 22 can be operated. However, in the eighth embodiment, the frame button display 8813 is displayed as an entity for a further limited period during the execution of the card forgetting prevention display performance, and the frame button 22 can be operated. Note that the same parts as in the above-mentioned embodiments are given the same reference numerals, and their description will be omitted.

FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), and 62 are diagrams illustrating in chronological order the display screens of the card forgetting prevention display effect displayed in the ending effect in the eighth embodiment. In FIGS. 61(a), 61(b), and 62, the frame button display 8813 is shown with imaginary lines when it is displayed semitransparently, and with solid lines when it is displayed as an entity. be done.

In this embodiment, when the card forget prevention display effect is started, as shown in FIG. 61(a), in addition to displaying a specific display 810 in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, Translucent frame button displays 8813 are displayed scattered around the edges of the display screen. The frame button display 8813 moves toward the center of the display screen as time passes.

When the semi-transparent frame button display 8813 reaches the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 and merges with it, the frame button display 8813 materializes as shown in FIG. 61(b). When the frame button display 8813 is materialized, the input of the frame button 22 is controlled to be valid, and when the input of the frame button 22 is detected as valid, an operation validity display 8813a (in this embodiment, the comment "Good") is displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and then the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 49(a) described in the first embodiment.

When the player operates the frame button 22 and wants to shift the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), the timing at which the frame button display 8813 materializes is determined. Therefore, the player follows the moving frame button display 8813 with his eyes.

Since the specific display 810 is displayed on the movement path of the frame button display 8813, it is possible to induce the specific display 810 to come into the field of view of the player who is following the frame button display 8813 with his or her eyes. In addition, by overlapping the position where the frame button display 8813 materializes with the position where the specific display 810 is displayed, it is possible to induce the player to pay attention to the specific display 810 displayed behind the frame button display 8813.

In the first place, the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 during the period from when the card forgetting prevention display performance is started until the frame button display 8813 materializes, so that the card forgetting prevention is prevented. The specific display 810 can be easily seen by the player compared to the case where the frame button 22 can be operated immediately after the start of the display performance and the specific display 810 can be immediately moved to the corner of the display screen.

If the frame button 22 is not operated while the frame button display 8813 is materialized, the frame button display 8813, which is displayed semi-transparently from the center position of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 toward the outside, moves as shown in FIG. 62.

In the state shown in FIG. 62, the input to the frame button 22 is controlled to be invalid, and even if the frame button 22 is inputted, an invalid operation display 8813b (in this embodiment) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. , the comment "Miss") is displayed, and the display screen is not shifted to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), but the specific display 810 is placed in the center of the display screen. maintained.

In this way, in this embodiment, by limiting the timing of operation of the frame button 22 while the card forget prevention display effect is being performed, the following favorable effects can be achieved.

That is, in a case where the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes from a translucent display to a solid display to indicate the timing when the frame button 22 can be operated, the specific display remains until the display mode of the frame button display 8813 changes. Since the symbol 810 is arranged at the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and configured to be easily visible to the player, attention to the specific display 810 can be improved.

Furthermore, in the middle of the card forgetting prevention display performance, the frame button display 8813 is switched from a solid display to a semi-transparent display, so that when the frame button 22 is operated, the display screen becomes as shown in FIG. 49(a). It is possible to avoid the period from the timing of transition to the end of the card forget prevention display performance period from becoming too short.

This makes it possible to avoid situations where the player is unable to change the light intensity or volume to the desired setting, even if the player has effectively operated the frame button 22, because there is not enough time to change the light intensity or volume settings before the card forgetting prevention display performance ends.

Therefore, a situation arises in which a player who has had the experience of not being able to change the light intensity or volume settings to the desired state even after operating the frame button 22 underestimates the value of operating the frame button 22. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player's desire to operate the frame button 22 (not only the operation during the ending performance but also the operation during the game) decreases.

Note that the frame button display 8813 may be accompanied by a musical note mark or a light bulb mark to suggest an object that can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. In this case, when the player is thinking of adjusting the volume, the frame button display 8813 can be more attention-grabbing if a musical note mark is attached, and attention can be distracted from the frame button display 8813 if a light bulb mark is attached.

Figure 63 is a diagram showing an example of the change over time of the frame button display 8813 in the card forgetting prevention display performance, the change over time of the validity of the operation of the frame button 22, and the operation of the frame button 22. As an example, Figure 63 shows a case in which the period of the card forgetting prevention display performance is divided into three equal parts and assigned to a first period T81 (see Figure 61 (a)) in which the semi-transparent frame button displays 8813 are scattered, a second period T82 (see Figure 61 (b)) in which the frame button displays 8813 are united and materialized, and a third period T83 (see Figure 62) in which the frame button displays 8813 become semi-transparent again and are scattered.

Unlike the first embodiment in which the frame button 22 could be operated at any time during the card forgetting prevention display performance, in this embodiment, operation of the frame button 22 is only valid during the second period T82. If the frame button 22 is operated during the second period T82, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 transitions to the state shown in FIG. 49(a), and the light intensity and volume settings can be changed. On the other hand, no matter how much the frame button 22 is operated during the first period T81 or third period T83, the light intensity and volume settings cannot be changed.

In FIG. 63, the periods T81, T82, and T83 are illustrated as being the same, but the lengths of the periods T81, T82, and T83 can be changed in various ways depending on the purpose. Below, an example of an effect that can be expected from changing the length of the first period 81 or the length of the third period T83 is described.

For example, by setting the first period T81 to be shorter, the transition to the second period T82 in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be accelerated. This makes it possible to lengthen the maximum length of the period that can be spent changing the settings of the light intensity or volume.

The setting of shortening the first period T81 may be effective, for example, when used in the ending performance of the first jackpot game (the first jackpot in a series of consecutive jackpots). During the time-saving state, the probability of winning, or the jackpot game, a specific song may be played, and there are players who are not interested in the sound during the normal state but would like to hear a specific song.

Even if such a player plays games with the volume turned down in the normal state, when transitioning from the normal state through the jackpot gaming state to the time saving state or variable probability state, the player may turn the volume down to the point where a specific song can be heard. I'm thinking of raising it.

Therefore, by lengthening the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the light intensity and volume settings, particularly in the ending performance of the first jackpot game, it becomes easier to change the volume settings at the appropriate timing when moving from the normal state through the jackpot game state to the time-saving state or the probability variable state, and it is possible to improve the satisfaction of players who want to hear the above-mentioned specific song.

In addition, for example, by setting the first period T81 longer, the transition to the second period T82 in which operation of the frame button 22 is valid is delayed, while the period during which the specific display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 can be maintained for a longer period.

Setting to lengthen the first period T81 may be effective in some cases, for example, in the ending performance of a jackpot game during a series of games. In most cases, it is sufficient to change the volume and light intensity settings at the first visit, and it is unlikely that you will want to change the volume and light intensity settings during a series of games. Even if the maximum length of time that can be spent changing the settings of the volume and light intensity becomes shorter due to the slower transition, the disadvantage to the player is small.

On the other hand, the longer the winning streak continues, the more excited the player becomes, and the more likely it is that the player will be so excited that he or she will forget to return the cards inserted in the card unit when finishing the game. In contrast, if the first period T81 is set long, the period during which the special display 810 is displayed in the center of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 during the card forget prevention display performance can be maintained for a long time, which can encourage the player to focus on returning the cards.

For example, by setting the second period T82 shorter, it is possible to make it more difficult for the frame button 22 to be operated and transition to the state shown in FIG. 49(a). In this case, in addition to being able to guide the player's gaze to the specific display 810 with the moving frame button display 8813 (see FIG. 61(a)), it is possible to induce the player to fail to operate when multiple frame button displays 8813 are combined, thereby increasing the possibility of transitioning the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 to the state shown in FIG. 62.

This allows the special display 810 to be maintained in the center of the display screen throughout the entire card forgetting prevention display performance, and the movement of the frame button display 8813 is expected to have the effect of guiding the player's gaze to the special display 810. Therefore, compared to when the frame button display 8813 is not present, the special display 810 can leave a stronger impression on the player.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the second period T82 longer, the period during which operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be maintained for a longer period, thereby ensuring opportunities to operate the frame button 22.

Furthermore, for example, by setting the third period T83 shorter, T82 can be made relatively longer, and the period in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid can be maintained for a longer period. Opportunities for operation can be secured.

Also, for example, by setting the third period T83 longer, the card forgetting prevention display effect after the state shown in FIG. 49(a) is entered by operating the frame button 22 in the second period T82 Since the remaining period of time can be secured for a long time, it is possible to easily avoid changing the settings of the light amount and volume halfway.

Note that the lengths of the periods T81, T82, and T83 may be changed for reasons other than those described above. For example, during a jackpot game, if there is a jackpot on a reserved ball whose first symbol has already been drawn, the first period T81 is extremely shortened, and the second period T82 is controlled to be lengthened by that amount. You can also do it.

In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be shown to the player as if it had started from the state shown in FIG. 61(b) without passing through the state shown in FIG. can give. By letting the player understand that this discomfort will help them understand that there is a jackpot on the held ball, the player can be made to pay attention to the card forgetting prevention display effect, so the card forgetting prevention display It is possible to improve attention to the performance. Thereby, the player can be made aware of the return of the card etc. inserted into the card unit, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the player actually forgets the card etc.

The present invention has been described above based on the above embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and it can be easily imagined that various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention.

In each of the above embodiments, some or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced by some or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above first embodiment, by controlling the operation of the winning unit 400 in multiple ways, it is possible to switch between a state in which a ball passing through the inside of the winning unit 400 is guided almost entirely to the second winning port 640 and a state in which it is guided almost entirely to the third winning port 64b. This is used to explain the case in which it is possible to configure a special probability variable state in which small winning games occur frequently (occurring with almost every change in the special pattern) as the game state after a big winning game, in which a large number of prize balls can be paid out before the transition to a big winning game by causing a ball to enter a specific winning port 65a that is opened during a small winning game, and a probability variable state in which small winning games do not occur frequently, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the setting may not be such that small wins occur frequently (specific winning port 65a is not necessarily required), and the winning unit 400 may be used to switch between a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for drawing special pattern 1 (corresponding to third winning port 64b) and a state in which it is easier to guide the ball to the winning port for drawing special pattern 2 (corresponding to second winning port 640).

In this case, in the game state that is transferred after the end of the jackpot game, the common game mode is to fire a ball toward the winning unit 400, and the jackpot type of jackpot that is expected when a jackpot is won is distributed. It is possible to configure a pachinko machine that can change the

In the first embodiment described above, the winning unit 400 is configured to operate the electric device 640a in a first operating pattern that makes it difficult to guide the ball to either the second winning opening 640 or the third winning opening 64b, a second operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to the third winning opening 64b, or a third operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to the second winning opening 640, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the electric device 640a may be configured to operate in an operating pattern that makes it easy to guide the ball to both the second winning opening 640 and the third winning opening 64b.

As a means for realizing this, for example, the operation time t3b of the reference operation pattern RP3 in the third operation pattern is set to 1.0 seconds, and the slide member 450 is maintained in a non-excited state for the remaining 1.0 seconds. By doing so, it is possible to cause the ball picked up by the tip portion 451 during the waiting time t3a to be guided to the second winning opening 640 and to the third winning opening 64b.

In the first embodiment described above, in the winning unit 400, when the solenoid SOL41 is driven with a ball resting on the tip 451 of the slide member 450 arranged in the forward position, the ball resting on the tip 451 is pushed onto the upper surface of the tip 451, forming the ball passage opening 414 so as to be able to pass through, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the slide member 450 is arranged in the retracted position, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip 451 and the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414 may be designed to be less than the diameter of the ball.

In other words, the upper surface of the tip 451 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes upward as it approaches the front, and since the displacement direction of the slide member 450 is the front-to-rear direction, the dimension between the upper surface of the tip 451 and the upper edge of the sphere passage opening 414 is shorter when the slide member 450 is in the retracted position than when the slide member 450 is in the advanced position.

Utilizing this, when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position, the ball is allowed to pass through the ball passage opening 414, while when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the retreat position, the tip end The ball riding on the tip 451 is designed with dimensions such that the ball catches on the upper edge of the ball passage opening 414, so that the ball rides on the tip 451 when the slide member 450 is displaced from the forward position to the retreat position. Balls can be prevented from passing through the ball passage opening 414. Thereby, the probability of a ball entering the ball passage opening 414 can be lowered.

In the first embodiment described above, in the winning unit 400, the left wall part 432 and the right wall part 433 are formed with a height that is high enough to block the passage of the ball in the left and right direction, and the left guide plate part 452 or the right guide plate part The introduction of the sphere from 453 to the central flow path 431 side is limited to passing through the left opening LT or right opening RT arranged on the rear side of the left wall 432 or right wall 433. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical heights of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed to be low so that the ball can pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433.

Also, for example, by utilizing the fact that the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450 is different when the slide member 450 is in the forward position and when it is in the retracted position, the height of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed to be sufficient to block the ball from passing above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 when the slide member 450 is in the forward position (when the vertical position of the upper surface is low) (for example, the height of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 may be designed so that the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 are higher than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450), while allowing the ball to pass above the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 when the slide member 450 is in the retracted position (when the vertical dimension of the upper surface is high) (allowing the ball to pass, for example, designed so that the vertical positions of the upper ends of the left wall portion 432 and the right wall portion 433 are lower than the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450).

In this case, as a variation of the flow path of the balls rolling on the upper surface of the slide member 450 and flowing down toward the central flow path 431, in addition to the flow path passing through the left opening LT or right opening RT located on the rear side of the left wall portion 432 or right wall portion 433, a flow path passing through the upper side of the left wall portion 432 or right wall portion 433 when the slide member 450 is positioned in the retracted position can be configured.

Further, the relationship between the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 450 and the vertical position of the upper ends of the left wall part 432 and the right wall part 433 may be made to be different on the left and right sides. For example, the configuration may be such that the ball is allowed to pass above the left wall 432 but is restricted from passing above the right wall 433, or the ball may be configured to pass above the right wall 433. It may be configured to restrict the ball from passing above the right wall portion 432 while allowing the ball to pass through the upper side of the right wall portion 432.

In this case, the flow path of the ball guided by the slide member 450 can be made to differ significantly depending on whether the ball flows down the left side or the right side.

In the above first embodiment, the structure for picking up a ball includes a tip 451 of the slide member 450 and a plate-like portion 471 of the tilt member 470, and the tip 451 is disposed on the outer left and right sides and above the plate-like portion 471 when viewed from the front. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bifurcated structure of the slide member 450 may be eliminated, and the part corresponding to the tip 451 may be disposed directly above the plate-like portion 471.

In this case, by providing a fixed regulation plate that regulates the passage of the ball between the tip portion 451 and the plate-like portion 471 in the area between the base plate 60 and the glass unit 16, the tip portion 451 It is possible to avoid a winning mode in which a ball that is not picked up is picked up by the plate-like portion 471.

Thereby, the horizontal dimension of the winning unit 400 can be reduced. In addition, by having only one tip 451, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of merging of balls in the path inside the winning unit 400, so it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the winning unit 400 (by simplifying the design). ).

In the first embodiment, the ceiling surface 447 disposed above the slide member 450 is formed to extend in the horizontal direction, and the inclined surface portion 444a of the ceiling component 444 disposed above the central channel 431 is formed to extend horizontally. Although the case where the slope increases toward the front side has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the ceiling surface 447 disposed above the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that slopes downward toward the rear. In this case, the downstream area of the ball (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450 becomes too large, and it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down from flapping. .

For example, the ceiling surface 447 disposed above the slide member 450 may be configured as a surface that slopes upward toward the rear. In this case, since it is possible to secure a large flow area (area through which the ball can pass) of the ball on the downstream side of the flow path of the ball flowing down the upper surface of the slide member 450, when the slide member 450 is displaced backward, Even if the balls riding on the top surface of the slide member 450 are pushed backwards and the density of the balls at the rear side of the slide member 450 becomes high, there is a possibility that the balls will become jammed on the top side of the slide member 450. It can be lowered.

For example, the ceiling component 444 disposed above the central channel 431 may be configured to be inclined downward toward the front side, or may be configured to extend in the horizontal direction. In this case, it is possible to avoid the ball flowing down from becoming too large (the area through which the ball can pass) on the downstream side of the central flow path 431, and causing the ball to flutter while flowing down.

In the first embodiment, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening 414 through which the ball picked up by the slide member 450 passes and the central opening 413 through which the ball picked up by the tilt member 470 passes are described as being slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right widths of the ball passage opening 414 and the central opening 413 may be designed to be slightly longer than several times (for example, twice) the diameter of the ball, and the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450, the central flow path 431, and the tilt member 470 may also be designed to be similar left and right widths. In this case, the number of balls that can be picked up at one time by the slide member 450 and the tilt member 470 can be increased, thereby improving the efficiency of winning.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the horizontal width of the ball passage opening 414 and the horizontal width of the central opening 413 are matched, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the horizontal width of the ball passage opening 414 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the sphere, and the horizontal width of the central opening 413 may be designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the sphere. Alternatively, the horizontal width of the central flow path 431 and the horizontal width of the tilting member 470 may be designed based on the same idea as the horizontal width of the central opening 413.

In this case, the balls can flow down side by side in the region downstream from the central channel 431, so even if the balls pass through the pair of left and right ball passing openings 414 at the same time, the balls can flow down the center channel 431. It is possible to easily avoid a situation where the balls merge and the flow resistance increases.

In addition, for example, the left and right width of the ball passage opening 414 may be designed to be slightly longer than multiple times the diameter of the ball, and the left and right width of the central opening 413 may be designed to be slightly longer than the diameter of the ball. In addition, the left and right widths of the tip 451, left guide plate portion 452, and right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450 may be designed with the same idea as the left and right width of the ball passage opening 414.

In this case, under the condition that the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked, the first ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the ball is picked up by the slide member 450) on the most upstream side (entrance side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400 While improving the ball entry efficiency, the second ball entry efficiency (the efficiency with which the ball is picked up by the tilting member 470) on the most downstream side (exit side) of the internal path of the winning unit 400 can be lowered than the first ball entry efficiency. .

This allows the player to see that the apparent ball entry efficiency (first ball entry efficiency) of balls entering the entrance of the winning unit 400 is high, while the probability that the ball is actually picked up by the tilting member 470 (second ball entry efficiency) is reduced. This can improve the player's impression of the ball entry efficiency of the winning unit 400, encouraging the player to continue playing.

In the above first embodiment, the case where the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 of the slide member 450 is the same as the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion 453 is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion 453 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452, or the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 may be made larger than the inclination angle of the right guide plate portion 453.

In particular, in the latter case, the difference in the falling time of the ball due to the difference in the longitudinal length of the left guide plate part 452 and the right guide plate part 453 can be compensated for by the falling speed of the ball, so that the left and right tips 451 If the balls are received at the same time, the timing at which the balls arrive at the central channel 431 can be made easier to match.

In the former case, on the other hand, the difference in the time it takes for the ball to flow down due to the difference in the front-to-back lengths of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 is amplified by the speed at which the ball flows down, so that when the left and right tip portions 451 receive balls simultaneously, it is easier to differentiate the timing at which the balls reach the central flow path 431.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding member 450 rolls the ball not only at the tip 451 that receives the ball from the play area, but also in the flow path behind it, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball may come into contact with the tip 451 only, and the ball that flows downstream of the tip 451 may roll on the upper surface of a fixed plate portion (a portion that does not displace) that covers the left guide plate portion 452, the right guide plate portion 453, etc. from above. In this case, the range in which the ball is accelerated or decelerated by the displacement of the sliding member 450 can be narrowed.

In this case, the configuration and operation mode of the tip portion 451 may be changed to an operation mode in which it tilts forward (the operation mode exemplified by the tilting member 470). That is, in the non-excited state, it may be configured to be in the open position described for the tilting member 470, and in the excited state, it may be configured to be in the closed position described for the tilting member 470.

In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 is described as having the ball picked up by the tip 451 roll on the fixed bottom surface 431a on the path until it reaches the tilting member 470, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface 431a may be configured to move in conjunction with the movement of the sliding member 450. In this case, even if the internal flow path of the winning unit 400 is clogged with balls, the entire internal flow path moves, so the balls can be loosened and the ball clog can be cleared. The movement of the bottom surface 431a may be in the opposite direction to the sliding member 450, or may be configured as one with the sliding member 450 and move in the same direction.

In the first embodiment, the fixed bottom surface portion 431a is formed as an inclined surface that causes the ball to roll linearly, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the bottom surface portion 431a may be curved to curve the direction in which the ball flows down, resulting in a noticeable change in the speed at which the ball flows down, or the flow path may be configured to have a range in which the ball falls while flowing down, causing the ball to bounce and resulting in variation in the flow pattern, or the flow path may be repeatedly bent so that the ball flows down in a meandering manner, thereby lengthening the time it takes for the ball to pass through.

In the first embodiment, the winning unit 400 is described as having the ball passage opening 414 as a simple opening, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a detection sensor for detecting ball passage may be provided in the ball passage opening 414, so that a ball entering the ball passage opening 414 can be detected. In this case, when a ball entering the ball passage opening 414 is detected, the third pattern display device 81 or the like may notify the player, thereby making the player aware that a ball has passed through the ball passage opening 414, and thus improving the attention-grabbing power of the winning unit 400.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which, in the winning unit 400, the ball picked up by the tip 451 is always guided to the tilting member 470 side, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a discharge opening is formed in the internal flow path, and some of the balls are discharged through the discharge opening, so that only some of the balls picked up by the tip 451 are guided to the tilting member 470. It may be configured so that it does not exist. In this case, the slide member 450 may also be configured to function as a member for opening and closing the discharge opening.

In the first embodiment, the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 of the slide member 450 are formed in a plate shape with the same inclination in the front-rear direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination may be changed midway, or the upper surface may be formed in a stepped shape. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls on the slide member 450, the magnitude of the load that the balls receive when the slide member 450 is displaced rearward can be changed (for example, when formed in a stepped shape, the load can be made different depending on whether the balls are arranged close to the steps and receive the load from the side of the steps, or whether the balls are arranged away from the steps and receive the load by sliding against the upper surface of the steps).

For example, if the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the downstream side (rear side) relative to the horizontal plane is made smaller than the inclination angle of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 on the upstream side (front side) relative to the horizontal plane, the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the upstream side can be made greater than the load received by the ball due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 on the downstream side. This makes it possible to narrow (reduce, make closer) the spacing between multiple balls arranged on the upstream and downstream sides of the slide member 450 by displacing the slide member 450.

For example, compared to the inclination angle of the left guide plate part 452 and right guide plate part 453 with respect to the horizontal plane on the upstream side (front side), the left guide plate part 452 and right guide plate part 453 on the downstream side (rear side) When forming a large inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane, it is possible to make the load that the ball receives on the upstream side due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450 be smaller than the load that the ball receives on the downstream side due to the rearward displacement of the slide member 450. can. Thereby, the distance between the plurality of balls arranged on the upstream side and downstream side of the slide member 450 can be widened (enlarged, made sparse) by the displacement of the slide member 450.

Further, for example, the magnitude of the inclination of the left guide plate portion 452 and the right guide plate portion 453 with respect to the horizontal plane may change multiple times along the downstream path. In this case, depending on the arrangement of the balls, the displacement of the slide member 450 can cause both a case in which the distance between the balls decreases and a case in which the distance between the balls increases.

Further, for example, the angle of inclination of the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 and the angle of inclination of the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 452 may be made different. That is, the upper surface of the left guide plate portion 452 is formed in a plate shape so that the slope with respect to the horizontal plane is the same in the front-rear direction, while the upper surface of the right guide plate portion 453 is formed such that the slope with respect to the horizontal plane changes along the way. good. In this case, the aspect of the load that the ball receives due to the displacement of the slide member 450 can be made different depending on whether the ball is placed on the left guide plate part 452 or the ball is placed on the right guide plate part 452. .

In the first embodiment, the slide member 450 and the tilting member 470 are interlocked by the transmission member 480 interposed therebetween, and problems such as ball biting occur on one side of the slide member 450 or the tilting member 470. Although a case has been described in which the operation of the other side is also affected, this is not necessarily the case.

For example, a coil spring that can expand and contract in the front-rear direction is interposed at a position (position between) where the front side of the pivot tip of the second member 485 of the transmission member 480, which is arranged to face the slide member 450, faces the central fixed part 454 of the slide member 450. Normally, the slide member 450 is pressed against the second member 485 by the biasing force of the coil spring, and the second member 485 and the slide member 450 are configured to work together, but when a ball is pinched between the front end of the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 (ball bite), the coil spring is configured to contract to cover the amount that the forward displacement of the slide member 450 is hindered, so that the second member 485 can be tilted forward even if the slide member 450 is not arranged in the forward position.

This makes it possible to prevent the operation of the first member 481 from being hindered by the second member 485, making it easier to prevent the operation of the tilting member 470 from being stopped midway due to ball bite occurring on the sliding member 450 side.

In this way, even when multiple transmission paths for the driving force are provided using the transmission member 480, by interposing a member such as a coil spring (which may be a cushioning material, etc.) in one transmission path, it is possible to prevent a malfunction occurring in one transmission path from being transmitted to other transmission paths.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the locking protrusion 487 is pushed down on the lower plate part 482b when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the energized state to the de-energized state, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do.

For example, the formation of the locking protrusion 487 may be omitted. In the excited state of the electric accessory 640a, the lower plate portion 482b is in contact with the eccentric protrusion 486 of the second member 485, while a gap is secured between the upper plate portion 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486. .

The load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the second member 485 is less than the static friction between the slide member 450, which abuts against the second member 485 at its outer end in the rotational radial direction, and the middle member 430, so that the second member 485 is prevented from being displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight. In other words, even if the abutment between the lower plate portion 482b and the eccentric protrusion 486 is released, the position of the second member 485 is maintained.

Therefore, when the electric accessory 640a is switched from the energized state to the de-energized state, the slide member 450 is maintained in the retracted position until the eccentric protrusion 486 is pushed down by the upper plate portion 482a, and only the tilting member 470 is raised. Operate. That is, the driving force of the solenoid SOL41 is concentratedly transmitted to the tilting member 470. In this case, the timing at which the sliding member 450 starts operating and the timing at which the tilting member 470 starts operating will deviate from each other.

That is, only the tilting member 470 operates from the start of the operation to the intermediate position, and the tilting member 470 and the slide member 450 operate from the intermediate position. In the process of the first member 481 descending, after the upper plate part 482a and the eccentric protrusion 486 come into contact with each other, the second member 485 moves to the rotating shaft part 485a in such a manner that the eccentric protrusion 486 is pushed down by the upper plate part 482a. It rotates in the forward rotation direction around . The operation ends at almost the same time for the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470.

In this case, even if a ball gets caught between the slide member 450 and the front design member 420 during switching from an excited state to a non-excited state, and the displacement of the slide member 450 is inhibited, the rising action of the tilting member 470 starts prior to the displacement of the slide member 450, so that the rising action of the tilting member 470 can be prevented from being inhibited.

This, in conjunction with suppressing the displacement of the slide member 450, delays the rising action of the tilt member 470, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is picked up by the tilt member 470 at an unexpected time.

Note that the load in the rotational direction due to the weight of the second member 485 is below the static friction between the slide member 450, which abuts against the second member 485 at its outer end in the rotational radial direction, and the middle member 430, and the second member 485 is prevented from displacing in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight, but this is not necessarily limited to this example. For example, the center of gravity of the second member 485 may be designed to be closer to the tilted tip, so that the second member 485 can be displaced in the forward rotation direction due to its own weight.

In the above first embodiment, the sliding member 450 and the tilting member 470 are linked by the driving force of a single solenoid SOL41, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the driving device that drives the sliding member 450 and the driving device that drives the tilting member 470 may be configured separately and configured to operate independently.

In this case, for example, the tilting member 470 is opened after approximately 3 seconds have elapsed since the slide member 450 was placed in the retreated position (sufficient time has elapsed for the ball that has flowed into the winning unit 400 to pass through). An additional actuation pattern may be added in which the tilting member 470 is then placed in the closed position when the slide member 450 is placed in the forward position. In this case, it is possible to easily prevent the ball from being picked up by the tilting member 470.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the tip portion 451 is configured to be difficult to pick up a ball even if the tilting member 470 pinches the ball when it is closed, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the solenoid SOL41 may be set to be driven so that the closing operation of the tilting member 470 does not occur at the timing when the ball can reach the tilting member 470 in the first place. In this case, the tilting member 470 can be smoothly closed.

Further, at a timing when the ball can reach the tilting member 470, the solenoid SOL41 may be set to be driven so that the tilting member 470 only performs an opening operation. In this case, since the weight of the ball acts in the direction of opening the tilting member 470, it is possible to assist the opening of the tilting member 470, and the ball slides from the tilting member 470 via the first member 481 and the second member 485. By transmitting the load to the member 450, the slide member 450 can be smoothly moved toward the retracted position.

In the above first embodiment, the case was described where the flow path of the balls flowing down the winning unit 400 is switched by repeatedly executing the operation patterns RP1 to RP3 set from the waiting times t1a to t3a and the operation times t1b to t3b, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only the operation time may be set as the standard operation pattern, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be set instead of the waiting time.

For example, if the operation time is set to 3.9 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time it takes to change and display the second pattern is set to 0.1 seconds, the 0.1 seconds will be the time the de-energized state is maintained, resulting in an operation mode similar to that achieved by the first operation pattern.

Also, for example, if the operating time is set to 0.2 seconds as the standard operating pattern and the time required for the fluctuating display of the second symbol is set to 1.8 seconds, that 1.8 seconds will be maintained in the de-energized state. As a result, an operation mode similar to that of the second operation pattern can be realized.

For example, if the operation time is set to 2.0 seconds as the standard operation pattern and the time required for the variable display of the second pattern is set to 2.0 seconds, the 2.0 seconds will be the time during which the de-energized state is maintained, and as a result, an operation mode similar to that of the third operation pattern can be achieved.

In the above first embodiment, a nail KG1 is disposed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b, and depending on the state of the nail KG1, the probability of a ball flowing downward from the internal flow path of the winning unit 400 entering the third winning opening 64b is changed, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the switching device 5770 described in the fifth embodiment may be disposed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning hole 64b, and whether or not the ball will enter the third winning hole 64b may be determined depending on the timing of the ball's entry relative to the operation of the switching device 5770. In this case, the ball can enter the third winning hole 64b regardless of the state of the nail KG1.

For example, a sorting device (for example, a seesaw mechanism) that introduces one out of every two (or N) balls into the third winning opening 64b is installed between the winning unit 400 and the third winning opening 64b. ) may be provided. In this case, the player can play the game with peace of mind because the sorting device allows one out of every two (or N) balls to enter the third winning hole 64b regardless of the state of the nail KG1. be able to.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball flowing down the upper side of the through gates 66, 67 is guided to the through gates 66, 67 by the nail KG1, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a structure made of a resin material may be used to guide the ball to the through gates 66, 67 in place of the nail KG1 or in combination with the nail KG1. In this case, the structure made of a resin material is less susceptible to changes in state than the nail KG1, so the guidance of the ball to the through gates 66, 67 can be stabilized.

Also, for example, by reducing the number of nails KG1 or changing their positions, the balls flowing down above the through gates 66, 67 may not all pass through the through gates 66, 67, but all at once. The other balls may be configured to deviate from the through gates 66 and 67 and flow down.

In the first embodiment, the special symbol 2 lottery can be won by detecting the ball picked up by the tilting member 470, and the ball not picked up by the tilting member 470 enters the third winning hole 64b. Although a case has been described in which it is possible to obtain the special symbol 1 lottery by doing so, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the allocation of the special symbols that can be used to win a lottery may be reversed (a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 is detected, so that a lottery for special symbol 1 can be won, and a ball not picked up by the tilting member 470 enters the third winning hole 64b, so that a lottery for special symbol 2 can be won). In this case, if the operation pattern of the electric device 640a after the big win ends is the second operation pattern in the case of big wins A and a, and the third operation pattern in the case of big wins B, C, b, and c, the same playability as that described in the first embodiment can be maintained. Furthermore, unlike the case described in the first embodiment, a small win game is likely to occur in a state in which a ball is likely to enter the third winning hole 64b, and since it is configured so that a ball is likely to enter the specific winning hole 65a, it is possible to easily cause a situation in which a ball that has fallen from the third winning hole 64b is picked up by the specific winning hole 65a.

In addition, for example, under conditions where a ball picked up by the tilting member 470 is detected and a lottery for special pattern 2 can be won, the ball may enter the third winning hole 64b and a lottery for special pattern 2 may be won. In this case, the specific winning hole 65a may be disposed with dimensions and in a position that do not protrude outward in the left-right direction beyond the left-right outer ends of the winning unit 400.

When the electric accessory 640a is driven in the second operation pattern, most of the balls that were picked up by the tip 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 are discharged from the winning unit 400 and go to the third winning port 64b side. Flow down. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is driven in the third operation pattern, most of the balls that were picked up by the tip part 451 and flowed down inside the winning unit 400 are picked up by the tilting member 470, It does not flow out to the third prize opening 64b side. The specific winning hole 65a is arranged to receive the ball spilled from the third winning hole 64b among the balls ejected from the winning unit 400 and flowing down to the third winning hole 64b side, thereby creating new gaming characteristics. can be configured.

In other words, regardless of whether the electric device 640a is driven in the second or third operating pattern, it is possible to win the lottery for the special symbol 2. Therefore, the specific winning hole 65a may be frequently opened and closed as a small prize game.

When the electric device 640a is driven in the second operating pattern, most of the balls picked up by the tip 451 and flowing down inside the winning unit 400 flow down to the third winning opening 64b, and some of these balls spill out of the third winning opening 64b and enter the specific winning opening 65a, allowing the player to receive a large number of prize balls.

On the other hand, when the electric accessory 640a is driven in the third operation pattern, most of the balls do not head toward the specific winning opening 65a (they are picked up by the tilting member 470), so the balls that enter the specific winning opening 65a This makes it difficult for the player to receive a large amount of prize balls.

In this way, regardless of whether the electric accessory 640a is driven in the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern, the player can win the special symbol 2 lottery. Although the specific winning opening 65a frequently opens and closes, the probability that the ball is guided to the specific winning opening 65a changes depending on the operating pattern of the electric accessory 640a, so when the specific winning opening 65a is opened (small winning game It is possible to configure a game feature in which there are cases where a large amount of prize balls are obtained by entering the ball into the specific winning hole 65a at the time of occurrence (at the time of occurrence), and cases where a large amount of prize balls are not obtained.

In the first embodiment described above, as the profit that the player obtains from the ball that has flown into the winning unit 400, when the ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, no special symbol is drawn, and only the prize ball is paid out. In the above example, when the ball passes through the third prize opening 64b, the special symbol 1 is drawn and the prize ball is paid out.However, this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, when a ball passes through the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435, the special symbol 1 is drawn and a prize ball is also paid out, while when the ball passes through the third prize opening 64b, the special symbol is drawn. Instead, it may be set so that only the prize ball is paid out.

In this case, in the first operation pattern, the ball rarely passes through the opening 435a, and in addition to the number of balls entering the first winning hole 64, the frequency of drawing special symbols 1 increases by passing through the opening 435a. do.

In the second operating pattern, the balls are picked up by the tip 451 and pass through the front side of the tilting member 470 when the electric role 640a is in an excited state, making it easier for them to enter the third winning opening 64b, so the frequency of drawing special symbols is not increased by balls that flow into the winning unit 400, and more prize balls are paid out. Even when the winning unit 400 is open so that balls can pass through the opening 435a, the rate at which balls pass through the opening 435a is 1 in 10, so when the opening 435a is open during operation time t2b, almost no balls flow into the opening 435a side. Therefore, in the second operating pattern, there is almost no increase in the frequency of drawing special symbol 1.

In the third operating pattern, the ball picked up by the tip 451 during standby time t3a is likely to be picked up by the tilting member 470 during operation time t3b, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 2 increases. Also, during operation time t3b, the ball can pass through the front side of the tip 451 and through the opening 435a, so the frequency of drawing special symbol 1 also increases.

Also, the opening 435a of the detection sensor 435a may be used as an outlet (an opening for discharging balls from the play area without the payout of prize balls or the selection of patterns) and simply as a sensor for counting the passage of balls. In this case, the opening 435a can be used to measure the frequency with which balls pass through the opening 435a.

Further, the function of the second winning hole 640 and the function of the third winning hole 64b may be set oppositely. In this case, it is sufficient to set the operating pattern for the special variable probability state as the second operating pattern, and set the operating pattern for the variable probability state as the third operating pattern, so that the ball enters the third winning hole 64b. A pachinko machine can be configured in which a small win is generated in a lottery, and a ball that deviates from the third winning hole 64b can enter a specific winning hole 65a.

As a result, if the state of the nail KG1 placed directly above the third winning hole 64b is such that a ball easily enters the third winning hole 64b, a small hit is likely to occur, but there are few balls that deviate from the third winning hole 64b. Therefore, while it is possible to prevent the number of prizes in the specific winning hole 65a from becoming excessive, if the state of the nail KG1 placed directly above the third winning hole 64b makes it difficult for the ball to enter the third winning hole 64b. Although small hits are unlikely to occur, there are many balls that deviate from the third winning hole 64b, so once the specific winning hole 65a is opened, a large amount of balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. That is, it is possible to configure a pachinko machine in which whether or not it is easy to enter the third winning hole 64b (advantageous or disadvantageous) and whether or not it is easy to enter the specific winning hole 65a (disadvantageous or advantageous) is balanced.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which up to four balls can be stored between the storage plate sections 715 in the upper variable prize winning device 700, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage plate portion 715 may be formed in such a shape that only one ball can be placed therebetween. In this case, the balls stopped between the storage plates 715 are on the moving floor member 740, and the balls that collided with the balls can flow into the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. In this case, whether the ball can easily pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be easily determined by checking the presence or absence of the ball between the storage plate parts 715. Compared to the case where it is necessary to count the number of balls in between, the burden on the player can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which multiple detection sensors 750 are arranged on both the left and right sides of the storage plate section 715 in the upper variable winning device 700, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of detection sensors 750 arranged may be one. Also, when one detection sensor is arranged, one may be left on the left or right side of the storage plate section 715 and the other may be excluded, or the detection sensor 750 may be arranged in a shifted position in front of or behind the storage plate section 715.

When the detection sensor 750 is placed on the front side of the storage plate 715, it is possible to make it easier for the player to see the balls passing through the opening 751. On the other hand, when the detection sensor 750 is placed on the back side of the storage plate 715, it is possible to add an effect that the balls passing through the opening 751 are hidden by the balls stored in the storage plate 715, thereby improving the player's ability to focus on the opening 751.

In the first embodiment described above, in the upper variable prize winning device 700, the relationship between the prescribed number of balls in the round game and the number of balls that can be stored between the storage plate portion 715 is 10 to 4, but The relationship between the numbers is arbitrarily determined and is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case of 10 balls to 10 balls, if the upper variable winning device 700 receives a winning number of balls exceeding the specified number (11 or more balls winning, over winning), the opening 751 can be configured to pass through a pachinko machine. In this case, the joy of increasing the number of prize balls obtained in the round game compared to the case where only the specified number of balls enter the game, and the joy of knowing that the gaming state that is transferred after the jackpot game ends will be an advantageous state. can be given to the player at the same time.

In the first embodiment, the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are linked together, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device for driving the movable floor member 740 may be provided separately from the drive device for driving the movable top cover member 730.

In this case, in addition to the operation pattern described in the first embodiment above, a wide variety of operation patterns can be configured. For example, when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the retracted position, the movable floor member 740 can also be placed in the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent balls that have passed the front side of the movable top cover member 730 from being stored in the position between the storage plate sections 715, thereby reducing the possibility of the balls entering the opening 751.

Also, for example, when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the retracted position, the movable floor member 740 may be moved back and forth (repeatedly) on its own. In this case, if the period during which the movable floor member 740 is maintained in the retracted position is longer than 0.2 seconds, the balls can be discharged from the position between the storage plate portions 715, whereas if the period during which the movable floor member 740 is maintained in the retracted position is shorter than 0.2 seconds, the balls can be retained in the position between the storage plate portions 715.

For example, when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position, the movable floor member 740 can also be placed in the forward position. In this case, even if the movable top cover member 730 is driven to repeatedly open and close during a round of play, the balls can be maintained in a state of being stored in the position between the storage plate section 715. Furthermore, by creating a time lag of several seconds between when the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position and when the movable floor member 740 is displaced from the forward position to the retracted position, in the case where a large number of balls enter the game together just before the movable top cover member 730 is placed in the forward position, the balls can be prevented from being discharged from the position between the storage plate section 715 until the time when they reach the opening 751 and can pass through the opening 751.

In the above first embodiment, the upper variable winning device 700 is described as being opened and closed during a big win game, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the upper variable winning device 700 may be configured to be opened and closed during a small win game, and the detection sensor 750 may be configured as a detection sensor that enables a big win game to be executed when a ball passes through the opening 751.

Here, in the case where the total open time of the upper variable winning device 700 in the small winning game is up to 1.8 seconds, if the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the backward position, it will be moved to the forward position every 0.12 seconds. In a state in which the movable upper lid member 730 is repeatedly displaced back and forth according to the rule of placing the movable upper lid member 730, the movable upper lid member 730 can be placed in the retreated position up to 15 times (0.12×15=1.8).

When the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position and the movable floor member 740 is driven so that the balls placed between the storage plates 715 are not ejected, the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position. The balls flowing down the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 in a state where the movable upper lid member 730 is in a state where the balls flow down can be stored at a position between the storage plate parts 715, and the balls can easily enter the opening part 751. When the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are interlocked, this corresponds to a driving mode in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

On the other hand, when the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position and the movable floor member 740 is driven so that the balls placed between the storage plates 715 can be ejected, the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the retracted position. The balls that flow down the front side of the movable upper lid member 730 in a state where the ball is disposed in the upper lid member 730 are discharged one after another from the positions between the storage plate portions 715, making it difficult to enter the balls into the opening portion 751. When the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are interlocked, this corresponds to a driving mode in which the movable upper lid member 730 is placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more.

In the small winning game, the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are opened and closed according to a predefined drive pattern. When the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are interlocked, a large number of balls are sent to the upper variable winning device during a period in which the movable upper lid member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds. Although it is preferable to let the ball enter the ball at 700 seconds, it is difficult to tell the difference between, for example, 0.1 seconds and 0.3 seconds.

Therefore, as a drive pattern for small win games, a notification may be issued to encourage the player to shoot a ball toward the upper variable winning device 700 at a timing that is earlier than the period during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, by the time it takes for the shot ball to reach the target. If the ball is shot in accordance with this notification, the ball can be stored in a position between the storage plate sections 715, making it easier for the ball to enter the opening 751. In this way, by notifying the player of the appropriate timing for shooting the ball, it is easier to avoid ball losses caused by shooting the ball at a timing other than that indicated by the notification.

As a drive pattern for a small winning game, two periods are provided during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, during which a period during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more is provided. In this case, if the ball does not enter the opening 751 during the first period during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds, a notification may be issued to encourage the player to shoot the ball toward the upper variable winning device 700 before the second period during which the movable upper cover member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, for example, even if the ball cannot be fired due to a blockage in the ball firing device, the period in which the movable upper lid member 730 is repeatedly placed in the forward position for 0.2 seconds or more is longer. If set (eg, 15 seconds), it may increase the likelihood that the ball launcher can be unclogged during that time.

Note that the timing, which is advanced by the period until the shot ball arrives, can be changed depending on the arrangement of the upper variable winning device 700. If it is placed near the upper end of the gaming area as in the first embodiment, it will take 1 to 2 seconds, but if it is placed at the lower right edge of the gaming area, it will be longer, and on the upstream side. Depending on the length of the ball path (the path formed by the nail KG1 or the path formed by the resin member), the width varies from about 5 to 10 seconds.

Moreover, although the case where the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are linked is illustrated, in the case where the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are configured to be driven independently, the movable floor member 740 moves backward. The above-mentioned notification may be made by aiming at a period in which the device is repeatedly operated in a driving mode in which the period in which the device is placed in a certain position is less than 0.2 seconds.

In this case, the operating mode of the movable floor member 740 does not correspond to the operating mode of the movable top cover member 730, so it is difficult to correlate the length of time that the movable top cover member 730 is positioned in the forward position with the operation of the movable floor member 740. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the above-mentioned notification.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball is easily allowed to enter the opening 751 while the ball is stored between the pair of storage plate parts 715, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state changing means is provided whose state changes between a guiding state in which the ball is guided to the opening 751 and a non-guiding state in which the ball is not guided by operation, and the operation of the state changing means is caused by the operation of the pair of storage plate parts. It may be configured to be performed using the kinetic energy of the ball ejected from 715. In this case, it is possible to construct a gaming machine in which the ball can easily enter the opening 751 after the ball is ejected from between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

In the first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball is used to prevent the ball from entering the pair of storage plates 715, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an opening/closing means may be provided that switches whether or not the ball is allowed to enter the area between the pair of storage plates 715. In this case, even before the area between the pair of storage plates 715 is filled with balls, the opening/closing means can be used to create a state in which the ball cannot enter between the pair of storage plates 715, and a situation can be created in which the ball passes through the opening 751.

In this case, various sizes of the opening and closing means can be exemplified, but by making the size of the opening and closing means smaller than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, the opening and closing means can be made less noticeable, making it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the ball will flow into the opening 751.

Furthermore, by making the size of the opening/closing means larger than the size of the ball when viewed from the front, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the state of the opening/closing means, and to determine whether or not the ball is flowing into the opening 751. It can be made easier.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which a ball that passed through the second specific winning opening 700a is guided to the area between a pair of storage plates 715 with a high probability, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a nail KG1 may be arranged between the storage plates 715 and the second specific winning opening 700a in such a position that it can come into contact with the ball.

This makes it easier to induce irregular winnings in which the ball that collides with the nail KG1 passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 before the area between the pair of storage plate parts 715 becomes full. Can be done. In particular, when a plurality of balls pass through the second specific winning opening 700a in succession, irregular winnings are likely to be induced when the flow is disturbed due to contact between the balls.

On the other hand, the nail KG1 is positioned so that it is not in contact with the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections 715. This allows the balls stored in the pair of storage plate sections 715 to be discharged smoothly.

Note that it is not necessary for a nail to be arranged in such a way that it can come into contact with the ball. For example, a protrusion may be formed that protrudes forward from the base plate member 710, and the ball may collide with this protrusion. In this case, compared to the case of the nail KG1, the design freedom of the shape of the protrusion can be improved. For example, by forming it into a protrusion shape that is long in the left-right direction and slopes downward as it approaches the opening 751, the possibility of the ball being guided into the opening 751 can be increased.

Further, for example, a movable member may be disposed on the front side of the base plate member 710, so that a ball that collides with the movable member is given momentum by the movable member, so that the ball can be guided to the opening 751. You can also do it. The movement of the movable member may be a rotational movement, a linear sliding movement, or a combination thereof.

Also, for example, the second specific winning opening 700a may be reciprocated in the left-right direction, or the detection sensor 750 and the storage plate portion 715 may be reciprocating in the left-right direction, depending on the timing. There may be a case in which the passed balls flow toward the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 instead of toward the pair of storage plate portions 715.

In the first embodiment, the balls are stored directly below the second specific winning port 700a, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a ball passage extending diagonally downward is formed downstream of the second specific winning port 700a, an opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 is formed at the downstream end of the ball passage, a ball storage section extends downward at a midpoint of the ball passage, and a movable floor member 740 is disposed at the lower end of the ball storage section. In this configuration, when the ball storage section becomes full, a trailing ball rolls over the top ball in the ball storage section and flows downstream through the ball passage, and the ball passes through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

The opening direction of the second specific winning opening 700a may be in an oblique direction, and the member that opens and closes the second specific winning opening 700a need not be a sliding member, but may be a rotating member (for example, a tulip-type member that is one of a pair of opening and closing members).

The direction of the ball passageway that extends diagonally downward downstream of the second specific winning port 700a is not limited in any way. For example, it may be diagonally downward when viewed from the front (diagonally downward as it moves to the left and right), or diagonally downward when viewed in the left-right direction (diagonally downward as it moves to the front and back).

In particular, when the angle is downward toward the rear, the opening 751 can be positioned closer to the player than the ball storage section. This makes the balls passing through the opening 751 more noticeable than the balls stored in the ball storage section, making it easier for the player to see the balls passing through the opening 751.

In the first embodiment, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plates 715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plates 715 is constant, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the vertical position of the upper surface of the movable floor member 740 may change in the vertical direction over time, or the movable floor member 740 may be a plurality of plate members on which the balls at the lower ends of the storage plates 715 are placed, arranged in a vertical direction, and operated to be opened in order from the top. By changing the vertical position of the ball placed at the bottom end of the plurality of balls placed between the pair of storage plates 715, the number of balls that need to be placed between the pair of storage plates 715 in order for the balls to be placed at the upper ends of the pair of storage plates 715 may be changed.

The pair of storage plates 715 may also be configured to be displaceable so that the left-right spacing between them can be changed. In this case, if the left-right spacing is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, four balls will be enough to fill the tank, but if the left-right spacing is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, eight balls will be enough to fill the tank, so the difficulty of passing balls through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be changed.

Moreover, even in the case where the tank is filled with four pieces, compared to the case where the left-right distance between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is slightly longer than the diameter of the ball, the pair of storage plate parts 715 If the left and right distance between the balls 715 is slightly longer than twice the diameter of the ball, the vertical length of the storage plate 715 can be halved, so the height dimension for storing the balls can be reduced. Can be shortened. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the storage plate portion 715 can be improved.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball placed between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is configured to be always visible, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the visibility of the ball at the position between the storage plates 715 can be reduced (for example, it can be configured to be hidden by a movable member, or it can be configured to be difficult to see depending on the lighting). You can also do it. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing when the ball will become full at the position between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

Although the number of balls stored between the pair of storage plates 715 is four, this is not necessarily limited to this. It can be zero, one, three, or five or more. For example, by setting it to eight (a number close to the specified number), the possibility of a ball passing through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 in the third special operation pattern can be greatly reduced.

In the first embodiment described above, the balls are stored in a position between a pair of storage plate sections 715, and when the movable floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the balls are discharged from the play area through the ball removal opening 782, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the movable floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position, the balls are discharged into a crane with multiple holes.

This Kruun has one of the multiple holes designated as a specific hole that has the same function as the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750. Even if the moving floor member 740 is placed in the retracted position during a round of play without being able to confirm that the ball has passed through the opening 751, and the ball is released from a position between a pair of storage plate sections 715, the player may still be able to gain an advantage by having the ball enter the specific hole of the Kruun, thereby improving the player's ability to pay attention to the ball that is released from a position between the pair of storage plate sections 715.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which a ball following the stored ball rather than a ball stored at a position between the pair of storage plate parts 715 can pass through the opening 751, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, the middle part of the storage plate part 715 is configured to be openable and closable, and the detection sensor 750 is also disposed downstream of the opening/closing part, so that when the middle part of the storage plate part 715 is opened, It may be configured such that any one of the balls stored between the pair of storage plate parts 715 is allowed to flow and pass through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750.

In the first embodiment described above, the driving device for the movable upper lid member 730 and the driving device for the movable floor member 740 are both solenoids 763, and the case where the operation of the movable upper lid member 730 and the operation of the movable floor member 740 are linked is explained. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a drive device separate from the solenoid 763 may be provided to drive the movable floor member 740 so that they can operate independently of each other. In this case, in addition to the operation mode described in the first embodiment, there may be a case where both the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are placed in the forward position, or when both the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 are placed in the forward position. It is possible to configure the case where the device is placed in the retracted position.

In the first embodiment, the movable top cover member 730 is formed in a plate shape that slopes downward on both the left and right sides, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable top cover member 730 may be formed in a flat plate shape that slopes in one direction. Even in this case, the order of operations in which the movable floor member 740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member 730 begins to displace toward the retreated position functions appropriately, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which a ball that flows along the front side of the movable top cover member 730 at the same time as the movable top cover member 730 is displaced to the retreated position passes the front side of the movable floor member 740 before the movable floor member 740 is positioned in the forward position.

In the above first embodiment, a case has been described in which the movable floor member 740 is displaced to the forward position slightly earlier than the movable top cover member 730 starts to displace toward the retreated position, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable top cover member 730 and the movable floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the order of operations may be reversed.

Further, although the case has been described in which the moving upper cover member 730 moves to the forward position slightly earlier than the moving floor member 740 starts moving towards the backward position, the operation order is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the movable upper lid member 730 and the movable floor member 740 may be displaced at the same time, or the order of operation may be reversed.

In the above first embodiment, the front surface of the base plate member 710 arranged on the back side of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 arranged in the forward position is a smooth surface, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, multiple deceleration protrusions protruding from the front surface of the base plate member 710 to the front side in a long protrusion shape in a direction intersecting the flow direction of the ball rolling on the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 (for example, the vertical direction) may be arranged along the flow direction of the ball. Alternatively, or in addition, the upper surface of the movable upper cover member 730 may be formed in a stepped shape to slow down the flow speed of the ball.

This reduces the speed at which the balls roll down the top surface of the movable top cover member 730, so that a single opening of the movable top cover member 730 (displacing it from the forward position to the retracted position) can increase the number of balls passing through the front side of the movable top cover member 730. Therefore, even if the movable top cover member 730 is configured in such a way that the balls slip out between the pair of storage plate sections 715 when the movable top cover member 730 is closed (positioned in the forward position), the balls can be more easily stored between the pair of storage plate sections 715, and the likelihood of the balls passing through the opening 751 of the detection sensor 750 can be increased.

In the above first embodiment, a pair of storage plates 715, a movable floor member 740, and a detection sensor 750 are disposed downstream of the movable upper cover member 730, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the configuration of the movable upper cover member 730 may be omitted, and the balls may be allowed to flow down to the pair of storage plates 715, the movable floor member 740, and the detection sensor 750 at all times.

In the first embodiment, in the jackpot game, the movable upper lid member 730 is operated in the first round to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning hole 700a, and in the second round and subsequent round games, the specific winning hole 65a is opened. Although the case where the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. It is possible to arbitrarily set which specific winning hole 65a, 700a is controlled so that the ball can be entered in which round game.

For example, the movable top cover member 730 may be operated in round play from the second round onwards, and controlled to allow balls to enter the second specific winning port 700a. In this case, it can be configured so that balls enter the specific winning port 65a only in small win games (corresponding to the case where the movable top cover member 730 is operated in all round play and controlled to allow balls to enter the second specific winning port 700a), so it is possible to avoid the setting of the number of prize balls paid out for balls entering the specific winning port 65a affecting the number of prize balls in big win games.

Therefore, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the specific winning port 65a to be greater than the number of prize balls paid out for a ball that enters the second specific winning port 700a, it is possible to configure a gaming machine that limits the number of prize balls awarded for a big win game while increasing the number of prize balls awarded for a small win game.

Also, for example, by setting the number of prize balls paid out for balls entering the specific winning hole 65a smaller than the number of prize balls paid out for balls entering the second specific winning hole 700a, prize balls for small winning games can be set. It is possible to configure a gaming machine that increases the number of prize balls in a jackpot game while suppressing the number of balls (for example, keeping the number of prize balls equivalent to the number of shot balls).

In addition, when the movable top cover member 730 is operated in multiple rounds of play and controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, in the event that the game state after a big win game changes depending on whether the game ball passes through the opening 751, if the game ball passes through the opening 751 in at least one round of play controlled to allow the ball to enter the second specific winning opening 700a, the game ball is deemed to have passed through the opening 751.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which a small win is not determined in the special symbol 1 lottery, but this is not necessarily limited to this. Alternatively, the special symbol 1 may be determined to be a small hit, while the special symbol 2 may not be determined to be a small win.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a during normal operation is the first operation pattern, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured such that the normal operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a becomes a third operation pattern.

In this case, a ball can enter the second winning hole 640 from the normal medium (low probability state of the special symbol), but the fluctuation time of the special symbol 2 in the low probability state of the special symbol is long except for jackpots. Since the time period is set (10 minutes in this embodiment), it is rare to win a jackpot by drawing the special symbol 2, and basically the special symbol 1 is won by the ball entering the first prize opening 64. It is possible to create a gameplay that aims to win the jackpot through the lottery.

In this case, for example, if the game state after the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot B is set to a high probability state until the next jackpot is won, and the state in which the operation pattern of the electric role device 640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed, the electric role device 640a will be operated in the third operation pattern after the 101st special symbol drawing, which is the same as the game state after the execution of the jackpot game of jackpot A. In other words, it is possible to configure a case in which the game transitions to a special probability state after the end of the jackpot game and after a specified number of special symbol drawings (100 in the first embodiment above).

In the case of jackpot C, the state in which the operation pattern of the electric device 640a is set to the second operation pattern continues until 100 special symbol drawings are completed, and after the 101st special symbol drawing, the electric device 640a is controlled to operate in the third operation pattern, but since the special symbol is in a low probability state, it simply transitions to the normal state.

In the first embodiment, the case where the allocation of the jackpot type is different between special symbol 1 and special symbol 2 has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the allocation of the jackpot type may be set to be the same for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. In this case, since there is no difference no matter which special symbol is used to win the jackpot, the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 1 and the lottery for the jackpot of special symbol 2 can be regarded as the same. In this case, for example, by excluding the case where the lottery for special symbol 2 is executed with a long-term fluctuation (for example, a 10-minute fluctuation) and setting the fluctuation time to the same as the fluctuation time selected in the lottery for special symbol 1, it is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the number of reserved balls for the special symbol is 8 (the sum of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1, which is 4, and the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2, which is 4).

Also, for example, among the jackpots of special symbol 1, the ratio of the jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a high probability state to the jackpot type in which the gaming state after the jackpot game is a low probability state (the above-mentioned In one embodiment, 1:1), among the jackpots of special symbol 2, a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state, and a jackpot type in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a low probability state. The ratio (1:1 in the first embodiment) may be configured to be different.

In this case, by configuring the jackpot of special symbol 2 to have a larger proportion of jackpot types in which the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game is a high probability state than the jackpot of special symbol 1, It is possible to configure a gaming machine that can shift to a state where jackpots of symbols 2 are likely to occur continuously.

In the first embodiment, the case where the directional control unit display 816 can be displayed at the same time as the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect are displayed has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the company name display effect and the card forgetting prevention display effect, an adjustment period in which the directional control unit display 816 can be displayed and the volume and light intensity can be adjusted may be provided. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 indicates the end of the adjustment period and also indicates the start of the variable performance after the end of the jackpot game, so that if the player keeps an eye on the time display 811, he or she can smoothly perform actions at the appropriate timing from adjusting the volume and light intensity during the adjustment period to launching the ball after the start of the variable performance.

The duration of the ending performance is determined by the type of jackpot, but the internal structure of the ending performance can be changed even if the type of jackpot is the same. When an adjustment period is set, the period during which the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance are executed is narrower than when an adjustment period is not set, but by shortening the duration of any of the performances or executing multiple performances simultaneously, the ending performance can be executed without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Whether or not to provide an adjustment period can be set arbitrarily, but for example, if the effect executed during a jackpot game is one in which the light intensity is particularly likely to be strong (strongest light intensity) among multiple variations, or if the effect is especially loud. If it is determined that the volume is likely to become loud (maximum volume), an adjustment period may be provided in the ending performance. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the gaming burden on the player.

Regardless of whether an adjustment period is provided, the length of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance can be changed. For example, in the midst of a series of jackpots, the length of the company name display, which does not increase the amount of information even if viewed many times in a short period of time, and the card forgetting prevention display may be shortened or displayed at the same time. In this way, the ending display performance can be made longer by that amount. The ending display shows the importance to the player, such as the number of prize balls actually won (this can be only for the currently running jackpot game, or the accumulated amount for consecutive games), and the game status after the jackpot game is over. Since information with a high value is displayed, by lengthening the display period, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will miss the information.

For example, if the game state after the end of a jackpot game is a low probability state, there is a high possibility that the winning streak will come to an end, and therefore the player is likely to finish playing and leave the seat. Therefore, by lengthening the length of the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player will forget to take their cards home.

For example, when the gaming state changes to a special probability state after the end of a jackpot game, this is the timing when the player's expectations for the ball payout are at their highest, so by making the company name display visible at this timing, the current It is possible to improve the impression of the pachinko machine being played and the manufacturing company. In addition, as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, players' expectations will increase, so by setting the company name display to be longer as the number of consecutive jackpots increases, it will give a better impression. be able to.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the volume and amount of light can be adjusted in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be determined whether or not the volume and light amount has been adjusted in the ending performance, and the determination result may be configured to influence the determination of the variable performance after the ending performance is completed.

For example, if a special effect (such as a one-shot announcement effect) that tends to have a higher light intensity or sound volume than the normal notification of the main symbol stopping is prepared as a variable effect, and an adjustment to reduce the light intensity has been made during the immediately preceding ending effect, executing the special effect may cause further fatigue to the player, whose eyes are likely already tired from the light, and may cause the player to stop playing midway. Therefore, by controlling the game so that the special effect is not executed when an adjustment to reduce the light intensity has been made during the immediately preceding ending effect, the player can continue playing while waiting for their fatigue to recover.

In addition, if, during a jackpot game, the player performs an operation to change the song that will be played in the game state after the jackpot game ends, the player will likely want to hear that song, so a period of time may be set aside to display the directional operation unit display 816 during the ending performance of the currently active jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 at the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the normal symbol variation display is still ongoing at the end of the ending performance and there is a time difference between the end of the ending performance and the start of the next variation of the normal symbol, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 may be shifted (delayed) from the end of the ending performance by the amount of the time difference. This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which a ball enters the winning unit 400 in which the electric role 640a is operating in the operation pattern (operation pattern in the normal state, first operation pattern) that is continuing from the jackpot game, even though the ball is shot after the ending performance.

In other words, the ball shot after the ending performance can be made to enter the winning unit 400 in a state where the electric device 640a is operating in the operation pattern (the second operation pattern or the third operation pattern) after the transition from the end of the jackpot game.

Even in this case, when the ending performance ends, if there are any reserved balls with special symbols, the special symbols will start to change after the ending performance ends. On the other hand, since it is desired to continue displaying the time display 811, for example, the display of the ending performance may continue in the main display area Dm, the change in the special symbols may be displayed in the small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, and as soon as the timing for the next change in the normal symbols to start arrives, the display in the small area Ds3 may be expanded and moved to the main display area Dm3.

Because the special symbols will be moved on the screen, it is preferable to move them before they enter slow-changing mode (reach, etc.). Therefore, the display mode described above (movement of the special symbols) may be performed only when a specific condition is met, that is, the time difference between the end of the ending performance and the start of the next normal symbol change is shorter than the time it takes for the special symbols to transition to slow-changing mode.

However, since the decision on the variable performance is made at the start of the variation, it will be after the end of the ending performance. Therefore, it is unclear during the ending performance whether or not the above-described display mode can be performed, so after the ending performance is completed, the audio lamp control device 113 determines that the above-mentioned specific conditions are met. In this case, the terminal position 812 may be moved to the right or a number such as "+2 seconds" may be displayed to notify that the ball launch timing has fallen later. In this case, it is thought that the player starts firing the ball when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, but if the player is notified that the ball firing timing has fallen back immediately after that, then The player who sees this can stop the ball from being launched. This allows ball loss to be minimized.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the specific display 810, the frame button display 813, etc. are displayed on a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, it may be configured to be displayed on the entire display screen (full screen display), or may be displayed on different parts of the display screen.

In the first embodiment, the case where the time display 811 is displayed from the beginning of the ending performance has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time display 811 may be displayed midway through the ending performance, or may be displayed by operating the frame button 22. Also, the time display 811 may be displayed or disappear each time the frame button 22 is operated.

In the first embodiment, the time display 811 is displayed as a bar, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, any number may be displayed on the display screen, and the number may be counted down to a target value (e.g., 0 (zero)), or counted up to a target value (e.g., 600). In this case, it is possible for the player to easily gauge the timing at which the display will reach the target value (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812).

This display is not limited to being displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. For example, a second display device or a seven-segment display device separate from the third pattern display device 81 may be prepared, and a countdown or countup display may be performed on the second display device or the seven-segment display device.

Note that the time display 811 may be expressed using both a bar and a countdown (countup). For example, in addition to displaying the time display 811 as a bar, a number (for example, 3) is displayed on the display screen several seconds (for example, 3 seconds before) before the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, and the number is A countdown display may also be performed. In this case, it is possible for the player to easily determine the timing at which the display becomes 0 (corresponding to the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812).

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to configure a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid even if the frame button display 813 is not displayed.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled when the frame button display 813 is displayed on the display screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a light emitting means may be disposed inside the frame button 22, and the light emitting means may be controlled to emit light at the timing when the frame button 22 can be operated. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the position of the operation target (frame button 22).

In the first embodiment, in the ending effect, the company name display effect is executed when the game state that enters after the end of the jackpot game is the most advantageous state for the player, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is performed in the jackpot game. Although a case has been described in which the process is executed when the number of payouts is equal to or greater than eight rounds (a predetermined number or more), the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the conditions for executing the company name display effect and the conditions for executing the card forgetting prevention display effect may be replaced.

In addition, at least one of the company name display effect and the card forget prevention display effect may be set to always be executed every time a jackpot is played, regardless of the type of jackpot, or may be set to be executed at a specified number of jackpots (for example, an odd-numbered jackpot during a winning streak, or a jackpot that is a multiple of three, etc.).

Note that the content of the ending effect is not limited to the company name display effect or the card forgetting prevention display effect, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, displaying text to calm players down such as "Pachinko is a game. Be careful not to get addicted to it," or displaying a video explaining the clerk call button for players who are unfamiliar with it. , an operation explaining a button operation for returning the movable accessory to the standby position may be displayed. While any of these displays are being executed, the frame button display 813 may be displayed to prompt the user to operate the frame button 22, or the time display 811 may be displayed to notify the timing of transition to the next production. can.

In the above first embodiment, the most advantageous state for the player is the special high probability state, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the state after the end of a big win game is either the high probability state or the time-saving state (normal state) (if there is no transition to the special high probability state), the most advantageous state for the player is the high probability state.

In addition, if the state after the jackpot game is only a time-saving state and there is a difference in the number of drawings in which the time-saving state continues, the state in which the number of drawings in which the time-saving state continues is the largest is the most advantageous for the player. state.

In addition, the state after the end of the jackpot game is only a variable probability state, and while in one jackpot type, the variable probability state continues until the next jackpot, in the other jackpot type, the state shifts to a special variable state after a predetermined number of drawings. In the case (such as when the operation pattern of the electric accessory 640a in the normal state is the third operation pattern), the other jackpot type is more advantageous by the amount of prize balls obtained during the small hit game in the special probability variable state. The most gaming state for the player is the state after the end of the jackpot of the other jackpot type.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ending display effect is always executed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be configured in which no ending display performance is performed. In particular, in the case of a jackpot type where the number of prize balls paid out is extremely small compared to other jackpot types (for example, sudden probability variable jackpot, sudden normal jackpot, etc.), it is better to omit the ending display effect to increase the payout of prize balls. It is possible to prevent the player from being conscious of the fact that the number is extremely small, and it is possible to start changing the symbols at an early stage after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, in particular, effects that allow players to play games without making the boundary between a special probability variable state and a jackpot game stand out (for example, an effect that adds up the number of prize balls in a small win game and the number of prize balls in a jackpot game) ), the ending display performance is omitted during the consecutive games, and the ending display performance is executed at the end of the consecutive games, so that the special probability change state and the jackpot game are presented to the player at the same time. It can be shown as one advantageous situation.

Moreover, the above-mentioned content is not limited to the ending display effect. For example, the company name display performance and the card forget prevention display performance may be displayed at the ending display of the first jackpot that enters a series of games, but may not be displayed during the series of games regardless of the type of jackpot.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the prize ball display 801 and the identification display 802 are displayed on the screen at the same timing, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the prize ball display 801 is displayed on the screen, the identification display 802 may be displayed after the display is switched. In this case, the player can be made to understand separately the profit obtained in the jackpot game and the profit that can be obtained after transferring from the jackpot game, so that the burden on the player in playing the game can be reduced.

In the first embodiment described above, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are all set to the same length (5 seconds), but this is not necessarily limited to this, and the duration of each effect can be set arbitrarily for each type of jackpot. For example, the execution period of the card forgetting prevention display effect may be set longer than the other effects (e.g., 10 seconds, etc.), or the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be executed repeatedly.

When repeated execution is performed, it may be repeated continuously or with other effects in between. For example, it may be configured to display the ending display effect (for the second time) after the card forgetting prevention display effect has ended. In this case, the first ending display effect may display the prize ball display 801 but not the identification display 802 or the reliability display 803, and the second ending display effect may display the identification display 802 and the reliability display 803 but not the prize ball display.

This allows the timing of notifying the player of the profit (number of winning balls) that the player achieved in the jackpot game to be separated from the timing of notifying the player of the game status after the jackpot game ends, thereby reducing the burden on the player. Also, by displaying content that is of high interest to the player (identification display 802 in the above example) towards the end of the ending performance, the player's attention to the ending performance can be maintained at a high level.

In addition, when content that is of high interest to the player (in the above example, the identification display 802 can be displayed) at a predetermined timing of the ending effect, the operation of the frame button 22 is executed before the timing of switching to that display. That is, by displaying the frame button 813, the player's attention to the third symbol display device 81 is increased, and the player feels that he or she is participating in the game by operating the frame button 22. By displaying the identification display 802 immediately after operating the frame button 22, it is possible to easily avoid a situation where the player misses the identification display 802.

Note that the length of the ending performance is not limited to several seconds, and the length can be set arbitrarily (for example, depending on the type of jackpot). That is, in addition to an ending effect that ends in a few seconds, an ending effect that takes several minutes may be prepared.

In the first embodiment described above, the duration of the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect in the ending effect are all set to the same length (5 seconds), and the execution period of the ending effect changes depending on the combination of effects executed. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the execution period of the ending effect is fixed and the company name display effect is set to be short, the card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be longer instead.

In this case, a player who understands that the company name display effect has ended in a short period of time can know at that point that the card forgetting prevention display effect will be longer, and can therefore understand that the time available to change the volume and light settings will be longer, which can increase the player's motivation to operate the frame button 22.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the company name display performance is executed after the ending display performance, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is executed after the company name display performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display order of the ending display performance, company name display performance, and card forgetting prevention display performance can be set arbitrarily, and the card forgetting prevention display performance may be executed before the company name display performance.

Further, any two of the ending display effect, company name display effect, and card forgetting prevention display effect may be configured to be executed simultaneously (performed in parallel). In this case, in order to avoid overlapping displays, it is preferable to separate the display positions on the third symbol display device 81. According to this, compared to the case where the ending display effect, the company name display effect, and the card forgetting prevention display effect are executed in sequence (executed in series), the time required for the ending effect is equal to the amount of time required to execute the effects simultaneously. can be shortened.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed when the company name display effect is executed, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a jackpot type may be prepared in which the ending display performance and the company name display performance are executed, and the card forgetting prevention display performance is omitted.

In the above first embodiment, a case was described in which the frame button display 813 and the directional operation unit display 816 are displayed after the ending display performance, and the settings can be changed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ending display performance may be executed after a period during which the frame button display 813 and the directional operation unit display 816 are displayed and the settings can be changed has elapsed.

In this case, the period during which the frame button display 813 and the direction operation section display 816 are displayed may start after entering the ending effect (after the round game of the final round is finished), or may start after the end of the round game of the final round. It may also be started during the end of the round game at the end of the game. In either case, it is possible to smoothly transition from the ending display performance to the variable performance.

The timing when the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed and the directional operation unit 45 becomes operable is not limited to after the frame button 22 is operated. For example, there may be cases where the frame button display 813 is not displayed, and the directional operation unit display 816 is displayed and the directional operation unit 45 becomes operable without operating the frame button 22.

In the above first embodiment, the directional control display 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen, and the specific display 810 is moved to the edge of the display screen and visible even while the volume or light intensity is being adjusted, and the card forgetting prevention display effect is continued. However, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that the card forgetting prevention display effect disappears when the volume or light intensity is adjusted, based on the determination that a player who is about to leave his/her seat is unlikely to adjust the volume or light intensity again.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that if the frame button 22 is operated while the frame button display 813 is displayed, the screen shifts to the adjustment screen, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the screen may shift to the adjustment screen while the frame button 22 is pressed, and when the frame button 22 is released, the screen returns to the screen before the operation. This allows the player to understand that two-handed operation is optimal for changing the settings of the volume and light intensity, and allows the player to take his hands off the handle 51, thereby suppressing ball firing during the ending performance. can do.

In addition, before the player operates the frame button 22, a message may be displayed saying "You can change the light intensity and volume settings by pressing the frame button." This allows the player to immediately understand that two-handed operation is required. By requiring two-handed operation during the ending performance, it is possible to suppress the launch of balls at a timing when the player would be less profitable if they were to be launched. In other words, the notification may be made in a manner that causes the player to operate multiple operating means simultaneously at a timing when the player would be more profitable if they suppressed the launch of game balls.

Further, for example, each time the frame button 22 is operated, a state in which the volume setting can be changed (display mode) and a state in which the light intensity setting can be changed (display mode) may be switched.

For example, during the ending performance, while the frame button 22 is pressed, the screen will shift to the adjustment screen, and when the frame button 22 is released, the screen will return to the previous screen. Once the screen is moved to the presentation display screen, the control may be such that the volume and light intensity can be adjusted even if the frame button 22 is not pressed. This prevents the player from being forced to perform operations with both hands until after the ending performance has ended, so the player can change the settings of the volume and light intensity while operating the handle 51.

In the first embodiment described above, when the frame button 22 is operated according to the frame button display 813 during execution of the card forgetting prevention display effect, the specific display 810 moves to the edge of the screen, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, if the player operates the frame button 22 according to the frame button display 813 during execution of the company name display effect, the manufacturing company name (Company A) as the specific display 810 is displayed at the top left of the screen of the third symbol display device 81. The card may be moved to a corner (end side), and then a card forgetting prevention display may be displayed on the specific display 810. While the company name display effect is being executed, the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed in the center of the screen of the third symbol display device 81 to notify the player that the settings of the volume and light intensity can be changed. good.

In addition, even if the specific display 810 is displayed at the edge of the display screen, if the volume or light setting is not changed within a specified time (e.g., within 2 seconds), the specific display 810 may be set to return to the center of the screen (the position before it was moved).

In the first embodiment, the volume and light settings can be changed during the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when variations (first and second modes) are provided in the pattern of the special symbol variation performance during the special probability change, probability change, and time reduction to which the ending performance is transitioned, it is also possible to change the setting to select which one of them. Here, the combination of the first and second modes can be set arbitrarily, and examples include a combination of a black and white display mode and a color display mode, a combination of a cartoon-like display mode and an anime-like display mode, and a combination of a display mode that requires repeated tapping of the frame button 22 and a display mode that requires a long press of the frame button 22.

Further, for example, if it is possible to change the setting of a song (such as a theme song) that is played during a jackpot performance or a variable performance, the setting of the song may be changed during the ending performance. It may be performed not during the ending performance, but during a fanfare performance, during a round game, during an interval between rounds, or during a period spanning these.

In the first embodiment, it has been explained that during the ending effect, the end timing of the ending effect is notified by the time display 811 and the end position 812, and the display effect changes in accordance with the operation of the frame button 22. , but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the notification of the end timing or occurrence timing of the performance, or the change in the performance displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed while the symbols are changing or during reach, or during a jackpot game excluding the ending performance. It may be performed during the performance.

For example, when it is performed while the symbols are changing or when the reach is in progress, the announced end timing may be the timing at which the special symbol fluctuations are stopped, or the timing at which pseudo-continuous fluctuations as the effect are started. . In the former case, since the number of reserved balls of the special symbol is reduced by 1, a new special symbol can be won by lottery, so this is an appropriate timing to encourage the player to shoot the ball. In the latter case, if the variation of the special symbols itself lasts for several minutes, the player's concentration can be maintained by cutting the variations into short intervals in the middle.

When the frame button 22 is operated in conjunction with the frame button display 813 at the end of the reach, if it is a jackpot, the screen shifts to the jackpot display screen, and if it is a miss, the display screen shifts to the miss display screen. By doing so, it is possible to make it easier for the player looking at the frame button display 813 to understand the result of the change in the special symbol.

For example, it may be performed during a performance during a jackpot game, excluding the ending performance. Operation of the frame button display 813 and the frame button 22 during a round can be used, for example, for promotion performance (for example, a performance in which a fanfare performance indicates that a 4-round jackpot is actually a 15-round jackpot, or a performance in which a fanfare performance indicates that a jackpot is being won that will give the player a higher profit than the profit expected to be obtained by the player).

In particular, in the case of the first embodiment described above, where the game state after the end of a jackpot game changes depending on whether or not the ball passes through the opening 751 during a round of play, by displaying the frame button display 813 during that round of play and encouraging the player to operate the frame button 22, it is possible to divert the player's attention from the opening 751, causing the player to fail to check whether or not the ball has passed through the opening 751.

When the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a movable part that protrudes in front of the display screen, if the frame button 22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display 813 during a round and the movable part is controlled to protrude in front of the display screen when a promotion performance is executed, the player can easily tell from the movement of the movable part that the promotion performance has been successful. Even if the frame button 22 is operated in accordance with the frame button display 813 during a round, when a promotion performance is not executed (when the notification in the fanfare performance and the actual notification are the same), the movable part is controlled not to protrude in front of the display screen, making it easy for the player to know that the promotion performance has failed.

For example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during the game instruction display effect (demo screen) that is executed when the first symbol is not drawn for a predetermined period of time. In this case, the notification can let the player know that the game instruction display effect has been completed.

Furthermore, for example, notification of the end timing of the performance or changes in the performance displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be applied to a game in which a ball passes through a predetermined detection port within a predetermined time. The process may be performed when the ball has not yet passed through the detection port. In this case, the notification can make the player aware that the ball has not passed through the detection port.

Also, for example, notification of the end of the effect or changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during the fanfare effect in a big win game or during the interval between rounds. In this case, the specific winning hole 65a or the second specific winning hole 700a will be opened at the end of the effect, so the player can easily know the appropriate timing to shoot the ball.

In addition, for example, notification of the end of the effect and changes in the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22 may be performed during a period that includes multiple rounds of play and multiple intervals between rounds in a jackpot game. This makes it possible to create an effect that lasts longer than the time set for a single round of play or the interval between rounds, and by making it possible to notify the player of the end of the long-lasting effect and change the effect displayed in response to the operation of the frame button 22, the player can be kept focused on the game without getting bored.

In the first embodiment, the case where the card forgetting prevention display effect is executed in the ending effect has been described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the number of reserved balls for the first pattern becomes 0. In this case, the card forgetting prevention display effect can be made visible to the player even before winning the jackpot.

Further, for example, it may be executed at the start of a long-term (for example, 60 seconds or more) fluctuation of the first symbol. In this case, players who are thinking of purchasing drinks or the like during their free time can be notified that the first symbol will begin to fluctuate for a long period of time, and also prevent them from forgetting their cards when they leave their seats. It can alert you.

In the first embodiment described above, the period in which the direction operation section display 816 is displayed and the light intensity and volume can be adjusted is until the end of the ending effect or until the first change after the end of the ending effect. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be set during a high-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol while the first symbol is fluctuating, or during a medium-speed fluctuation display of the third symbol. In this case, from the timing when the direction operation section display 816 is displayed and the period in which the light amount and volume can be adjusted ends, the timing when the high-speed fluctuation display changes to the medium-speed fluctuation display, or from the timing when the medium-speed fluctuation display changes to the low-speed fluctuation display. The player can grasp the timing of transition to variable display (reach display, etc.).

Further, it may be possible to configure a period during which the direction operation section display 816 is displayed and the light amount and volume can be adjusted during the variation of the special symbol (including during the display of low-speed variation). In this case, the direction operation unit display 816 may be displayed in the small area Ds3, or the display may be interchangeable between the small area Ds3 and the main display area Dm.

In this case, during the variable display of the special symbol, a notification indicating that an adjustable period is prepared is executed, and then a notification of that period is executed, and a frame button 813 etc. is displayed, The notification may be configured to be performed in stages such that the direction operation section display 816 can be displayed and the volume and light amount can be adjusted. In this case, since the player's interest can be shifted step by step even while the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner, a situation may arise where the player does not realize that there is a period in which adjustments can be made. can be easily avoided.

In addition to this, the adjustment of the volume and light intensity may be controlled so that it remains effective from the next change onwards, and if the special symbol that changed when the volume and light intensity adjustment was made becomes a jackpot, the player may be controlled so that the jackpot game can be played while maintaining the volume and light intensity adjustment.

In addition, for example, the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until multiple fluctuations are completed, rather than being limited to the first fluctuation, or the period during which the light intensity and sound volume are adjustable may be configured to continue until the fluctuation of the first pattern reaches a predetermined state (for example, a long-term fluctuation, a fluctuation that results in a jackpot, etc.).

Furthermore, in the latter half of a variable performance that becomes a jackpot or in a fanfare performance, a period may be provided in which the direction operation unit display 816 is displayed and the amount of light and volume can be adjusted. In this case, the volume can be set during the jackpot, and the player can know the start timing of the jackpot game from the timing of the end of the period.

In the first embodiment, the terminal position 812 is fixed, and the time display 811 moves over time, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the speed at which the time display 811 moves may be constant, or the speed at which the time display 811 moves may be changed midway. Also, for example, the right end of the time display 811 may be configured to move in the opposite direction (leftward) in some cases.

Further, for example, the terminal position 812 may be configured to be movable. That is, by moving the terminal position 812 while the time display 811 is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

Note that the movement of the terminal position 812 may be configured to wait for the time display 811 to arrive and move immediately after the time display 811 has arrived, or to move the terminal position 812 before the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It may be configured so that it moves at.

Further, the moving direction of the terminal position 812 as the moving destination of the time display 811 is not limited to the left-right direction. For example, it may move vertically or it may move in a spiral manner. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the time until the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812.

In the first embodiment, the direction operation section 816 is displayed in the center of the display screen and the specific display 810 is moved to a corner of the display screen by operating the frame button 22 in the ending effect. It is not limited to this. For example, the specific display 810 may be placed at the corner of the display screen before the frame button 22 is operated. Further, for example, by operating the frame button 22, the movable accessory may extend to the vicinity of the center of the display screen, and the display position of the specific display 810 may be changed to a position where it is not hidden by the movable accessory.

In addition, for example, the specific display 810 may be set to disappear by operating the frame button 22 during the ending performance, or the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed only when the frame button 22 is operated during the ending performance, or a combination of these may be used.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the display mode of the horizontal scale display 818 on the display screen changes when the volume is changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in addition to or in place of this, a predetermined line may be output when the volume is changed.

For example, if the system is configured to output a line such as "Please be careful not to forget to take out a card," each time the player changes the volume, it is possible to alert the player to not forgetting a card.

The content, volume or voice (tone of voice) of the dialogue may also be changed in response to the changed volume. In particular, when the content of the dialogue (e.g., "Be careful not to forget to pick up your card" or "Make sure you take your card home with you") or the tone of voice changes (e.g., the tone of voice of a different character), this makes it easy for the player to set the volume to their liking.

In the first embodiment described above, a case has been described in which the comments displayed in the caution comment display 815 and the second caution comment display 819 in the ending effect match the targets that the player can change settings for, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, comments that do not match the settings that can be changed by the player may be displayed.

In this case, if there is a jackpot among the pending starting winnings, the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819 will display an expectation display such as "Jackpot!?" or "Big chance occurring" ( By displaying comments that make the player expect that a jackpot might be possible, the player can look forward to winning the next jackpot during the ending performance, so the player's attention to the ending performance is It is possible to improve the player's ability to operate the frame button 22, and to increase the player's desire to operate the frame button 22.

When an expectation is displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819 and a jackpot can already be expected, it is normal to refrain from firing the ball until the jackpot game starts in order to avoid wasting balls. It is. Therefore, even if the time display 811 is made to reach the terminal position 812 in time with the end of the ending performance, it is highly likely that the player's attention cannot be increased.

Therefore, the time display 811 may be configured to reach the terminal position 812 not when the ending presentation ends, but when the variable presentation of the lottery that results in a big win ends. In this case, the player's attention to the time display 811 and the terminal position 812 can be improved.

In this case, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed starting from the ending performance and continuing until the timing when the variable performance of the lottery that results in a big win ends, or may not be displayed during the ending performance and may be displayed after the transition to the subsequent variable performance.

In the former case, the player realizes that he has already won the jackpot even when he is watching the ending effect, so the player understands that there is no need to fire the ball immediately after the jackpot game ends. Can be done. Therefore, the player can suppress the ball from being launched.

In the latter case, when the ending performance is shifted to the variable performance, the time display 811 and the end position 812 may be displayed without waiting for the variable performance of the lottery that will become a jackpot, or the fluctuating performance of the lottery that will be a jackpot has started. It may be displayed later or at the same time as the start of the variable effect. In either case, the player can know that he will win the jackpot even before the fluctuating performance ends, so for example, the fluctuating performance may take a long time (for example, it takes 10 minutes for one fluctuation). ), it is possible for the player to suppress the ball launch, and it is easier to avoid the situation where the player leaves the gaming machine without realizing that there is a jackpot on the pending starting prize. can.

In addition, if there is a jackpot among the pending starting prizes, the expectation display will not be displayed in the ending performance, but the time display 811 and the end position 812 will be displayed during the variable performance, and the lottery that will be a jackpot will be displayed. It may be configured in such a manner that the end position 812 is reached at the timing when the variable performance ends.

In addition, in the case where there is a jackpot among the pending starting winnings, the display mode may be changed in accordance with the number of starting winnings that become a jackpot. For example, when the number of starting prizes that become a jackpot is 2, an expectation display such as "Jackpot x 2!?" may be displayed on the caution comment display 815 or the second caution comment display 819, or " Multiple jackpots!?" is an expectation display that indicates that there will be multiple jackpots, but it may be unclear how many starting prizes will be jackpots. Thereby, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In this case, if the time display 811 is configured to reach the end position 812 at the timing when the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in a jackpot ends, the player's attention can be smoothly shifted to the jackpot game by setting the timing to the end of the variable presentation of the lottery that will result in the first jackpot after the end of the ending presentation.

In addition, the display position of comments that do not match the settings that the player can change may be set in small area Ds3, and the comment may be configured to become visible when frame button display 813 disappears as a result of frame button 22 being operated while frame button display 813 is displayed, or the display of the comment may be set to cover the entire display screen (full-screen display). In this case, the player's motivation to operate frame button 22 may be increased.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the card forgetting prevention display effect shifts to the next variable effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a single picture (still picture) may be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 between the card forgetting prevention display effect and the next variable display screen. In this case, if the symbol variation starts at the time when the display of a single picture starts, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the end position 812 coincides with the time when the display of the single picture starts. It is good to set it like this.

Further, the symbol variation may be started some time after the transition to the variation display screen after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, the timing at which the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is preferably set to the timing after the transition to the variable display screen after the end of the jackpot game.

In the first embodiment, a case has been described in which the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is set as the timing suitable for the player to start shooting the ball, but this is not necessarily the case. It's not something you can do. For example, the time display 811 is displayed during a period in which the player can earn a predetermined profit by shooting a ball, and the player can shoot the ball at the timing when the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812. It may be configured as an appropriate timing to end the process. In this case, the player can be encouraged to shoot the ball during the period when the time display 811 is moving to the right, and the player can be urged to stop shooting the ball at an appropriate timing. Can be done.

In this case, if the specified conditions are met before the right end of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812, a character string such as "Ready" may be displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, or the display on the display screen may be switched, to notify the player that the specified conditions have been met. In this case, the display of the time display 811 may be maintained even after the specified conditions are met, or the display of the time display 811 may be turned off when the specified conditions are met.

For example, if the gaming machine is controlled so that a string of characters is displayed on the display screen when the number of reserved balls of special symbol 1 (special symbol 2, or both) reaches four (full), the player can see by the string of characters that he will not be able to win the lottery for special symbol 1 (special symbol 2, or both) even if he shoots any more balls. This makes it possible to urge the player to stop shooting balls at the appropriate time, without having to suddenly change the speed at which the time display 811 moves.

In the above first embodiment, a warning comment display 815 is displayed before pressing the frame button 22, and a second warning comment display 819 is displayed after pressing the frame button 22, but this is not necessarily limited to the above.

For example, the system may be controlled so that after pressing the frame button 22, only the caution comment display 815 is displayed, the direction operation section 816 and the vertical scale display 817 are displayed, but the horizontal scale display 818 is not displayed. In this case, the content of the caution comment 815 that was displayed before pressing the frame button 22 matches the target (light intensity) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button 22 can be increased.

For example, if the caution comment display 815 has disappeared and only the second caution comment display 819 is displayed before pressing the frame button 22, the second caution comment display 819 may be displayed after pressing the frame button 22 without displaying the caution comment display 815, and the direction operation unit 816 and horizontal scale display 818 may be displayed but the vertical scale display 817 may not be displayed. In this case, the content of the second caution comment 819 that was displayed before pressing the frame button 22 matches the target (volume) whose settings can be changed by operating the frame button 22, so the player's satisfaction with operating the frame button 22 can be increased.

As a result, the player can select whether or not to operate the frame button 22 after confirming in advance whether or not the setting of the object (volume or light intensity) that the player wants to change can be changed. , the burden of operating the frame button 22 can be reduced.

Although the case has been described where the frame button display 813 and the operation target when the frame button 22 is operated are displayed in separate locations, this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the triangular mark on the frame button display 813 is a musical note, the volume can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22, whereas when the triangular mark on the frame button display 813 is a light bulb mark, the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22. In other words, the display mode of the frame button display 813 itself can be changed to notify the target that can be adjusted by operating the frame button 22.

In addition, if there are multiple operating means corresponding to the frame button 22 and each has a different shape, the frame button display 813 can be configured to display the different shapes, so that the frame button display 813 can inform the player which operating means to operate. In this case, the adjustable target may be configured to change depending on the operating means operated.

In the second embodiment, the slide member 2450 is molded integrally with the front protrusion 2457, but this is not necessarily limited to the above. For example, the front protrusion 2457 and the slide member 2450 may be molded separately, and the front protrusion 2457 may be displaced upward and downward due to load transmission accompanying the forward and backward sliding movement of the slide member 2450, thereby switching between a case in which the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface 431a and a case in which they do not protrude from the upper surface of the bottom surface 431a.

In this case, compared to when the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are displaced in the forward/rearward direction, the component of the load applied to the ball from the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b along the flow direction of the ball in the central flow path 2431 can be made smaller, making it easier to avoid a situation in which the ball is erroneously accelerated when the ball interference protrusions 2458a, 2458b are displaced forward.

In the above fourth embodiment, the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 are integrally formed, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by configuring the obstruction rod portion 4425 to be attachable to the rolling plate portion 4421, the rolling plate portion 4421 can be used both when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is not attached and when the obstruction rod portion 4425 is attached to the rolling plate portion 4421, and costs can be reduced by making the rolling plate portion 4421 a common part.

Further, for example, the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 may be formed separately, and the obstruction rod portion 4425 may be configured to interlock with each other when the rolling plate portion 4421 is operated. Thereby, the degree of freedom in arranging the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 can be improved. In this case, the drive device that drives the rolling plate portion 4421 may also be used as the drive device that drives the obstruction rod portion 4425, or a separate drive device may be provided.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 is disposed on the right side of the right end of the guide portion 4413, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the downstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 may be extended to the left and may be formed to cover the upper surface of the guide portion 4413. In this case, the ball rolling down the upper surface of the rolling plate portion 4421 can be smoothly placed on the guide portion 4413. That is, the height position of the rolling plate part 4421 is lowered (sinks) due to the weight of the ball, and the upper surface of the rolling plate part 4421 is arranged at a lower position than the upper surface of the guide part 4413, so that the height position of the rolling plate part 4421 is lowered than the upper surface of the guide part 4413. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the flow resistance increases when the ball that has reached the side moves to the guide portion 4413 side. The same can be said of the upstream end of the rolling plate portion 4421 and both ends of the opening/closing member of the variable prize winning device 65.

In the fourth embodiment, a case has been described in which the electric accessory 4420 slides in the front-rear direction, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced. For example, in the fourth embodiment, the rotational axis of the rotational displacement is the direction along the opening in which the rolling plate portion 4421 appears (the horizontally long opening formed on the back side of the flow path forming portion 4410). It may be arranged so that it extends.

A horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate is formed so as to hang down from the rotation axis. The hanging state of the opening/closing plate corresponds to the non-guiding state, and in this state, an obstructing part capable of obstructing the passage of the ball is formed at the downstream end of the opening/closing plate so as to correspond to the obstructing rod portion 4425. By rotating the opening/closing plate 90 degrees in the direction in which it stands up (rearward rotation direction) from the non-guiding state, the opening/closing plate is placed in a state in which it can guide the ball toward the guide portion 4413, which corresponds to the guiding state. In this state, the obstructing part is retracted to the rear side of the flow path configuration portion 4410.

With this configuration, even if the ball flows toward the plate-shaped portion 4412 side than the rotating shaft in the non-guiding state, the ball will be affected depending on the arrangement of the ball when the opening/closing plate is displaced in the backward rotation direction. can be lifted above the rotation axis.

In addition, the rotation axis of the pivotal displacement may be arranged to extend in the front-rear direction at the lower end of the opening from which the rolling plate portion 4421 appears and disappears in the fourth embodiment. The state in which the opening and closing plate extends from the rotation axis in the same direction as the guiding state in the fourth embodiment is configured as the guiding state. The vertical arrangement of the ball entrance 4411 and the ceiling portion 4414 is pulled upward so that the opening and closing plate can be pivotally displaced from the guiding state to a state in which it rotates 90 degrees counterclockwise around the rotation axis (corresponding to the non-guiding state). In other words, according to this configuration, the state in which the opening and closing plate is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the guiding state is configured as the non-guiding state, and the rolling plate portion 4421 and the obstruction rod portion 4425 in the fourth embodiment are configured from the same part.

With this configuration, when the opening/closing plate is rotated from the guiding state to the non-guiding state, all of the balls riding on the top surface of the opening/closing plate in the guiding state are guided to the guide portion 4413 side. be able to. As a result, when the electric accessory 4420 is slid and displaced from the guided state to the non-guided state in the fourth embodiment, most of the balls riding on the upper surface of the rolling plate part 4421 in the guided state are transferred to the plate-like part 4411. Compared to flowing down to the side, the ball can be easily guided to the guide portion 4413 side.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball receiving rotating member 5771 that is rotationally displaced between the second specific winning hole 700a and the opening 751 is disposed, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed from a rotating part configured to be able to swing left and right, and may be operable to distribute the falling path of the ball to either the left or right.

Furthermore, for example, an opening/closing plate that slides may be provided. In this case, the opening/closing plate may be used to open/close the flow path or opening 751 to the area between the pair of storage plate parts 715.

The opening/closing plate may be configured to be positioned on the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plates 715 or on the opening 751, thereby switching the flow path of the balls. That is, the opening/closing plate may be configured to be able to switch between a state in which the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plates 715 is open while the opening 751 is closed, and a state in which the flow path to the area between the pair of storage plates 715 is closed while the opening 751 is open.

In the fifth embodiment, a case has been described in which the balls are received one by one in the ball receiving recess 5772, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the configuration may be such that a predetermined number exceeding one (for example, two each) can be accepted. In this case, when the ball receiving rotating member 5771 rotates at a constant speed, a plurality of balls (a predetermined number) can be made to enter the position between the pair of storage plate portions 715 at once.

In the above fifth embodiment, the ball receiving rotation member 5771 is always rotated in a clockwise direction, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, while the ball is always rotated, it may be rotated counterclockwise at a predetermined interval. In this case, even if a ball becomes trapped between the ball receiving recess 5772 and the flow-down restriction member 5778, the ball can be eliminated by reversing the direction of rotation.

Further, in the case of a predetermined jackpot type, the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be stopped for the first 10 seconds of the round game, and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be rotated after the 10 seconds have elapsed. In this case, since it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down toward the pair of storage plates 715 (toward the opening 751) during the first 10 seconds, the balls guided toward the movable upper lid member 730 as the nail KG1 are In a state in which more balls miss, the number of balls entering the second specific winning hole 700a during the first 10 seconds can be reduced, so the possibility that the ball will pass through the opening 751 can be increased.

Further, for each type of jackpot, the rotation direction of the ball receiving rotating member 5771, the rotation speed (including whether it is constant or variable), whether or not the rotation direction is reversed, etc. may be set. In this case, attention to the ball receiving rotating member 5771 can be improved.

In the above fifth embodiment, the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is narrow enough that the ball does not spill sideways when it flows from the second specific winning opening 700a to the ball receiving recess 5772, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the second specific winning opening 700a and the ball receiving rotating member 5771 may be longer than the diameter of the ball, and when the ball receiving recess 5772 is filled with balls, the ball that passes through the second specific winning opening 700a may spill sideways and flow to the inclined plate portion 5718b.

In this case, even if the rotation of the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is stopped, the ball entering the second specific winning port 700a is not impeded, so the ball receiving rotating member 5771 can be controlled to stop at a predetermined timing.

When the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is stopped during a round of play, it is possible to prevent balls from flowing into the position between the pair of storage plate sections 715 until the ball receiving rotating member 5771 is next started to operate, so that it is possible to delay the timing at which the ball is introduced into the position between the pair of storage plate sections 715 and the timing at which the ball passes through the opening 751.

In the sixth embodiment, the predetermined length of time that elapses from the time when the right tip of the launch time display 6811 reaches the terminal position 812 to the time when the right tip of the time display 811 reaches the terminal position 812 is designed to be slightly longer than the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates 66, 67 (the position indicated by the target suggestion display 6822), but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the predetermined length of time may be designed to be longer by taking into account the probability of the ball entering the through gates 66, 67, using the average length of time that elapses from when the ball is launched until it reaches the through gates 66, 67 as a comparison target.

In the sixth embodiment, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display the target suggestion display 6822 to encourage the player to aim at the through gates 66 and 67, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine in which a jackpot game, a time-saving state, a probability change state, or a special probability change state is played by hitting the right hand, the display screen may display "Right Hit" instead of the target suggestion display 6822. Also, when the target suggestion display 6822 is enlarged, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be enlarged as a whole. Alternatively, the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 throughout the ending performance, or the display of "Right Hit" may be configured to be displayed somewhere on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 from the middle of the ending performance.

For example, when the goal suggestion display 6822 is displayed as a fanfare effect, the goal suggestion display 6822 may be designed to suggest aiming at the second specific winning opening 700a or the opening 751 of the upper variable winning device 700. In this case, if the goal suggestion display 6822 is set to remain on the display screen during the first round of play until the passage of the ball is detected at the opening 751, the player By disappearing 6822, it is possible to know that the ball has passed through the opening 751, so that attention to the target suggestion display 6822 can be improved.

In addition to the method of encouraging the player to aim at the through gates 66, 67 on the display screen, such as the target suggestion display 6822, it is also possible to provide a light emitting means for illuminating the vicinity of the through gates 66, 67 on the game board 13, and to have the light emitting means illuminate at the same time as the target suggestion display 6822 is displayed. This allows the player to rely on the light to know where to aim the ball.

Moreover, although the case where the goal suggestion display 6822 is displayed in the ending effect has been described, it is not limited to this. For example, when transitioning from the ending performance to the variable performance, the target suggestion display 6822 may be configured to continue to be displayed for a predetermined period even in the variable performance. Further, the display period of the target suggestion display 6822 may be set to a predetermined time width, or the target number of balls entering the target ball entrance (as the number of reserved balls in the first symbol) The process may continue until a permissible number (four in this embodiment) is detected.

In the sixth embodiment, the game stop suggestion display 6831 is used to prompt the player to stop shooting the ball, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the game stop suggestion display 6831 may be used to prompt the player to stop operating the frame button 22. This allows a player who operates the frame button 22 without knowing that it is an inappropriate timing for operating the frame button 22 to know that he or she is operating the frame button 22 at an inappropriate timing, thereby reducing the burden on the player when playing the game.

The game stop suggestion display 6831 may also be configured with a message that prompts the player to stop executing the "right hit" but not to stop the "left hit" (for example, a comment saying "Please return to left hit").

In addition, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, the illumination elements 29 to 33 and the indicator lamp 34 may be made to emit a strong light or an abnormal color (for example, a deep red), or a comment such as "Please stop shooting balls" or "Please return to left-handed hitting" may be output at a loud volume from a speaker.

In the sixth embodiment, it was explained that the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed when the passage of a ball through the through gates 66, 67 is detected before the end of the ending performance, but this is not necessarily limited to this. In other words, it may be displayed when a ball is detected entering a specified ball entry port even during a period when no balls are scheduled to enter the specified ball entry port.

The predetermined ball entry openings are not limited to the through gates 66 and 67, and may include various ball entry openings (general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, through gate 67, specific winning opening). 65a, second specific winning opening 700a, opening 751, etc.).

For example, periods when a ball is not scheduled to enter include during the execution of an ending effect, as well as periods other than a predetermined period on a right-handed machine (a gaming machine that plays the game with right-handed bats during a predetermined period such as a time-saving state). An example is the period of . That is, by setting the game stop suggestion display 6831 to be displayed when a ball entering the ball entrance located on the right side of the gaming area is detected during a period other than the predetermined period, inappropriate It is possible to prevent the player from hitting right at the right timing.

In addition, for example, examples of periods when a ball is not expected to enter the jackpot include the fanfare effect during a jackpot game and the first interval time Int1 between rounds. In other words, by setting the game stop indication 6831 to be displayed when a ball is detected entering the ball entry port during the fanfare effect or the first interval time Int1 between rounds, it is possible to suppress the release of balls when the flow path to the specific winning port 65a or the second specific winning port 700a is not open (closed), and the occurrence of wasted balls can be minimized.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game stop suggestion display 6831 prompts the user to immediately stop shooting the ball, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display may be changed in accordance with the number of reserved balls in the lottery due to balls entering a predetermined starting hole (for example, the second winning hole 640).

That is, for example, if the ball is controlled so that it can be expected that the ball will enter a predetermined starting port, and there is a margin until the number of balls on hold is full (four balls) (for example, if the number of balls on hold is 2) ), the game stop suggestion display 6831 displays a comment that the player can understand as the margin (for example, "2 more pieces"), or the game stop suggestion display 6831 is not displayed and a game preparation suggestion is made. Display 6841 is displayed, and when the number of reserved balls is full, the game stop suggestion display 6831 as explained in the sixth embodiment, or a comment such as "Ready completed", indicates that the balls will not be launched. It may be configured to suggest that it is unnecessary.

In the sixth embodiment, a case has been described in which the game stop suggestion display 6831 is displayed when ball shooting is detected, prompting the user to stop shooting the ball, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of the game stop suggestion display 6831, or in conjunction with the game stop suggestion display 6831, information that is beneficial to the player may be displayed (notified). As a result, the player's sense of regret can be reduced compared to the case where the player only feels the sense of regret that he hit the ball in vain. Not only that, but depending on the situation, it is possible to encourage the player to shoot the ball as desired during the ending performance.

In this case, examples of information that is beneficial to the player include information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state for the first symbol or a high probability state for the first symbol, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a normal state, a time-saving state, a high probability state, or a special high probability state, information on whether the operating pattern of the electric device 640a will change or not after a predetermined number of lottery draws have passed after the jackpot game ends, information on whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls in the lottery for the first symbol that is currently reserved, and information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the setting of the jackpot probability for the first symbol (for example, the jackpot probability for the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability for the high probability state can be changed to 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)).

In the seventh embodiment, a case was described in which the setting change is canceled (initialized) when a specified time has passed since the light intensity or volume setting change was performed, but this is not necessarily limited to this, and various conditions for canceling the setting change are exemplified. For example, the condition for canceling the setting change may be a transition to a game explanation display (a so-called demo screen) that is executed on the display screen before the game starts, or the condition for canceling the setting change may be a specified time that is determined by controlling the time, or a specified number of jackpots on the same day or over multiple days.

Furthermore, the frame button 22 is operated at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the frame button display 813 is displayed in the game explanation display before the start of the game, the timing when the frame button display 813 is not displayed during the game, etc.). This may be set as a condition for canceling the setting change, or it may be set as a condition for canceling the setting change that the passing of a ball is detected in a predetermined prize opening or through gate 66, 67 during the ending performance. , the acquisition of a jackpot of a predetermined jackpot type may be a condition for canceling the setting change, or a ball removal notification that is notified when the amount of balls stored in the upper tray 17 exceeds the allowable amount is executed. The condition for canceling the setting change may be that the setting change is canceled.

Further, the notification is set to be performed when it is determined that the ball is flowing down the right side game area 303, such as when the passage of the ball is detected by the through gate 67 at a timing when a right-handed game should not be played. , a notification to encourage the player to play the game with left-handed playing (for example, a notification that outputs a voice such as "Please return to playing left-handed"), and a left-pointing arrow and " A condition for canceling the setting change may be that a notification displaying the comment "Please return to left-handed batting" is executed.

In the seventh embodiment, a case has been described in which the settings for the volume and light intensity can be changed in the ending effect, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be switchable between a state where only the volume can be changed, a state where only the light amount can be changed, and a state where both the volume and the light amount can be changed. This switching may be performed by operating the frame button 22, or may be performed by the audio lamp control device 113 in accordance with the performance to be performed.

In the seventh embodiment described above, a case was described in which the player can grasp the volume and light intensity settings immediately before the volume and light intensity setting changes are canceled from the past light intensity display 7817 and past volume display 7818, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a numerical value indicating the difference between the current state and the immediately previous setting value may be displayed or sounded as "+1" or "-2" or the like. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the operations required to return to the settings before cancellation.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the settings before the volume or light intensity settings were cancelled is suggested is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when a player is changing the volume or light intensity settings, the settings before the change may be suggested. In this case, even if the player intentionally makes a change, if he or she does not like the change after actually making it, the player can easily revert to the original settings. This lowers the hurdle for changing the volume or light intensity settings.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the scattered frame button displays 8813 are materialized when they are combined, and the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled. However, this is not necessarily limited to the display mode. For example, the semi-transparent frame button display 8813 may be configured to materialize at a predetermined timing, not as a display to encourage the operation of the frame button 22 (regardless of whether the display is related to operation), but as a display that indicates the elapsed time of the ending performance.

In addition, for example, a single translucent frame button display 8813 may be displayed moving or stationary, and switched between a translucent state and a materialized state at a predetermined timing. In this case, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the frame button display 8813 will be materialized, thereby improving attention to the frame button display 8813.

In the eighth embodiment, the timing at which the frame button display 8813 materializes is displayed as the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a mark or comment (such as "PUSH") suggesting the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated may be displayed in the horizontally elongated frame in which the time display 811 moves. In this case, the time display 811 can be used both to suggest the timing at which the ending performance will end and to suggest the timing at which the frame button 22 is operated.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the scattered frame button displays 8813 move and merge, and then move further apart, is described, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after the frame button displays 8813 merge and materialize, when the period during which the operation of the frame button 22 is valid has passed, the frame button displays 8813 may be controlled to disappear.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which whether the frame button display 8813 is translucent or materialized corresponds to whether the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled or disabled, but this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, during the period in which the frame button display 8813 is materialized, a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is disabled and a state in which the operation of the frame button 22 is enabled may be configured.

For example, the timing of switching between enabling and disabling the operation of the frame button 22 may be set to the same as that described in the eighth embodiment above, and the frame button display 8813 may be configured to be materialized and displayed in the center of the display screen immediately after the card forget prevention display performance begins.

In the eighth embodiment, the case was described where each of the periods T81, T82, and T83 is set as a dividing line between a period in which operation of the frame button 22 is invalid and a period in which operation is valid, but this is not necessarily limited to this. For example, operation of the frame button 22 may be valid during each of the periods T81, T82, and T83, and the difference between each of the periods T81, T82, and T83 may be set as a difference in the performance mode to which the operation of the frame button 22 leads.

That is, when the frame button 22 is operated in the first period T81, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting can be changed but the light intensity setting cannot be changed, when the frame button 22 is operated in the second period T82, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where both the volume setting and the light intensity setting can be changed, and when the frame button 22 is operated in the third period T83, the screen transitions to an adjustment display screen where the volume setting cannot be changed but the light intensity setting can be changed. In addition to this, the difference between each period T81, T82, and T83 may be set as a difference in the performance display (moving image to be displayed) transitioned to by operating the frame button 22.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which the periods T81, T82, and T83 are set to the same length, but the length is not necessarily limited to this. The length of each period T81, T82, T83 can be set arbitrarily, and the setting contents can be made to correspond to various conditions.

For example, the length of each period T81, T82, and T83 may be set differently for each type of jackpot, or the second period T82 may be set to be shorter during a streak in which the probability of winning continues multiple times, since it is unlikely that the settings will be changed at this point.

In addition, especially in the case of jackpot types where the volume and light intensity are large (maximum round jackpot, particularly intense (long) jackpot), the second period T82 is set to be longer to make it easier to change settings. You may do so. In this case, if the first period T81 is set short, it is possible to secure a long period for changing the settings of the volume and light amount in the ending effect, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

In the eighth embodiment, a case has been described in which it is possible to change the settings of the light amount and volume by operating the frame button 22 according to the display mode of the frame button display 8813, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by operating the frame button 22, information that is profitable to the player may be displayed.

In this case, examples of information that is beneficial to the player include, as described above, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a low probability state for the first symbol or a high probability state for the first symbol, information on whether the game state after the jackpot game ends is a normal state, a time-saving state, a probability variable state, or a special probability variable state, information on whether the operating pattern of the electric device 640a will change or not after a predetermined number of lottery draws have elapsed after the jackpot game ends, information on whether there is a jackpot among the reserved balls in the lottery for the first symbol that is currently reserved, and information that suggests the current jackpot probability setting when the gaming machine is configured to be able to change the setting of the jackpot probability for the first symbol (for example, the jackpot probability for the low probability state can be changed to 1/320 (setting 1) or 1/256 (setting 2), and the jackpot probability for the high probability state can be changed to 1/32 (setting 1) or 1/26 (setting 2)).

The present invention may be implemented in a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-mentioned embodiments. For example, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine (commonly called a two-time right machine or a three-time right machine) in which the expected value of a jackpot is increased until a jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, two or three times) including the first jackpot. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which the player is given a predetermined game value after the jackpot pattern is displayed, with the necessary condition being that the ball enters a predetermined area. It may also be implemented as a pachinko machine that has a winning device with a special area such as a V zone, and the special game state is entered with the necessary condition being that the ball enters the special area. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, it may be implemented as various gaming machines such as arepachi, mahjong ball, slot machines, and gaming machines that are a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine.

Slot machines are well known in that, for example, after inserting a coin and determining the effective line of symbols, a lever is operated to change the symbols, and a stop button is operated to stop and finalize the symbols. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "a slot machine that has a display device that displays a variable display of a string of identification information consisting of multiple identification information, and then displays the determined identification information, and that starts the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., a lever), stops the variable display of the identification information due to the operation of a stop operation means (e.g., a stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and generates a special game that awards a predetermined game value to the player, provided that the combination of identification information at the time of the stop is a specific one." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins, medals, etc.

An example of a gaming machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine is one that has a display device that displays a pattern sequence consisting of multiple patterns in a variable manner and then displays the pattern in a fixed manner, but does not have a handle for shooting balls. In this case, after a specified amount of balls are inserted based on a specified operation (button operation), the pattern starts to change due to, for example, the operation of an operating lever, and the pattern change is stopped due to, for example, the operation of a stop button or after a specified time has passed, and a special game is generated in which a specified gaming value is awarded to the player, provided that the fixed pattern at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot pattern, and a large number of balls are paid out to the player in a receiving tray at the bottom. If such a gaming machine is used instead of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only the balls as the gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as the gaming value, and the restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

Below, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be shown.

<The means for guiding the game ball is long>
a first detection means arranged downstream of the guiding means for detecting the passage of the game ball; and a second detection means arranged downstream of the guiding means for detecting the passage of the game ball and for providing a player with a benefit different from the benefit that can be provided to the player based on the first detection means detecting the passage of the game ball, wherein the guiding means comprises a designated portion for receiving the game ball that has flowed down from the ball entry area, and a downstream portion arranged downstream of the designated portion and displaced in response to the displacement of the designated portion, and is configured to be able to change between a first state in which the game ball is easily guided to the first detection means and a second state in which the game ball is easily guided to the second detection means, depending on at least the position of the downstream portion.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the passing of a game ball is detected in a predetermined detection area (second starting prize opening 27), it will be opened with a certain probability to enter the prize ball opening located on the back side. A movable accessory (second variable winning device 31) that can guide the game ball is provided, and the movable accessory is frequently opened and balls enter the prize ball opening frequently. There is a gaming machine in which a gaming state in which a player can win a large amount of payouts of prize balls is set as a gaming state that is more advantageous than a normal state (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-169630).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, because the movable member (opening/closing member 28b) is disposed in another detection area (variable start winning hole 28a), the movable member that opens and closes the predetermined detection area is It is configured so that the game ball can always pass through a predetermined detection area. In normal conditions, it is recommended to play the game ball in a way that causes the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area, but beginners of the game may accidentally shoot the game ball so that it flows down to the right side of the game area.

When the passage of a game ball is detected in a predetermined detection area, in addition to the drawing of the opening action of the movable accessory (small winning drawing), a special symbol drawing (big winning drawing) is also held. When a jackpot occurs, a penalty is imposed as a gaming state after the jackpot ends, and the player is forced to play a game that is more disadvantageous than the normal state. From a gaming beginner's perspective, he or she may feel suspicious that a penalty has been imposed on him without knowing the reason, which may cause him to lose interest in the gaming machine and cause him to fail to acquire new players. That is, there was a problem that the game was not friendly to beginners and lacked equality.

In response to this, with gaming machine A1, by maintaining the guiding means in the first state, a state can be created in which the gaming ball is easily guided to the first detection means, and in this state, the guiding of the gaming ball to the second detection means (predetermined detection area) can be suppressed. As a result, by utilizing the guiding means, it is possible to prevent the gaming ball from passing through the second detection means, thereby improving the fairness of the game.

Note that the guide means may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion are formed integrally, or may be configured such that the predetermined portion and the downstream side portion are formed separately.

Gaming machine A2 is characterized in that in gaming machine A1, the downstream portion is configured to prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the second detection means in the first state, and to prevent the gaming ball from being guided to the first detection means in the second state.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine A1, the downstream side can switch the detection means through which the gaming balls flowing down via the guide means pass.

A gaming machine A3 in the gaming machine A1 or A2, wherein the guide means includes an intermediate part that causes the game ball received by the predetermined part to flow down toward the downstream side part.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine A1 or A2, the intermediate portion allows the game balls flowing down via the guide means to be guided either to the first detection means or to the second detection means. However, it is possible to prolong a state of uncertainty.

Note that the intermediate portion may be configured to be displaceable in response to the displacement of the downstream side portion, or may be configured so as not to be displaced regardless of the displacement of the downstream side portion.

In the gaming machine A3, the intermediate portion is configured so that the downward direction of the game ball does not change in either the first state or the second state, and the guide to the first detecting means or the second detecting means is provided on the downstream side. Game machine A4 is characterized in that the game is played.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A3, gaming machine A4 has the following advantages: even if the guiding means switches between the first and second states while the gaming ball is being guided through the middle section after entering the ball entry area, it does not affect the flow direction of the gaming ball in the middle section, so it is possible to avoid a situation in which a change in the state of the guiding means is detected from a change in the flow pattern of the gaming ball being guided through the middle section.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4, the guide means is arranged in a position where the predetermined portion restricts entry of the ball from the ball entry area into the guide means in the first state, and in the second state. A gaming machine A5, wherein the predetermined portion is arranged at a position that allows the ball to enter the guide means from the ball entry area.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, by switching the state of the guiding means, it is possible to switch whether or not a new game ball can enter the guiding means.

Further, it is possible to draw attention to the passage of the game ball in the predetermined portion and the passage of the game ball in the downstream side portion. That is, the player's line of sight can be focused at a plurality of positions, and the points of attention of the guide means can be increased.

Gaming machine A6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine A5, the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined portion and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream portion are performed simultaneously.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A5, gaming machine A6 allows switching to be performed simultaneously at different positions, giving the player the gameplay of being able to select and visually confirm either the switching at a specific portion or the switching at the downstream portion.

In gaming machine A5, gaming machine A7 is characterized in that the switching of the arrangement of the predetermined part and the switching of the arrangement of the downstream part are executed at different timings.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A5, since switching is performed at different positions at different timings, it is difficult for the player to notice the line of sight between the switching at a predetermined part and the switching at the downstream side. It is possible to add a game feature in that it can be visually recognized by shifting it. In addition, the movement of the player's line of sight can be guided.

A gaming machine A8 is any of the gaming machines A1 to A7, characterized in that the predetermined portion slides and displaces in the forward and backward directions.

According to gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects produced by any of gaming machines A1 to A7, it is possible to avoid conspicuous movement of a predetermined portion when viewed from the front. The predetermined part is a part that switches whether or not the ball can enter the guiding means, and is not a part that determines whether the ball is guided by the first detecting means or the second detecting means, so it is avoided to attract attention. By doing so, it is possible to make the operation of the downstream side relatively noticeable.

A gaming machine A9, in any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, wherein the downstream portion is displaced in a rotational manner.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A8, gaming machine A9 can emphasize the movement of the downstream portion, which is the area that determines whether the ball is guided to the first detection means or the second detection means.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, the guide means is arranged such that the distance of the game ball flowing down from the predetermined part to the downstream part is longer than the distance between the predetermined part and the downstream part in front view. A gaming machine A10 characterized in that the game machine A10 is configured such that the length becomes long.

According to the gaming machine A10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, before the game ball flowing from the predetermined part reaches the downstream part, the player looks from the predetermined part to the downstream part. It can be moved easily.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the guiding means includes a preventing means for preventing the game ball from reaching the downstream side part without passing through the predetermined part.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, the gaming machine A11 can restrict the flow path of the gaming ball reaching the downstream portion by using a prevention means, thereby preventing the gaming ball from reaching the downstream portion via an unintended path and entering the wrong detection means.

A gaming machine A12, which is one of the gaming machines A1 to A11, is characterized in that the guide means is configured to be able to shorten a second period during which the multiple gaming balls received by the specified part during a first period pass through the downstream part, compared to a first period during which the specified part receives multiple gaming balls from the ball entry area.

According to the gaming machine A12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A11, the guide means reduces the timing shift of the passage of the game ball in the downstream side part rather than the shift in the timing when the predetermined part receives the game ball. Since it can be made smaller, it is possible to maintain the accuracy of switching the direction of flow of the game ball at the downstream side, while expanding the allowable range of deviation in the timing of receiving the game ball at a predetermined part, providing comfortable gaming. It can be made easier.

Gaming machine A13 is characterized in that the predetermined portion in gaming machine A12 is configured with a shape that applies a load to the gaming ball in a direction that accelerates the gaming ball when displaced.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine A12, gaming machine A13 generates a load in a direction that accelerates the gaming ball when the specified part is displaced, and thus accelerates the gaming ball placed on the specified part when the specified part is displaced toward the gaming ball that passed through the specified part before the specified part was displaced, thereby creating a situation in which the distance between the gaming balls is reduced.

<Extending the flow path>
Gaming machine B1 is equipped with a ball entry area, a flow-down means for causing a gaming ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting the passage of the gaming ball flowing down the downstream area, wherein the flow-down means comprises a first movable part for causing the gaming ball to flow down, a second movable part that is located downstream of the first movable part and causes the gaming ball to flow down, and a specified part that is located between the first movable part and the second movable part and causes the gaming ball to flow down.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, are equipped with a detection sensor into which a gaming ball can enter and a movable member that guides the gaming ball to the detection sensor (see, for example, JP 2015-181572 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the path along which the game balls flow toward the detection sensor is limited to the length of the movable member, so the flow of the game balls can easily become monotonous and players can easily become bored, leaving room for improvement in the way the game balls flow down.

On the other hand, according to gaming machine B1, the downstream means disposed upstream of the detection means includes a plurality of movable parts sandwiching a predetermined part, so it is possible to easily provide variations in the length and shape of the movable parts. , it is possible to improve the falling behavior of the game ball.

Gaming machine B2 is characterized in that in gaming machine B1, the first movable part has an overlapping part that overlaps with the specified part in the vertical direction at least at the downstream end.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B1, since the gaming balls can flow to the predetermined part via the overlapping part, the gaming balls do not fall off between the first movable part and the predetermined part. can be easily prevented.

A game machine B3 in the game machine B1 or B2, wherein the first movable part includes, at least at the downstream end, an inclined part for directing the downward direction of the game ball toward the predetermined part.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines B1 and B2, gaming machine B3 has an inclined portion that can direct the flow of the gaming ball toward the designated portion, making it easier to prevent the gaming ball from falling out between the first movable portion and the designated portion even if the flow of the gaming ball is disturbed.

<Gathering game balls on the downstream side>
A gaming machine comprising a ball entry area, a flowing means for causing the game ball that has entered the ball entry area to flow down to a downstream area, and a detection means for detecting passage of the game ball flowing down the downstream area, The flowing down means is characterized by comprising a predetermined means for making the interval at which the plurality of game balls that have entered the ball entry area at a predetermined interval flow down the downstream area shorter than the predetermined interval. Game machine BZ1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple movable parts that can configure two types of open states in which the load applied by a gaming ball when the gaming ball flows down from a predetermined ball entry area can guide the gaming ball to the first detection means or the second detection means, and the movable parts are configured to close from the open state by the transmission of a mechanical load when a predetermined number of gaming balls enter each prize ball port (for example, see JP 2016-202338 A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the game ball is normally maintained in a state in which neither the first detection means nor the second detection means guides the game ball, the first detection means guides the game ball to the first detection means. state and a second state in which the game ball is guided to the second detection means, a total of three states, but in any of the states, the falling path of the game ball after it enters the ball entry area is the same. The timing (interval) at which the ball enters the entry area is almost the same as the timing (interval) at which the prize ball is paid out as the ball enters the ball area, so the profit given to the player is generated. This poses a problem in that the timing of playing the game is limited to the firing interval (fixed interval) of the game balls, making it difficult to pace the game and making it difficult to increase the player's interest.

In response to this, with gaming machine BZ1, a predetermined means of the flow-down means can be used to create cases where the interval at which the gaming ball flows down the downstream area is shorter than the interval at which the gaming ball enters the ball entry area, making it possible to create cases where the gaming ball flows down the downstream area at intervals shorter than the interval at which the gaming ball is launched. This makes it easier to avoid a fixed interval at which the benefit given to the player when the gaming ball enters the ball entry area is generated, and by adding variance to the game, it is possible to increase the interest of the player.

Gaming machine BZ2 is characterized in that in gaming machine BZ1, the predetermined means is configured to make the flow speed of the gaming ball in the ball entry area faster than the flow speed of the gaming ball in the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine BZ1, gaming machine BZ2 can use a specified means to create a state in which a gaming ball flowing down the downstream area can be caught up with a gaming ball in the ball entry area.

In the game machine BZ1 or BZ2, the falling means is configured to be able to be displaced in one direction or the other direction, and by displacement in the one direction or displacement in the other direction, the flowing means is configured to move the game ball that has entered the ball entry area. A gaming machine BZ3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to apply a predetermined load toward the downstream area.

In game machine BZ3, in addition to the effects of game machines BZ1 and BZ2, the flow-down means is configured to be capable of reciprocating displacement, and the game machine can change the flow-down pattern by either flowing down the flow-down means when the flow-down means is displaced in one direction, or flowing down the flow-down means when the flow-down means is displaced in the other direction.

Gaming machine BZ4 is characterized in that in gaming machine BZ3, the gaming ball flowing down the flow-down means is positioned either at a non-branching position where no branching occurs in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball, or at a branching position where branching may occur in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of game machine BZ3, game machine BZ4 can reduce the fatigue of the player who watches the game ball while it is flowing down the flow means, compared to when the game ball is located at the branching position.

Gaming machine BZ5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine BZ4, the branching position is located on the side where visibility is higher than that of the non-branching position.

According to the game machine BZ5, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BZ4, it is possible to reduce the fatigue of the player who gazes at the game ball.

The side with higher visibility can be exemplified in various ways. For example, it may be the side closer to the player (the front side), it may be a side that is less likely to be hidden by game balls flowing down the game area, or it may be a side that is not dazzling when light is emitted by LEDs or other light-emitting effects.

In the gaming machine BZ4 or BZ5, the branch position is arranged at a first position on the ball entry area side and a second position downstream from the first position, and the branch position is arranged at a first position on the ball entry area side and a second position downstream from the first position, and A gaming machine BZ6 characterized in that the non-branching position is located between.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines BZ4 and BZ5, gaming machine BZ6 has the advantage that when a gaming ball flows down the flow means, it is placed at the branching position twice with an interval between them, so that when one gaming ball is guided to the flow means, the player's attention can be increased twice. This makes it possible to efficiently increase the player's attention to the gaming ball.

In any of gaming machines BZ1 to BZ6, a gaming machine BZ7 is characterized in that an inclination angle of the downstream means with respect to a horizontal plane on the side of the ball entry area is larger than an angle of inclination with respect to the horizontal plane on the side of the downstream area. .

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ6, gaming machine BZ7 accelerates the gaming ball flowing down the flow means more on the ball entry area side, shortening the distance between the gaming ball and the downstream area side.

Gaming machine BZ8 is any of gaming machines BZ1 to BZ7, characterized in that the ball entry area is larger than the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ7, gaming machine BZ8 makes it easier for multiple gaming balls to enter the ball entry area at the same time, and makes it easier for those gaming balls to become crowded (connected) in the downstream area.

Game machine BZ9 is characterized in that in game machine BZ8, the ball entry area is configured to be able to be divided into a plurality of locations.

According to the game machine BZ9, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine BZ8, there are provided a plurality of places where the game ball enters the falling means, so it is possible to increase the frequency of the game balls entering the falling means.

Game machine BZ10 is characterized in that, in game machine BZ9, the falling path of the game ball flowing down to the flowing down means differs depending on the difference in the ball entry area where the game ball enters.

According to the game machine BZ10, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine BZ9, the period until the game ball passes the falling means, the arrangement of the game ball on the falling means, etc. Since the game ball can change depending on whether the ball is hitting the ball, it is possible to increase the player's interest in knowing from which area the game ball entered the falling means, and from which area the ball entered the ball. can improve their attention span.

Any one of the gaming machines BZ1 to BZ10 is characterized in that it is equipped with a downstream path restricting device for preventing the game ball flowing down the downstream device from deviating from the downstream path toward the downstream area. BZ11.

According to the game machine BZ11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines BZ1 to BZ10, the game ball that enters the ball entry area is configured to surely reach the downstream area by the downstream path restriction means. Can be done.

<Technical idea of receiving a game ball at a position far from the ball entry area>
A switching means capable of switching a state between a first state in which a game ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a second state in which entry of a game ball into the ball entry area is restricted, and the switching means A gaming machine C1 comprising: a downstream area in which a game ball can flow downward, the downstream area being disposed on a side remote from the ball entry area of the switching means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the landing position of a game ball on a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the game ball can be guided to the prize ball opening and a state in which entry of the game ball into the prize ball opening is restricted. However, there are multiple downstream positions near the prize ball opening and upstream positions upstream from the downstream position, and regardless of whether the game ball lands at the downstream position or the upstream position, the game ball There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow the ball to pass through the prize hole (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-029531).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, at the same time that the game ball that landed at the upstream position approaches the prize ball opening, another game ball lands at the downstream position, and multiple game balls cluster together and form the prize ball opening. When attempting to pass through the ball, there is a problem that the ball may become clogged or the resistance to the ball's flow may become large. In other words, there was a problem in that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, the game ball is configured to flow down to the switching means on the side away from the ball entry area (the landing position of the game ball on the switching means is restricted). ), the game balls can be aligned while flowing down the switching means, and it is possible to avoid clogging the balls and increasing the flow resistance of the game balls when trying to pass through the ball entry area. Therefore, improvements can be made from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball.

A gaming machine C2 characterized in that the gaming machine C1 is provided with a prevention means for preventing the flow of water to the switching means outside the flowing region.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effects provided by the game machine C1, the prevention means can prevent the game ball from passing outside the flowing area and reaching the switching means.

Gaming machine C3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine C2, at least a portion of the switching means is disposed behind the front surface of the gaming board that constitutes the gaming area.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C2, the position where the game ball lands on the switching means is made to appear at least on the game area side (the front of the game board), and at least a part of the other part is made to appear closer to the front of the game board. By arranging it on the rear side, it is possible to reduce the length of the switching means encroaching on the game area while ensuring the falling length of the game ball on the switching means to the rear side of the front surface of the game board. Thereby, it is possible to secure a wide area for arranging other components and improve the degree of freedom in designing the gaming area.

Gaming machine C4 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines C1 to C3, the switching means has a first section in which the gaming ball can roll and a second section that is located downstream of the first section, and the gaming ball that lands on the switching means from the flow-down area is configured to easily land on the first section.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C3, gaming machine C4 can roll the gaming ball over a long distance on the switching means, suppressing the bouncing of the gaming ball and calming its flow, while also ensuring the length of the flow to the ball entry area, thereby improving attention to the gaming ball.

Gaming machine C5 is characterized in that in gaming machine C4, the switching means is provided with a guide path between the first section and the second section that can bridge the gaming ball in the first state and the second state.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine C4, the game ball after landing on the first part of the switching means is guided as a part where the rolling of the game ball is maintained regardless of the state of the switching means. Since the route is provided, variations in the flow of the game ball can be increased compared to the case where the state switching of the switching means and the change in the flow mode of the game ball correspond one-to-one.

In the gaming machine C5, a gaming machine C6 is characterized in that a plurality of types of falling lengths of the gaming ball on the guide route are configured.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C5, it is possible to increase the variations in the flow of the gaming ball.

There are various examples of factors that can cause the length of the game ball flowing down the guidance path to change. For example, it may be configured to change depending on the position where the ball enters the switching means, or it may be configured to change depending on the relative relationship between the timing of the ball entering the switching means and the timing at which the state of the switching means is switched.

In the gaming machine C5 or C6, the switching means includes an approach means for moving the game ball closer to the guide route over a predetermined range on the upstream side of the guide route. C7.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines C5 and C6, gaming machine C7 can use the approaching means to move the gaming ball closer to the guidance path before the gaming ball gets on the guidance path, thereby preventing the gaming ball from getting stuck in the bridge to the guidance path.

Gaming machine C8 is characterized in that in gaming machine C7, the approach means is an inclined surface that moves the gaming ball in a direction perpendicular to the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part of the switching means or the guide path.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine C7, gaming machine C8 has the following advantages: the flow direction of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means is perpendicular to the inclination direction of the inclined surface, so that the load applied to the gaming ball by the inclined surface does not accelerate or decelerate the flow speed of the gaming ball in the first part or guide section of the switching means, and the impact can be minimized.

A gaming machine C9 in any of the gaming machines C4 to C8, wherein the second section is configured to restrict acceptance of a plurality of gaming balls at the same time.

Gaming machine C9 has the same effect as any of gaming machines C4 to C8, and also makes it easier to avoid situations where more gaming balls than expected enter the second section.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C9, the switching means is characterized by having a ball entry restriction means that restricts the gaming ball from entering the guide path side when the state is switched between when the gaming ball lands in a specified section on the end side of the flow-down area and when the gaming ball passes through the specified section. C10.

According to gaming machine C10, when the switching means executes a state switch in a short period of time in any of gaming machines C1 to C9, it becomes easier to prevent the gaming ball from erroneously entering the guide path side.

Gaming machine C11 is characterized in that the switching means in any of gaming machines C1 to C10 is equipped with a deceleration means for decelerating the flow speed of the gaming ball in the downstream portion.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines C1 to C10, the gaming machine C11 can stabilize (rectify) the flow pattern of the gaming balls downstream of the switching means.

<Multiple incoming balls are influenced by previous incoming balls and tend to pass through the detection means>
A downstream area where a game ball can flow down, a downstream area disposed on the downstream side of the downstream area, a first downstream area where a game ball can flow down after passing through the downstream area, and the downstream area. a second downstream area configured to allow a game ball that has passed but does not flow down the first downstream area to flow down, and provides a predetermined profit when the game ball flows down the second downstream area. The game ball can be given to the player and the game ball is placed in the downstream area more than in the first case where the game ball flows down from the downstream area to the downstream area with no game ball placed in the downstream area. In the second case where the game ball flows down from the downstream area to the downstream area in a state where A gaming machine D1.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a ball entry port and a special ball entry port are located behind an opening/closing means, and the special ball entry port is configured to be switched between a state in which it is blocked by a sliding plate member and a state in which the plate member is retracted to allow game balls to enter. When the plate member is in a state in which game balls are allowed to enter, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means are configured to enter the special ball entry port, and there are gaming machines in which the subsequent game state is set to a game state that is advantageous to the player when a ball enters the special ball entry port (for example, see paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP 2015-150122 A).

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, when one gaming ball is received by the opening and closing means, it is assumed that the ball will enter the specific ball entry port, so the player feels reassured and it is difficult to draw attention to the second and subsequent balls entering the opening and closing means. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention to the gaming balls being received by the opening and closing means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, among the game balls accepted in the downstream area, the game ball that is received in the plurality is more than the game ball that is received in the second game ball than the game ball that is received in the first place. Since the ball is configured to have a high possibility of being accepted in the downstream area, it is possible to maintain attention to the game ball that has flown down to the downstream area.

A gaming machine D2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine D1, it is configured so that gaming balls that enter the downstream area second or later are more likely to enter the second flow-down area than the first gaming ball that enters the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine D1, gaming machine D2 can maintain the player's attention for a long period of time on the gaming balls that have flowed down into the flow area.

Gaming machine D3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D1 or D2, when multiple gaming balls are placed in the downstream area at the same time, the gaming balls are configured to flow easily down the second flow area.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, it is possible to maintain the player's attention to the gaming ball that has flowed down to the downstream area while the gaming ball is placed in the downstream area. can. Further, it is possible to make the player aware of the manner in which the game ball is launched.

A gaming machine D4 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, a plurality of gaming balls are parked in the downstream area so that the gaming balls can be easily received in the second downstream area. .

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, gaming machine D4 can draw attention to the placement of gaming balls in the downstream area.

Gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines D1 to D4, it is provided with an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state that opens the flow path of gaming balls from the flow-down area and a second state that narrows the path more than the first state, and the downstream area is configured so that gaming balls are unlikely to be guided to the second flow-down area immediately after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the player's attention to the downstream area is maintained after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state. can.

A gaming machine D5 is configured such that, from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state, gaming balls that enter the downstream area after the predetermined period of time have passed are more likely to flow down the second flow-down area than gaming balls that enter the downstream area within the predetermined period of time. A gaming machine D6.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects provided by the gaming machine D5, the attention to the downstream area can be maintained for a long time from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state.

Gaming machine D7 is characterized in that, in gaming machine D6, after the predetermined period has elapsed from the time when the opening/closing means is switched to the first state, the change in the period until the gaming ball that has flowed down the flow area flows down the second flow area can be suppressed.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine D6, gaming machine D7 makes it possible to reduce attention in the downstream area and relax the player by making the flow-down pattern (flow-down period) of the gaming ball constant after the opening/closing means is switched to the first state and a predetermined period has elapsed.

Gaming machine D8 is any one of gaming machines D5 to D7, and is characterized by having a guide ball selection means configured not to guide the first gaming ball that enters the flow-down area after the opening/closing means is switched from the second state to the first state, into the second flow-down area.

According to the game machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D5 to D7, a plurality of game balls are allowed to enter the second flowing region in the first state of the opening/closing means. Since the necessity arises, attention to the opening/closing means and the number of game balls passing through the opening/closing means can be improved.

Gaming machine D9 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D8, it is configured so that the number of gaming balls that can be received in the second flow area is equal to the number of gaming balls that cannot be received in the second flow area.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects produced by any of the game machines D1 to D8, there are cases where an excessively large number of game balls are accepted, such as when all balls enter the second downstream area. It is possible to avoid giving players excessive expectations.

Gaming machine D10 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines D1 to D9, a maximum number of gaming balls that can be received by the downstream area is set, and gaming balls exceeding that maximum number are configured to be received by the second flow-down area.

Gaming machine D10 can improve attention to the downstream area and the second flow area in addition to the effects of any of gaming machines D1 to D9.

Gaming machine D11 is one of gaming machines D1 to D10, characterized in that the flow-down area can be positioned at a position where passing gaming balls are likely to flow into the first flow-down area.

According to the gaming machine D11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D10, a state is easily created in which the gaming balls arranged in the downstream area easily flow into the first downstream area.

A gaming machine D12, which is any one of the gaming machines D1 to D11, and includes a retention means for retaining game balls placed in the downstream area in the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D11, gaming machine D12 can restrict gaming balls placed in the first flow area from flowing toward the second flow area by using a retention means.

Gaming machine D13 is any one of gaming machines D1 to D12, characterized in that the second flow-down area is located above the first flow-down area.

According to the gaming machine D13, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines D1 to D12, the game ball placed in the first downstream area is prevented from flowing toward the second downstream area by the height difference of the arrangement. Can be done.

<Switching between contact and non-contact with the game ball>
A downstream area in which a game ball can flow down, an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state in which a path for a game ball passing through the downstream area is opened and a second state in which the path is narrower than the first state; a downstream region disposed on the downstream side of the region; a first downstream region configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream region to flow down; and a first downstream region that is configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream region to flow down. A second downstream area configured to allow game balls that do not flow down the first downstream area to flow down, a contact state in which the game balls that have passed through the downstream area can come into contact, and a non-contact state in which they do not contact. an abutting means that can be switched by, and a predetermined profit can be given to the player when a game ball flows down the second downstream area, and when the game ball comes into contact with the abutting means. A gaming machine E1 characterized in that the opening/closing means is configured to be switchable from the first state to the second state when

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are multiple movable parts in the flow path of gaming balls that enter a ball entrance that is opened and closed by an opening and closing member, and the flow path of the gaming balls can change due to the load from the movable parts (see, for example, JP 2017-000562 A).

However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the movable member is configured so that it can always come into contact with the falling game ball, so the falling state of the game ball that enters the ball entry hole does not change, and the player There is a problem that there is a high possibility that players will get bored, and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing player's interest.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the abutting means can be switched between a contacting state in which it can come into contact with the game ball that has passed through the downstream area, and a non-contacting state in which it does not make contact. Therefore, the manner in which the game ball flows can be made to be significantly different depending on whether the game ball contacts the contactable means or when it does not contact the contactable means. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of the falling manner of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the game from the viewpoint of increasing the player's interest.

A gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, a gaming ball that receives a load through the gaming ball contacting the contactable means is configured to flow down the second flow-down area.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1, it is possible to improve attention to the downward flow state of the gaming ball in the downstream area.

Gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine E1 or E2, when the opening and closing means is switched from the second state to the first state while a gaming ball is in contact with the contactable means, the gaming ball that has flowed down from the flow-down area to the downstream area can flow down the second flow-down area.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E1 or E2, if the game ball is in contact with the abuttable means at the timing when the opening/closing means is opened, the opening/closing mechanism can be opened and closed after the opening/closing means is opened. Since the game ball that has passed through the means can easily flow down the second downstream area, it is possible to improve attention to the contactable means.

<The game ball is received in the second game area after passing through a state in which the passage of the game ball is stopped>
a downstream area through which game balls can flow; an opening/closing means that can be switched between a first state that opens the path of game balls passing through the downstream area and a second state that narrows the path more than the first state; a downstream area arranged downstream of the flow area; a first flow area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area to flow down; and a second flow area configured to allow game balls that have passed through the downstream area but do not flow down through the first flow area to flow down; and when a game ball flows down through the second flow area, a predetermined benefit can be given to the player, and the game machine EZ1 is characterized in that it transitions from a state in which game balls are prevented from passing through a predetermined part of the downstream area to a state in which game balls can flow down into the second flow area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball entry port and a specific ball entry port are arranged at the back of the opening/closing means, and the specific ball entry port may be blocked by a plate member that slides, or the board member may be retracted. When the plate member is in the state where the board member allows the entry of game balls, most of the game balls received by the opening/closing means enter the specific ball entrance. There is a gaming machine that is configured to do so, and the gaming state is set to a gaming state that is advantageous for the player by entering a ball into a specific ball entrance (for example, see paragraphs 0030 to 0032 of JP 2015-150122 A). .

However, in the conventional gaming machines described above, the positions of the ball entrance and the specific ball entrance are almost the same except for the difference between the left and right, so it is difficult to tell at a glance through the opening and closing means whether the game ball has entered the specific ball entrance. When a notification is issued on the liquid crystal device due to a game ball entering the specific ball entrance, there is a problem in that the display on the liquid crystal device is easier to understand, and so the player's attention is concentrated on the liquid crystal device. In other words, there is a problem in that it is difficult to maintain attention on the game ball that has been accepted by the opening and closing means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine EZ1, the game ball is configured to flow down to the second downstream area after passing through a state where the passing of the game ball is prevented in a predetermined part of the downstream area. The eyes of the player can be focused on the game ball stopped in the downstream area in preparation for entering the area, and the player's attention can be maintained on the game ball received by the opening/closing means.

Gaming machine EZ2 is characterized in that in gaming machine EZ1, the specified portion is located in the first flow-down area.

According to the gaming machine EZ2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ1, it is possible to improve attention to the ball entering the first downstream area, which is an area that does not affect the provision of a predetermined profit.

Gaming machine EZ3 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing through by a predetermined gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EZ1 and EZ2, gaming machine EZ3 can maintain high attention to a gaming ball even if the gaming ball deviates from the second flow area and flows down, due to the expectation that the gaming ball may block a specific area.

Gaming machine EZ4 is characterized in that, in gaming machine EZ1 or EZ2, the predetermined portion is prevented from passing through by a predetermined member different from the gaming ball, and the size of the predetermined member in a front view is set to be smaller than the size of the gaming ball.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines EZ1 and EZ2, gaming machine EZ4 can make the specified member that prevents the passage of the gaming ball less noticeable than the gaming ball, thereby increasing attention to the gaming ball.

Any one of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ4 is characterized in that, after the first downstream area is filled with game balls, game balls that follow and arrive are accepted into the second downstream area. Game machine EZ5.

According to the gaming machine EZ5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ4, it is possible to shift the player's line of sight from the first downstream area to the second downstream area, so it is possible to shift the player's line of sight from the first downstream area to the second downstream area. The period during which the second downstream area is visually recognized can be made longer than when the second downstream area attracts attention.

Furthermore, when the ball enters the second downstream area, the first downstream area is filled with game balls, so even if you lose sight of the game ball that entered the second downstream area, the ball will enter the second downstream area at a glance. It can be seen that this is possible.

Gaming machine EZ6 is characterized in that it is equipped with a state switching means that can switch between a retention state in which gaming balls are retained in the first flow-down area and a discharge state in which gaming balls are discharged from the first flow-down area, and the state of the state switching means is switched in response to the switching of the state of the opening/closing means.

According to the gaming machine EZ6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine EZ5, it is possible to associate the state switching between the opening/closing means and the state switching means, so that by visually recognizing either one, it is easy to predict the state of the other. can do.

A gaming machine EZ7, which is characterized in that, in the gaming machine EZ5 or EZ6, an upper limit number of game balls that can be received in the first downstream area is set.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EZ5 or EZ6, gaming machine EZ7 makes it easier to predict how many more gaming balls need to pass through the flow-down area before a gaming ball can be accepted into the second flow-down area by checking the number of gaming balls placed in the first flow-down area.

Any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ7 is provided with a displacing means that is configured to be displaceable, and the displacing means can be set in a dischargeable state in which the received game balls can be discharged to the downstream area and in the dischargeable state in which the received game balls can be discharged into the downstream area. A game machine EZ8 characterized in that the game machine is displaced so as to switch between a state in which it cannot be discharged to a downstream area and a state in which it cannot be discharged.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines EZ1 to EZ7, the gaming machine EZ8 is configured so that whether or not the gaming ball is discharged to the downstream area, where the player's attention is high, changes depending on the state of the displacement means, as a prerequisite for the gaming ball to be received in the second flow-down area, thereby improving attention to the downstream area and the displacement means.

In other words, if the game balls that have passed through the downstream area are sure to flow down to the downstream area, by knowing the number of game balls passing through the downstream area, it is possible to predict from experience the timing at which the game balls will flow down to the second downstream area. Therefore, there is a possibility that there will not be a large disadvantage even if the player plays the game without looking at the downstream area.

On the other hand, in a situation where whether or not the game balls flow down to the downstream area is switched depending on the state of the displacement means, the number of game balls passing through the downstream area and the number of game balls flowing down to the downstream area are different. Because of the misalignment, it is necessary to also look at the downstream region. Thereby, attention to the downstream region can be improved.

The gaming machine EZ9 is characterized in that the displacement means is configured to be able to reduce the falling velocity of the received gaming ball compared to the descending velocity of the gaming ball flowing down the downstream area.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EZ8, gaming machine EZ9 can slow down the flow speed of the gaming ball received by the displacement means, making it easier to avoid the player losing sight of the gaming ball received by the displacement means.

In the gaming machine EZ8 or EZ9, the displacement means is provided with a ball receiving section capable of receiving up to a predetermined number of gaming balls, and the gaming balls received in the ball receiving section are displaced by the displacement of the displacement means. Gaming machine EZ10.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine EZ8 or EZ9, gaming machine EZ10 can limit the number of gaming balls displaced by the displacement of the displacement means to a predetermined number relative to the ball receiving section, so by setting the displacement speed of the displacement means to a predetermined range, the number of gaming balls that can be discharged from the displacement means to the downstream area in a predetermined period of time can be kept within a predetermined range.

<Means for notifying the end of the ending>
A gaming machine G1 is characterized by comprising: an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined effect related to a game; and a notification means for notifying a player of the end of the duration of the predetermined effect so that the player can grasp the end of the duration.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that shift to a state where a special symbol variable game is possible after a jackpot game ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, with the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is difficult to know when the jackpot game ends, which is a source of dissatisfaction for players who want to start the special symbol lottery immediately after switching to the state where the special symbol variation game is possible. was.

For example, as a general game progression, after a jackpot is achieved in the drawing of special symbol 1, there is a distribution in which, after the end of the jackpot game, the state shifts to a state in which it is easier to obtain the lottery of special symbol 2, which is more advantageous than special symbol 1. There are gaming machines, but in such gaming machines, immediately after the jackpot game ends, the lottery for special symbol 2 starts without being won, so if the lottery for special symbol 1 is pending, the special symbol will be drawn after the jackpot game ends. 1 was executed, and if the player won a jackpot in that lottery, there was a possibility that the player would be disadvantaged.

To avoid this situation, it is preferable to win the lottery for special symbol 2 as soon as possible after the jackpot ends, before winning the jackpot by drawing special symbol 1 after the jackpot ends, so it is desirable to start firing the game balls as soon as it becomes possible to win the lottery for special symbol 2.

On the other hand, in order to win the special symbol 2 lottery, the ball entrance is generally opened and closed by an electric accessory, but the electric accessory is kept closed during the jackpot game. After the end of the jackpot game, the game becomes openable. Therefore, even if game balls are fired before the electric accessory is released, most of the balls are likely to be wasted.

For these reasons, players would like to avoid firing game balls toward the electric device during a jackpot game because the electric device will remain closed and they will not be able to win the lottery for special symbol 2. However, more than that, players would probably want to shoot game balls into the ball entrance on the downstream side of the electric device that opens as soon as the jackpot game ends in order to win the lottery for special symbol 2 before winning the jackpot by drawing special symbol 1.

In contrast, with conventional gaming machines, it was difficult to know when the big win game would end, making it difficult to time the release of the gaming ball.

In response to this, gaming machine G1 is equipped with a notification means that notifies the player so that the player can grasp the end point of a specified performance, making it easier to determine the timing for launching the gaming ball by using the notification from the notification means as a guide.

In the gaming machine G1, the predetermined performance is such that at least one of a first performance or a second performance whose notification content is different from the first performance is executed, and the duration period can be changed depending on a combination of notifications, and The notification means is configured to be able to communicate the difference in the duration of the predetermined effect to the player, and includes an ending means indicating the end point of the predetermined effect, and a time notification indicating the time elapsed from the current time to the end point. A gaming machine G2 comprising means.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the gaming machine G2 allows the player to know the duration and end time of the currently ongoing specified effect, even if multiple durations of the specified effect are available.

A gaming machine G3, characterized in that the time notification means in the gaming machine G2 includes a pseudo-time notification means for indicating the time elapsed from the present time until the end of the specified performance and a pseudo-time with a specified time difference.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G2, the pseudo time reporting means can notify the player of a preferable timing before the end of the predetermined performance. As a result, for example, the time that may elapse from when a game ball is launched until it reaches a predetermined ball entrance can be used up during the execution of a predetermined effect, and the time that may elapse from when a game ball is launched until it reaches a predetermined ball entrance can be used up while a predetermined performance is being executed, and a predetermined input can be performed immediately after the end of a predetermined performance. It is possible to easily realize a game in which a game ball flows into a ball mouth.

Among any of the gaming machines G1 to G3, the specified performance can be executed at least immediately before the end of a specified bonus game, and the manner of execution is changed according to the type of bonus game. Gaming machine G4.

With gaming machine G4, in addition to the effect provided by any of gaming machines G1 to G3, the type of bonus game can be associated with a specified presentation.

In any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the notification means notifies a point in time a predetermined period before the end of the predetermined performance period.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G4, the end of the predetermined performance period can be known in advance by the notification means.

The timing of the specified performance period is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be during a specified specific game, during a pattern change, or while waiting for a pattern change.

A gaming machine G6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines G1 to G5, a predetermined still image or video is displayed in the display area of the display means at the end of the predetermined performance to calm the player down.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G5, it is possible to effectively suppress the player's addiction to the game.

A gaming machine G7 characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, the display on the display means is switched after the end of the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G1 to G6, gaming machine G7 can also switch the display, making it easier for the player to understand that the end of a specific presentation has passed.

The gaming machine G8 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine G7, after the end of the predetermined performance, a specific performance can be executed continuing from the predetermined performance.

According to the gaming machine G8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G7, a specific performance can be executed during the execution of a predetermined performance, compared to a case where a new performance is executed after the end of the predetermined performance. Therefore, it is possible to secure a long performance time.

A gaming machine G9, in any of the gaming machines G1 to G8, characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed so as to be visible in at least a part of the display area of the display means.

With gaming machine G9, in addition to the effects provided by any of gaming machines G1 to G8, a predetermined effect can be confirmed by visually checking the display area of the display means, so the burden on the player can be reduced compared to when the predetermined effect is executed outside the display area of the display means (e.g., outside the game area, etc.).

A gaming machine G10 characterized in that, in the gaming machine G8 or G9, it is possible to configure a case in which the mode of display in the display area of the display means differs at a predetermined timing.

According to the gaming machine G10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G8 or G9, it is possible to improve attention to the aspect at a predetermined timing.

The different aspects at a given timing are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, there are different cases where an operation starts at a given timing and where it is stopped and maintained at a given timing, and different cases where an operation becomes operable at a given timing and where it is inoperable at a given timing.

A gaming machine G11 that is characterized by executing an illusion effect that creates the illusion that the specified effect has ended before the end of the specified effect in the gaming machine G8 or G9.

In addition to the effects of gaming machines G8 and G9, gaming machine G11 can increase the player's concentration with each illusion performance.

In any of gaming machines G8 to G11, a suggestion suggesting that a predetermined profit can be earned by firing a game ball in the display area of the display means from the end of the predetermined performance until a predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine G12 characterized by displaying a display.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G8 to G11, gaming machine G12 can inform the player viewing the display area of the appropriate timing for firing the gaming ball through suggestive displays, thereby reducing the burden on the player.

The form of the predetermined condition is not limited in any way, and various forms are exemplified. For example, it may be the passage of a predetermined period of time, or the passing of a predetermined number of game balls through a predetermined ball entrance or the detection of such passing.

A gaming machine G13, in which the suggestion display in the gaming machine G12 is a display suggesting that the player should aim for a specific ball entrance or an opening/closing lottery ball entrance that executes a lottery for opening or closing a specific ball entrance or an electric device that opens and closes the specific ball entrance.

According to the gaming machine G13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G12, the aim of the fired game ball is made clear by the suggestion display, so that the burden on the player can be reduced.

Gaming machine G14 is characterized in that in the specified presentation of gaming machine G12 or G13, a display is configured that continues until a specified launch timing, and if the launch is not performed even after the specified launch timing has passed or if the gaming ball is not detected at a specified detection port, a specified notification continues until either of these occurs.

According to the game machine G14, in addition to the effects produced by the game machine G12 or G13, if it is confirmed that the predetermined notification is continued, it is possible to check whether the game ball has been fired after the predetermined firing timing. The player can be made aware of whether the game ball is not detected at the predetermined detection port or not.

A gaming machine G15 is characterized in that, in any of gaming machines G12 to G14, a predetermined notification is made when a predetermined number of balls are detected or more than the predetermined number of balls are detected during the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines G12 to G14, gaming machine G15 can notify the player by a predetermined notification that a predetermined number of balls or more have entered the game during a predetermined performance, allowing the player to use this as a hint to adjust the strength of the game balls being fired, etc., thereby reducing the burden of playing the game.

Note that the mode of the predetermined notification is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a predetermined four-letter phrase may be displayed, a display may be displayed to make players hesitate to shoot the game ball, a predetermined light emitting means may be activated, or a predetermined sound may be displayed. It may also be something that outputs.

In any of gaming machines G1 to G15, the predetermined performance is executed at a predetermined volume regardless of the volume setting made by the player, or regardless of the light emission intensity setting made by the player. A gaming machine G16 characterized in that it is executed with a predetermined luminous intensity and a predetermined luminescent color.

According to the gaming machine G16, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines G1 to G15, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not notice the sound or light depending on the player's settings.

<Setting the period for changing the volume and light intensity at the ending>
The game is characterized by comprising a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance related to the game, and a change means capable of configuring a changeable state in which a predetermined setting related to the game can be changed during the execution of the predetermined performance. Game machine H1.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that transition to a state where a special symbol variable game is possible after a jackpot game ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the player does not hold the handle for a long time between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special symbol variation game is possible, so it is easy for the player to keep holding the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that the game ball is easily fired by mistake. That is, there is a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing game balls.

In contrast, gaming machine H1 allows for a changeable state to be configured during a specified presentation, so idle time during the specified presentation can be used to change the specified settings. This makes it easier for players to take their hands off the handle, making it easier to prevent the erroneous launch of gaming balls. In other words, it can be improved from the perspective of making effective use of gaming balls.

Gaming machine H2 is characterized in that it is equipped with a notification means for notifying the player in a manner that enables the player to grasp the end of the duration of the predetermined effect in the gaming machine H1, and the effect is continued by the notification means in the changeable state.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1, it is possible to inform the player of the timing at which it is preferable to grasp the handle again after changing a predetermined setting. This makes it easier for the player to avoid suffering disadvantages due to not firing the game ball at an appropriate timing.

Gaming machine H3 is characterized in that, in the changeable state of gaming machines H1 or H2, the changeable predetermined setting can be configured to be switchable.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H1 or H2, there are a plurality of predetermined settings that can be changed, so that even if the player has a long free time, the player does not have anything on hand. This can make it easier to avoid conflicts.

A gaming machine H4, in the gaming machine H3, wherein in the changeable state, the predetermined setting that can be changed or the predetermined setting that is being changed is displayed by a display means.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, it is possible to make it clear through display which of the predetermined settings related to the game are to be changed. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the gaming burden on the player.

Gaming machine H5 is characterized in that, in any one of gaming machines H1 to H4, a visible area of a predetermined display on the display means changes when a predetermined operation is performed in the changeable state.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H4, the player can change the visible area of a predetermined display on the display means by a predetermined operation performed by the player. Displays that are considered to be of interest can be placed in front of the player's line of sight. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the game without feeling bothered by moving his/her line of sight.

Gaming machine H6 is characterized in that, in gaming machine H5, a state can be configured in which a part of the display area of the display means is made invisible by a specified operation executed in the changeable state.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H5, gaming machine H6 makes part of the display area of the display means invisible through a specified operation, which allows a player who wishes to keep a display that may become invisible visible to think about whether or not to perform the specified operation. This makes it easier for players to avoid situations where they perform the specified operation without thinking.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, when the predetermined setting is changed in the changeable state, the change is returned under a predetermined condition, or the change is invalidated under a predetermined condition. A gaming machine H7 featuring the following.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a predetermined setting is returned or invalidated. The player can be made to understand this.

Note that the predetermined conditions are not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a jackpot game may be started, a jackpot game may be continued a predetermined number of times, a predetermined number or more of game balls may be detected by a predetermined detection means in a predetermined period, or a predetermined number of game balls may be detected by a predetermined detection means. It is also possible to operate a predetermined operating means at the appropriate timing.

In the gaming machine H7, the predetermined condition is achieved by operating a predetermined operating means operated to change the predetermined setting.

According to the gaming machine H8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H7, changes in a predetermined setting can be reversed or invalidated by operating a predetermined operation means, so that changes in a predetermined setting can be reversed. , or can facilitate intentional invalidation.

In the gaming machine H7, the gaming machine H9 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is achieved at a predetermined timing, regardless of the timing at which the predetermined setting change is executed.

In addition to the effects of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H9 achieves a predetermined condition at a predetermined timing, making it possible to avoid a situation in which the predetermined condition is never achieved.

Note that the predetermined timing is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the special figure variation may be executed a predetermined number of times, a predetermined content may be notified, or a predetermined time such as noon may be set.

In the gaming machine H7, the gaming machine H10 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is achieved when a predetermined state passes for a predetermined period of time.

In addition to the effect of gaming machine H7, gaming machine H10 allows the player to know that a certain time has passed since a certain state was maintained by reverting or nullifying a certain setting change.

The specified state is not limited in any way. For example, when consecutive jackpot games are played, the jackpot type obtained may be repeated (or more or less than a specified number of rounds), the operation means may not be operated, or special chart changes may not be executed.

In any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, a predetermined target amount can be set in advance in the predetermined setting, and in the changeable state, a difference notification that allows the difference between the predetermined setting and the target amount to be grasped. A gaming machine H11 characterized by comprising means.

According to the gaming machine H11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H10, even if a change in a predetermined setting is reversed or invalidated, the player playing the game remains the same. If there is, by changing the predetermined setting while grasping the difference from the target amount using the difference notification means, it is possible to easily return the predetermined setting to the state before it was returned or invalidated.

As a result, when the player playing the game changes, the predetermined settings are maintained as the settings of the previous player, and the predetermined settings are changed in consideration of the gaming burden placed on the subsequent player. Even if the gaming machine is controlled to be reset or disabled, the predetermined settings can be easily returned to the previous state, even if the player playing the game has not changed. Even if a predetermined setting is unintentionally returned or invalidated, the predetermined setting can be easily returned to the previous state, thereby reducing the gaming burden on the player.

<Change the display format of the same display depending on the situation>
A gaming machine I1 is characterized in that it is provided with an effect execution means capable of executing a predetermined display effect related to a game, and is configured so that the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed during the execution of the predetermined display effect.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a movable accessory placed on the front side of the display device and the display on the display device can be combined to make an integrated shape visible (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2011 -019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, it is necessary to decide the placement position, size, and shape of the display according to the placement position, size, and shape of the movable accessory, so the display area of the display device is effectively utilized. There was a problem in that there was room for improvement in terms of performance.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, the display position or the displayed size of the predetermined display effect can be changed while the predetermined display effect is being executed, so that the shape of the movable accessory is not affected. This can be improved from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the display area of the display device without causing any damage.

In the gaming machine I1, the predetermined display effect is configured such that its distinguishability is lower when it is displayed at the edge of the display area than when it is displayed at the center of the display area. Features gaming machine I2.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1, attention to a predetermined display performance can be adjusted depending on where in the display area it is displayed.

The manner in which the distinctiveness is reduced is not limited in any way, and various manners are exemplified. For example, the display may be made semi-transparent, or the display size may be reduced.

Gaming machine I3 is characterized in that in gaming machine I1 or I2, the change is performed by operating a specified operating means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the player can select whether or not to change the display mode of a predetermined display performance. This can increase the player's desire to participate in the game.

<Button operation related>
The predetermined performance can be switched from a first state to a second state by operating a performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance related to a game and a predetermined operation means during execution of the predetermined performance. A game machine IZ1 characterized by comprising: a performance switching means configured as follows.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines that transition to a state where a special symbol variable game is possible after a jackpot game ends (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-019743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machines, the player does not hold the handle for a long time between the end of the round game in the jackpot game and the transition to the state where the special symbol variation game is possible, so it is easy for the player to keep holding the handle. However, in this case, there is a problem that the game ball is easily fired by mistake.

In contrast, with the gaming machine IZ1, the effects executed during a predetermined effect can be switched by operating a predetermined operating means, so that idle time during the predetermined effect can be used to operate the predetermined operating means. Because the effects can be switched by operating the operating means, it is possible to effectively increase the player's motivation to operate the operating means. This makes it easier to encourage the player to take their hands off the handle, making it easier to prevent the erroneous launch of gaming balls.

The gaming machine IZ1 is provided with an operation notification means that can notify that the predetermined operation means can be operated, and by operating the predetermined operation means in accordance with the notification from the operation notification means, the predetermined production mode can be changed. A gaming machine IZ2 is characterized in that a switch can be made.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machine IZ1, the gaming machine IZ2 provides assistance with the operation of the specified operation means by the operation notification means, so that even an inexperienced player can operate the specified operation means without hesitation.

Gaming machine IZ3 is characterized in that in gaming machine IZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is executed during a portion of the duration of the specified presentation.

According to the gaming machine IZ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ2, the notification from the operation notification means is performed during a part of the duration of the predetermined performance, so that the predetermined performance cannot be visually recognized during other times. This allows for some leeway.

The timing of the notification from the operation notification means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed from the middle of a specified performance, the notification from the operation notification means may be executed until the middle of a specified performance, or the notification from the operation notification means may be executed throughout the execution of the specified performance. Furthermore, when a notification from the operation notification means is executed throughout the execution of a specified performance, the operation may be valid throughout the execution of the notification, or may include a time during which the operation is invalid.

A gaming machine IZ4 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ3, the performance is configured so that the performance cannot be switched by operating the specified operating means during a specified period in the latter half of the specified performance.

According to the gaming machine IZ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ3, by disabling the operation of the predetermined operation means during the second half predetermined period of the predetermined performance, the predetermined effect during the second half predetermined period It can draw attention to the performance.

Gaming machine IZ5 is characterized in that, in gaming machine IZ4, the display of the operation notification means in the display area of the display means is hidden during the specified period in the latter half of the specified performance.

According to the gaming machine IZ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine IZ4, it is possible to grasp by visually checking the display area of the display means that a period in which the operation of a predetermined operating means is invalid has entered.

A gaming machine IZ6 is characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ5, when there are multiple types of effects that can be switched by operating the specified operating means, the gaming machine IZ6 is equipped with an additional notification means for predicting the effect that will be executed by operating the specified operating means.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ5, the gaming machine IZ6 can predict the effect that will be executed by operating a specified operating means using the attached notification means, reducing the disappointment and sense of futility caused by switching to an unexpected effect despite operating the specified operating means, and the player only needs to operate the specified operating means when switching to a preferred effect, eliminating the hassle of repeatedly operating the specified operating means.

A gaming machine IZ7, which is any one of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ6, wherein the predetermined operation means can be operated from the middle of the predetermined performance.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ6, the IZ7 gaming machine can draw the player's attention to a specific presentation until the player is able to operate a specific operation means.

Gaming machine IZ8 is characterized in that in gaming machine IZ6 or IZ7, the additional notification means is provided with a display for suggesting a specific operation timing, and the specific operation timing is set as a timing that allows a specific adjustment period to be secured by the end of the specific performance.

In addition to the effects of the gaming machines IZ6 and IZ7, the IZ8 gaming machine can change the timing of a specific operation depending on the length of the adjustment period, so that it is possible to predict the development of the presentation after operating a specific operating means from the timing of the specific operation.

A gaming machine IZ9 is characterized in that, in any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ8, the mode of performance switched by operating the predetermined operating means is returned to the mode before switching under a predetermined condition.

In addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines IZ1 to IZ8, the gaming machine IZ9 returns the presentation to the state before it was switched under a specified condition, allowing the player to operate the specified operation means again. This allows the player to operate the specified operation means a greater number of times, enhancing the atmosphere of the player participating in the game.

A gaming machine IZ10 is any one of gaming machines IZ2 to IZ9, characterized in that the notification from the operation notification means has multiple types of modes in which the number of the predetermined operation means operated simultaneously differs.

According to the gaming machine IZ10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines IZ2 to IZ9, there are cases in which the number of predetermined operating means that are operated simultaneously is one, and cases in which there are two or more. Therefore, by intentionally having the player operate two predetermined operating means, it is possible to distract the player from time when it is not necessary to shoot game balls and get him absorbed in the game. In this case, since the player's hand can be removed from the ball firing handle, erroneous firing of game balls can be suppressed, and unnecessary disadvantages due to the fired game balls being wasted can be avoided. Can be done.

In any of the gaming machines IZ2 to IZ10, the notification from the operation notification means includes notification executed when a predetermined profit obtained when a ball enters a predetermined ball entry hole reaches an upper limit. Characteristic gaming machine IZ11.

In addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines IZ2 to IZ10, the gaming machine IZ11 allows the player to visually recognize a notification from the operation notification means, so that the player can understand that the predetermined profit that can be obtained by the ball entering a predetermined ball entrance has reached its upper limit.

Gaming machine Z1 is a slot machine in any one of gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3, and IZ1 to IZ11. Among them, the basic configuration of a slot machine is "a gaming machine equipped with a variable display means for dynamically displaying a sequence of identification information consisting of a plurality of identification information and then displaying the identification information in a definite manner, and equipped with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to a player, the dynamic display of the identification information being started due to the operation of a start operation means (e.g., an operation lever), the dynamic display of the identification information being stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means (a stop button) or by the passage of a predetermined time, and the necessary condition being that the determined identification information at the time of the stop is a specific identification information." In this case, typical examples of the game medium include coins and medals.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3, and IZ1 to IZ11, The gaming machine Z2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among these, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is that it is equipped with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, a ball is launched into a predetermined gaming area, and the ball is fired into an operating port located at a predetermined position within the gaming area. One example is one in which the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is fixed and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with winning a prize (or passing through an operating port) as a necessary condition. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning hole) placed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow balls to be won, and a value corresponding to the number of winnings is given. Examples include those that are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A13, B1 to B3, BZ1 to BZ11, C1 to C11, D1 to D13, E1 to E3, EZ1 to EZ10, G1 to G16, H1 to H11, I1 to I3, and IZ1 to IZ11, The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among these, the basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine is as follows: ``Equipped with a variable display means that dynamically displays an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information and then definitively displays the identification information, and a starting operating means (for example, an operating lever). The dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player with the necessary condition that the confirmed identification information at the time of stopping is specific identification information, and a ball is used as a gaming medium and the identification information is A gaming machine is configured such that a predetermined number of balls are required to start the dynamic display, and a large number of balls are paid out when a special gaming state occurs.
<Others>
In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the landing position of a game ball on a movable accessory that can be switched between a state in which the game ball can be guided to the prize ball opening and a state in which entry of the game ball into the prize ball opening is restricted. However, there are multiple downstream positions near the prize ball opening and upstream positions upstream from the downstream position, and regardless of whether the game ball lands at the downstream position or the upstream position, the game ball There is a gaming machine that is configured to allow a prize ball to pass through the opening (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-029531).
However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem in that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball. The present technical idea has been made in order to solve the problems exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of game balls.
<Means>
In order to achieve this objective, the gaming machine of Technical Idea 1 has two states: a first state in which the game ball can be guided to the ball entry area, and a second state in which the entry of the game ball into the ball entry area is restricted. a switching means capable of switching the state, and a downstream region in which a game ball can flow down toward the switching means, the downstream region being arranged on a side away from the ball landing region of the switching means. be done.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, and includes a prevention means for preventing the flow of water to the switching means outside the flow area.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 2, in which at least a portion of the switching means is disposed on the rear side of the front surface of the game board constituting the gaming area.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the falling behavior of the game ball.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, in addition to the effect produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 1, the preventing means prevents the game ball from passing outside the flowing region and reaching the switching means. be able to.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine described in Technical Idea 2, the game machine can switch while ensuring that the falling length of the game ball on the switching means is on the rear side of the front of the gaming board. The length by which the means encroach on the playing area can be reduced.
<Sign>
10 Pachinko machine (gaming machine)
13 Game board (game board)
22 Frame button (part of the operation means)
64b Third winning opening (detection means, second detection means, first detection means)
66, 67 Through gate (opening/closing lottery entrance)
81 Third symbol display device (part of production execution means, part of notification means, part of change means, part of production switching means, part of operation notification means, display means)
113 Audio lamp control device (part of production execution means, part of notification means, part of change means, part of production switching means, part of operation notification means)
410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
413 Central opening (located behind part of the ball entry area, part of the downstream area, and part of the branch position (second position))
414 Ball passage opening (part of ball entry area)
420 Previous design components (part of prevention measures)
422 Joint part (part of guide means, prevention means)
423 Partition plate (part of guide means, prevention means)
428 Ball guide protrusion (part of downstream area)
430 Middle member (part of flow path restriction means)
431 Central channel (part of the guide means, intermediate part, part of the downstream means, part of the non-branching position, part of the guide route, predetermined part)
440 Upper stage member (part of flow path restriction means)
450 Slide member (part of the guide means, part of the flow means, part of the switching means, first movable part)
451 Tip part (predetermined part, first part)
452 Left guide plate part (part of prescribed means, part of non-branching position)
452a Inclined surface section (approach means, overlapping section, inclined section)
453 Right guide plate part (part of prescribed means, part of non-branching position)
453a Slanted surface section (approach means, overlapping section, inclined section)
470 Tilting member (part of guide means, downstream part, part of branch position (second position), second part, second movable part)
640 Second winning opening (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
640a Electric accessories (part of the guide means, part of the switching means)
700a 2nd specific prize opening (flowing area, part of guide ball selection means)
715 Storage plate section (part of downstream area, part of first downstream area, part of guide ball selection means, part of retention means)
730 Movable upper lid member (opening/closing means)
740 Moving bed member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
751 Opening (second downstream area, part of guide ball selection means)
782 Ball extraction opening (part of the first downstream area)
810 Specific display (part of a predetermined display effect)
811 Time display (part of notification means, time notification means)
812 End position (part of notification means, end means)
813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
815 Caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
819 2nd caution comment display (part of attached notification means)
B3 Sphere arrangement (part of branch position, 1st position)
DR1 route (part of downstream area)
2458a Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
2458b Ball interference protrusion (deceleration means)
5770 Switching device (displacement means)
5772 Ball holder recess (ball holder)
6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
6822 Goal suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
7817 Past light amount display (difference notification means)
7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)

10. Pachinko machines (amusement machines)
13 Game board (game board)
22 Frame button (part of the operating means)
64b Third winning port (detection means, second detection means, first detection means)
66, 67 Through gate (opening/closing lottery entry gate)
81 Third pattern display device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means, display means)
113 Voice and lamp control device (part of the performance execution means, part of the notification means, part of the change means, part of the performance switching means, part of the operation notification means)
410 Plate member (part of ball entry restriction means)
413 Central opening (arranged behind a part of the entrance area, a part of the downstream area, and a part of the branch position (second position))
414 Ball passage opening (part of ball entry area)
420 Design elements (part of preventive measures)
422 Joint (part of guide means, prevention means)
423 Partition plate (part of guide means, prevention means)
428 Ball guide ridge (part of downstream region)
430 Middle stage member (part of flow path restricting means)
431 Central flow path (part of guide means, middle part, part of flow down means, part of non-branch position, part of guide path, specified part)
440 Upper member (part of flow path restricting means)
450 Slide member (part of guide means, part of flow-down means, part of switching means, first movable part)
451 Tip portion (predetermined portion, first portion)
452 Left guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
452a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
453 Right guide plate portion (part of the predetermined means, part of the non-branching position)
453a Inclined surface portion (access means, overlapping portion, inclined portion)
470 tilting member (part of the guide means, downstream side part, arranged in part of the branching position (second position), second part, second movable part)
640 second winning port (detection means, first detection means, second detection means)
640a Electric device (part of guide means, part of switching means)
700a: Second specific winning port (flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
715 Retention plate portion (part of the downstream region, part of the first flow-down region, part of the guide ball selection means, part of the retention means)
730 Movable upper cover member (opening/closing means)
740 Moving floor member (part of retention means, state switching means, contactable means)
751 Opening (second flow area, part of guide ball selection means)
782 Ball outlet (part of the first flow area)
810 Specific display (part of a specified display effect)
811 Time display (part of the notification means, time notification means)
812 End position (part of the notification means, end means)
813 Frame button display (part of operation notification means)
815 Caution comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
819 Second warning comment display (part of auxiliary notification means)
B3 Ball arrangement (part of branch position, first position)
DR1 Route (part of the flow area)
2458a Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
2458b Ball interference protrusion (speed reducing means)
5770 Switching device (displacement means)
5772 Ball receiving recess (ball receiving part)
6811 Launch time display (pseudo time notification means)
6822 Target suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
6841 Game preparation suggestion display (part of suggestion display)
7817 Past light quantity display (difference notification means)
7818 Past volume display (difference notification means)

Claims (3)

The present invention is provided with a switching means for switching between a first state in which the game ball can be guided to a ball entry area and a second state in which the game ball is restricted from entering the ball entry area, and a flow-down area in which the game ball can flow down toward the switching means,
A gaming machine characterized in that the flow-down area is located on a side away from the front ball area of the switching means. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a prevention means for preventing flow toward the switching means outside the flow area. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein at least a portion of the switching means is disposed on the rear side of the front surface of the gaming board constituting the gaming area.

Images